Service Manual Frenic

APPENDICES
Contents
Appendix H Before Use ································

································································
·······························································
································ ······························· 50
H.1 Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates for Inverter Type H) ································
···································· 50
H.2 External View and Terminal Blocks································································
································ ·································
································ 52
Appendix I Function Codes Overview ································
································································
································
············································
············ 54
I.1 Supplementary note································
note································································
································································
····················································
···················· 55
I.2 Function codes table ································
································································
································
···················································
··················· 57
I.3 Factory default value per applicable electric motor capacitance ···························· 84
I.4 Motor constants ································
································································
·························································
································ ························· 85
[1] When Fuji standard motor 8-series,
8 series, or other motors are selected by motor selection
(Function code P99 = 0 or 4) ································ ································
········································ 85
[2] When HP rating motor is selected by motor selection (Function code P99/A39 = 1) ·· 86
Appendix J Description of Function Codes ································································
································ ······································
································ 87
J.1 F codes (Basic functions) ································
································································
································
·············································
············· 87
[1] Frequency setting by keypad (F01 = 0 (Factory default state), 8) ·························· 89
[2] Setting up a reference frequency using analog input (F01 = 1 to 3, 5) ···················· 90
[3] Frequency setting by digital input signal “UP”/“DOWN” (F01=7)···························· 96
[4] Frequency setting using digital inputs (option DIO interface card) (F01 = 11) ··········· 97
[5] Frequency setting using pulse train input (F01=12) ································
············································
············ 97
J.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ··························································
································ ·························· 135
J.3 C codes (Control functions) ································
································································
································
·········································
········· 176
J.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters)································································
································ ······································
································ 185
J.5 H codes (High performance functions) ···························································
································ ··························· 192
[1] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at
shipment ································
································································
································································
································ ·································
································ 204
[2] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions
at power shutdown ································
································································
································
····················································
···················· 205
J.6 A codes (Motor 2 parameters)································································
································ ······································
································ 225
J.7 J codes
des (Applied functions) ································
································································
································
·········································
········· 226
[1] PID command with the / keys on the keypad (J02 = 0, factory default) ·········· 227
[2] PID command by analog inputs (J02 = 1) ·······················································
································ ······················· 227
[3] PID command with UP/DOWN control (J02 = 3)································
···············································
··············· 230
[4] PID command via communications
communications link (J02 = 4) ································
·············································
············· 230
[5] Pump control································
································································
····························································
································ ···························· 241
J.8 d codes (Applied functions 2) ································ ································
······································· 293
[1] Speed control (Vector
Vector control without speed or pole position sensor for PMSM) ······ 293
J.9 U codes (Customizable logic operation) ·························································
································ ························· 297
J.10 U1 codes (Customizable logic operation)························································
································ ························ 322
J.11 y codes (Link functions) ································
································································
································
··············································
·············· 326
Appendix K Overview of RS-485
RS 485 Communication
Communication ·····························································
································ ····························· 331
K.1 RS-485
485 common specifications ································································
································ ····································
································ 332
K.2 Terminal specifications ································
································································
································
···············································
··············· 333
[1] RS-485
485 communication port 1 (for connecting the keypad) ································
································· 333
[2] RS-485
485 communication port 2 (terminal block)································
·················································
················· 333
K.3 Connection method ································
································································
································
···················································
··················· 334
K.4 RS-485 connection devices ········································································· 337
[1] Converter ································································································ 337
[2] Requirements for the cable (COM port 1: for RJ-45 connector) ··························· 337
[3] Requirements for the cable (COM port 2: for RS-485 connector) ························· 337
[4] Branch adapter for multi-drop ······································································ 338
K.5 RS-485 noise suppression ·········································································· 338
Appendix L FRENIC Loader Overview ··········································································· 339
L.1 Modes ···································································································· 339
L.2 Connection ······························································································ 340
L.3 Function overview ····················································································· 340
[1] Configuring inverter’s function code ······························································ 340
[2] Multi-monitor ···························································································· 341
[3] Running status monitor··············································································· 342
[4] Test-running ····························································································· 343
[5] Real-time trace ························································································· 344
[6] Historical trace ························································································· 345
Appendix M Options for communication and operation overview ·········································· 346
M.1 Mounting adapter (for communication option card) ··········································· 346
M.2 Communication option cards (required mounting adapter required) ······················ 346
M.3 Terminal block type options ········································································· 347
M.4 Option keypad ·························································································· 347
M.5 DeviceNet communications card (OPC-DEV) ·················································· 348
M.6 CC-Link communications card (OPC-CCL) ····················································· 349
M.7 Digital I/O interface card (OPC-DIO) ······························································ 350
M.8 Analog interface card (OPC-AIO) ·································································· 352
M.9 RTD Card (OPC-PT) ·················································································· 355
M.10 LonWorks Card (OPC-LNW) ········································································ 356
M.11 Relay Output Card (OPC-F2-RY) ·································································· 357
M.12 RS-485 communication card (OPC-E2-RS)····················································· 358
M.13 Simple keypad with USB port (TP-E1U) ························································· 360
M.14 Multi-functional keypad (TP-A1-E2C) ····························································· 361
M.15 FRENIC Visual Customizer ········································································· 363
[1] Overview ································································································· 363
[2] Specifications ··························································································· 363
[3] Functions ································································································ 363
[4] Main Window ··························································································· 364
Appendix N Standard Model Specifications ····································································· 365
N.1 ND-mode inverters for general load ······························································· 365
N.2 HD-mode inverters for heavy duty load ·························································· 368
N.3 HND-mode inverters for general load····························································· 371
N.4 HHD-mode inverters for heavy duty load ························································ 375
Appendix O EMC Filter Built-in Type Specifications ··························································· 380
O.1 ND-mode inverters for general load ······························································· 380
O.2 HD-mode inverters for heavy duty load ·························································· 380
O.3 HND-mode inverters for general load····························································· 381
O.4 HHD-mode inverters for heavy duty load ························································ 382
Appendix P Common Specifications ·············································································· 383
Appendix H Before use
Appendix H Before Use
H.1 Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates for Inverter Type H)

Unpack the package and check the following:
(1) An inverter and the following accessories are contained in the package.
Accessories - DC reactor (for ND-mode inverters of FRN0139E2■-4 or above, HD/HND-mode inverters of
FRN0168E2■-4 or above, and HHD-mode inverters of FRN0203E2■-4 or above)
- Keypad rear cover (with three screws for securing the keypad)
- Instruction manual
- CD-ROM (containing the FRENIC-Ace User's Manual)
- Wiring guide (for FRN0012E2■-4 or below, FRN0115E2■-2 or below, FRN0011E2■-7
or below)
(2) The inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts missing.
(3) The inverter is the type you ordered. You can check the type and specifications on the main nameplate. (The
main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter as shown on Figure H-3.)
(a) Main Nameplate (b) Sub Nameplate
Figure H-1 Nameplates
TYPE: Type of inverter
Figure H-2 Type of inverter

APPENDICES
Appendix-50
The FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace
Ace is available in four different drive modes
modes--ND
ND (Normal Duty), HD (Heavy Duty)
Duty),, HND
HN (High,
Normal Duty), and HHD (High, Heavy Duty). One of these modes should be selected to match the load property of
your system. Specifications in each mode are printed on the main nameplate.
ND
D mode : Designed for general load applications.
Overload capability: 120% for 1 min.
HD mode : Designed for heavy duty load applications.
HND mode : Designed for general load applications.
HHD mode : Designed for heavy duty load applications.
Overload capability: 150% for 1 min. and 200% for 0.5 s.
SOURCE : Number of input phases (three-phase:
(three phase: 3PH), input voltage, input frequency, input current
OUTPUT : Number of output phases, rated output voltage, output frequency range, rated output capacity,
rated output current, and overload capability
SCCR : Short-circuit
circuit capacity
MASS : Mass of the inverter in kilogram
SER. No. : Product number
68A123A0579E BB 601
Production week
This indicates the week number that is numbered
from 1st week of January.
The 1st week of January is indicated as '01'.
Production year: Last digit of year
Product version
: Compliance with European Standards (See Appendix G Section G-1)
: Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards (cUL certification)

(See Appendix G Section G-2)
: Compliance with the Radio

Radio Waves Act (South Korea) ((Refer
efer to the FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual
Appendix G Section G-3)
: Compliance with Russian

Russi Standards
If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product, contact your
Fuji Electric representative.
Appendix-51
51
H.2 External View and Terminal Blocks

(1) Outside and inside views
Term cover
mounting screw Term cover
Keypad
Control circuit
Warning plate terminal block
Wiring guide
Term cover
Main circuit
Main nameplate terminal block
(a) FRN0006E2■-2G H
Cooling fans
Control circuit terminal block
Keypad
Front cover
Front cover
Main nameplate Main circuit

Warning plate terminal block
Wiring guide
Front cover
mounting screw
(b) FRN0072E2■-4EH
Cooling fans
Internal air circulation fan
Mounting base Keypad enclosure
(can be opened)
Control circuit
Front cover terminal block
Keypad Front cover
Warning plate
Warning label
Main circuit
terminal block
Main nameplate
APPENDICES
(c) FRN0590E2■-4EH
Figure H-3 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters
Appendix-52
(2) Warning plates and label
(a) FRN0006
06E2■-4G H (b) FRN0203E2■-4EH
FRN0203E2 H
Figure H-4 Warning Plates and Label
Appendix-53
53
Appendix I Function Codes Overview

Function codes are used for selecting various functions of FRENIC-Ace. Function codes comprise 3 digits or 4
digits of alphanumeric character. The first digit categorizes the group of function code alphabetically and the
subsequent 2 or 3 digits identify each code within the group by number. Function code comprises 11 groups: Basic
function (F code), Terminal function (E code), Control code (C code), Motor 1 parameter (P code), High-level
function (H code) (H1 code), Speed control 2 parameter (A code), Application function 1 (J code) (J1 code) (J4
code) (J5 code), Application function 2 (d code), Customizable logic (U code) (U1 code), Link function ( y code),
Keypad functions (K code), and Option function (o code) . The function of each function code is determined
according to the data to be set. The following descriptions are for supplementary explanation of function code table.
Refer to instruction manual of each option to find the details of the option function (o code).
APPENDICES
Appendix-54
I.1 Supplementary note

■ Change, reflect, and save function code data during operation
Function code
codes are categorized into those which data change is enabled during operation of the inverter and those
which such change is disabled. The meaning of the code in the “Change during operation” column of the function
code table
able is
s described in the following table.
Change during
Code Reflect and save data
operation
At the point when data is changed by / key, the changed data is immediately
reflected on the operation of inverter. However, at this stage, the changed value is
Y* Allowed not saved to the inverter. In order to save it to the inverter, press key. Without
saving by key and leaving the state of when the change was made by the
key, the data before the change is reflected on the operation of inverter.
Even if data is changed by the / key, the changed data will not be reflected
Y Allowed on the operation of the inverter as is; by pressing the key, the changed value
is reflected on the operation of the inverter and is also saved to the inverter.
N Not allowed —
■ Copying data
Function code data can be copied collectively by using the optional keypad “TP-E1U” “TP E1U” (program mode menu
number 7 “Data copy”) or “TP-A1”.. By using this function, it is possible to read out all function code data and write
the same data to a different inverter.
However, iiff the specification of inverter at the copy source and copy destination is not identical, some function
codes may not be copied due to security reason. According to nec necessity,
essity, configure the settings individually for the
function code
codes that are not copied. The behaviour of the function codes regarding data copy is indicated in the
“data copy” column in the function code table in n the next page and following.
Y: to be copied.
Y1: When inverter capacity is different, copying will not be performed.
N: not to be copied.
■ Negative logic setting of data

Digital input terminal and transistor/contact output terminal can become a signal for which negative logic is
specified by function code data setting. Negative logic is a function to reverse ON and OFF state of in
input
put or output,
and switch Active ON (function enabled with ON: positive logic) and Active OFF (function enabled with OFF:
negative logic). However, negative logic may not be enabled depending on the function of the signal.
Negative logic signal can be swit
switched
ched by setting the data with 1000 added to the function code data of the function
to be set. For example, the following example shows when coast to a stop command “BX” is selected by function
code E01.
Function code data Action

7 “BX” is ON and coast to a stop (Active ON)
1007 “BX” is OFF and coast to a stop (Active OFF)
Appendix-55
55
■ Drive
rive control
The FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace Ace runs under any of the following drive controls. Some function codes apply exclusively to the
specific drive control, which is indicated by letters Y (Applicable) and N (Not applicable) in the “Drive control”
column in the function code tables given on the foll
following
owing pages.
Abbreviation in “Drive
control” column in function Control target (H18) Drive control (F42)
code tables
Speed 0,2: V/f control

V/f
(Frequency for V/f and PG V/f) 1: Dynamic torque vector control
15: Vector control without speed sensor
PM Speed
nor pole position sensor
For details about the drive control, refer to the description of F42 ““Drive
Drive control selection 1.
1.”
The FRENIC--Ace is a general-purpose
general purpose inverter whose operation is customized by frequency
frequency-basis
function codes, like conventional inverters. Under the speed
speed-basis
basis drive control, however, the control
target is a motor speed, not a frequency, so convert the frequency to the motor
mo tor speed according to the
following expression.
Motor speed (r/min) = 120 × Frequency (Hz) ÷ Number of poles
APPENDICES
Appendix-56
56
I.2 Function codes table

The table of function code
codes to be used in FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace is shown below.
■ F code
codes:: Fundamental Functions (Basic function)
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
Code Name Data setting range
PM
V/f
F00 Data protection 0: No data protection, no digital setting protection 1 Y
Y Y 0 Y Y 87
1: With data protection, no digital setting protection
2: No data protection, with digital setting protection
3: With data protection, with digital setting protection
F01 Frequency setting 1 0: Keypad key operation ( / key) 1 N
N Y 0 Y Y 88
1: Analog voltage input (Terminal [12])
(from 0 to ±10 VDC)
2: Analog current input (Terminal [C1] (C1 function))
(4 to 20mA DC, 0 to 20mA DC)
3: Analog voltage input (Terminal [12]) + Analog current input
(Terminal [C1] (C1 function))
5: Analog voltage input (Terminal [C1] (V2 function))
(0 to 10 VDC)
7: UP/DOWN control
8: Keypad key operation ( / key)
(With balanceless
balanc eless bumpless)
10: Pattern operation
11: Digital input/output
input/output interface card (option)
12: Pulse train input
F02 Operation method 0: Keypad operation 1 N
N Y 2 Y Y 99
(rotation direction input: terminal block)
1: External signal (digital input)
2: Keypad operation (forward rotation)
3: Keypad operation (Reverse rotation)
F03 Maximum output frequency 1 25.0 to 500.0 Hz 3 N
N Y 50.0 Y Y 100
F04 Base frequency 1 25.0 to 500.0 Hz 3 N
N Y 50.0 Y Y 101
F05 Rate
Rated voltage at base
ase 0: AVR disable 1 N
N Y 380 Y Y
frequency
requency 1 (output voltage proportional to power voltage)
160 to 500V: AVR operation (400V class)
F06 Maximum output voltage 1 160 to 500V: AVR operation (400V class) 1 N
N Y Y Y
F07 Acceleration time
time1 0.00 to 3600 s 12 Y
Y Y 20.0 Y Y 103
F08 Deceleration time
time1 * 0.00 is for acceleration and deceleration time cancel (when Y
Y Y Y Y
performing soft-start
soft start and stop externally)
F09 Torque boost 1 0.0 to 20.0% (% value against base frequency voltage 1) 3 Y
Y Y *2 Y N 105
F10 Electronic thermal overload 1: Enable (For a general
general-purpose
purpose motor with self-cooling
self cooling fan) 1 Y
Y Y 1 Y Y 105
protection
rotection for motor 1 2: Enable (For an inverter
inverter-driven
driven motor (FV) with separately
(Select motor characteristics) powered cooling fan)
F11 (Overload detection level) 0.00 (disable) 24 Y
Y Y1 *3 Y Y
(Inverter rated current dependent on F80)
F12 (Thermal time constant) 0.5 to 75.0 min 3 Y
Y Y *4 Y Y
F14 Restart mode after momentary
omentary 0: Trip immediately 1 Y
Y Y 1 Y Y 108
power
ower failure (Mode selection) 1: Trip after a recovery from power failure
2: Trip after momentary deceleration is stopped
3: Continue to run (for heavy inertia load or general load)
4: Restart from frequency at power failure (for general load)
5: Restart from starting frequency
F15 Frequency limiter (Upper
pper limit) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 3 Y
Y Y 70.0 Y Y 115
F16 (Lower limit) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 3 Y
Y Y 0.0 Y Y
F18 Bias (for frequency setting 1) -100.00
100.00 to 100.00% 6 Y*
Y* Y 0.00 Y Y 115
F20 DC braking 1 0.0 to 60.0Hz 3 Y
Y Y 0.0 Y Y 116
(Braking starting frequency)
F21 (Braking level) 0 to 80% 1 Y
Y Y 0 Y Y
F22 (Braking time) 0.00 (Disable): 0.01 to 30.00 s 5 Y
Y Y 0.00 Y Y
F23 Starting frequency 1 0.1 to 60.0Hz 3 Y
Y Y 0.5 Y Y 119
F24 (Holding time) 0.00 to 10.00 s 5 Y
Y Y 0.00 Y Y
F25 Stop frequency 0.0 to 60.0 Hz 3 Y
Y Y 0.2 Y Y
Indicates quick setup target function code.

*2: Factory defaults are depended on motor capacity.
capacit Refer to ““I.3 Factory
Factory default
default value
value per
per applicable
applicable electric
electric motor
motor capacitance
capacitance”.
*3: The motor rated current is automatically set. Refer to “I.4 Motor constant
constant”.
*4: 5.0min for inverters of nominal applied motor 22kW or below; 10.0min for those of 30kW or above.
Appendix-57
57
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
F26 Motor sound ND mode 1 Y Y 2 Y Y 120
(Carrier frequency) - 0.75 to 10 kHz (FRN0002 to 0059E2■-4EH)
- 0.75 to 6 kHz (FRN0072E2■-4EH or above)
HD/HND mode
- 0.75 to16 kHz (FRN0001 to 0020E2■-GH)
- 0.75 to16 kHz (FRN0020 to 0059E2■-4EH)
- 0.75 to10 kHz (FRN0072 to 0168E2■-4EH)
- 0.75 to 6 kHz (FRN0203E2■-4EH or above)
HHD mode
- 0.75 to16 kHz (FRN0001 to 0020E2■-GH)
- 0.75 to16 kHz (FRN0022 to 0168E2■-4EH)
- 0.75 to10 kHz (FRN0203E2■-4EH or above)
F27 (Tone) 0: Level 0 (Disable) 1 Y Y 0 Y N
1 to 3 : Level 1 to 3
F29 Terminal FM1 (Mode selection) 0: Voltage output (0 to +10 VDC) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 121
1: Current output (4 to 20 mA DC)
3: Pulse output
F30 (Output gain) 0 to 300% 1 Y* Y 100 Y Y
F31 (Function selection) 0: Output frequency 1 (PM: Speed command value) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
1: Output frequency 2 (PM: Speed estimated value)
2: Output current
3: Output voltage
4: Output torque
5: Load factor
6: Input power
7: PID feedback value
8: Estimated speed
9: DC link bus voltage
10: Universal AO
13: Motor output
14: Calibration (+)
15: PID command (SV)
16: PID output (MV)
18: Inverter heat sink temperature
20: Reference frequency
60: External PID control1 feedback value (EPID1-PV)
61: External PID control1 command (EPID1-SV)
65: External PID control1 output (EPID1-OUT)
111 to 120 Customizable logic output signal 1 to 10
F32 Terminal FM2 0: Voltage output (0 to +10 VDC) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
(Mode selection) 1: Current output (4 to 20 mA DC)
F33 Terminal FM1 (Pulse rate) 25 to 32000 p/s (number of pulse at monitor value 100%) 1 Y* Y 1440 Y Y
F34 Terminal FM2 (Output gain) 0 to 300% (Inverter rated current dependent on F80) 1 Y* Y 100 Y Y
F35 (Function selection) Same as F31 1 Y Y 2 Y Y
F37 Load selection/ 0: Variable torque load 1 N Y 1 Y N 124
Auto torque boost/ 1: Constant torque load
Auto energy-saving operation 2: Auto torque boost
1 3: Auto energy-saving operation (variable torque load)
4: Auto energy-saving operation (constant torque load)
5: Auto energy-saving operation with auto torque boost
(Inverter rated current dependent on F80)
F40 Torque limiter 1 (Driving) 0 to 300%; 999 (Disable) 1 Y Y 999 Y Y 126
F41 (Braking) 0 to 300%; 999 (Disable) 1 Y Y 999 Y Y
F42 Drive control selection 1 0: V/f control without slip compensation 1 N Y 0 Y Y 128
1: Vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector)
2: V/f control with slip compensation
15: Vector control for synchronous motor without speed or pole
position sensor
F43 Current limiter 0: Disable (No current limiter works.) 1 Y Y 2 Y N 131
(Mode selection) 1: Enable at constant speed (Disable during ACC/DEC)
2: Enable during ACC/constant speed operation
F44 (Level) 20 to 150% (Rated current of the inverter for 100%) 1 Y Y 130 Y N
F50 Electronic thermal overload 1 to 9000 kWs 1 Y Y1 OFF Y Y 132
protection for braking resistor OFF: Cancel
(Discharging capacity)
F51 (Allowable average loss) 0.001 to 99.99 kW 45 Y Y1 0.001 Y Y
F52 (Braking resistance value) 0.00: Resistance not required (Compatible mode with FRENIC-Multi 12 Y Y1 0.00 Y Y
series)
0.01 to 999 Ω
F80 Switching between ND, HD, 0: HHD mode 1 Y Y 4 Y Y 134
APPENDICES
HND and HHD drive modes 1: HND mode

3: HD mode
4: ND mode
ND/HD mode is not supported for 200V class series.
Appendix-58
■ E code: Extension Terminal Functions (Terminal function)
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
E01 Terminal [X1] function 0 (1000): Select multistep frequency (0 to 1 steps) “SS1” 1 N Y 0 Y Y 135
E02 Terminal [X2] function 1 (1001): Select multistep frequency (0 to 3 steps) “SS2” 1 N Y 1 Y Y
E05 Terminal [X5] function 4 (1004): Select ACC/DEC time (2 steps) “RT1” 1 N Y 8 Y Y
5 (1005): Select ACC/DEC time (4 steps) “RT2” Y Y
6 (1006): Select 3-wire operation “HLD” Y Y
7 (1007): Coast to a stop command “BX” Y Y
8 (1008): Reset alarm (Abnormal) “RST” Y Y
9 (1009): External alarm “THR” Y Y
(9 = Active OFF/ 1009 = Active ON)
11 (1011): Select frequency setting 2/ setting 1 “Hz2/ Hz1” Y Y
13: DC braking command “DCBRK” Y N

14 (1014): Select torque limit 2/ torque limit 1 Y Y
“TL2/ TL1”
15: Switch to commercial power (50 Hz) “SW50” Y N
17 (1017): UP command “UP” Y Y
18 (1018): DOWN command “DOWN” Y Y
19 (1019): Allow function code editing Y Y
(Data change enabled) “WE-KP”
20 (1020): Cancel PID control “Hz/PID” Y Y
21 (1021): Switch normal/ inverse operation “IVS” Y Y
22 (1022): Interlock “IL” Y Y
24 (1024): Select link operation (RS-485, BUS option) “LE” Y Y
25 (1025): Universal DI “U-DI” Y Y
26 (1026): Select auto search for idling motor speed at starting“STM” Y Y
30 (1030): Force to stop “STOP” Y Y
(30 = Active OFF/1030 = Active ON)
33 (1033): Reset PID integral and differential terms “PID-RST” Y Y
34 (1034): Hold PID integral term “PID-HLD” Y Y
35 (1035): Select local (Keypad) command “LOC” Y Y
38 (1038): Run enable "RE" Y Y
39 : Dew condensation prevention "DWP" Y Y
40 : Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power Y N
(50Hz) "ISW50"
41: Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power Y N
(60Hz) "ISW60"
48: Pulse train input (Only for X5 terminal (E05)) “PIN” Y Y
49 (1049): Pulse train sign “SIGN” Y Y
(Other than X5 terminal (E01 to E04))
50 (1050): Clear running motor regular switching time “MCLR” Y Y
59 (1059): Enable battery-driven operation Y N
“BATRY/UPS
72 (1072): Count the run time of commercial power-driven motor 1 Y N
“CRUN-M1”
78 (1078): Select speed control parameter 1 “MPRM1” N Y
80 (1080): Cancel customizable logic “CLC” Y Y
81 (1081): Clear all customizable logic timers “CLTC” Y Y
82 (1082): Cancel anti-regenerative control “AR-CCL” Y Y
87 (1087): Run command 2/ 1 “FR2/FR1” Y Y
88 (1088): Run forward / stop 2 “FWD2” Y Y
89 (1089): Run reverse / stop 2 “REV2” Y Y
100: No function assigned “NONE” Y Y
134: Switch fire mode “FMS” Y Y
149 (1149): Switch pump control “PCHG” Y Y
150 (1150): Enable master motor drive in mutual operation“MEN0” Y Y
151 (1151): Enable pump control motor 1 to be driven “MEN1” Y Y
Appendix-59
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
171 (1171): PID control multistage command 1 “PID-SS1” Y Y
181 (1181): External PID1 multistage command 1 "EPID-SS1" Y Y
201 (1201): External PID1 ON command "EPID1-ON" Y Y
202 (1202): External PID1 Cancel "%EPID1" Y Y
203 (1203): External PID1 Switch normal/inverse operation Y Y
"EPID1-IVS"
204 (1204): External PID1 reset integral and differential components Y Y
"EPID1-RST"
205 (1205): External PID1 hold integral component "EPID1-HLD" Y Y
* Inside the ( ) is the negative logic signal (OFF at short-circuit)
E10 Acceleration time 2 0.00 to 3600 s 12 Y Y 20.0 Y Y 156
E11 Deceleration time 2 * 0.00 is for acceleration and deceleration time cancel (when
performing soft-start and stop externally)
E12 Acceleration time 3
E13 Deceleration time 3
E14 Acceleration time 4
E15 Deceleration time 4
E16 Torque limiter 2 (Driving) 0 to 300%; 999 (Disable) 1 Y Y 999 Y Y 157
E17 (Braking)
E20 Terminal [Y1] function 0 (1000): Inverter running “RUN” 1 N Y 0 Y Y 158
E21 Terminal [Y2] function 1 (1001): Frequency (speed) arrival “FAR” 1 N Y 1 Y Y
E27 Terminal [30A/B/C] function 2 (1002): Frequency (speed) detected “FDT” 1 N Y 2 Y Y
3 (1003): Under voltage detected (inverter stopped) “LU” 1 N Y 15 Y Y
5 (1005): Inverter output limiting “IOL” 1 N Y 99 Y Y
6 (1006): Auto-restarting after momentary power failure “IPF” Y Y
7 (1007): Motor overload early warning “OL” Y Y
8 (1008): Keypad operation enabled “KP” Y Y
10 (1010): Inverter ready to run “RDY” Y Y
11: Switch motor drive source between commercial power and Y N
inverter output (For MC on commercial line)
"SW88"
inverter output (For secondary side) "SW52-2"
inverter output (For primary side) "SW52-1"
15 (1015): Switch MC on the input power lines “AX” Y Y
16 (1016): Pattern operation stage transition “TU” Y Y
17 (1017): Pattern operation cycle completed “TO” Y Y
18 (1018): Pattern operation stage 1 “STG1” Y Y
25 (1025): Cooling fan in operation “FAN” Y Y
26 (1026): Auto-resetting “TRY” Y Y
27 (1027): Universal DO “U-DO” Y Y
28 (1028): Heat sink overheat early warning “OH” Y Y
30 (1030): Lifetime alarm “LIFE” Y Y
33 (1033): Reference loss detected “REF OFF” Y Y
35 (1035): Inverter outputting “RUN 2” Y Y
36 (1036): Overload prevention controlling “OLP” Y Y
37 (1037): Current detected “ID” Y Y
41 (1041): Low current detected “IDL” Y Y
42 (1042): PID alarm “PID-ALM” Y Y
43 (1043): Under PID control “PID-CTL” Y Y
44 (1044): Under sleep mode of PID control “PID-STP” Y Y
45 (1045): Low torque detected “U-TL” Y Y
52 (1052): Running forward “FRUN” Y Y
53 (1053): Running reverse “RRUN” Y Y
APPENDICES
54 (1054): Under remote mode “RMT” Y Y

55 (1055): Run command entered "AX2" Y Y
Appendix-60
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
56 (1056): Motor overheat detected by thermistor “THM” Y Y
59 (1059): Terminal [C1] (C1 function) wire break detected Y Y
“C1OFF”
68(1068): Motor regular switching early warning "MCHG" Y Y
69(1069): Pump control output limit signal "MLIM" Y Y
76 (1076): Speed deviation excess “PG-ERR” N Y
77 (1077): Low DC link bus voltage detection “U-EDC” Y Y
79 (1079): During decelerating at momentary power failure “IPF2” Y Y
84 (1084): Maintenance timer counted up “MNT” Y Y
87 (1087): Frequency arrival and detected “FARFDT” Y Y
88 (1088): Auxiliary motor drive signal “AUX_L” Y Y
95 (1095): Running in fire mode “FMRUN” Y Y
98 (1098): Light alarm “L-ALM” Y Y
99 (1099): Alarm output “ALM” Y Y
101 (1101): EN circuit failure detected “DECF” Y Y
102 (1102): EN terminal input OFF “ENOFF” Y Y
111 (1111): Customizable logic output signal 1 “CLO1” Y Y
160 (1160): Motor 1 being driven by inverter "M1_I" Y Y
161 (1161): Motor 1 being driven by commercial power "M1_L" Y Y
167 (1167): Motor 4 being driven by inverter "M4_L" Y Y
180 (1180): In mutual operation "M-RUN" Y Y
181 (1181): Alarm in mutual operation "M-ALM" Y Y
211 (1211): Under external PID1 control "EPID1-CTL" Y Y
212 (1212): External PID1 output "EPID1-OUT" Y Y
213 (1213): Running under external PID1 "EPID1-RUN" Y Y
214 (1214): External PID1 alarm "EPV1-ALM" Y Y
215 (1215): External PID1 feedback error "EPV1-OFF" Y Y
* Inside the ( ) is written the negative logic signal setting (OFF at
short-circuit)
E30 Frequency arrival detection 0.0 to 10.0 Hz 3 Y Y 2.5 Y Y 165
width (Detection width)
E31 Frequency detection 1 (Level) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 3 Y Y 50.0 Y Y 167
E32 (Hysteresis width) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 3 Y Y 1.0 Y Y
E34 Overload early 0.00 (Disable) 24 Y Y *3 Y Y 168
warning/Current detection
(Level)
E35 (Timer) 0.01 to 600.00 s 5 Y Y 10.00 Y Y
E37 Current detection 2/ 0.00 (Disable) 24 Y Y *3 Y Y
Low current detection (Inverter rated current dependent on F80) 1
(Level)
E38 (Timer) 0.01 to 600.00 s 5 Y Y 10.00 Y Y
E42 LED display filter 0.0 to 5.0 s 3 Y Y 0.5 Y Y 169
*3: The motor rated current is automatically set. Refer to “I.4 Motor constant”.
Appendix-61
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
E43 LED monitor (Item selection) 0: Speed monitor
monitor (Selectable with E48) 1 Y
Y Y 0 Y Y 169
3: Output current
4: Output voltage
8: Calculated torque
9: Input power
10: PID process command
14: PID output
15: Load factor
16: Motor output
17: Analog signal input monitor
25: Input watt-hour
watt
60: External PID1 process command (final) ((physical value)
61: External PID1 feedback value ((physical value)
62: External PID1 output (%)
63: External PID1 manual command (%)
E44 (Display when stopped) 0: Specified value 1 Y
Y Y 0 Y Y 170
1: Output value
E48 LED monitor 0: Output frequency 1 (PM:
(PM: Speed command value
value) 1 Y
Y Y 0 Y Y 170
(Speed monitor item) 1: Output frequency 2 (PM:
(PM: Speed estimated value
value)
2: Reference frequency
3: Motor rotation speed
4: Load rotation speed
7: Speed (%)
E50 Display coefficient for speed
s 0.01 to 200.00 5 Y
Y Y 30.00 Y Y 170
monitor
E51 Display coefficient for “Input
“I 0.000 (Cancel/Reset). 0.001 to 9999 45 Y
Y Y 0.010 Y Y 170
watt-hour
hour data”
E52 Keypad (Menu display mode) 0: Function code data setting mode (Menu 0, Menu1, and Menu 7) 1 Y
Y Y 0 Y Y 171
1: Function code data check mode (Menu 2 and Menu 7)
2: Full-menu mode
E59 Terminal [C1] function
unction 0: Current input (C1 function) 1 N
N Y 0 Y Y 172
selection 1: Voltage input (V2 function)
E61 Terminal [12] extended 0: None 1 N
N Y 0 Y Y 173
function
unction 1: Auxiliary frequency setting 1
E62 Terminal [C1] 2: Auxiliary frequency setting 2 1 N
N Y 0 Y Y
(C1 extended function) 3: PID process command
E63 Terminal [C1] 20: Analog signal input monitor 1 N
N Y 0 Y Y
(V2 extended function) 40: External PID process command
41: External PID feedback value
42: External PID manual command
E64 Saving of digital reference
eference 0: Auto saving (main power is turned off) 1 Y
Y Y 0 Y Y 173
frequency
requency 1: Save by turning key ON
E65 Reference loss detection
etection 0: Stop deceleration 1 Y
Y Y 999 Y Y 174
20 to 120%, 999: Cancel
E76 DC link bus low
low-voltage
voltage 400 to 800 V (400 V class) 1 Y
Y Y 470 Y Y 174
detection level
E80 Low torque detection (Level) 0 to 300% 1 Y
Y Y 20 Y Y 175
E81 (Timer) 0.01 to 600.00 s 5 Y
Y Y 20.00 Y Y
E98 Terminal [FWD] function 0 (1000): Select multistep frequency (0 to 1 steps) “SS1” 1 N
N Y 98 Y Y 175
E99 Terminal [REV] function 1 (1001): Select multistep frequency (0 to 3 steps) “SS2” 1 N
N Y 99 Y Y
2 (1002): Select multistep frequency (0 to 7 steps) “SS4” Y Y

3 (1003): Select multistep frequency (0 to 15 steps) “SS8” Y Y
6 (1006): Select 3-wire
wire operation “HLD” Y Y
7 (1007): Coast to a stop command “BX” Y Y
8 (1008): Reset alarm (Abnormal) “RST” Y Y
9 (1009): External alarm “THR” Y Y
11 (1011): Select frequency setting 2/ frequency setting 1 Y Y
“Hz2/ Hz1”
13: DC braking command “DCBRK” Y N
14 (1014): Select torque limit 2/ torque limit 1 “TL2/ TL1” Y Y
APPENDICES
17 (1017): UP command “UP” Y Y

18 (1018): DOWN command “DOWN” Y Y
indicates quick setup target function code.
Appendix-62
62
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
19 (1019): Allow function code editing (Data change enabled) Y Y
“WE-KP”
20 (1020): Cancel PID control “Hz/PID” Y Y
21 (1021): Switch normal/ inverse operation “IVS” Y Y
22 (1022): Interlock “IL” Y Y
24 (1024): Select link operation (RS-485, BUS option) “LE” Y Y
25 (1025): Universal DI “U-DI” Y Y
26 (1026): Select auto search for idling motor speed at starting“STM” Y Y
30 (1030): Force to stop “STOP” Y Y
33 (1033): Reset PID integral and differential terms “PID-RST” Y Y
34 (1034): Hold PID integral term “PID-HLD” Y Y
35 (1035): Select local (Keypad) command “LOC” Y Y
38 (1035): Run enable "RE" Y Y
39: Dew condensation prevention "DWP" Y Y
40: Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power Y Y
(50Hz) "ISW50"
41: Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power Y Y
(60Hz) "ISW60"
49 (1049): Pulse train sign “SIGN” Y Y
50 (1050): Clear running motor regular switching time “MCLR” Y Y
59 (1059): Enable battery-driven operation “BATRY/UPS” Y Y
72 (1072): Count the run time of commercial power-driven motor 1 Y N
“CRUN-M1”
78 (1078): Select speed control parameter 1 “MPRM1” N Y
80 (1080): Cancel customizable logic “CLC” Y Y
81 (1081): Clear all customizable logic timers “CLTC” Y Y
82 (1082): Cancel anti-regenerative control “AR-CCL” Y Y
87 (1087): Run command 2/ 1 “FR2/FR1” Y Y
88 (1088): Run forward / stop 2 “FWD2” Y Y
89 (1089): Run reverse / stop 2 “REV2” Y Y
98: Run forward / stop command “FWD” Y Y
99: Run reverse / stop command “REV” Y Y
100: No function assigned “NONE” Y Y
149 (1149): Switch pump control “PCHG” Y Y
150 (1150): Enable master motor drive in mutual operation “MEN0” Y Y
201 (1201): External PID1 ON command "EPID1-ON" Y Y
202 (1202): External PID1 Cancel "%EPID1" Y Y
203 (1203): External PID1 Switch normal/inverse operation Y Y
"EPID1-IVS"
204 (1204): External PID1 reset integral and differential components Y Y
"EPID1-RST"
205 (1205): External PID1 hold integral component "EPID1-HLD" Y Y
* Inside the ( ) is the negative logic signal. (OFF at short-circuit)
Appendix-63
■ C code: Control F
Functions
unctions of Frequency (Control Function)
unction)
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
C01 Jump frequency 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 3 Y
Y Y 0.0 Y Y 176
C02 2
C03 3
C04 (Skip width) 0.0 to 30.0Hz 3 Y
Y Y 3.0 Y Y
C05 Multistep
ultistep frequency 1 0.00 to 500.00Hz 22 Y
Y Y 0.00 Y Y 177
C06 2
C07 3
C08 4
C09 5
C10 6
C11 7
C12 8
C13 9
C14 10
C15 11
C16 12
C17 13
C18 14
C19 15
C21 Pattern operation 0: 1 cycle operation 1 N
N Y 0 Y Y 178
(Mode selection) 1: Repetition operation
2: Constant speed operation after 1 cycle operation
C22 (Stage 1) Special setting: Press key three times. 84 Y
Y Y 1st: Y Y
C23 (Stage 2) 1st: Set run time 0.0 to 3600 s and press key. 0.00
2nd: F
C24 (Stage 3) 2nd: Set rotational direction F (forward) or r (reverse) and press 3rd: 1
C25 (Stage 4) key.
3rd: Set acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 and press key.
C26 (Stage 5)
C27 (Stage 6)
C28 (Stage 7)
C30 Frequency setting 2 0: Keypad / key operation 1 N
N Y 2 Y Y 180
1: Analog voltage input (Terminal [12])
(from 0 to ±10 VDC)
2: Analog current input (Terminal [C1] (C1 function))
(4 to 20 mA DC, 0 to 20 mA DC)
3: Analog voltage input (Terminal [12]) + Analog current input
5: Analog voltage input (Terminal [C1] (V2 function))
(0 to 10 VDC)
7: UP DOWN control
8: Keypad key operation ( / key)
(With balanceless bumpless)
10: Pattern operation
11: Digital input/output interface card (option)
12: Pulse train input
C31 Analog input adjustment -5.0
5.0 to 5.0% 4 Y*
Y* Y 0.0 Y Y 181
(Terminal [12] ) (Offset)
C32 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00% 5 Y*
Y* Y 100.0 Y Y
C33 (Filter) 0.00 to 5.00 s 5 Y
Y Y 0.05 Y Y
C34 (Gain base point) 0.00 to 100.00% 5 Y*
Y* Y 100.0 Y Y
C35 (Polarity selection) 0: Bipolar 1: Unipolar 1 N
N Y 1 Y Y
C36 Analog input adjustment -5.0
5.0 to 5.0% 4 Y*
Y* Y 0.0 Y Y
(Offset)
C37 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00% 5 Y*
Y* Y 100.0 Y Y
C38 (Filter) 0.00 to 5.00 s 5 Y
Y Y 0.05 Y Y
C39 (Gain base point) 0.00 to 100.00% 5 Y*
Y* Y 100.0 Y Y
C40 Terminal [C1] (C1 function) 0: 4 to 20 mA Unipolar 1 N
N Y 0 Y Y
range
ange / polarity selection 1: 0 to 20 mA Unipolar
10: 4 to 20 mA Bipolar
11: 0 to 20 mA Bipolar
APPENDICES
Appendix-64
64
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
C41 Analog input adjustment -5.0 to 5.0% 4 Y* Y 0.0 Y Y 181
(Terminal [C1] (V2 function))
(Offset)
C42 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00% 5 Y* Y 100.0 Y Y
C43 (Filter) 0.00 to 5.00 s 5 Y Y 0.05 Y Y
C44 (Gain base point) 0.00 to 100.00% 5 Y* Y 100.0 Y Y
C45 (Polarity selection) 0: Bipolar 1 N Y 1 Y Y
1: Unipolar
C50 Bias (for frequency setting 1) 0.00 to 100.00% 5 Y* Y 0.00 Y Y 183
(Bias base point)
C53 Selection of normal/inverse 0: Normal 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 183
operation(Frequency setting 1) 1: Inverse
C55 Analog input adjustment -100.00 to 100.00% 6 Y* Y 0.00 Y Y 181
(Terminal 12) (Bias) 184
C56 (Bias base point) 0.00 to 100.00 % 5 Y* Y 0.00 Y Y
C58 (Display unit) * Same as J105 (However, setting range is, 1 to 80) 1 Y Y 2 Y Y
C59 (Maximum scale) -999 to 0.00 to 9990 12 N Y 100 Y Y
C60 (Minimum scale) -999 to 0.00 to 9990 12 N Y 0.00 Y Y
C61 Analog input adjustment -100.00 to 100.00 % 6 Y* Y 0.00 Y Y 181
(Terminal[C1](C1 function))
(Bias)
C64 (Display unit) * Same as J105 (However, setting range is, 1 to 80) 1 Y Y 2 Y Y
C65 (Maximum scale) -999 to 0.00 to 9990 12 N Y 100 Y Y 184
C67 Analog input adjustment -100.00 to 100.00 % 6 Y* Y 0.00 Y Y 181
(Terminal [C1] (V2 function))
(Bias)
C70 (Display unit) * Same as J105 (However, setting range is,1 to 80) 1 Y Y 2 Y Y 184
C71 (Maximum scale) -999 to 0.00 to 9990 12 N Y 100 Y Y
Appendix-65
■ P codes: Motor 1 Parameters (Motor 1 parameter)
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
P01 Motor 1 (No. of poles) 2 to 22 poles 1 N Y1 4 Y Y 185
P02 (Rated capacity) 0.01 to 1000 kW (At P99 = 0, 4, 21, or 22) 11 N Y1 *6 Y Y
0.01 to 1000 HP (At P99 = 1)
P03 (Rated current) 0.00 to 2000A 24 N Y1 *6 Y Y
P04 (Auto-tuning) 0: Disable 21 N N 0 Y Y 186
1: Stop tuning
2: Rotation tuning
5: Stop tuning(%R1, %X)
P05 (Online tuning) 0: Invalid 1 Y Y 0 Y N 188
1: Valid
P06 (No-load current) 0.00 to 2000A 24 N Y1 *6 Y N 188
P07 (%R1) 0.00 to 50.00% 5 Y Y1 *6 Y N
P08 (%X) 0.00 to 50.00% 5 Y Y1 *6 Y N
P09 (Slip compensation gain for 0.0 to 200.0% 5 Y* Y 100.0 Y N 188
driving)
P10 (Slip compensation response 0.01 to 10.00 s 5 Y Y1 0.5 Y N
time)
P11 (Slip compensation gain for 0.0 to 200.0 % 5 Y* Y 100.0 Y N
braking)
P12 (Rated slip frequency) 0.00 to 15.00 Hz 5 N Y1 *6 Y N 190
P13 (Iron loss factor 1) 0.00 to 20.00 % 5 Y Y1 *6 Y N 190
P30 (PMSM drive magnetic pole 0: Pull-in by current 1 N Y1 1 N Y 190
position detection mode) 1: For IPMSM (Interior permanent magnet synchronous motor)
2: For SPMSM (Surface permanent magnet synchronous motor)
3: Pull-in by current for IPMSM (Interior permanent magnet
synchronous motor)
P53 (%X correction factor 1) 0 to 300 % 1 Y Y1 100 Y N 190
P60 (PMSM armature resistance) 0.000 to 50.000 ohm 45 N Y1 *7 N Y 190
P61 (PMSM d-axis inductance) 0.00 to 500.00 mH 24 N Y1 *7 N Y
P62 (PMSM q-axis inductance) 0.00 to 500.00 mH 24 N Y1 *7 N Y
P63 (PMSM induced voltage) 160 to 500V (400Vclass) 1 N Y1 *7 N Y
P64 (PMSM iron loss) 0.0 to 20.0 % 3 Y Y1 *7 N Y
P65 (PMSM d-axis inductance 0.0 to 100.0 % ; 999 3 Y Y1 *7 N Y 190
magnetic saturation correction)
P74 (PMSM reference current at 10 to 200 % (100%= motor rated current) 1 Y* Y1 *7 N Y 190
starting)
P83 (Reserved for PMSM) *9 0.0 to 50.0; 999 3 Y Y1 999 N – 191
P84 (Reserved for PMSM) *9 0.0 to 100.0; 999 3 N Y1 999 N –
P85 (PMSM flux limitation value) 50.0 to 150.0; 999 3 Y Y1 999 N Y 190
P86 (Reserved for PMSM) 0.0 to 100.0% 3 N N 0.0 N – 191
P87 (PMSM reference current for 0 to 200 % 1 N Y1 60 N Y –
polarity discrimination)
P88 (Reserved for PMSM) *9 0 to 100 %; 999 1 N Y1 999 N – 191
P89 (Reserved for PMSM) *9 0; 1 to 100 1 N Y1 0 N –
P90 (PMSM overcurrent protection 0.00(disable); 0.01 to 2000 A 24 N Y1 *7 N Y 191
level)
P99 Motor 1 selection 0: Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard IM, 8-series) 1 N Y1 0 Y Y 191
1: Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating IMs)
4: Other IMs
20: Other motors(PMSMs)
21: Motor characteristics (Fuji PMSM GNB2 series)

*6: Factory defaults are depended on motor capacity. Refer to “I.4 Motor constant”.
*7: Factory defaults are the parameters for Fuji standard PMSM and depended on motor capacity.
*9: Factory use. Do not access these function codes.
APPENDICES
Appendix-66
■ H codes: High Performance Functions (High Level Function)
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
H02 Data initialization 0: Standard 1 N Y 0 Y Y 192
(Method) 1: User
H03 (Target) 0: Manual setting value 1 N N 0 Y Y
1: Initial value (factory default value)
2: Initialize motor 1 parameters
11: Initialize the parameters(excluding parameters related to
communication)
12: Initialize the parameters related to customizable logic
H04 Auto-reset (Times) 0: Disable 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 194
1 to 20: Number of retries
H05 (Interval) 0.5 to 20.0 s 3 Y Y 5.0 Y Y
H06 Cooling fan ON/OFF control 0: Disable (Always Fan ON) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 195
1: Enable (ON/OFF control effective)
H07 Curve acceleration/ 0: Disable (Linear acceleration/deceleration) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 195
deceleration 1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration (Weak)
2: S-curve acceleration/deceleration (Strong)
3: Curve acceleration/deceleration
H08 Rotational direction limitation 0: Disable 1 N Y 0 Y Y 195
1: Enable (Reverse rotation inhibited)
2: Enable (Forward rotation inhibited)
H09 Starting mode (Auto search) 0: Disable 1 N Y 0 Y N 196
1: Enable (Only at restart after momentary power failure)
2: Enable (At normal start and at restart after momentary power
failure)
H11 Deceleration mode 0: Normal deceleration 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 198
1: Coast to a stop
H12 Instantaneous overcurrent 0: Disable 1 Y Y 1 Y N 198
limiting (Mode selection) 1: Enable
H13 Restart mode after momentary 0.1 to 20.0 s 3 Y Y1 *2 Y N 198
power failure (Restart timer)
H14 (Frequency fall rate) 0.00: Selected deceleration time 5 Y Y 999 Y N
0.01 to 100.00Hz/s
999: According to current limiter)
H15 (Continuous running level) 400 to 600V 1 Y Y 470 Y Y
H16 (Allowable momentary power 0.0 to 30.0s, 999 (Depend on inverter judgment) 3 Y Y 999 Y Y
failure time)
H26 Thermistor (for motor) 0: Disable 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 198
(Mode selection) 1: PTC: 0h4 trip and stop the inverter
2: PTC: Output motor overheat detected “THM” and continue to
run
H27 (Level) 0.00 to 5.00 V 5 Y Y 1.60 Y Y
H30 Communication link function Frequency command Run command 1 Y Y 0 200 Y
(Mode selection) 0: F01/C30 F02
1: RS-485 (Port 1) F02
2: F01/C30 RS-485 (Port 1)
3: RS-485 (Port 1) RS-485 (Port 1)
4: RS-485 (Port 2) F02
5: RS-485 (Port 2) RS-485 (Port 1)
6: F01/C30 RS-485 (Port 2)
7: RS-485 (Port 1) RS-485 (Port 2)
8: RS-485 (Port 2) RS-485 (Port 2)
H42 Capacitance of DC link bus For adjustment at replacement 1 Y N – Y Y 202
capacitor (0000 to FFFF (in hexadecimal))
H43 Cumulative run time of cooling For adjustment at replacement Displays the cumulative run time of 74 Y N – Y Y
fan cooling fan in units of ten hours.
H44 Startup count for motor 1 For adjustment at replacement 1 Y N – Y Y 206
(0000 to FFFF in hexadecimal)
H45 Mock alarm 0: Disable 1 Y N 0 Y Y 206
1: Occurrence of mock Alarm
H46 Starting mode 0.1 to 20.0 s 3 Y Y1 *6 Y Y 206
(Auto search delay time 2)
*2: Factory defaults are depended on motor capacity. Refer to “I.3 Factory default value per applicable electric motor capacitance”.
*6: Factory defaults are depended on motor capacity. Refer to “I.4 Motor constant”.
Appendix-67
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
H47 Initial capacitance of DC link For adjustment at replacement 1 Y N – Y Y 206
bus capacitor (0000 to FFFF in hexadecimal)
H48 Cumulative run time of For adjustment at replacement 74 Y N – Y Y 202
capacitors on printed circuit Change in cumulative motor run time (Reset is enabled) 206
boards (in units of ten hours)
H49 Starting mode 0.0 to 10.0 s 3 Y Y 0.0 Y Y 207
(Auto search delay time 1)
H50 Non-linear V/f 1 (Frequency) 0.0: Cancel 3 N Y 0.0 Y N 207
0.1 to 500.0 Hz
H51 (Voltage) 0 to 500V:AVR operation ( 400V class) 1 N Y 0 Y N
H52 Non-linear V/f 2 (Frequency) 0.0: Cancel 3 N Y 0.0 Y N
0.1 to 500.0 Hz
H53 (Voltage) 0 to 500V:AVR operation ( 400V class) 1 N Y 0 Y N
H56 Deceleration time for forced 0.00 to 3600 s 12 Y Y 20.0 Y Y 207
stop
H63 Low limiter (Mode selection) 0: Limit by F16 (Frequency limiter: Low) and continue to run 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 207
1: If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16
(Frequency limiter: Low), decelerate to stop the motor.
H64 (Lower limiting frequency) 0.0: Depends on F16 (Frequency limiter, Low) 13 Y Y 1.6 Y Y 207
0.1 to 60.0 Hz
H68 Slip compensation 1 0: Enable during acceleration/deceleration, enable at base 1 N Y 0 Y N 207
(Operating conditions frequency or higher
selection) 1: Disable during acceleration/deceleration, enable at base
frequency or higher
2: Enable during acceleration/deceleration, disable at base
frequency or higher
3:Disable during acceleration/deceleration, disable at base
frequency or higher
H69 Anti-regenerative control 0: Disable 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 208
(Mode selection) 2: Torque limit control with force-to-stop
(Cancel limit control after three times of deceleration time has
passed)
3: DC link bus voltage control with force-to-stop
(Cancel voltage control after three times of deceleration time
has passed)
4: Torque limit control without force-to-stop
5: DC link bus voltage control without force-to-stop
H70 Overload prevention control 0.00: Follow the deceleration time selected 5 Y Y 999 Y Y 209
0.01 to 100.00 Hz/s, 999 (Cancel)
H71 Deceleration characteristics 0: Disable 1 Y Y 0 Y N 209
1: Enable
H72 Main power shutdown 0: Disable 1 Y Y 1 Y Y 209
detection (Mode selection) 1: Enable (Available FRN0045E2E-4EH or above)
H76 Torque limiter (Braking) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 3 Y Y 5.0 Y N 210
(Frequency rising limiter for
braking)
H77 Service life of DC link bus 0 to 8760 (in units of ten hours) 74 Y N 6132 Y Y 210
capacitor (ND
spec)
H78 Maintenance interval (M1) 0 (Disable): 1 to 9999 (in units of ten hours) 74 Y N 6132 Y Y 210
(ND
spec)
H79 Preset startup count for 0000 (Disable): 0001 to FFFF (in hexadecimal) 1 Y N 0 Y Y 211
maintenance (M1)
H80 Output current fluctuation 0.00 to 1.00 5 Y Y 0.20 Y N 211
damping gain for motor 1
H81 Light alarm selection 1 0000 to FFFF (in hexadecimal) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 212
H82 Light alarm selection 2 0000 to FFFF (in hexadecimal) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
H86 Reserved *9 0 to 2 1 Y Y 0 – – 214

H89 Electronic Thermal Overload 0: Inactive 1 Y Y 1 – – 214
Protection for Motor 1 1: Active
(data store)
H90 Reserved *9 0 to 1 1 Y Y 0 – – 214
H91 PID feedback wire break 0.0 (Alarm disable): 0.1 to 60.0 s 3 Y Y 0.0 Y Y 214
detection
*9: Factory use. Do not access these function codes.

APPENDICES
Appendix-68
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
H92 Continuous running at the 0.000 to 10.000 times; 999 7 Y Y1 999 Y Y 214
momentary power failure (P) 999:Manufacturer adjustment value
H93 (I) 0.010 to 10.000 s; 999 7 Y Y1 999 Y Y
999:Manufacturer adjustment value
H94 Cumulative motor run time 1 0 to 9999 74 N N – Y Y 210
Change in cumulative motor run time (Reset is enabled) 215
(in units of 10 hours)
H95 DC braking 0: Slow response 1 Y Y 1 Y N 116
(Braking response mode) 1: Quick response 215
H96 STOP key priority/ 0: STOP key priority disable/ Start check function disable 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 215
Start check function 1: STOP key priority enable/ Start check function disable
2: STOP key priority disable/ Start check function enable
3: STOP key priority enable/ Start check function enable
H97 Clear alarm data 0: Disable 1 Y N 0 Y Y 215
1: Alarm data clear (Automatically return to 0 after clearing
data)
H98 Protection/Maintenance 0 to 127 (Data is displayed in decimal) 1 Y Y *11 Y Y 216
function (Mode selection) Bit 0: Lower the carrier frequency automatically
(0: Disable; 1: Enable)
Bit 1: Input phase loss protection (0: Disable; 1: Enable)
Bit 2: Output phase loss protection (0: Disable; 1: Enable)
Bit 3: Main circuit capacitor life judgment selection
(0: Factory default referenced;
1 User measurement value standard)
Bit 4: Judge the life of main circuit capacitor
Bit 5: Detect DC fan lock (0: Enable; 1: Disable)
Bit 6: Braking transistor error detection
H99 Password 2 setting/check 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal) 1 Y N 0 Y Y 218
H101 Destination 0:Not selected 1 Y Y G(AEU): Y Y 221
1:Japan 0
2:Asia J:1
3:China C:3
4:Europe K:7
5:Americas
7:Korea
H111 UPS operation level 120 to 220 VDC: (200 V class) 221
240 to 440 VDC: (400 V class)
H114 Anti-regenerative control 0.0 to 50.0%, 999: disabled 3 Y Y 999 Y Y 221
(Level)
H116 Fire Mode (Mode selection) 0: FMS: ON N Y 0 222
1: FMS toggle method
2: FMS latch method
H117 (Confirmation time) 0.5 to 10.0 s Y Y 3.0
* Set ON/OFF setting time for FMS signals.
H118 (Reference frequency) Inherit: Follow the ordinary reference frequency specified with Y Y Inherit
F01, etc.
0.1 to 500.0 Hz
H119 (Rotation direction) 0: Follow the run command specified with F02, etc. N Y 0
2: Forward rotation
3: Reverse rotation
H120 (Start method) 0: Follows the start methods specified with instant power failure Y Y 0
restart
1: Auto search
H121 (Reset interval) 0.5 to 20.0 s Y Y 5.0
H193 User initial value (Save) 0: Disable 1 Y N 0 Y Y 193
1: Save 224
H194 (Protection) 0: Save enable 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
1: Protected (Save disable)
H195 DC braking 0.00: Disable 5 Y Y 0.00 Y N 116
(Braking timer at the startup) 0.01 to 30.00 s 224
H197 User password 1 0: All function codes are disclosed, but the change is not 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 218
(Selection of protective allowed.
operation) 1: Only the function code for quick setup can be
disclosed/changed.
2: Only the function code for customize logic setting is not
disclosed/not changed.
H198 (Setting/check) 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal) 1 Y N 0000 Y Y
H199 User password protection 0: Disable 1 Y N 0 Y Y
valid 1: Protected
*11: FRN0020E2 -2G H or below: 83, FRN0072E2 -4EH or below: 83, FRN0012E2 -7G H or below: 83, FRN0085E2 -4EH or above: 19.
Appendix-69
■ A codes: Motor 2 Parameters (Motor 2 parameters)
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
Name Data setting range
PM
V/f
A43 Speed control 2 0.000 to 5.000 s 7 Y Y 0.200 N Y 293
(Speed command filter)
A44 (Speed detection filter) 0.000 to 0.100 s 7 Y* Y 0.025 N Y
A45 P (Gain) 0.1 to 200.0 times 3 Y* Y 2.0 N Y
A46 I (Integral time) 0.001 to 9.999 s 7 Y Y 0.600 N Y
999: Cancel integral term
APPENDICES
Appendix-70
■ J code
codes:: Application Functions 1 (Application function 1)
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
J01 PID control (Mode selection) 0: Disable 1 N Y 0 Y Y 226
1: Process
rocess (normal operation)
2: Process
rocess (inverse operation)
J02 (Remote command) 0: Keypad key operation ( / key) 1 N Y 0 Y Y 227
1: PID process command 1 (Analog input: Terminals 12, C1 and
V2)
3: UP/DOWN
4: Communication
J03 P (Gain) 0.000 to 30.000 times 7 Y Y 0.100 Y Y 232
J04 I (Integral time) 0.0 to 3600.0 s 3 Y Y 0.0 Y Y
J05 D (Differential time) 0.00 to 600.00 s 5 Y Y 0.00 Y Y

J06 (Feedback filter) 0.0 to 900.0 s *1 3 Y Y 0.5 Y Y
J10 (Anti-reset
reset windup) 0 to 200% 1 Y Y 200 Y Y 235
J11 (Select Warnin
ng output) 0: Warning caused by process command value 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 236
1: Warning caused by process command value with hold
2: Warning caused by process command value with latch
3: Warning caused by process command value with hold and
latch
4: Warning caused by PID error value
5: Warning caused by PID error value with hold
6: Warning caused by PID error value with lat
latch
7: Warning caused by PID error value with hold and latch
J12 (Upper limit of warning (AH)) 0% to 100% 1 Y Y 100 Y Y
J13 (Lower limit of warning (AL)) 0% to 100% 1 Y Y 0 Y Y

J15 (Sleep frequency) 0.0: Disable 3 Y Y 0.0 Y Y 238
1.0 to 500.0 Hz
J16 (Sleep timer) 0 to 60 s 1 Y Y 30 Y Y
J17 (Wakeup frequency) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 3 Y Y 0.0 Y Y
J18 (Upper limit of PID process 0 to 500
0 Hz; 999 (Depends on setting of F15) 1 Y Y 999 Y Y 239
output)
J19 (Lower limit of PID process 0 to 500 Hz; 999 (Depends on setting of F1
F16) 1 Y Y 999 Y Y
output)
J21 Dew Condensation Prevention 1～50
50 % 1 N Y 0 Y N 240
(Duty)
J22 Commercial Power Switching 0: Keep inverter operation (Stop due to alarm) 1 Y Y 0.0 Y Y -
Sequence 1: Automatically switch to commercial
commercial-power
power operation
J23 (Wakeup level of PID error) 0.0 to 100.0% 3 Y Y 0.0 Y Y 238
J24 (Wakeup timer) 0 to 3600 s 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
Appendix-71
71
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
J105 PID control (Display unit) 0 to 80 N Y 0 Y Y 240
0: Inherit (PID Control 1 feedback unit)
1: none
2: %
4: r/min
7: kW
[Flow]
20: m3/s
21: m3/min
22: m3/h
23: L/s
24: L/min
25: L/h
[Pressure]
40: Pa
41: kPa
42: MPa
43: mbar
44: bar
45: mmHg
46: psi PSI (Pounds per square inch absolute)
47: mWG
48: inWG
[Temperature]
60: K
61: degreeC
62: degreeF
[Concentration]
80: ppm
J106 (Maximum scale) -999 to 0.00 to 9990 N Y 100 Y Y
J107 (Minimum scale) -999 to 0.00 to 9990 N Y 0.00 Y Y
J136 PID multistep command -999 to 0.00 to 9990 Y Y 0.00 Y Y 240
(Multistep command 1)
J137 (Multistep command 2) -999 to 0.00 to 9990 Y Y 0.00 Y Y
J138 (Multistep command 3) -999 to 0.00 to 9990 Y Y 0.00 Y Y
APPENDICES
Appendix-72
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
J401 Pump Control Mode Selection 0: Disable 1 N Y 0 Y Y 259
1: Enable (Inverter drive motor fixed system, judged by MV)
2: Enable (Inverter drive motor floating system, judged by MV)
3: Enable (Inverter drive motor floating + commercial power-driven
motor system, judged by MV)
11 Enable (Inverter drive motor fixed system, judged by output
frequency) *7
12 Enable (Inverter drive motor floating system, judged by output
frequency) *7
13 Enable (Inverter drive floating + commercial power-driven motor
system, judged by output frequency) *7
52: Enable (Communications-linked inverter drive motor floating
system)
54: Enable (Communications-linked all motors simultaneous PID
control system)
J402 Communication Master/Slave 0: Communication master inverter 1 N Y 1 Y Y 261
Selection 1: Communication slave inverter
J403 Number of Slaves 1 to 3 units 1 N Y 1 Y Y 261
* Set for a master only.
J404 Master Input Permeation 0000H to 007FH (hexadecimal) 1 N Y 0000H Y Y 261
Selection Bit 0: FWD
Bit 1: REV
Bit 2: X1
Bit 3: X2
Bit 4: X3
Bit 5: X4
Bit 6: X5
* The inverter sends the master terminal input info to the slave.
* The slave stores the received data to S06 after masking.
J411 Motor 1 Mode Selection 0: Disable (off at all times) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 262
J412 Motor 2 Mode Selection 1: Enable 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
2: Forced drive ON (forced commercial power drive)
J413 Motor 3 Mode Selection 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
J414 Motor 4 Mode Selection 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
J425 Motor Switching Procedure 0: Fixing procedure 1 N Y 0 Y Y 263
1: Equal operating time (Cumulative run time of each motor is
equalized.)
2: Fixing procedure (Switching the motor at slow flowrate stop)
3: Equal operating time (Switching the motor at slow flowrate
stop)
J430 Stop of Commercial 0: Stop commercial power-driven motors 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 264
Power-driven Motors 1: Stop commercial power-driven motors only when an inverter
alarm occurs
2: Continue to run
J435 Motor Regular Switching 1: Inverter-driven pumps are subject to switching. 1 Y Y 1 Y Y 266
Mode Selection 2: Commercial power-driven pumps are subject to switching.
3: All pumps (inverter-driven pumps/commercial power-driven
pumps) are subject to switching.
J436 Motor Regular Switching Time 0.0: Disable 3 Y Y 0.0 Y Y
0.1 to 720.0 h: Enable: (Switching time)
999: Enable (Switching time fixed at three minutes)
J437 Motor Regular Switching 0.00 to 600.00 s 5 Y Y 0.10 Y Y
Signal Output Time
J450 Motor Increase Judgment 0 to 500 Hz 1 Y Y 999 Y Y 269
(Parallel Judgment F) 999: Depends on J18
J451 (Duration time) 0.00 to 3600.00 s 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y
J452 Motor Decrease Judgment 0 to 500 Hz 1 Y Y 999 Y Y
(Parallel Judgment F) 999: Depends on J19
J453 (Duration time) 0.00 to 3600.00 s 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y
J454 Contactor Restart Time when 0.01 to 2.00 s 5 Y Y 0.10 Y Y 270
Switching the Motor
J455 Motor Increase Switching 0.00: Depends on F08 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y 270
Time (Deceleration time) 0.01 to 3600.00 s
J456 Motor Increase Switching 0 to 100% 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
Level
J457 Motor Increase PID Control 0 to 500 Hz 1 Y Y 999 Y Y
Start Frequency 999: Depends on J452
J458 Motor Decrease Switching 0.00: Depends on F07 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y 271
Time (Acceleration time) 0.01 to 3600.00 s
J459 Motor Decrease Switching 0 to 100% 1 Y Y 999 Y Y
Level 999: Depends on J456
J460 Motor Decrease PID Control 0 to 500 Hz 1 Y Y 999 Y Y
Start Frequency 999: Depends on J450
Appendix-73
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
J461 Motor Increase/Decrease 0.0:: Disable 3 Y Y 0.0 Y Y 271
Switching Judgment 0.1 to 50.0%
Non
Non-responsive
responsive Area Width
J462 Failure Inverter Judgment 0.0: Disable 3 Y Y 5.0 Y Y 272
Time 0.5 to 600.0 s
J463 PID control start frequency 0: Disable 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 272
1 to 500Hz
500
999: Depends on J19
J465 Auxiliary Motor 0.0:: Disable 3 Y Y 50.0 Y Y 272
(Frequency operation level) 0.1 to 500.0 Hz
J466 (Hysteresis width) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 3 Y Y 1.0 Y Y
J467 (PV operation level) 0.00:: Disable 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y 272
0.01 to 9990
J468 (Connection timer) 0.00 to 2.00 s 5 Y Y 0.00 Y Y
J469 (Interrupting timer) 0.00 to 2.00 s 5 Y Y 0.00 Y Y
J480 Motor Cumulative Run Time 0 to 65535 1 Y N 0 Y Y 274
(Motor 0) For adjustment at the replacement time
J481 (Motor 1) 1 Y N 0 Y Y
J482 (Motor 2) 1 Y N 0 Y Y
J483 (Motor 3) 1 Y N 0 Y Y
J484 (Motor 4) 1 Y N 0 Y Y
J490 Y Terminal ON Maximum 0.000 to 1000 (The
The display of "1.000" indicates 1000 times.) 45 Y N 0.000 Y Y 275
Cumulation Count
(Y1,Y2)
J492 Relay ON Maximum 45 Y N 0.000 Y Y
Cumulation Count
(30A
(30A/B/C)
J493 Relay ON Maximum 45 Y N 0.000 Y Y
Cumulation Count
(Y6RY to Y8RY)
J501 External PID Control 1 0: Disable 1 N Y 0 Y Y 276
(Mode selection) 1: Enable process control (Normal operation)
2: Enable process control (Inverse operation)
11: Enable process control, interlocking with inverter running
(Normal operation)
12: Enable process control, interlocking with inverter running
(Inverse operation)
21: Enable process control by external digital signal (Normal
operation)
22: Enable process control by external digital signal (Inverse
operation)
31: Enable process control by external digital signal, interlocking
with inverter running (Normal operation)
32: Enable process control by external digital signal, interlocking
with inverter running (Inverse operation)
J502 (Remote command selection) 0: Keypad ( / key) 1 N Y 0 Y Y 277
3: Terminal command “UP/DOWN”
4: Command via communications link (Use function code S13)
51: External PID command 1 (Analog input: Terminals [12], [C1]
and [V2])
J505 (Display unit) Same as J105 1 N Y 0 Y Y 282
J506 (Maximum scale) -999
999 to 0.00 to 9990 12 N Y 100.0 Y Y 283
J507 (Minimum scale) -999
999 to 0.00 to 9990 12 N Y 0.00 Y Y
J510 P (Gain) 0.000 to 30.000 times 7 Y Y 0.100 Y Y 284
999:: ON/OFF control
J511 I (Integral time) 0.0 to 3600.0 s 3 Y Y 0.0 Y Y
J512 D (Differential time) 0.00 to 600.00 s 5 Y Y 0.00 Y Y
J513 (Feedback filter) 0.0 to 900.0 s 3 Y Y 0.5 Y Y
J514 (Anti-reset
reset wind-up) 0.00 to 9990 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y 285
0.00:: Disable
Upper/lower limit values are restricted by the maximum/minimum
scales.
J515 (ON/OFF control hysteresis 0.00 to 9990 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y 285
width) Upper/lower limit values are restricted by the maximum/minimum
scales.
J516 (Proportional operation 0 to 150% 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 286
output convergent value)
J517 (Proportional cycle) 1 to 150 s 1 Y Y 30 Y Y 286
APPENDICES
Appendix-74
74
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
J518 External PID Control 1 -10
10 to +110% 2 Y Y 100 Y Y 287
(Upper limit of PID process
output)
J519 (Lower limit of PID process -10
10 to +110% 2 Y Y 0 Y Y
output)
J520 (Upper and lower limits) 0: Limit PID output with J518, J519 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
1: 110%, -10%
10% of PID output with J518 exceeded or less than
J519
J521 (Alarm output selection) 0: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (PV) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 288
1: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (PV) (with Hold)
2: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (PV) (with Latch)
3: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (PV) (with Hold and Latch)
4: Deviation alarm (PV)
5: Deviation alarm (PV) (with Hold)
6: Deviation alarm (PV) (with Latch)
7: Deviation alarm (PV) (with Hold and Latch
8: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (SV)
9: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (SV) (with Hold)
10: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (SV) (with Latch)
11: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (SV) (with Hold and Latch)
12: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (MV)
13: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (MV) (with Hold)
14: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (MV) (with Latch)
15: Absolute-value
Absolute value alarm (MV) (with Hold and Latch)
J522 (Upper level alarm (AH)) OFF: Disable 12 Y Y OFF Y Y
-999
999 to 0.00 to 9990
scales.
J524 (Lower level alarm (AL)) OFF: Disable 12 Y Y OFF Y Y
-999
999 to 0.00 to 9990
scales.
J527 (Feedback error detection 0: Disable (Turns ON output signals (EPV1
(EPV1-ERR) and 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 291
mode) continues operation.)
1: Enable (Free run stop (PVA trip))
2: Enable (Deceleration and stop (PVA trip))
J529 (Feedback error upper
upper-limit) Auto: 105% equivalent 12 Y Y AUTO Y Y
-999
999 to 0.00 to 9990
scales.
J530 (Feedback error lower-limit)
lower Auto: -5% equivalent 12 Y Y AUTO Y Y
-999
999 to 0.00 to 9990
scales.
J531 (Feedback error detection 0.0 to 300.0 s 3 Y Y 0.1 Y Y
time)
J540 (Manual command) 0: Keypad ( / key) 1 N Y 0 Y Y 292
8: Keypad ( / key) (Balanceless
(Balanceless-bumpless)
bumpless)
51: External PID command 1 (Analog input: Terminals [12], [C1]
and [V2])
J551 External PID 1 Multistep -999
999 to 0.00 to 9990 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y 292
Command
(Multistep command 1)
J552 (Multistep command 2) -999
999 to 0.00 to 9990 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y
J553 (Multistep command 3) -999
999 to 0.00 to 9990 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y
Appendix-75
75
■ d codes: Application Functions 2 (Application function 2)
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
d01 Speed control 1 0.000 to 5.000 s 7 Y Y 0.200 N Y 293
(Speed command filter)
d02 (Speed detection filter) 0.000 to 0.100 s 7 Y* Y 0.025 N Y
d03 P (Gain) 0.1 to 200.0 times 3 Y* Y 2.0 N Y
d04 I (Integral time) 0.001 to 9.999 s 7 Y Y 0.600 N Y
999:Cancel integral term
d21 Speed agreement / PG error 0.0 to 50.0 % 3 Y Y 10.0 N Y 295
(Hysteresis width)
d22 (Detection timer) 0.00 to 10.00 s 5 Y Y 0.50 N Y
d23 PG error processing 0: Continue to run 1 1 N Y 2 N Y
1: Stop with alarm 1
3: Continue to run 2
d25 ASR switching time 0.000 to 1.000 s 7 Y Y 0.000 N Y 295
d32 Speed limit / 0 to 110 % 1 Y Y 100 N Y 295
Over speed level 1
d33 Speed limit / 0 to 110 % 1 Y Y 100 N Y
Over speed level 2
d35 Over speed detection level 0 to 120 %; 999 1 Y Y 999 N Y 296
999: Depend on d32, d33
d51 Reserved *9 -500 to 500 *12 2 N Y *12 Y Y 296
d55 Reserved *9 0000 to 00FF (Display in hexadecimal) 1 N Y 0 Y Y
d61 Command pulse input 0.000 to 5.000 s 7 Y Y 0.005 Y Y 296

(Filter time constant)
d62 (Pulse scaling factor 1) 1 to 9999 1 Y Y 1 Y Y
d63 (Pulse scaling factor 2) 1 to 9999 1 Y Y 1 Y Y
d67 PMSM starting mode 0: Disable 1 N Y 2 N Y 196
(Auto search) 1: Enable (At restart after momentary power failure) 296
2: Enable (At restart after momentary power failure and at normal
start)
d69 Reserved *9 30.0 to 100.0Hz 3 Y Y 30.0 Y N 296
d79 Reserved *9 0; 160 to 500 V (400V order); 999 1 N Y 0 N Y
d91 Reserved *9 0.00 to 2.00, 999 5 Y Y 999 – – 296
d92 Reserved *9 0.00 to 10.00 5 Y Y 0.30 – –
d99 Extension function 1 0 to 127 1 Y Y 0

Bit 0-8: Reserved *9 – –
*9: Factory use. Do not change these function codes.

*12: FRN0012E2 -7G H or below: 20, FRN0020E2 -2G H or below: 20, FRN0290E2 -4EH or below: 20, FRN0361E2 -4EH and
FRN0415E2 -4EH: 50, FRN0520E2 -4EH or above: 100. APPENDICES
Appendix-76
■ U codes: Application Functions 3 (Customizable logic)
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
U00 Customizable logic 0: Disable 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 299
(Mode selection) 1: Enable (Customizable logic operation)
ECL alarm occurs when the value is changed from 1 to 0 during
operation.
U01 Customizable logic: Step 1 [Digital] 1 N Y 0 Y Y
(Block selection) 0: No function assigned
10 to 15: Through output + General-purpose timer
20 to 25: Logical AND + General-purpose timer
30 to 35: Logical OR + General-purpose timer
40 to 45: Logical XOR + General-purpose timer
50 to 55: Set priority flip-flop + General-purpose timer
60 to 65: Reset priority flip-flop + General-purpose timer
70, 72, 73: Rising edge detector + General-purpose timer
80, 82, 83: Falling edge detector + General-purpose timer
90, 92, 93: Rising & falling edges detector + General-purpose
timer
100 to 105: Hold + General-purpose timer
110: Increment counter
120: Decrement counter
130: Timer with reset input
General-purpose timer function
(Least significant digit 0 to 5)
_0: No timer
_1: On-delay timer
_2: Off-delay timer
_3: Pulse (1 shot)
_4: Retriggerable timer
_5: Pulse train output
[Analog]
2001: Adder
2002: Subtracter
2003: Multiplier
2004: Divider
2005: Limiter
2006: Absolute value of input
2007: Inverting adder
2008: Variable limiter
2009: Linear function
2051 to 2056: Comparator1 to 6
2071, 2072: Window comparator1, 2
2101: High selector
2102: Low selector
2103: Average of inputs
2151: Loading function from S13
2201: Clip and map function
2202: Scale converter
3001: Quadratic function
3002: Square root function
[Digital, Analog]
4001: Hold
4002: Inverting adder with enable
4003, 4004: Selector 1, 2
4005: LPF(Low-pass filter) with enable
4006: Rate limiter with enable
5000: Selector 3
5100: Selector 4
6001: Reading function code
6002: Writing function code
6003: Temporary change of function code
Appendix-77
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
U02 Customizable logic: Step 1 [Digital] 0 to 105: The same as E20 value. However, 27, 111 to 1 N Y 100 Y Y 299
(Input 1) 120 cannot be selected
U03 (Input 2) 2001 to 2200 (3001 to 3200): Output of Step 1 to 200 1 N Y 100 Y Y
“SO01” to”SO200”
4001 (5001): X1 terminal input signal “X1”
4010 (5010): FWD terminal input signal “FWD”
4011 (5011): REV terminal input signal “REV”
6000 (7000): Final run command RUN “FL_RUN”
6001 (7001): Final run command FWD “FL_FWD”
6002 (7002): Final run command REV “FL_REV”
6003 (7003): Accelerating “DACC”
6004 (7004): Decelerating “DDEC”
6005 (7005): Under anti-regenerative control “REGA”
6007 (7007): With/without alarm factor “ALM_ACT”
* Inside the ( ) is the negative logic signal. (OFF at short-circuit)
[Analog]
8000 to 8065: The value with 8000 added to F31
9001: Analog 12 terminal input signal [12]
9002: Analog C1 terminal input signal [C1] (C1)
9003: Analog V2 terminal input signal [C1] (V2)
*9004: Analog 32 terminal input signal [32]
*9005: Analog C2 terminal input signal [C2]
*9006: RTD1 [PT1]
*9007: RTD2 [PT2]
U04 (Function 1) -9990 to 0.00 to 9990 12 N Y 0.00 Y Y
U05 (Function 2) 12 N Y 0.00 Y Y
*: The use of the option card lets those functions remain in effect.
Customizable logic Step 1 to 14 function codes are assigned as follows: Setting value is the same as U01 to U05.
Step1 Step2 Step3 Step4 Step5 Step6 Step7 Step8 Step9 Step10
Block selection U01 U06 U11 U16 U21 U26 U31 U36 U41 U46
Input 1 U02 U07 U12 U17 U22 U27 U32 U37 U42 U47
Input 2 U03 U08 U13 U18 U23 U28 U33 U38 U43 U48
Function 1 U04 U09 U14 U19 U24 U29 U34 U39 U44 U49
Function 2 U05 U10 U15 U20 U25 U30 U35 U40 U45 U50
Step11 Step12 Step13 Step14
Block selection U51 U56 U61 U66
Input 1 U52 U57 U62 U67
Input 2 U53 U58 U63 U68
Function 1 U54 U59 U64 U69
Function 2 U55 U60 U65 U70
APPENDICES
Appendix-78
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
U71 Customizable logic 0: Disable 1 N Y 0 Y Y 299
(Output selection) 1 to 200: Output of Step 1 to 200 “S001” to “S0200”
Output signal 1
U72 Output signal 2
U73 Output signal 3
U74 Output signal 4
U75 Output signal 5
U76 Output signal 6
U77 Output signal 7
U78 Output signal 8
U79 Output signal 9
U80 Output signal 10
U81 Customizable logic 0 to 205 (1000 to 1205): Same as E98 1 N Y 100 Y Y
(Function selection) 8001 to 8043: The value with 8000 added to E61
Output signal 1
U82 Output signal 2
U83 Output signal 3
U84 Output signal 4
U85 Output signal 5
U86 Output signal 6
U87 Output signal 7
U88 Output signal 8
U89 Output signal 9
U90 Output signal 10
U91 Customizable logic timer 0: Monitor disable 1 Y N 0 Y Y
monitor (Step selection) 1 to 200: Step 1 to 200
U92 Customizable logic -9.999 to 9.999 8 N Y 0.000 Y Y
(The coefficients of the
approximate formula)
(Mantissa of KA1)
U93 (Exponent part of KA1) -5 to 5 2 N Y 0 Y Y
U94 (Mantissa of KB1) -9.999 to 9.999 8 N Y 0.000 Y Y
U95 (Exponent part of KB1) -5 to 5 2 N Y 0 Y Y
U96 (Mantissa of KC1) -9.999 to 9.999 8 N Y 0.000 Y Y
U97 (Exponent part KC1) -5 to 5 2 N Y 0 Y Y
U100 Task process cycle setting 0: Auto select from 2, 5, 10 or 20 ms depending on the number 1 N Y 0 Y Y 299
of steps
2: 2 ms (Up to 10 step)
5: 5 ms (Up to 50 step)
10: 10 ms (Up to 100 step)
20: 20 ms (Up to 200 step)
U101 Customizable logic -999 to 0.00 to 9990 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y 299
(Operating point 1 (X1)) 322
U102 (Operating point 1 (Y1))
U103 (Operating point 2 (X2))
U105 (Operating point 3 (X3))
U107 Customizable logic 0: Invalid 1 N N 0 Y Y 299
(Auto calculation of the 1: Execute calculation 323
coefficients of the (When the calculation is finished, the results are stored to the
approximate formula) function code U92 to U97)
Appendix-79
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
U121 Customizable logic -9990 to 0.00 to 9990 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y 299
(User parameter 1)
U122 (User parameter 2)
U171 Customizable logic -9990 to 0.00 to 9990 12 Y Y 0.00 Y Y
(Storage area 1)
U172 (Storage area 2)
U190 Customizable logic setting 1 to 200 1 Y Y 15 Y Y
step (Step number)
U191 Setting step (Select block) Same as U01 1 N Y 0 Y Y
U192 (Input 1) Same as U02 1 N Y 100 Y Y
U193 (Input 2) Same as U03 1 N Y 100 Y Y
U194 (Function 1) Same as U04 12 N Y 0.00 Y Y
U195 (Function 2) Same as U05 12 N Y 0.00 Y Y
U196 Customizable logic 0 to 9999 1 N N 0 Y Y
ROM version Upper digit
(Monitor)
U197 Customizable logic 0 to 9999 1 N Y 0 Y Y
ROM version Upper digit
(For User setting)
U198 Customizable logic 0 to 9999 1 N N 0 Y Y
ROM version Lower digit
(Monitor)
U199 Customizable logic 0 to 9999 1 N Y 0 Y Y
ROM version Lower digit
(For User setting)
APPENDICES
Appendix-80
■ y codes: LINK Functions (Link function)
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
y01 RS-485 Communication 1 0 to 255 1 N Y 1 Y Y 326
(Station address) *Set 1 when other than BACnet is 0.
*Set 127 when BACnet is 128 or above.
y02 (Communications error 0: Immediately trip with alarm er8 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
processing) 1: Trip with alarm er8 after running for the period specified by
timer y03
2: Retry during the period specified by timer y03. If the retry
fails, trip with alarm er8 . If it succeeds, continue to run.
3: Continue to run
y03 (Timer) 0.0 to 60.0 s 3 Y Y 2.0 Y Y
y04 (Baud rate) 0: 2400 bps 1 Y Y 3 Y Y
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
6: 76800 bps
y05 (Data length selection) 0: 8 bit 1: 7 bits 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
y06 (Parity selection) 0: None (Stop bit: 2 bits) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
1: Even number parity (Stop bit: 1 bits)
2: Odd number parity (Stop bit: 1 bits)
3: None (Stop bit: 1 bits)
y07 (Stop bit selection) 0: 2 bits 1: 1 bits 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
y08 (Communication time-out 0: Not check of the time-out 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
detection timer) 1 to 60 s
y09 (Response interval time) 0.00 to 1.00 s 5 Y Y 0.01 Y Y
y10 (Protocol selection) 0: Modbus RTU protocol 1 Y Y 1 Y Y
1: FRENIC Loader protocol (SX protocol)
2: Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol
3: Metasys N2
5: BACnet protocol
y11 RS-485 Communication 2 1 to 255 1 N Y 1 Y Y
(Station address)
y12 (Communications error 0: Immediately trip with alarm erp 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
processing) 1: Trip with alarm erp after running for the period specified by
timer y13
2: Retry during the period specified by timer y13. If the retry
fails, trip with alarm erp . If it succeeds, continue to run.
3: Continue to run
y13 (Timer) 0.0 to 60.0 s 3 Y Y 2.0 Y Y
y14 (Baud rate) 0: 2400 bps 1 Y Y 3 Y Y
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
6: 76800 bps
y15 (Data length selection) 0: 8 bits 1: 7 bits 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
y16 (Parity selection) 0: None (Stop bit: 2 bits) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
1: Even number parity (Stop bit: 1 bits)
2: Odd number parity (Stop bit: 1 bits)
3: None (Stop bit: 1 bits)
y17 (Stop bit selection) 0: 2 bits 1: 1 bit 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
y18 (Communication time-out 0: Not check of the time-out 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
detection timer) 1 to 60 s
y19 (Response interval time) 0.00 to 1.00 s 5 Y Y 0.01 Y Y
y20 (Protocol selection) 0: Modbus RTU protocol 1 Y Y 0 Y Y
1: FRENIC Loader protocol (SX protocol)
2: Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol
3: Metasys N2
5: BACnet protocol
50: Pump control protocol
Appendix-81
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
y60 BACnet Device instance 1 N Y 37 Y Y 329
number 0 to 4194
(Upper)
y61 (Lower) 0: Compatible with present version, 128 to 999 1 N Y 0 Y Y 329
y95 Data clear processing for 0: Do not clear the data of function codes Sxx when a 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 329
communications error communications error occurs. (compatible with the
conventional inverters)
1: Clear the data of function codes S01/S05/S19 when a
communications error occurs.
2: Clear the run command assigned bit of function code S06
when a communications error occurs.
3: Clear both data of S01/S05/S19 and run command assigned
bit of S06 when a communications error occurs.
* Related alarms: er8, erp, er4, er5, ert
y97 Communication data storage 0: Store into nonvolatile memory (Rewritable times are limited) 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 329
selection 1: Write into temporary memory (Rewritable times are
unlimited)
2: Save all data from temporary memory to nonvolatile memory
(After all save, return to Data 1)
y98 Bus link function Frequency command Run command 1 Y Y 0 Y Y 329
(Mode selection) 0: Follow H30 Follow H30
1: Bus link Follow H30
2: Follow H30 Bus link
3: Bus link Bus link
y99 Loader link function Frequency command Run command 1 Y N 0 Y Y 330
(Mode selection) 0: Follow H30, y98 Follow H30, y98
1: FRENIC loader Follow H30, y98
2: Follow H30, y98 FRENIC loader
3: FRENIC loader FRENIC loader
APPENDICES
Appendix-82
■ K codes: Keypad functions for TP-A1-E2C
Communication
Change when
control
Related page
Data copying
Drive
running
Factory
Default
format
PM
V/f
K01 Multifunction keypad TP-A1 0: Japanese 1 Y Y 6 Y Y –
(Language selection) 1: English
2: German
3: French
4: Spanish
5: Italian
6: Chinese
8: Russian
9: Greek
10: Turkish
11: Polish
12: Czech
13: Swedish
14: Portuguese
15: Dutch
16: Malay
17: Vietnamese
18: Thai
19: Indonesian
100: User-Customizable language
K02 (Backlight OFF time) 0: Always OFF 1 Y Y 5 Y Y –
1 to 30 min
K03 (Backlight brightness 0 (dark) - 10 (bright) 1 Y Y 5 Y Y –
adjustment)
K04 (Contrast adjustment) 0 (low) - 10 (high) 1 Y Y 5 Y Y –
K08 (LCD monitor status display) 0: Not displayed 1 Y Y 1 Y Y –
1: Fully displayed
K15 (Sub-monitor display 0: Operation guide display 1 Y Y 0 Y Y –
selection) 1: Bar graph display
K16 (Sub-monitor 1 display 1 to 35 1 Y Y 13 Y Y –
selection) 1: Output frequency 1 (PM: Speed command value)
K17 (Sub-monitor 2 display 2: Output frequency 2 (PM: Speed estimated value) 1 Y Y 19 Y Y –
selection) 3: Reference frequency
4: Motor rotation speed
5: Load rotation speed
8: Speed (%)
13: Output current
14: Output voltage
18: Calculated torque
19: Input power
25: Load factor
26: Motor output
27: Analog input monitor
35: Input watt-hour
50: PID command (final)(physical data)
51: PID feedback(final)(physical data)
52: PID output
53: PID control1 command (physical data)
54: PID control1 feedback value (physical data)
55: PID control2 command (final)(physical data)
56: PID control2 feedback value (physical data)
60: External PID command (final)(physical data)
61: External PID feedback(final)(physical data)
62: External PID output (%)
63: External PID manual command (%)
K20 (Bar graph 1 display selection) 1: Output frequency 1 (PM: Speed command value) 1 Y Y 1 Y Y –
13: Output current
14: Output voltage
K21 (Bar graph 2 display selection) 18: Calculated torque 1 Y Y 13 Y Y –
19: Input power
K22 (Bar graph 3 display selection) 1 Y Y 19 Y Y –
25: Load factor
26: Motor output
K91 (< key shortcut selection) 0: disabled 1 Y Y 0 Y Y –
K92 (> key shortcut selection) 11 to 99: respective mode 1 Y Y 64 Y Y –
The keypad function K codes are used when the multi-function keypad (TP-A1) is connected. For details about the K codes, refer to the instruction
manual for the keypad.
Appendix-83
I.3 Factory default value per applicable electric motor capacitance
Applicable electric motor capacity Restart mode after momentary

Torque boost 1 to 2
power failure (Restart timer)
kW HP F09/ A05
H13
0.1 1/8 6.7
0.2 1/4 4.0
0.4 1/2 3.5
0.75 1 6.5
1.5 2 4.9 0.5
2.2 3 4.5
3.7 5 4.1
5.5 7.5 3.4
7.5 10 2.7
11 15 2.1
15 20 1.6
18.5 25 1.3
1.0
22 30 1.1
30 40
37 50 0.0
45 60
55 75
75 100 1.5
90 125
110 150
132 175
2.0
160 200 0.0
200 250
220 300 2.5
280 400
315 450
4.0
355 500
APPENDICES
Appendix-84
I.4 Motor constants

[1] When Fuji standard motor 8-series, or other motors are selected by motor selection
(Function code P99 = 0 or 4)
■ 3-phase 400V class, Fuji standard motor
Motor rated Starting mode

capacity setting Rated No-load (Auto search
Applicable motor %R1 (%) %X (%)
current (A) current (A)
range (kW) capacity (kW) P07 P08 delay time 2)
P03 P06
P02 H46
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.22 0.20 13.79 11.75

0.10 to 0.19 0.1 0.35 0.27 12.96 12.67
0.20 to 0.39 0.2 0.65 0.53 12.95 12.92
0.5
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 1.15 0.83 10.20 13.66
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 1.80 1.15 8.67 10.76
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 3.10 1.51 6.55 11.21
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 4.60 2.43 6.48 10.97 0.6
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 7.50 3.84 5.79 11.25 0.8
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 11.50 5.50 5.28 14.31 1.0
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 14.50 6.25 4.50 14.68 1.2
11.00 to 14.99 11 21.00 8.85 3.78 15.09 1.3
15.00 to 18.49 15 27.50 10.00 3.25 16.37
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 34.00 10.70 2.92 16.58 2.0
22.00 to 29.99 22 39.00 12.60 2.70 16.00
30.00 to 36.99 30 54.00 19.50 2.64 14.96 2.3
37.00 to 44.99 37 65.00 20.80 2.76 16.41
2.5
45.00 to 54.99 45 78.00 23.80 2.53 16.16
55.00 to 74.99 55 95.00 29.30 2.35 16.20 2.6
75.00 to 89.99 75 130.0 41.60 1.98 16.89 2.8
90.00 to 109.9 90 155.0 49.60 1.73 16.03 3.2
110.0 to 131.9 110 188.0 45.60 1.99 20.86 3.5
132.0 to 159.9 132 224.0 57.60 1.75 18.90 4.1
160.0 to 199.9 160 272.0 64.50 1.68 19.73 4.5
200.0 to 219.9 200 335.0 71.50 1.57 20.02
4.7
220.0 to 249.9 220 365.0 71.80 1.60 20.90
250.0 to 279.9 250 415.0 87.90 1.39 18.88 5.0
280.0 to 314.9 280 462.0 93.70 1.36 19.18 5.5
315.0 to 354.9 315 520.0 120.0 0.84 16.68
5.6
355.0 to 399.9 355 580.0 132.0 0.83 16.40
400.0 to 449.9 400 670.0 200.0 0.62 15.67 7.5
450.0 to 499.9 450 770.0 0.48 13.03
500.0 to 559.9 500 835.0 270.0 0.51 12.38 9.8
560.0 to 629.9 560 940.0 0.57 13.94
630.0 to 709.9 630 1050.0 355.0 0.46 11.77
10.5
710.0 or above 710 1150.0 290.0 0.54 14.62
Appendix-85
[2] When HP rating motor is selected by motor selection (Function code P99/A39 = 1)
■ 3-phase 400V class, HP rating motor
Motor rated Starting mode

capacity setting Applicable motor Rated current No-load current %R1 (%) %X (%) (Auto search
range (HP) Capacity (HP) (A) P03 (A) P06 P07 P08 delay time 2)
P02/A16 H46
0.01 to 0.11 0.1 0.22 0.20 13.79 11.75

0.12 to 0.24 0.12 0.34 0.27 12.96 12.67
0.25 to 0.49 0.25 0.70 0.56 11.02 13.84
0.5
0.50 to 0.99 0.5 1.00 0.61 6.15 8.80
1.00 to 1.99 1 1.50 0.77 3.96 8.86
2.00 to 2.99 2 2.90 1.40 4.29 7.74
3.00 to 4.99 3 4.00 1.79 3.15 20.81 0.6
5.00 to 7.49 5 6.30 2.39 3.34 23.57 0.8
7.50 to 9.99 7.5 9.30 3.12 2.65 28.91 1.0
10.00 to 14.99 10 12.7 4.37 2.43 30.78 1.2
15.00 to 19.99 15 18.7 6.36 2.07 29.13 1.3
20.00 to 24.99 20 24.6 4.60 2.09 29.53
25.00 to 29.99 25 30.0 8.33 1.75 31.49 2.0
30.00 to 39.99 30 36.2 9.88 1.90 32.55
40.00 to 49.99 40 45.5 6.80 1.82 25.32 2.3
50.00 to 59.99 50 57.5 9.33 1.92 24.87
2.5
60.00 to 74.99 60 68.7 10.4 1.29 26.99
75.00 to 99.99 75 86.9 14.3 1.37 27.09 2.6
100.0 to 124.9 100 113.0 18.7 1.08 23.80 2.8
125.0 to 149.9 125 134.0 14.9 1.05 22.90 3.2
150.0 to 174.9 150 169.0 45.2 0.96 21.61 3.5
175.0 to 199.9 175 188.5 45.2 0.96 21.61 4.1
200.0 to 249.9 200 231.0 81.8 0.72 20.84 4.5
250.0 to 299.9 250 272.0 41.1 0.71 18.72
4.7
300.0 to 324.9 300 323.0 45.1 0.53 18.44
325.0 to 349.9 325 342.9 45.1 0.53 18.44 5.0
350.0 to 399.9 350 375.0 68.3 0.99 19.24 5.5
400.0 to 449.9 400 429.0 80.7 1.11 18.92
5.6
450.0 to 499.9 450 481.0 85.5 0.95 19.01
500.0 to 599.9 500 534.0 99.2 1.05 18.39 7.5
600.0 to 699.9 600
700.0 to 749.9 700 9.8
638.0 140.0 0.85 18.38
750.0 to 799.9 750
800.0 or above 800 10.5
APPENDICES
Appendix-86
Appendix J Description of Function Codes

s
This section describes details of function code. In principle, explanation is given for each function code in order of
group and numerical order. However, function codes that are strongly related to one function are explained
together in the first pa
paragraph.
ragraph.
J.1 F codes (Basic functions)

function
F00 Data protection
This is a function to protect currently set data by disabling to make changes in function code data (except F00) and
all types of command value
values (frequency setting, PID command) by / key operation from keypad.
Change of function code Changing digital reference

F00 data
Change from keypad Change from communication data with the / keys
0 Allowed Allowed Allowed

1 Not allowed * Allowed Allowed
2 Allowed Allowed Not allowed
3 Not allowed * Allowed Not allowed
*Although it is not possible to change function code from keypad, function code F00 can be changed.
F00 data can be changed by the double key operation using “ key + key” or “ key + key”.
As a similar function related to data protection, “Allow function code editing (Data change enabled) ‘WE-KP
KP’” which
can be assigned to a digital input terminal is available ( Function code E01 to E05 Data = 19).
By combining data protection F00, protection of function code fun
functions
ctions as follows:
Change in function code

Input signal “WE
“WE-KP”
KP”
Change from keypad Change from communication
OFF Not allowed
Allowed
ON Follow setting of F00
• If “enable data change with keypad” [W[WE-KP]

KP] is set to a digital input terminal by mistake, it is not
possible to make changes
changes in function codes. In this case, after shortening (ON) the terminal to which
temporarily “WE-KP”
“WE KP” function is assigned, and the terminal [CM], change to a different function.
• “WE-KP”
KP” is the change enable signal for function code; this is not the function to protect frequency
setting and PID command by key operation.
Appendix-87
87
F01 Frequency setting 1

Related function codes:
F18 bias (for frequency setting 1)
C30 frequency setting 2
C31 to C35 analog input adjustment (Terminal [12])
C36 to C39 analog input adjustment (Terminal [C1] (C1 function))
C40 terminal [C1] (C1 function) (Range / polarity selection)
C41 to C45 analog input adjustment (Terminal [C1] (V2 function))
C55 to C56 analog input adjustment (Terminal [12]) (Bias Bias base point)
C61 to C62 analog input adjustment (Terminal [C1] (C1 function)
(Bias Bias base point)
C67 to C68 analog input adjustment (Terminal [C1] (V2 function))
(Bias Bias base point)
C50 bias (for frequency setting 1) (Bias base point)
d61 to d63 Command (Pulse train input)
Select setting method of frequency setting. Set frequency setting 1 by function code F01, frequency setting 2 by
C30.
F01, C30 data Command sources

0 Frequency setting by keypad (refer to the following descriptions to find the setting method)
Set by voltage value to be input in the terminal [12] (0 to ±10VDC, Maximum output frequency
1
/DC±10V)
Setting by current value to be input in the terminal [C1] (C1 function) (4 to 20mADC or 0 to 20
mADC, Maximum output frequency / 20 mADC)
(Set slide switch SW4 of printed circuit board to [AI] side (factory default state), SW3 to [C1]
2 side (factory default state), respectively.)
(It is necessary to select C1 function (factory default state) by E59=0)
(It is necessary to disable PTC input function by H26=0)
Set by the addition result of voltage value to be input in the terminal [12] (0 to ±10VDC,
Maximum output frequency /±10 VDC) and current value to be input in the terminal [C1] (C1
3 function) (4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC, Maximum output frequency/20 mA DC)
When the addition result becomes maximum output frequency or higher, it is restricted by the
maximum output frequency)
Set by voltage value to be input in the terminal [C1] (V2 function) (0 to +10 VDC, Maximum
output frequency /+10 VDC)
(Set slide switch SW4 of printed circuit board to [AI] side (factory default state), SW3 to [V2]
5 side, respectively.)
(It is necessary to select V2 function by E59 = 1)
(It is necessary to disable PTC input function by H26 = 0)
Set by UP command “UP” and DOWN command “DOWN” assigned to the digital input terminal
7 It is necessary to assign UP command (Data = 17) and DOWN command (Data =18) to the
digital input terminal [X1] to [X5]. (E01 toE05)
8 Frequency setting by keypad (with balanceless bumpless function)
10 Set by pattern operation (C21 to C28)
Enable a digital input/output interface card (option).
11
(For details, refer to the Digital Input Output Interface Card Instruction Manual.)
Setting by pulse train input “PIN” (Data = 48), which was assigned to the digital input terminal
[X5].
12
Note: When using X5 terminal with pulse train input, it might be affected by noise from other
wire. Keep away from other wire from the wire to X5 terminal as far as possible.
APPENDICES
Appendix-88
Setting method of reference frequency

[1] Frequency setting by keypad (F01 = 0 (Factory default state), 8)
(1) Set the data of function code F01 to “0” or “8”. When keypad is at program mode or alarm mode, it is not
possible to perform frequency setting with / keys.. In order to enable frequency setting with / keys,
shift to the operation mode.
(2) When / key is pressed, reference frequency is displayed and the least significant digit of the reference
frequency flashes.
(3) By pressing the / key again, it is possible to change the reference frequency. To save the set frequency,
press key. (E64=0: Factory default
default state). When the frequency is saved, it is possible to operate with the
saved frequency next time the power is turned on.
• Automatic saving method (Function code E64 = 0) is available other than the above method as a data
saving method of frequenc
frequency setting.
• While the data of function code F01 is set to “0” or “8”, when frequency setting method other than
frequency setting 1 (frequency setting 2, communication, multistep frequency) is selected as
frequency setting, it is not possible to change the reference setting with / keys even if keypad is
at operation mode. In this case, pressing / keys displays the currently selected reference
frequency.
• When frequency setting is performed with / keys, the least significant digit displayed flashes
and
d the data is changed from the least significant digit and the changing digit gradually shifts to the
upper digit.
• In order to perform setting such as reference frequency, press / once and when the least
significant digit flashes push down the key, and
nd then, the flashing digit will move. Therefore, it is
possible to change the large
large numerical number easily. This operation is called cursor movement.
• When the data of function code F01 is set to “8”, balanceless bumpless function becomes enabled.
When switching to frequency setting with keypad from frequency setting method other than keypad,
the switched initial value of frequency setting with keypad takes the value of the frequency setting
before it is switched. By using this function, even if frequenc
frequency
y setting is switched, it is possible to
perform operation without shock.
Appendix-89
89
[2] Setting up a reference frequency using analog input (F01 = 1 to 3, 5)
It is possible to arbitrarily specify a frequency setting from the analog inputs (voltage value to be input to terminal
[12] or terminal [C1] (V2 function) or current value to be input to terminal [C1] (C1 function)) by multiplying them
with the gain and adding the bias. The polarity can be selected and the filter time constant and offset can be
adjusted.
Adjustment constants of frequency setting 1
Bias Gain
F01 Polarity
Input terminal Input range Base Base Filter Offset
data Bias Gain selection
point point
0 to +10V,
1 [12] F18 C50 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
-10 to +10V
4 to 20 mA
2 [C1] (C1 function) F18 C50 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
0 to 20 mA
[12]+ [C1] 0 to +10V,

F18 C50 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
(C1 function) -10 to +10V
3
(Set by result of 4 to 20 mA
addition) F18 C50 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
0 to 20 mA
5 [C1] (V2 function) 0 to +10V F18 C50 C42 C44 C45 C43 C41
Adjustment constants of frequency setting 2
Bias Gain
C30 Polarity
Input terminal Input range Base Base Filter Offset
data Bias Gain selection
point point
0 to +10V,
1 [12] C55 C56 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
-10 to +10V
4 to 20 mA
2 [C1] (C1 function) C61 C62 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
0 to 20 mA
[12]+ 0 to +10V,
C55 C56 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
[C1] (C1 function) -10 to +10V
3
(Set by result of 4 to 20 mA
addition) C61 C62 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
0 to 20 mA
5 [C1] (V2 function) 0 to +10V C67 C68 C42 C44 C45 C43 C41
■ Offset (C31, C36, C41)

C31, C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage/current input. The offset also applies to signals sent
from the external equipment.
■ Filter (C33, C38, C43)

C33, C38, and C43 provide the filter time constants for the voltage and current of the analog input. The larger time
constant, the slower response. Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response speed of the
machine (load). If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises, increase the time constant.
■ Terminal [12] Polarity selection (C35)

C35 configures the polarity and therefore the input range for analog input voltage.
C35 data Modes for terminal inputs

0 -10 to +10 V
1 0 to +10 V (Negative value of voltage is regarded as 0 V)
APPENDICES
Appendix-90
■ Terminal [C1] (C1 function) range / polarity selection (C40)
C40 data Terminal input range Handling when bias value is set to minus
0 4 to 20 mA (Factory default)
Limit below 0 point with 0
1 0 to 20mA
10 4 to 20mA
Enable below 0 point as minus value.
11 0 to 20mA
■ Terminal [C1] (V2 function) polarity selection (C45)
0 to +10V
0
When bias value is set to minus, enable below 0 point as a minus value.
0 to +10V (factory default)
1
When bias value is set to minus, limit below 0 point by 0.
In order to use [C1] terminal as C1 function, V2 function, and PTC function, the following setting are necessary.
[C1] terminal SW3 SW4 E59 H26 C40
When using C1 function (4 to 20 mA) C1 side AI side 0 0 0,10

When using C1 function (0 to 20 mA) C1 side AI side 0 0 1,11
When using V2 function (0 to +10V) V2 side AI side 1 0 Not relevant
When using PTC function C1 side PTC side Not relevant 1, 2 Not relevant
For details of SW3 and SW4, refer to the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 2, Section 2.2.8.
Caution is necessary because if the above switch settings are not performed accurately, unexpected frequency
setting may be performed for the inverter.
Appendix-91
■ Gain Bias
Terminal <Frequency setting 1: F01> <Frequency setting 2: C30>
Reference
ence frequency Reference
ence frequency
Gain Gain
Point B Point
Point B
B
[12] Bias Bias

Point A Point A
Analog input Analog input
Bias base Gain base Bias base Gain
Gain base
base
point point point point
point
Reference
ence frequency
Gain Gain
Point B Point
Point B
B
[C1]
(C1 Bias Bias
function) Point A Point A
Gain base
base
point
Reference
ence frequency
Gain Gain
Point B Point
Point B
B
[C1]
(V2 Bias Bias
function) Point A Point A
Gain base
base
point
For [12] + [C1] (C1 function) (setting by the result of addition), bias and gain are reflected to [12] and [C1]
(C1 function) individually, and added by frequency command value of the result.
Function code F18, C50, C32, C34
Bias/gain Frequency command
Bias/gain
Function code F18, C50, C37, C39

APPENDICES
Appendix-92
92
For single polarity (Terminal [12] (C35=1), Terminal [C1] (C1 function), Terminal [C1] (V2 function). As the above
diagram indicates, for reference frequency and analog input of frequency setting 1, it is possible to set arbitrary
relationship by A point (determined by bias (F18) and bias reference point (C50)) and B point (determined by the
gain corresponding to each analog input and the gain referen
reference
ce point (C32 and C34, C37 and C39, and C42 and
C44)).
For reference frequency and analog input of frequency setting 2 (C30), it is possible to set arbitrary relationship by
A point (determined by bias and bias reference point (C55 and C56, C61 and C62, and an d C67 and C68)) and B point
(determined by the gain corresponding to each analog input and the gain reference point (C32 and C34, C37 and
C39, and C42 and C44)).
Both data of bias and gain are set with 100% as the maximum frequency. The data of bias refere
reference
nce point and gain
reference point are set up with full scale of analog input (10V or 20mA) as 100%.
By setting the bias to minus value, even if the analog input is unipolar, it is possible to perform frequency setting as
bipolar. For terminal [C1] (C1 fun
function),
ction), C40 is set to 10 or 11, and for terminal [C1] (V2 function), C45 is set to 1,
and then, the frequency setting at analog input at or below 0 point becomes negative polarity, as a result, it
becomes possible to perform forward and reverse operation o only
nly by analog command.
<Frequency setting 1: F01>
• Analog input at or below bias reference point ((C50)
50) is restricted by bias value (F18).
• When the value set in bias reference point (C50)
(C50)≥≥ each gain reference point (C34, C39, C44), it is
judged as incorrect
incorrect setting and reference point becomes 0 Hz.
<Frequency setting 2: C30>
• Analog input at or below bias reference point (C56, C62, and C68) is restricted by bias value (C55,
C61 and C67).
• When the value set in bias reference point (C56, C62, C68) ≧ each gain reference point (C34, C39,
C44), it is judged as incorrect setting and reference point becomes 0 Hz.
Example) When setting reference frequency to 0 to 60 Hz by analog input (terminal [12]) 1 to 5V

(When maximum frequency is F03=60 Hz)
Reference
Refer nce frequency
(Maximum
(Maximum frequency:
frequency: converted
converted with
with F03
F03 == 60
60 Hz
Hz as
as 100%)
100%)
Gain (C32)
Point
B
Point A
Bias (F18) Analog input (voltage)
Analog input (%)

(
(Analog
(Analog input
input full
full scale:
scale:
Bias base Gain base converted
converted with
with 10
10 VV as
as 100%)
100%)
point point
(A point)
In order to set reference frequency to 0 Hz when analog input is 1V, set bias (F18) to 0%. At this point, 1V has to
become the bias reference point and 1V is equivalent to 10% against full scale 10V of terminal [12], therefore, set
the bias reference point (C50) to 10%.
(B point)
In order to set reference frequency so that the frequency becomes the highest when analog input is 5V, set the
gain (C32) to 100%. At this point, 5V has to become the gain reference point and 5V is equivalent to 50% against
full scale 10V of terminal [12], therefore, set the gain reference point (C34) to 50%.
The setting method without changing reference point and by using gain and bias individually is the same
as for Fuji Electric
lectric inverter of old model..
Appendix-93
93
olar (Terminal [12] (C35=0))

For bipolar (C35=0)).. For terminal [12], by setting function code C35 to “0”, it is possible to use
bipolar input ((-10V
10V to +10V).
When both bias (F18) and bias reference point (C50) are set to “0”, command becomes forward and reverse
symmetric as shown in the diagram below.
Reference
ence frequency
Gain
Point
B
Terminal
Terminal [12]
[12] input
input
Gain base
point
When bias (F18) and bias reference point (C50) is set to arbitrary value (A1 point, A2 point, and A3
point, etc.), as shown in the diagram below, it is determined by the bias value (F18).
Reference
ence frequency
Point A1
Point A2
Terminal
Terminal [12]
[12] input
input
Point A3
• To input bipolar (0 to ±10 VDC) analog voltage at analog input (terminal [12]), set function code C35
to “0”. When the data of C35 is “1”, only DC 0 to +10V is effective and negative polar input DC0 to
-10V
10V is regarded as 0 (Zero) V.
• When setting reference frequency by display other than frequency (Hz), please change the speed
monitor unit in E48.
APPENDICES
Appendix-94
94
When operating unipolar analog input as bipolar (terminal [C1] (C1 function) (C40 = 10, 11), terminal [C1]
(V2 function) (C45 = 0)
For C1 function set C40 = 10, 11, for V2 function set C45 = 0, and by setting bias value to minus value, it is
possible to obtain a negative reference frequency.
Example of frequency setting by V2 function when -100% is set to the bias value is shown in the diagram below.
Reference frequency
Reference frequency
+100%
Reference frequency 0% (V2) Input

0V 5V 10V
F18 = -100.0%
Reference frequency -100%
Appendix-95
[3] Frequency setting by digital input signal “UP”/“DOWN” (F01=7)
As frequency setting, UP/DOWN control is selected, and when the terminal command UP or DOWN is turned on
with Run command ON, the output frequency increases or decreases accordingly, within the range from 0 Hz to
the maximum fre
frequency.
quency.
The set frequency is stored internally, and the previous operating frequency is set first when resuming operation
(including when turning ON power, switching the setting means).
To perform frequency setting by UP/DOWN control, it is necessary to se
sett the data of function code F01 to “7” and
assign “UP command [UP], down command [DOWN]” to the digital input terminals.
terminal
( Function code E01 to E05 Data = 17, 18)
Input signal Input signal

“UP” “DOWN” Action
Data = 17 Data = 18
OFF OFF The output frequency will be held
ON OFF Increase output frequency by currently selected acceleration time
OFF ON Decrease output frequency by currently selected dec
deceleration
ration time
ON ON The output frequency will be held
At the restart of operation, before the internal frequency reaches the previous output frequency, when
UP/DOWN command is input, output frequency at the point is held internally and UP/DOWN control
starts from that value. Therefore, the previous output fre
frequency
quency data is overwritten and deleted.
Frequency
Internally held frequency
Output frequency
Run
command
UP
command
APPENDICES
Appendix-96
96
[4] Frequency setting using digital inputs (option DIO interface card) (F01 = 11)
The frequency setting with binary (8,12bit) or BCD code via option DIO interface card (OPC-DIO) is also available
to be selected. Refer to the Digital Input Output Interface Card Instruction Manual.
[5] Frequency setting using pulse train input (F01=12)
■ The pulse train input format

By assigning a “PIN” (E05= 8) to terminal [X5] and inputting a serial pulse, a frequency proportional to the pulse
frequency can be set. “SIGN” can also be assigned (E01 is E4=49) to other than terminal [X5], and pulse train sign
commands can also be specified. If no “SIGN” is assigned, the polarity will be positive.
The command polarity is determined by the pulse train sign. Motor rotation direction is determined by a
combination of the pulse train input polarity and “FWD”/“REV” commands. The relationship between pulse train
input polarity and rotation direction is shown in Table .
Table J.1 The relationship between the pulse train input polarity and rotation direction
Polarity according to the pulse train input Run command Rotational direction
+ “FWD” (Forward rotation command) Forward rotation
+ “REV” (Reverse rotation command) Reverse rotation
- “FWD” (Forward rotation command) Reverse rotation
- “REV” (Reverse rotation command) Forward rotation
+Polarity –Polarity
Pulse train sign
Pulse train input
Figure J.1 Pulse train sign/Pulse train input.
Appendix-97
■ Pulse scaling factor 1 (d62), pulse scaling factor 2 (d63)

For pulse train input, set the relationship between input pulse frequency and frequency setting value by function
code d62 (Command (pulse train input) pulse scaling factor 1) and d63 (command (pulse train input) pulse scaling
factor 2).
Frequency setting value
Pulse scaling factor 2
Input pulse frequency
Pulse scaling factor 1
Figure J.2 Relationship between input pulse frequency and frequency setting value
As shown in the figure above, set input pulse frequency [kp/s] to function code d62 (command (pulse train input)
pulse scaling factor 1) and set frequency setting value [Hz] (when the input pulse frequency becomes the value set
to function code d62) to function code d63 (command (pulse train input) pulse scaling factor 2). At this time, the
*
relationship formula of input pulse frequency to be entered and frequency setting value f (or speed command
value) is as follows:
* Pulse scaling factor 2 (d63)

f [Hz] = Np [kp/s] ×
Pulse scaling factor 1 (d62)
f* [Hz]: Frequency setting value

Np [kp/s]: Input pulse frequency to be input
Depending on the pulse train sign, polarity of the command is determined. Rotation direction of the motor is
determined by the polarity of pulse train input and “FWD”/”REV” command. J.1 The relationship between the pulse
train input polarity and rotation direction is specified in Table .
■ Filter time constant (d61)

Set filter time constant for pulse train input. The larger the time constant, the slower the response. Specify the
proper filter time constant by taking into account the response speed of the machine. If the pulse is lower and
frequency command fluctuates, set larger time constant.
■ Switching frequency setting

Switch frequency setting 1 (F01) and frequency setting 2 (C30) by the signal “Frequency setting 2/frequency
setting 1” “Hz2/ Hz1”, which was assigned to the external digital input terminal.
(Refer to Function code E01 to E05 (Data =11) to find the details of “Hz2/ Hz1”.
Input signal “Hz2/ Hz1” Frequency setting method to be selected

OFF Frequency setting 1 (F01)
ON Frequency setting 2 (C30)
APPENDICES
Appendix-98
F02 Operation method
Select setting method of run command. Indicate instruction method of run/stop and rotation direction
(forward/reverse rotation) for each setting method.
Setting method of run command

F02 data
Run/stop Rotation direction command
0: Keypad operation
/ keys “FWD”, “REV”
(Rotation direction input: Terminal block)
1: External signal (digital input) “FWD”, “REV”
Rotation direction command is unnecessary
2: Keypad operation (forward rotation) / keys (Forward rotation operation only, reverse
rotation operation disabled)
Rotation direction command is unnecessary
3: Keypad operation (Reverse rotation) / keys (Reverse rotation operation only, forward
rotation operation disabled)
Digital input signal, “FWD”, “REV” needs to be assigned to terminals

terminal [FWD], [REV].
( Function code E98, E99 data = 98, 99)
• F02 cannot be changed when “FWD” or “REV” is ON.
• If F02 = 1 and when assignment of terminal [FWD] or [REV] is changed from other function to “FWD”
function or “REV” function, turn the terminal [FWD] and [REV] off in advance (motor may rotate due to
change in the setting).
■ 3-wire
wire operation by external signal
Although external signal of “FWD” and “REV” is 2 2-wire
wire operation at the initial state, by assigning “Select 3
3-wire
operation (HLD)”, it is possible to use as self-hold
self hold signal at 3
3--wire
wire operation by using “FWD”, “REV” and “HLD”
signals. When “HLD” is ON, inverter self-holds
self holds “FWD” or “REV” signal, and the hold state can be released by OFF.
If there is no “HOLD” function assignment,
assignment, “FWD” and “REV” become 2 2-wire
wire operation.
Refer to Function code E01 to E05 (Data =6) to find the details of “HLD”.
frequency
Output
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
Ignored
As a setting method of run command, high-priority

high priority setting method
methods (remote/local switch (refer
(refer to the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC
User’s’s Manual Chapter 3,, Section 3.3.6),
3.3. ), communication, etc.) are available in addition to the above mentioned
settings.
Appendix-99
99
F03 Maximum frequency 1
F03 specifies the maximum frequency that the inverter outputs. When the device to be driven is set to rated or
higher, the device may be damaged. Make sure to make an adjustment to design mode value of the machinery.
• Data setting range: 25.0 to 500.0
.0 (Hz)
Inverter can perform setting of high speed operation

ration easily. When changing the setting, make sure to check
the motor and machine mode before use.
Injuries could occur. Failure may occur.
When changing maximum output frequency (F03) in order to make the operation frequency a larger
value, change the frequency limiter (upper limit) (F15) as well.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-100
100
F04, F05 Base frequency 1, Rated voltage at base frequency 1

F06 Maximum output voltage 1
Related function codes: H50, H51 Non-linear V/f 1 (Frequency, voltage)
H52, H53 Non-linear V/f 2 (Frequency, voltage)
Set the base frequency and base frequency voltage that are essential to operation of the motor. By combining
related function codes H50 to H53, it is possible to set non-linear V/f pattern (weak or strong voltage by arbitrary
point) and perform setting of V/f characteristics that is suitable for the load.
Impedance of the motor becomes larger with high frequency, and when output voltage becomes less, output
torque may be reduced. In order to prevent this, increase the voltage at high frequency by setting function code
F06 (maximum output voltage 1). However, it is not possible to output voltage at or higher than the input power
voltage of the inverter.
Function code
Point of V/f Remarks
Frequency Voltage
Maximum output During auto torque boost, vector control with/ without speed
F03 F06
frequency sensor, the maximum output voltage setting is disabled.
Base frequency F04 F05
Non-linear V/f 2 H52 H53 This code is disabled during auto torque boost, vector control
Non-linear V/f 1 H50 H51 with/ without speed sensor.
<Setting example>
■ Normal V/f pattern setting
Output voltage (V)
Maximum output voltage
Rated voltage at base frequency
Output
frequency
Base frequency Maximum output frequency 1
Figure J.3 Characteristics diagram of normal V/f pattern setting
■ Non-linear V/f pattern setting (2 points)

Output voltage (V)
Maximum output voltage 1 (F06)
Rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05)
Non-linear V/f pattern 2 (voltage) (H53)
Non-linear V/f pattern 1 (voltage) (H51)
Output frequency (Hz)

Base Maximum
frequency 1 frequency 1
(F04) (F03)
(H50) (H52)
Figure J.4 Characteristics diagram of no-linear V/f pattern setting (2 points)
Appendix-101
■ Base frequency (F04)

Set the data in accordance with rated frequency of the motor (given on the nameplate of the motor).
.0 (Hz)
■ Rated voltage at base frequency (F05)

Set the data to “0” in accordance with rated voltage of the motor (given on the nameplate of the motor).
• Data setting range: 0 : AVR disable
160 to 500 (V) : AVR operation (at 400 V class)
• When data is set to “0”, the base frequency voltage becomes equivalent to inverter input voltage. When input
voltage fluctuate
fluctuates,, output voltage fluctuates as well.
• When data is set to arbitrary voltage other than “0”, automatically keep
keeps
s the output voltage constant. When
control fun
function
ction such as auto torque boost and auto energy
energy-saving
saving operation is used, it is necessary to adjust to
the rated voltage (given on the nameplate of the motor) of the motor.
The voltage that the inverter can output is lower than the input voltage of the inverter.
i nverter. Appropriately set
the voltage in accordance with the motor.
■ Non--linear
linear V/f 1, 2 (Frequency) (H50, H52)
Set frequency at the arbitrary point of non-linear
non linear V/f pattern.
• Data setting range: 0.0 (Cancel), 0.1 to 500.0
.0 (Hz)
When 0.0 is set, the setting becomes the pattern without using non
non--linear
linear V/f pattern.
■ Non--linear
linear V/f 1, 2 (Voltage) (H51, H53)
Set voltage at the arbitrary point of non-linear
non linear V/f pattern.
• Data setting range: 0 to 500 (V) : AVR operation (at 400 V class)
■ Maximum output voltage 1 (F06)

Set the voltage at maximum output frequency 1 (F03).
• Data setting range: 160 to 500 (V) : AVR operation (at 400V class)
When rated voltage at base frequency (F05) is “0”, the data of non
non-linear
linear V/f (H50 to H53, H65, and H66)
and F06 becomes invalid (linear V/f for at or below base frequency, and constant voltage for at or higher
than base frequency).
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-102
102
F07, F08 Acceleration time1, Deceleration time 1

E10, E12, E14 Acceleration time 2, 3, 4
E11, E13, E15 Deceleration time 2, 3, 4
H07 Curve acceleration/deceleration
H56 Deceleration time for forced stop
Acceleration time sets the time taken by the output frequency to reach the maximum output frequency from 0Hz,
and deceleration time sets the time taken by the output frequency to reach 0Hz from the maximum frequency.
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 3600 (s)
For V/f control

Maximum
Acceleration time 1 output Deceleration time 1
(F07) frequency (F03) (F08)
Starting frequency 1 Stop frequency

(F23) (F25)
Actual Actual
acceleration time deceleration time
■ Acceleration/Deceleration time
Type of Function code

Select ACC/DEC time
Acceleration/decele Acceleration Deceleration ( Function code E01 to E05)
ration time time time
“RT2” “RT1”
ACC/DEC time 1 F07 F08 Switch by acceleration/deceleration
OFF OFF selection “RT1” “RT2”. (Data = 4 or 5)
ACC/DEC time 2 E10 E11 OFF ON When there is no assignment,
ACC/DEC time 3 E12 E13 ON OFF acceleration/deceleration time 1 (F07,
F08) are valid.
ACC/DEC time 4 E14 E15 ON ON
Turning the Force to stop “STOP” command OFF causes the motor to
decelerate to a stop in accordance with the deceleration time for
At Force to stop - H56
forced stop (H56). After the motor stops, the inverter enters the alarm
state with the alarm er6 displayed. (Data = 30)
Appendix-103
■ Curve acceleration/deceleration (H07)

Select acceleration/deceleration pattern (change pattern of frequency) at acceleration/deceleration
Curve acceleration/
H07 data Action
deceleration
Disable (Linear
0 Acceleration/deceleration with constant acceleration.
acceleration/deceleration)
S-curve Smoothen the speed change and reduce Weak: Fix acceleration/deceleration change
1 acceleration/deceleration shock when starting acceleration and rate to 5% of the maximum output frequency
(Weak) right before the speed becomes within each S-curve range.
S-curve constant, as well as when starting Strong: Fix acceleration/deceleration
2 acceleration/deceleration deceleration and right before the change rate to 10% of the maximum output
(Strong) deceleration stops. frequency within each S-curve range.
Linear acceleration/deceleration (constant torque) at or below base frequency and
Curve acceleration becomes gradually slower at or higher than the base frequency, and
3
acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration with constant load rate (rated output). It is possible to
accelerate/decelerate with the maximum capability.
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
For the purpose of decreasing the shock on the load machine side, smoothen the speed change at the start of
acceleration and right before it becomes constant speed, and at the start of deceleration and right before the stop
of deceleration. As for s-curve acceleration/deceleration values, fix with 5% (Weak) or 10% (Strong) for S-curve
acceleration/deceleration. The specified acceleration/deceleration time determines acceleration of linear part and
the actual acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer than the specified acceleration /deceleration time.
Output frequency
Acceleration time Deceleration time
Specified acceleration time Specified deceleration time

Maximum
frequency
Time
Acceleration/Deceleration time
< S-curve acceleration/deceleration (Weak): When frequency change is 10% or higher than the maximum
frequency>
Acceleration or deceleration time (s) = (2 × 5/100 + 90/100+ 2 × 5/100) × reference acceleration or
deceleration time
= 1.1 × reference acceleration or deceleration time
< S-curve acceleration/deceleration (Strong): When frequency change is 20% or higher than the maximum
frequency.>
Acceleration or deceleration time (s) = (2 × 10/100 + 80/100 + 2 × 10/100) × (reference acceleration or
deceleration time)
= 1.2 × (reference acceleration or deceleration time)
APPENDICES
Appendix-104
Curve acceleration/deceleration
This is a pattern to perform linear acceleration/deceleration (rated torque) at or below base frequency and
acceleration becomes g gradually
radually slower at or higher than the base frequency, and acceleration/deceleration with
constant load rate (rated output).
It is possible to accelerate/decelerate with the maximum capability of the motor to be driven by the inverter.
Torque/output
Acceleration torque
Acceleration output (kW)
Output frequency
Base frequency
Output frequency The diagram on the left shows

pattern at acceleration.
This is the same as at deceleration.
Maximum frequency
Base frequency
Time
Ti
Specified acceleration time
• When S-curve
curve acceleration/deceleration and curve acceleration/deceleration is selected by curve
acceleration/deceleration H07, the actual acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer than the set
value.
• If acceleration/deceleration time is set shorter than necessary, current limiting function, torque limit or
anti-regenerative
regenerative function may operate and acceleration/deceleration time may become longer than
the set value.
F09 Torque boost 1 (Refer to F37)
For details of torque boost 1 setting, refer to the section of function code F37.
F10 to F12 Electronic thermal overload Protection for motor 1 (Select motor characteristics,
Thermal time constant)
In order to detect overload of motor (electronic thermal function by inverter output current), set temperature
characteristics of motor (Select motor characteristics (F10), thermal time constant (F12), and overload detection
level (F11).
protecting the motor with motor overload alarm 0l1.
When overload of motor is detected, inverter is turned off, protect
Improper setting of the electronic thermal function may result in a failure to protect the motor from
burning.
Temperature characteristics of motor is used for motor overload early warning “OL” as well. Even if only
overload early warning is used, it is necessary to set temperature characteristics of the motor (F10, F12).
( Function code E34)
For disabling motor overload alarm, set F11 = 0.00 (Disable).
For PTC thermistor built-in
built in motor, by connecting PTC thermistor to terminal [C1], it is possible to protect
the motor. Refer to H26 to find the details.
Appendix
Appendix-105
105
■ Select motor characteristics (F10)

F10 selects characteristics of cooling system of the motor.
F10 data Function

Self-cooling fan of general-purpose motor (Self-cooling)
1
(When operating with low frequency, cooling performance decreases.)
Inverter-driven motor, High-speed motor with separately powered cooling fan
2
(Keep constant cooling capability irrespective to output frequency)
Figure J shows electronic thermal operation characteristics diagram when F10=1 is set. The characteristics
coefficient α1 and α3 and the switch coefficient f2, f3 differ depending on the characteristics of the motor.
Each coefficient that is set by motor characteristics that is selected by motor capacitance and motor selection
(P99) is shown in Table J., Table J. and
Table .
Actual detection level (%)
Detection level setting (F11)
fb = Base frequency
fb = 60 Hz for base frequency of
60 Hz or higher
Output frequency
Figure J.5 Characteristics diagram of motor cooling system
Table J.2 When P99 = 0, 4 (Motor characteristics 0, other)
Thermal time Characteristics coefficient Characteristics

Thermal time constant setting switch frequency coefficient
Motor capacity constant τ
Standard current
(Factory default)
value Imax f2 f3 α1 α2 α3
0.4, 0.75 kW 75% 85% 100%

7Hz
1.1 to 3.0 kW 85% 85% 100%
5.5 to 11 kW 5 min 5 Hz 6Hz 90% 95% 100%
15 kW Continuous 7Hz 85% 85% 100%
allowance current
18.5, 22 kW value x 150% 5Hz 92% 100% 100%
30 to 45 kW Base Base 54% 85% 95%
55 to 90 kW 10 min frequency × frequency × 51% 95% 95%
33% 83%
110 kW or above 53% 85% 90%
Table J.3 When P99 = 1 (Motor characteristics 1)

Standard current
(Factory default)
Base
0.2 to 22 kW 5 min frequency × 69% 90% 90%
Continuous Base 33%
30 to 45 kW allowance current frequency × 54% 85% 95%
APPENDICES
value x 150% 33% Base

55 to 90 kW 10 min frequency 51% 95% 95%
× 83%
110 kW or above 53% 85% 90%
Appendix-106
Table J.4 When P99 = 20, 21 (Motor characteristics)

(Factory default) Standard current
90 kW or below 5 min Continuous 53% 85% 95%

Base Base
allowance
110 kW or frequency frequency
10 min current value x 53% 85% 90%
above × 33% × 83%
150%
When F10=2 is set, cooling effect by output frequency will not decrease, therefore, overload detection level
becomes constant value (F11) without decrease.
■ Overload detection level (F11)

F11 sets operation level of electronic thermal.
• Data setting range: 1 to 135% of the rated current value of inverter (continuous allowance current value)
Normally, set to the motor continuous allowance current (in general, about 1.0 to 1.1 times of motor rated current)
when operating at base frequency.
For disabling electronic thermal as disable, set F11 = 0.00: Disable.
■ Thermal time constant (F12)

F12 sets thermal time constant of the motor. For overload detection level that is set by F11, set the electronic
thermal operation time when 150% of current is flowing continuously. Thermal time constant of general-purpose
motor of Fuji Electric and general motors is 5 minutes for 22 kW or lower, and 10 minutes (factory default state) for
30kW or higher.
• Data setting range: 0.5 to 75.0 (min)
(Example) When the data of function code F12 is set to “5” (5 minutes).
As shown in Figure 6, when 150% of current of operation level that was set flows for 5 minutes, motor overload
(alarm 0l1 ) protection function will operate. In addition, with 120%, it operates after 12.5 minutes.
The time when alarm actually occurs is shorter than the set data because the time until the current reaches 150%
level after exceeding the continuous allowance current (100%) is considered.
Operation time (min.)
Changed
with F12
(Output current / Detection level current) x 100 (%)
Figure J.6 Example of current-operation time characteristics
Appendix-107
F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure (Mode selection)

codes H13 (Restart timer)
H14 (frequency lowering rate)
H15 (Continu
(Continuous
ous running level)
H16 (Allowable momentary power failure time)
H92 Continu
Continuous
ous running at the momentary power failure (P)
H93 Continu
Continuous
ous running at the momentary power failure (I)
Set the operation for when momentary power failure occurs (trip operation, restart operation method at
auto-restarting)
restarting)
■ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Mode selection) (F14)

V/f control (F42=0,2,3), dynamic torque vector control(F42=1,4), PM motor control(F42=15)
Operation
Operation contents
F14 data
Without auto search With auto search
0: Trip immediately When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and at the time when
undervoltage is detected by the DC link bus voltage of the inverter, undervoltage alarm lu is
outputted, the inverter output shuts down, and the motor coasts to a stop.
1: Trip after a When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and at the time when
recovery from undervoltage is detected by the DC link bus voltage of the inverter , the inverter output shuts down
power failure and the motor coasts to stop, but the undervoltage alarm will not be outputted.
When auto-started
auto started from momentary power failure, undervoltage alarm lu is outputted.
2: Trip after As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a momentary
momentary power failure, decelerate-to
to-stop
stop control is invoked.
deceleration is Decelerate-to-stop
Decelerate stop control regenerates kinetic energy from the load's moment of inertia, slowing
stopped down the motor and continuing the deceleration operation. After decelerate
decelerate-to-stop
stop operation, an
undervoltage alarm lu iss issued.
3: Continue to run As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a momentary
(for heavy inertia power failure, decelerate-to
decelerate to-stop
stop control is invoked.
load or general Decelerate-to-stop
Decelerate stop control regenerat
regenerates
es kinetic energy from the load's moment of inertia, slowing
load) down the motor, and operation is continued to wait for auto-restarting.
auto restarting. If there is not enough
energy for regeneration and when undervoltage is detected, the inverter output shuts down and
the motor
tor coasts to a stop.
If run command is entered at auto
auto-restarting,
restarting, If run command is entered at auto
auto-restarting,
restarting,
restart from the frequency of when undervoltage auto-searching
searching is performed, motor speed is
is detected. estimated, and restart from the frequency.
This setting is most suitable for the fan with large inertia moment of load.
4: Restart from When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and at the time when
frequency at undervoltage is detected by the DC link bus voltage of the inverter, the inverter output shuts down,
power failure and the motor coasts to a stop.
(for general load)
auto-restarting,
restarting, If run command is entered at auto-restarting,
restarting,
restart from the frequency of when undervoltage auto-searching
is detected. estimated, and restart from the frequency.
This setting is most suitable for the case (fan) when load inertial moment is large, and motor
speed does not decrease so much even if the motor coasts
coast s to a stop due to momentary power
failure.
5: Restart from When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and at the time when
starting frequency undervoltage is detected by the DC link bus voltage of the inverter, the inverter output shuts down,
and the motor coasts to a stop.
auto-restarting,
restarting, If run command is entered at auto
auto-restarting,
restarting,
restart from the starting frequency that was set auto-searching
by function code F23. estimated, and restart from the frequency.
This setting is most suitable for the case (pump etc.) when load inertia moment is small, when the
load is heavy, and motor speed decreases up to 0 in a short time after the motor coasts to a stop
due to momentary power failure.
With auto
auto-searching:
searching: Auto-searching
Auto searching is selected by starting mode selection “STM”
“STM ON or H09
H09/d67 = 1 or 2.
Refer function code H09
H09/d67
/d67 (Starting mode) to find the detail of starting mode selection “STM” ON auto
auto-searching.
When momentary power failure restart operation (F14 = 3 to 5) is selected, operation will resume automatically
at auto-restarting.
restarting. Design your machinery so that safety is ensured even at restarting.
APPENDICES
Otherwise an accident could occur.
Appendix
Appendix-108
108
■ Restart mode after momen

momentary
tary power failure (Basic operation: Without auto-searching
auto searching setting)
When inverter detected that DC link bus voltage becomes at or drops below undervoltage level while operating, it
is judged as a momentary power failure. When load is light and momentary power
p ower failure is very short, momentary
power failure may not be detected and motor operation might be continued because DC link bus voltage does not
drop so much.
When inverter judges the state as momentary power failure, return returns to momentary power failure restart mode and
prepares for restart. After power is auto-restarted,
auto restarted, the inverter becomes at inverter ready to run state after elapse
of initial charging time. At momentary power failure, power of external circuit (relay circuit
circu it etc.), which controls the
inverter, decreases as well, and run command may be turned off. Therefore, when the inverter becomes at inverter
ready to run state, wait 2 seconds for input of run command. When input of run command is confirmed within 2
seconds,ds, initiate restarting according to F14 (mode selection). When there is no input of run command at run
command input waiting state, momentary power failure restart mode will be released and start from normal starting
frequency. Therefore, input run command
command within 2 seconds after autoauto-restarting
restarting or hold run command by off off-delay
timer or mechanical latch relay.
In case of F02=0 (run command from keypad and rotation direction command determined by terminal), it operates
in the same way as above. For rotation direction fixed mode (F02 = 2, 3), run command is held within the inverter,
therefore, it restarts immediately at inverter ready to run state.
Power Power
failure restoration
DC link bus
voltage
Undervoltage level
Power failure Preparation time:

period approx. 0.3 to 0.6 s
Gate command ON Gate OFF Preparation complete

Inverter
status
Stand by for run command
Run command
Restart
• At auto-restarting,
restarting, inverters waits 2 seconds for input of run command, however, if allowable
momentary power failure time (H16) is elapsed after the state is judged as power failure, the state of
run command input waiting for 2 seconds will be cancelled and normal starting operation is
performed.
formed.
• When coast to a stop command “BX” is entered during power failure, momentary power failure restart
waiting state is released and returns to normal run mode, and when run command is inputted, start
from normal starting frequency.
• Detection of momentary
momentary power failure within the inverter is performed by detecting DC link bus voltage
drop of the inverter. With the structure in which a magnetic contactor is equipped on the output side of
the inverter, there will be no operation power of the magnetic contactor at momentary power failure
and the magnetic contactor becomes at open state. When the magnetic contactor becomes open,
connection of inverter and motor is released and load of the inverter is shutdown. Therefore, it
becomes difficult to decrease DC link bus voltage of the inverter and it may not be judged as a
momentary power failure. If this is the case, momentary power failure restart will not be performed
normal. As a countermeasure against this case, by connecting auxiliary contact signal of the magnetic
contactor to the interlock signal “IL” it is possible to detect momentary power failure without fail.
Function code E01 to E05 Data = 22
Terminal command “IL” Meaning
OFF No momentary power failure has occurred.

A momentary power failure has occurred.
ON
(Restart after a momentary power failure enabled)
Appendix
Appendix-109
109
When motor speed decreases during momentary power failure, and when restarting from frequency of before
momentary power failure after power is recovered (auto-restarting), current limiter becomes active and output
frequency of the inverter decreases automatically.
When output frequency and motor rotation speed synchronize, the speed is accelerated up to the original output
frequency. Refer to the figure below. However, it is necessary to enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting (H12 =
1) to bring in synchronization of the motor.
Power Power
failure restoration
F14 = 4
DC link bus
voltage Undervoltage
Time
Synchronization
Output frequency
(motor rotational speed) Acceleration
Time
Auto-restarting after
momentary power failure IPF
Time
• Auto-restarting after momentary power failure “IPF”

During momentary power failure auto-restarting “IPF” signal is turned on until returning to original frequency after
auto-restarting after momentary power failure occurred. When “IPF”: is turned ON, motor speed decreases,
therefore, take necessary measures. ( Function code E20, E21 and E27 Data = 6)
APPENDICES
Appendix-110
■ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Basic operation: Without auto-searching
auto searching setting)
Auto-searching
searching is not performed normally if there is residual voltage of the motor.
Therefore, it is necessary to secure the time until residual voltage runs out.
Restart mode after momentary power failure secures the necessary time with function code H46 starting mode
(auto search delay time 2). Even if starting conditions are satisfied, inverter does not start unless auto
auto-search
search delay
time elapses after inverter goes into OFF state. Inverter starts after elapse of auto-searching
auto searching delay time.
( Function code H09, d67)
Power Power
failure restoration
DC link bus
voltage
Motor speed/output
frequency
Output frequency Motor speed
• When operating auto-searching,

searching, it is necessary to perform auto
auto-tuning
tuning in advance.
• When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency, the inverter
disables auto search and starts running the motor with the maximum frequency or the upper limit
frequency, whichever is lower.
• During auto search, if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs, the inverter will restart the auto
search.
• Use 60 Hz or below for auto-searching
auto searching
• Note that auto search may not fully provide the performance depending
depen ding on load conditions, motor
parameters, wiring length, and other external factors.
OFL -2,
• When output circuit filter OFL- 2, -4
4 is equipped on the output side of the inverter, auto
auto--searching
OFL  -A type.
must be disabled. Use OFL-
• If using permanent magnetic
magnetic type synchronous motors to restart following a momentary power
interruption, do not set d67 = 0.
Appendix
Appendix-111
111
■ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Allowable momentary power failure time) (H16)
Sets the maximum time from when momentary power failure (undervoltage level) occurs until restart (setting
range: 0.0 to 30.0 s). Set coast to a stop time which is allowable for machine and equipment. Momentary power
failure restart operation should be performed within the spe
specified
cified time, however, if the set time is exceeded, the
inverter judges the state as a power shut down, and then operates as powering on again without performing
momentary power failure restart operation.
Power failure Power restoration
DC link bus
voltage
Undervoltage level
Power failure Preparation time:

period approx. 0.3 to 0.6 s
Inverter Gate command ON Preparation complete

status
Run command
(case 1)
Restart
Run command
(case 2))
Normal operation start
When allowable momentary power failure time (H16) is set to “999”, momentary power failure restart is performed
until DC link bus voltage decreases by momentary power failure restart allowance voltage (100 V for 400 V class),
however, if the voltage becomes at or below the moment
momentaryary power failure allowance voltage, the state is judged as
a power shut down. As a result, the inverter operates as powering ON again without performing momentary power
failure restart operating.
Power supply voltage Allowance voltage of momentary power failure

f ailure restart
400V 100V
The time until voltage decreases to the momentary power failure restart allowance voltage from
undervoltage differs greatly depending on the inverter capacit
capacity and with/without option.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-112
112
■ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Restart timer) (H13) (Exclusive to V/f control for IM)
H13 set the time until restart is performed after momentary power failure occurred. (At auto
auto-searching
searching setting,
use H46 (auto search holding time 2)).
Restarting at the state when residual voltage
voltage of the motor is high, inrush current becomes greater or temporarily
becomes at regeneration state, and overcurrent alarm may occur. For security reason, in order to restart after
residual voltage is reduced to some extent, adjust H13. Even if auto
auto-restarted,
started, restart cannot be performed until the
holding time (H13) elapses.
DC link bus voltage

Undervoltage level
Inverter status (1) In operation Preparation complete
Run command
Gate OFF Operation start

Inverter status (2) Gate command ON (gate ON)
Restart
Factory default: At the factory default state, setting is performed so that it is appropriate to the standard motor
(refer to “I.3
“ Factory default value per applicable electric motor capacitance
capacitance“).
“). Basically, there is
no need to modify the default setting. However, when problems occur due to the long holding
time or decrease in flow rate of pump becomes significant, change to about half of the standard
value and make sure that alarm etc. will not occur.
■ Restart Mode aft

after
er Momentary Power Failure (H14)(Exclusive to V/f control for IM)
At momentary power failure restart operation, when inverter output frequency and motor rotation speed does not
synchronize, overcurrent occurs and current limiter will operate. when current limit is detected, automatically
decrease the output frequency and synchronize with the motor rotation speed. H14 sets the slope of lowering
output frequency (frequency lowering rate in Hz/s).
H14 data Output frequency lowering operation

0.00 Decrease by the selected deceleration time.
0.01 to 100.00 (Hz/s) Decrease by the lowering rate that is set by H14.
Depending on the PI regulator of current limiting processing (PI constant is
999
fixed value within the inverter), the rate will decrease.
When frequency lowering rate is increased, regeneration operation is performed at the moment when
output frequency of the inverter and rotation speed of inverter synchronize, and overvoltage trip may
occur. When frequency lowering rate is reduced, the time until output frequency of the inverter and motor
rotation speed synchronize
synchronize (current limiting operation) becomes longer, and protection operation of
inverter overload may be activated.
Appendix
Appendix-113
113
■ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Continuous running level) (H15)
Continued operation at the momentary power failure (P, I) (H
(H92,
92, H93)
• Trip after momentary deceleration is stopped
When trip after deceleration stopped is selected (F14 = 2), at momentary power failure restart operation (Mode
selection), momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and deceleration stop control starts when
DC link bus voltage of the inverter becomes at or drops below the continuous running level.
Adjust voltage level of DC link bus to start deceleration stop control by H15.
Under decelerate
decelerate-to-stop
stop control, the inverter decelerates its output frequency keeping the DC link bus voltage
constant using a PI regulator.
regulator
P (proportional) and I (integral) components of the PI regulator are specified by H92 and H93, respectively.
For normal inverter operation, it is not necessary to modify d
data
ata of H15, H92 or H93.
• Continue to run
When momentary power failure restart operation (Continue to run) is selected (F14 = 3) at momentary power
failure restart (operation selection), momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter and conti
continue to
run control starts when DC link bus voltage of the inverter becomes at or drops below the continue to run level.
Adjust continue to run level to start continue to run control by H15.
Under continue to run control, the inverter continues to run keepi
keeping
ng the DC link bus voltage constant using the PI
regulator..
P (proportional) and I (integral) components of the PI regulator are specified by H92 and H93, respectively.
For normal inverter operation, it is not necessary to modify data of H15, H92 or H93.
DC link bus voltage

Continuous running reset level (H15 + α)
α
Continuous running level (H15)
Undervoltage level
Inverter output frequency
Alpha (α)
(
Power supply group
FRN0060
RN0060E2E-4E
EH or below FRN0075E2E-
FRN0075 -4EH or above
400 V 10 V 20 V
Even if “Deceleration stop control” or “Continue to run”, is selected, the inverter may not be able to
perform the function when the inertia of the load is small or the load is heavy, due to undervoltage
caused by the control delay. In such a case, when “Deceleration stop control” is selected, the inverter
allows the motor to coast to a stop; when “Continue to run” is selected, the inverter saves the output
frequency being applied when the undervoltage alarm occurs and perform momentary power failure
restart operation.
When the input power voltage for the
the inverter is high, setting continue to run level high makes the control
more stable even if the inertia of the load is relatively small. Raising the continuous running level too
high, however, might cause continue to run control activated even during normal operation.
When the input power voltage for the inverter is extremely low, continue to run control might be activated
even during normal operation, at the beginning o off acceleration or at an abrupt change in load. To avoid
this, lower the continuous running level. Lowering it too low, however, might cause undervoltage that
result from voltage drop due to the control delay.
Before you change the continuous running level, make sure that the continuous running control will be
performed properly, by considering the fluctuations of the load and the input voltage.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-114
114
F15, F16 Frequency limiter

imiter (Upper limit), Frequency limiter
imiter (Lower limit)
Related function codes
codes:: H63 Lower limit Limiter (Mode selection)
■ Frequency limiter (Upper limit) (Lower limit) (F15, F16)

F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency or reference frequency, respectively.
Frequency Limiter Object to which the limit is applied

Frequency limiter
imiter (Upper) F15 Output frequency
Frequency limiter
imiter (Lower)
(Low F16 Reference frequency
When the limit is applied to the reference frequency or reference speed, delayed responses of
control may cause an overshoot or undershoot, and the frequency may temporarily go beyond the
limit level.

.0 (Hz)
■ Low Limiter (Mode selection) (H63)

H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low level specified by
F16, as follows:
H63 data Action

0 The output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16.
1 The inverter decelerates to stop the motor.
Refer to the figure below.

Operation Operation
frequency frequency
Maximum frequency Maximum frequency
Frequency limiter (high) Frequency limiter (high)
Frequency limiter (low) Frequency limiter (low)

Frequency Frequency
setting setting
(For H63 = 0) (For H63 = 1)
• When changing the frequency limiter (Upper) (F15) in order to raise the reference frequency, be sure
to change the maximum frequency (F03) accordingly.
• Set each function code related to operation frequency so that the relationship among data becomes
the following magnitude relationship.
- F15>F16, F15>F23, F15>F25
- F03>F16
However, F23 is the starting frequency, and F25 is stop frequency
If any wrong data is specified for these function codes, the inverter may not run the motor at the
desired speed, or cannot start it normally.
F18 Bias (for frequency setting 1) (Refer to F01)
Refer to the description of function code F01 to find the details of bias (Frequency setting 1) setting.
Appendix
Appendix-115
115
F20 to F22 DC braking1 (Starting frequency, braking level, braking time)

H95 DC braking (Braking response mode)
H195 DC braking (Braking timer at the startup)
These function codes specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during
decelerate-to-stop operation.
If the motor enters a decelerate-to-stop operation by turning OFF the run command or by decreasing the reference
frequency below the stop frequency, the DC braking starts when output frequency reached the DC braking starting
frequency. Set braking starting frequency (F20), braking level (F21), and braking time (F22) to start DC braking
when deceleration is stopped.
Setting the braking time to “0.00” (F22 = 0) disables the DC braking.
By H195, it is possible to perform DC braking when starting up inverter. By doing so, it is efficient for preventing
from falling down when the brake is released, and prompt torque startup when starting up.
■ Braking starting frequency (F20)

F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate-to-stop state.
• Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (Hz)
■ Braking level (F21)

F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated. The function code data
should be set, assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100%, in increments of 1%.
• 0 to 80%
■ Braking time (F22)
F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking.
• Data setting range: 0.00 (Disable), 0.01 to 30.00 (s)
APPENDICES
Appendix-116
■ Braking response mode (H95)

H95 specifies the DC braking response mode.
H95 data Characteristics Note
Slow response. Slows the rising edge of Insufficient braking torque may result at the
0 the current, thereby preventing reverse start of DC braking.
rotation at the start of DC braking.
Quick response. Quickens the rising edge Reverse rotation may result depending on
1 of the current, thereby accelerating the the moment of inertia of the mechanical
build-up
up of the braking torque. load and the coupling mechanism.
Decelerate-to
to-stop start
DC braking 1
(braking starting frequency) (F20)
Time
DC braking 1
(braking time)
(F22)
DC braking 1
(braking level)
(F21)
DC braking current
Time
DC braking
(braking response mode) (H95)
It is also possible to input DC braking command “DCBRK” by using an external digital input signal as the
terminal command. As long as the DCBRK is ON, the inverter performs DC braking, regardless of the
braking time specified by F22.
( Refer to function code E01 to E05 Data =13 to find the details of “DCBRK”)
Turning the “DCBRK” ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates the DC braking. This
feature allows the motor to be excited before starting, resulting in smoother acceleration (quicker
build-up
up of acceleration torque) (under V/f control).
Depending on the timing of the activation of “DCBRK”, alarm of overvoltage or overcurrent occurs.
In general, specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip frequency of motor. If an
extremely high value is set, control may bec
become
me unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some
cases.
The DC braking function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism.
Injuries could occur.
Appendix
Appendix-117
117
■ Braking timer at the startup (H195)

When starting up inverter by run command, it is possible to start by operating DC braking.
This is particularly useful in applications such as hoists and elevators where the inverter runs at low speed braking
mode after starting up, preventing loads from falling.
• Data setting range: 0.00: No DC braking at the start up 0.01 to 30.00 (s)
Output
current
DC braking
(operation time at startup)
(H195)
Operation
command
Inverter
operation
status
APPENDICES
Appendix-118
F23 to F25 Starting frequency

requency 1, Starting frequency
requency 1 (Holding time) and Stop ffrequency
Under V/f control

At the startup of an inverter, the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency. The inverter stops its
output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency. Set the starting frequency to a level at which the
motor can generate enough torque for startup. Generally, set the rated slip frequency of the motor as the starting
frequency.
Specifying the holding time for the starting frequency compensates for the delay time for the establishment of a
magnetic flux in the motor; specifying that for the stop frequency stabilizes the motor speed at the stop of the
inverter.
Output frequency
Starting frequency 1
(holding time)
(F24)
Starting
frequency 1 Stop frequency
(F23) (F25)
Time
Inverter Shut off Shut off

Inverter in operation (gate ON)
operation status (gate OFF) (gate OFF)
Time
Figure J.7 Inverter operation diagram
■ Starting frequen
frequency
cy 1 (F23)
F23 specifies the starting frequency at the startup of an inverter.
Under V/f control, even if the st
start
art frequency is set at 0.0 Hz, the inverter starts
s its output at 0.1 Hz.
■ Starting frequency 1 (Holding time)

t (F24)
F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1.
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 10.00 (s)
■ Stop frequency (F25)

F25 specifies the stop frequency at the stop of the inverter.
Under V/f control, eve
even
n if the stop frequency is set at 0.0 Hz, the inverter stops its output at 0.1 Hz.
If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency, the inverter does not output any power as long
as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency.
Appendix
Appendix-119
119
F26, F27 Motor Sound (Carrier frequency

frequency, Tone)
Related function codes: H98 Protection/Maintenance function
unction (Mode selection)
■ Motor Sound (Carrier frequency) (F26)

Adjust carrier frequency. By changing carrier frequency, it is possible to reduce an audible noise generated by the
motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself, and to decrease a leakage current from the main output
(secondary) wiring.
Setting frequency of carrier frequency
frequency differs depending on each model overload rating (ND/HD/HND/HHD).
Item Characteristics
Carrier frequency Low to High
Motor sound noise emission High ↔ Low
Motor temperature (due to harmonics components) High ↔ Low
Ripples in output current waveform Large ↔ Small
Leakage current Low ↔ High
Electromagnetic noise emission Low ↔ High
Inverter loss Low ↔ High
Setting range of carrier frequency is as follows.
Modes 0.75 to 6kHz 0.75 to 10kHz 0.75 to 16kHz
FRN E2 -2G
G H (HHD/HND
/HND) — — 0001 to 0020
0
FRN E2 -4G
G H (ND) — 0002 to 0012 —
FRN E2 -4G
G H (HD/HND
/HND/HHD) — — 0002 to 0012
FRN E2 -4EH
EH (ND) 0072 or above 0020
20 to 0059 —
FRN E2 -4EH
EH (HD/HND) 0203 or above 0072 to 0168 0020 to 0059
FRN E2 -4EH
EH (HHD) — 0203 or above 0020 to 0168
FRN E2 -7G
G H (HND/HHD)
HHD) — — 0001 to 0011
001
Specifying a carrier frequency that is too low will cause the output current waveform to have a large
amount of ripple. As a result, the motor loss increases, causing the motor temperature to rise.
Furthermore, the large amount of ripple tends to cause a current limiting alarm. When the carrier
frequency is set to 1 kHz or lower, therefore, reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to
be 80% or less of the rated current.
When a high carrier frequency
frequency is specified, the temperature of the inverter may rise due to the ambient
temperature rise or an increase of the load. If it happens, the inverter automatically decreases the carrier
frequency to prevent the inverter overload ( 0lu ) . With consideration
consideration for motor noise, the automatic
reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled. Refer to the description of H98.
It is recommended to set the carrier frequency at 5 kHz or above under vector control with speed sensor.
DO NOT set it at 1 kHz or below.
Running
ing a PMSM at low carrier frequency may overheat the permanent magnet due to the output current
harmonics, resulting in demagnetization. When decreasing the carrier frequency setting, therefore, be
sure to check the allowable carrier frequency of the motor
motor.
When using a Fuji standard PMSM with the rated load, decrease the carrier frequency. Setting a high
carrier frequency decreases not only the harmonic components of the output current but also the allowed
continuous running inverter output current.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-120
120
■ Motor Sound (Tone) (F27)

F27 changes the motor running sound tone (only for motors under V/f control). This setting is effective when the
carrier frequency specified by function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower. Changing the tone level may reduce the high
and harsh
rsh running noise from the motor.
If the tone level is set too high, the output current may become unstable, or mechanical vibration and
noise may increase. Also, this function code may not be very effective for certain types of motor.
F27 data
d Function
0 Disable (Level 0)
1 Enable (Level 1)
2 Enable (Level 2)
3 Enable (Level 3)
F29 to F35 Terminal [FM1], [FM2] (Mode selection, Output gain, Function selection, Pulse rate)
These function codes allow outputting monitor data such as output frequency and output current to terminal
terminals [FM1],
[FM2] as analog DC voltage, current, and pulse ([FM1] only). In addition, voltage and current output level on
terminals [FM1], [FM2] is adjustable.
When switching voltage, current, and pulse, it is necessa
necessary
ry to switch both mode selection function code
and switch on the PCB.
There is no pulse output function for terminal [FM2]
Terminal Mode selection function Gain Function Pulse rate Switch

[FM1] F29 F30 F31 F33 SW5
[FM2] F32 F34 F35 None SW7
■ Mode selection (F29, F32)

F29 and F32 select output form of terminals
terminal [FM1], [FM2]. Accordingly, change the switches
es SW5, SW7 on the
control PCB.
For details of the switches on the control PCB, refer to the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC Ace User’s Manual Chapter 12
“SPECIFICATIONS.
“SPECIFICATIONS.”
F29 data Terminal [FM1] output form Control PCB switch (SW5)
0 Voltage output (0 to +10 VDC) FMV side
1 Current output (4 to 20 mA DC)
FMI side
2 Current output (0 to 20mA DC)
3 Pulse output FMP side
F32 data Terminal [FM2] Output form Control PCB switch (SW7)
0 Voltage output (0 to +10 VDC) FMV side
1 Current output (4 to 20 mA DC)
FMI side
2 Current output (0 to 20mA DC)
The output current is not isolated from analog input, and does not have an isolated power su
supply.
pply.
Therefore, if an electrical potential relationship between the inverter and peripheral equipment has been
established, e.g., by connecting an analog input,, cascade connection of a current output device is not
available.
Keep the optimum connection wire length.
Appendix
Appendix-121
121
■ Output gain (F30, F34)

F30, F34 allows you to adjust the output voltage within the range of 0 to 300%.
Terminal FM1, FM2 output voltage
Meter
■ Function selection (F31, F35)

F31, F35 specify which data is monitored at the output terminals [FM1], [FM2].
F31/F35
[FMA] output Data Definition of monitor amount 100%
data
Output frequency 1
0 (PM: Speed Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency (F03)
command value )
Output frequency 2
1 (PM: Speed Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency (F03)
estimated value)
Twice the inverter rated current
2 Output current Output current (RMS) of the inverter (Inverter rated output current
depending on F80 setting)
3 Output voltage Output voltage (RMS) of the inverter 400 V class: 500 V
4 Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque
Load factor (Equivalent to the
5 Load factor Twice the rated motor load
indication of the load meter)
Twice the rated output power
6 Input power Input power of the inverter (Inverter rated output power
depending on F80)
7 PID feedback value Feedback value under PID control 100% of the feedback amount
Estimated speed under vector
8 Estimated speed Maximum speed as 100%
control without speed sensor
9 DC link bus voltage DC link bus voltage of the inverter 400 V class: 1000 V
Command from communication
10 Universal AO ( RS-485 communication user 20,000/100%
manual)
Twice the rated motor output
13 Motor output Motor output (kW)
(P02/A16 setting value)
Always full scale (equivalent to
For meter calibration
14 Calibration (+) 100%)
Full scale output
Output
15 PID command (SV) Command value under PID control PID command 100%
Output level of the PID processor
16 PID output (MV) under PID control (Frequency Maximum frequency (F03)
command)
APPENDICES
Inverter heat sink Heat sink detection temperature of

18 200°C/100%
temperature inverter
20 Reference frequency Reference frequency Maximum frequency (F03) / 100%
Appendix-122
F31/F35
/F35
[FMA] output Data Definition of monitor amount 100%
data
External PID control1
External PID control1 feedback
60 feedback value 100% / 100%
value
(EPID1-PV)
PV)
61 command External PID control1 command 100% / 100%
(EPID1-SV
SV)
65 External PID control1 output Maximum frequency (F03) / 100%
output (EPID1-OUT)
(EPID1
Customizable logic
111 Enable only at analog output 100% / 100%
output signal 1
Customizable logic
output signal 2
Customizable logic
output signal 3
Customizable logic
output signal 4
Customizable logic
output signal 5
Customizable logic
output signal 6
Customizable logic
output signal 7
Customizable logic
output signal 8
Customizable logic
output signal 9
Customizable logic
output signal 10
■ Pulse rate (F33)

F33 specifies the pulse rate at which the output of the monitored item selected reaches 100%, in accordance with
the modes of the pulse counter to be connected.
• Data setting range: 25 to 32000 (pulse/s)
Pulse output waveform Pulse output circuit
FM1
10.5 to 12.
12.5 V
Instruments
Appendix
Appendix-123
123
F37 Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost

Boost/Auto
/Auto Energy Saving Operation 1
codes: F09 Torque boost 1
F37 specifies V/f pattern, torque boost type, and auto energy saving operation in accordance with the
characteristics of the load.
F37 Auto Energy-saving

saving
V/f characteristics Torque boost Applicable load
data Operation
Variable torque V/f Variable torque load

0 By F09 torque
pattern (General-purpose
(General purpose fan and pumps)
boost
1 Disabled Constant torque load
Linear V/f pattern Auto torque Constant torque load (To be selected if a
2
Boost motor may be over
over-excited
ted at no load)
Variable torque V/f Variable torque load
3 By F09 torque
pattern (General-purpose
(General purpose fan and pumps)
boost
4 Enabled Constant torque load
Linear V/f pattern Auto torque Constant torque load (To be selected if a
5
Boost motor may be over
over-excited
ited at no load)
If a required “load torque + acceleration toque” is 50% or more of the rated torque, it is recommended to
select the linear V/f pattern. Factory defaults are set to linear V/f pattern.
■ V/f characteristics
The FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace series of inverters offer a variety of V/f patterns and torque boosts, which include V/f patterns
suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps and for constant torque load (including special
pumps requiring high starting torque). Two types
types of torque boosts are available: manual and automatic.
Output voltage (V) Output voltage (V)
Rated voltage Rated voltage
Output Torque Output

Torque boost frequency boost frequency
Base Base
frequency 1 frequency 1
Variable torque V/f pattern (F37 = 0) Linear V/f pattern (F37 = 1)

APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-124
124
When the variable torque V/f pattern is selected (F37 = 0 or 3), the output voltage may be low at a low
frequency zone, resulting in insufficient output torque, depending on the characteristics of the motor and
load. In such a case, it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using
the non-linear
linear V/f pattern.
Recommended value: H50 = 1/10 of the base frequency
H51 = 1/10 of the voltage at base frequency
V/f pattern of variable

Output voltage (V) torque V/f pattern with
non-linear
linear V/f
Rated voltage at
base frequency 1
V/f pattern of variable

torque V/f pattern
without non--linear V/f
Non-linear
linear V/f
pattern 1 (voltage)
Output frequency
Non-linear
linear V/f Base
pattern 1
(frequency) frequency 1
■ Torque boost
• Manual torque boost by F09 (Manual adjustment)
• Data setting range: 0.0 to 20.0 (%), (100%/base frequency voltage)
In torque boost using F09, constant voltage is added to the basibasic

c V/f pattern, regardless of the load. To secure a
sufficient starting torque, manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09.
Specify an appropriate level that guarantees smooth Startup and yet does not cause over- ove r-excitation
excitation at no or light
load.
Torque boost using F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the
load fluctuation.
Specify the function code F09 data in percentage to the base frequency voltage. At factory shipment, boost amount
with which approx. 100% of starting torque can be assured, is specified.
• Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque, but may cause overcurrent due to
over-excitation
excitation at no load. If you continue to drive the motor, it may overheat. To avoid such a
situation, adjust torque boost to an appropriate level.
• When the non-linear
non linear V/f pattern and the torque boost are used together, the torque boost takes effect
below the frequency on the non-linear
non linear V/f pattern’s poi
point.
Output voltage (V)
Rated voltage at Increase output

base frequency 1 voltage with Torque
boost 1 (F09)
Non-linear
linear V/f
pattern 1 (voltage)
Torque boost 1
Output frequency
Non-linear
linear V/f Base
pattern 1
(frequency) frequency 1
Appendix
Appendix-125
125
•Auto torque boost

This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load. Under light load, auto torque
boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over over-excitation.
excitation. Under heavy load, it increases the
output voltage to increase the output torque of the motor.
• This function controls in accordance with motor characteristics. Therefore, set the base frequency 1
(F04), rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05), and other pertinent motor parameters (P01 th through
P03 and P06 through P99) in line with the motor capacity and characteristics, or else perform
auto-tuning
tuning (P04).
• When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity, the maximum torque might
decrease or the motor operation might become unstable. In such cases, do not use auto torque boost
but choose manual torque boost using F09 (F37 = 0 or 1).
F40, F41 Torque limiter 1 (Driving),

(Driv ), Torque limiter 1 (Braking)
codes:
E16, E17 Torque limiter 2 (Driving), Torque limiter 2 (Braking)
H76 Torque control (Braking) (Frequency rising limit for braking)
Under V/f control (F42=0)

If the inverter output torque exceeds the specified levels of the torque limiters (F40, F41, E16, E17), the inverter
controls the output frequency and limits the output torque for preventing a stall.
To use the torque limiters, it is necessary to configure the function codes listed in Table J.1.
1.
In braking, the inverter increases the output frequency to limit the output torque. Depending on the
conditions during operation, the output frequency could dangerously increase. H76 (Frequency rising
limit for braking) is provided to limit
limit the increasing frequency component.
Table J.1 Related function codes
Function
Name V/f control Remarks
code
F40 Torque limiter 1 (Driving)
(Driv Y
F41 Torque limiter 1 (Braking) Y
E16 Torque limiter 2 (Driving) Y
E17 Torque limiter 2 (Braking) Y
H76 Torque limiter (Frequency rising limit for braking) Y
■ Torque limit control mode

Torque limit is performed by limiting torque current flowing across the motor.
The graph below shows the relationship between the torque and the output frequency at the constant torque
current limit.
Torque Constant torque limit
Constant output limit
Output frequency
Base frequency
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-126
126
■ Torque limiter (F40, F41, E16, E17) Data setting range: 0 to 300%; 999 (Disable)
These function codes specify the operation level at which the torque limiters become activated, as the percentage
of the motor rated torque.
Function code Name Torque limit feature
F40 Torque limiter 1 (Driving) Driving torque current limiter 1

F41 Torque limiter 1 (Braking) Braking torque current limiter 1
E16 Torque limiter 2 (Driving) Driving torque current limiter 2
E17 Torque limiter 2 (Braking) Braking torque current limiter 2
Although the setting range of the torque is 300%,

%, the torque limiter determined by the overload current of
the unit internally limits the torque current output. Therefore, the torque current output is automatically
limited at a value lower than 300%,%, the maximum setting value.
■ Torque limiter levels specified via communications link (S10, S11)

The torque limiter levels can be changed via the communications link. Communication dedicated code
codess S10, S11
interlock with the function code
codes F40, F41.
■ Switching torque limiters

The torque limiters can be switched by the function code setting and the terminal command “TL2/TL1” (Select
torque limiter level 2/1) assigned to any of the digital input terminals. To assign the Torque limiter 2/Torque limiter 1,
“TL2/TL1” set Data = 14 in function codes
code from E01 to E05. If no “TL2/TL1” is assigned, torque limiter levels 1 1-1
and 1-2
2 (F40 and F41) take effect by default.
Torque limiter 1 (Driving): F40 (S10)
Driving torque
limiter
Torque limiter 2 (Driving): E16
Torque limiter 1 (Braking): F41 (S11)
Braking torque
limiter
Torqu
Torquee limiter 2 (Braking): E17
Figure J.8 Switching torque limits diagram
Appendix
Appendix-127
127
■ Torque limiter (Braking) (Frequency rising limit for braking) (H76) Data setting range: 0.0 to 500.0 (Hz)
H76 specifies the rising limit of the frequency in limiting torque for braking. The Factory defaults are 5.0 Hz. If the
increasing frequency during braking reaches the limit value, the ttorque
orque limiters no longer function, resulting in an
overvoltage trip. Such a problem may be avoided by increasing the setting value of H76.
The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar in function. If both are activated concurrently, they
may conflict
onflict with each other and cause hunting. Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters.
Under vector control with

without speed sensor nor pole position sensor (PMSM) (F42=15)
When a PMSM is driven under vector control without speed sensor nor pole position sensor, the torque limiters are
used like as IM driven under vector control without speed sensor.
When switching control target motor and control method with the function code F42, the Factory defaults
are also switched.
The factory default for PMSM is 200%.
%.
Table J.6
.6 Related function codes
Function code Name Vector control Remarks
F40 Torque limiter 1 (Driving) Y Factory defaults are ““200%”

(F42=15)
F41 Torque limiter 1 (Braking) Y
E16 Torque limiter 2 (Driving) Y Factory defaults are “999”
E17 Torque limiter 2 (Braking) Y
F42 Drive control selection 1
F42 specifies the motor drive control.
F42 data Control mode Basic control Speed feedback Speed control
0 V/f control without slip compensation Frequency control
Vector control without speed sensor
1 V/f control Disable With slip compensation
(dynamic torque vector)
Frequency control
2 V/f control with slip compensation
Vector control for synchronous motor Speed control with
15 without speed sensor nor pole Vector control Estimated speed automatic speed regulator
position sensor (ASR)
■ V/f control for induction motor without slip compensation (F42=0)

Under this control, the inverter controls an
a induction motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V/f
pattern specified by function codes.
Vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector) (F42=1)
To get the maximal torque out of a motor, this control calculates the motor torque matched tto
o the load applied and
uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output.
When the vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector) is selected, automatically auto torque boost
and slip compensation become enabled. This control is effect
effective
ive for improving the system response to external
disturbances such as load fluctuations, and the motor speed control accuracy.
Note that the inverter may not respond to a rapid load fluctuation.
For slip compensation in case of vector control without speed sensor,sensor, constants of motor are used.
Therefore, satisfy the following conditions below. If these conditions cannot be satisfied, sufficient control
performance may not be obtained.
APPENDICES
• A single motor is controlled per inverter.

• The prerequisite is that
that motor parameter P02, P03, P06 to P13 are accurately set or auto
auto-tuning is
performed.
Appendix
Appendix-128
128
• Under vector control without speed sensor

sensor,, the capacity of the motor to be controlled must be not less
than two ranks lower of the nominal applied motor capacity. Otherwise, the inverter may not control
the motor due to decrease of the current detection resolution.
• The wiring distance between the inverter and motor should be 50 m (164 ft) or less. If it is longer, the
inverter may not control the motor due to leakag
leakagee current flowing through stray capacitance to the
ground or between wires. Especially, small capacity inverters whose rated current is also small may
be unable to control the motor correctly even if the wiring is less than 50 m (164 ft)
ft).. In that case, make
the wiring length as short as possible or use a wire with small stray capacitance (e.g., loosely
loosely-bundled
cable) to minimize the stray capacitance.
■ V/f control with slip compensation (F42=2)

Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics, decreasing the
motor rotation. The inverter’s slip compensation function first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the
motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation. This
prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip.
That is, this function is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy.
Function code Action
P12 Rated slip frequency Specify the rated slip frequency.

Adjust the slip compensation amount for driving.
Slip compensation gain
P09 Slip compensation amount for driving = Rated slip x Slip compensation
for driving
gain for driving
Adjust the slip compensation amount for braking.
Slip compensation gain
P11 Slip compensation amount for braking = Rated slip x Slip compensation
for braking
gain for braking
Slip compensation Specify the slip compensation response time. Basically, there is no
P10
response time need to modify the setting.
To improve the accuracy of slip compensation, perform auto

auto-tuning.
tuning.
H68 enables or disables the slip compensation function 1 according to the motor driving conditions.
Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone

H68 data
Accel / Decel During constant speed Base frequency or below Above the base frequency
0 Enable Enable Enable Enable
1 Disable Enable Enable Enable
2 Enable Enable Enable Disable
3 Disable Enable Enable Disable
■ Vector control for synchronous motor without speed sensor nor pole position sensor (F42=15)
This control estimates the motor speed based on the inverter's output voltage and current, and uses the estimated
speed for speed control. It also decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current
components, and controls ea each
ch of those components as vectors. No PG (pulse generator) interface card is
required. It is possible to obtain the desired response by adjusting the control constants (PI constants) using the
speed regulator (PI controller).
When changing function code F42 to data 15 “Vector control for synchronous motor without speed
sensor nor pole position sensor” by the keypad, then the inverter automatically updates data of F03, F04,
F05 and others.
Appendix
Appendix-129
129
■ Control parameters which are initialized when the control method F42 is changed
When control method (F42) is switched between synchronous motor and induction motor, the data of related
function codes are also switched to the default value. See the table below.
Switch F42 between Change H03=2 with H03=2 with

Function code
0 and 15 P02 F42=0 F42=15
F03 Y N N N
F04 Y N N Y
F05 Y N N Y
F06 Y N N Y
F10 N N N Y
F11 Y N N Y
F12 Y N N Y
F15 Y N N N
F23 Y N N N
F26 Y N N N
F40, F41 Y N N N
E50 Y N N N
P01 Y N Y Y
P02 N N N N
P03 Y Y Y Y
P06 to P08 N Y Y Y
P30 N Y Y Y
P60 to P64 N Y Y Y
P65 N Y Y Y
P74 N Y Y Y
P83 N Y Y Y
P84 N Y Y Y
P85 N Y Y Y
P87 to P89 N Y Y Y
P90 N Y Y Y
P99 Y N N N
H46 N Y Y Y
d01 to d04 Y N N N
Y: Switched N: Not switched

APPENDICES
Appendix-130
F43, F44 Current limiter (Mode selection and Level)

Related function codes: H12 Instantaneous overcurrent
vercurrent limiting
imiting (Mode selection)
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter (F44), the inverter
automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limits the output current. According to limit value
based on Inverter’s rated ccurrent,
urrent, the default setting of the current limiter is 160% for HHD/HD mode, and 130% for
HND/ND mode, respectively (Initial value is automatically written when selecting ND/HD/HND/HHD by function
code F80) If overload current, higher than the current limit limiter
er level, flows instantaneously so that the output
frequency decrease due to the current limiter causes a problem, consider to increase the current limitlimiter level.
The current limiter mode should be also selected with F43. If F43 = 1, the current limiter is enabled only during
constant speed operation. If F43 = 2, it is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation.
Choose F43 = 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output current
during constant speed operation.
■ Mode selection (F43)

F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter becomes active.
Running states that enable the current limiter

F43 data
During acceleration During constant speed During deceleration
0 Disabled
Disable Disabled
Disable Disabled
1 Disabled
Disable Action Disabled
2 Action Action Disabled
■ Level (F44)
F44 specifies
cifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated, as a ratio of the inverter
rating.
• Data setting range: 20 to 200 (%) of rated current of the inverter
(Inverter’s rated current changes according to the setting value of function code F80.)
■ Instantaneous overcurrent limiting (Mode selection) (H12)

H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters
en ters the overcurrent trip when its
output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level. Under the current limit processing, the inverter
immediately turns OFF its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output
frequency.
H12 data Function
0 Disable (An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level.)
1 Enable (An instantaneous overcurrent limiting operation is activated)
If any problem could occur when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing, it is
necessary to cause an overcurrent trip (H12 = 0) and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time.
• Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software, it may cause a de
delay in
control. If you need a quick response current limiting, also enable the instantaneous overcurrent
limiting with H12.
• If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low, the
inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency. This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous
turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting. Depending on the load, extremely short
acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter outp
output
frequency, causing hunting (undesirable oscillation of the system) or activating the inverter
overvoltage trip (alarm 0u ). When specifying the acceleration time, therefore, you need to take into
account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia o off the load.
• The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar in function. If both are activated concurrently,
they may conflict with each other and cause hunting. Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters.
• Vector control with speed sensor itself contains the current control system, so it disables the current
limiter specified by F43 and F44, as well as automatically disabling the instantaneous overcurrent
limiting (specified by H12). Accordingly, the inverter causes an overcurrent
ove rcurrent trip when its output
current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level.
Appendix
Appendix-131
131
F50 to F52 Electronic thermal overload protection for braking resistor

(Discharging capability, Allowable average loss and Braking resistance value)
These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor.
Set the discharging capability, allowable average loss and resistance to F50, F51 and F52, respectively. These
values are determined by the inverter and braking
braking resistor models. For the discharging capability, allowable
average loss and resistance, refer to the FRENIC--Ace User’s Manual Chapter 11 “11.8.4 Specifications.”
The values listed in the tables are for standard models and 10% ED models of the braking resistors which Fuji
Electric provides. When using a braking resistor of any other manufacturer, confirm the corresponding values with
the manufacture
manufacturer and set the function codes accordingly.
Set 0.00 to F52 when replacing from FRENIC-Multi.
FRENIC Multi.
Depending on the thermal characteristics of the braking resistor, the electronic thermal overload
protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm dbh even if the actual
temperature rise is not large enough. If this happens, review the relationship between the performance
index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes.
Using the standard models of braking resistor or using the braking unit and braking resistor together can
output temperature detection signal for overheat. Assign terminal command THR (“Enable external alarm
trip”) to any of digital input terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and [REV] and connect that terminal and its
common terminal to braking resistor’s terminals 2 and 1.
Calculating the dischargin

discharging
g capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor and configuring
the function code data
When using any nonnon-Fuji
Fuji braking resistor, inquire to the resistor manufacturer about the resistor rating and then
configure the related function codes.
The
he calculation procedures for the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor differ
depending on the application of the braking load as shown below.
<Applying braking load during deceleration>

In usual deceleration, the braki
braking
ng load decreases as the speed slows down. In the deceleration with constant
torque, the braking load decreases in proportion to the speed.
Use Expressions (1) and (3) given below.
Applying braking load during running at a constant speed
Different from dur
during
ing deceleration, in applications where the braking load is externally applied during running at a
constant speed, the braking load is constant.
Use Expressions (2) and (4) given below.
Braking load (kW)

Braking load (kW)
(Braking time)
(Braking time)
<Applying
Applying braking load during deceleration> <Applying braking load during running at a constant speed>
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-132
132
■ Discharging capability (F50)

The discharging capability refers to kWs allowance for a single braking cycle. It can be calculated from breaking
F50 data Function
1 to 9000 1 to 9000 (kWs)

OFF Disable the electronic thermal overload protection
Braking time (s) × Motor rated capacity (kW)

Discharging capability (kWs) = (1)
2
Discharging capability (kWs) = Braking time (s) x Motor rated capacity (kW) (2)
■ Allowable average loss (F51)

Allowance average loss is the resistor capacitor that enables continuous operation of motor. It can be calculated
from ED (%) and motor capacity (kW).
F51 data Function

0.001 to 99.99 0.001 to 99.99 (kW)
%ED(%)
× Motor rated capacity (kW) (3)
100
Allowable average loss (kWs) =
2
%ED(%)
Allowable average loss (kWs) = × Motor rated capacity (kW) (4)
100
■ Braking resistance value (F52)
F52 specifies the resistance of the braking resistor.
F52 data Function

Braking resistor protection method by FRENIC-Multi series method (Resistance
0.00
not required)
0.01 to 999 0.01 to 999 (Ω)
Appendix-133
F80 Switching between ND,HD,HND and HHD drive modes
ND is the standard mode for specifications other than J (for Japanese) model, therefore, it is possible to alleviate
ambient temperature condition and increase over
overload
oad capability by switching to HHD/HND/HD modes. However,
rated current (applicable motor capacity) becomes one or two frames lower.
To change the data of function code F80 data, double key operation with “ key + / key” is necessary.
Maximum
Ambient Overl
Overload
F80 data
ata Drive mode Application Rated current level output
temperature capability
frequency
Capable of driving a motor
50°C 150% 1min,
0 HHD mode Heavy load whose capacity is the same 500Hz
(122°F)
(122 200% 0.5s
as the inverter capacity.
whose capacity is one rank 50°C
1 HND mode Light load 120% 1 min 500Hz
higher than the inverter (122°F)
(122
capacity.
whose capacity is one rank 40°C
3 HD mode Medium load 150% 1 min 500Hz
(104
capacity.
whose capacity is two rank
ranks 40°C
4 ND mode Light load 120% 1 min 120Hz
(104
capacity.
For the concrete rated current level, refer to the FRENIC-Ace

Ace User’s
User’s Manual Chapter 12 “SPECIFICATIONS
“SPECIFICATIONS.”
Factory defaults are 0: HHD for Japan and 4: ND for other countries.
When, by changing the mode, the motor capacity becomes 7 75kW
kW or higher, make sure to connect direct
current reactor (DCR) according to the motor capacity. However, it is not necessary when using PWM
converter.
Failure may occur
ND, HD, HND, and HHD HHD-mode

mode inverters are subject to restrictions on the function code data setting range and
internal processing as listed below.
Function code Name Remarks

F21 DC braking 1 (Braking level) Upper limit restriction
F26 Motor sound (Carrier frequency) Upper limit restriction
F44 Current limiter (Level)
( evel) Default setting,
setting setting value
F03 Maximum frequency Allowed output frequency range
Refer to explanation of each function code and selection guidance in the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC Ace User
User’s
’s Manual Chapter 10
“10.4.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity
capacity.”
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-134
134
J.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions)

E01 to E05 Terminals [X1] to [X5] function
Related function codes: Terminal E98 [FWD] function
Terminal E99 [REV] function
E01 to E05, E98 and E99 assign commands to general

general-purpose,
purpose, programmable, digital input terminals, [X1] to [X5],
[FWD], and [REV].
These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter
logic interprets the ON or OFF sstate
tate of each terminal. The factory default setting is normal logic system “Active ON.”
Functions assigned to digital input terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and [REV] are as shown below. Descriptions that
follow are given in normal logic system. Eachach signal ha
has
s been described at data allocation order. However, the
signal is rel
related has been described together. Refer to the function codes in the “Related function codes” column, if
any.
The FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace runs under “V/f: “ V/f control or ““PM
PM SLV: vector control without
without speed sensor nor pole position
sensor for permanent magnet synchronous motor. motor.”” Some terminal commands assigned apply exclusively to the
specific drive control, which is indicated by letters Y (Applicable) and N (Not applicable) in the ““Control
ontrol mode”
column
mn in the table given below.
• Run commands (e.g., Run forward “FWD”), stop commands (e.g., Coast to a stop “BX”), and frequency
change commands can be assigned to digital input terminals. Depending on the state of digital input
terminals, modifying a single function code setting may cause abrupt start of operation or significant change
of the speed. Ensure safety before modifying the function code settings.
• Functions for switching run or frequency command sources (such as “SS1, SS2, SS4, SS8”, “Hz2/H “Hz2/Hz1”,
“Hz/PID”, “IVS” and “LE”) can be assigned to the digital input terminals. Switching these signals may cause a
sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed depending on the condition.
An accident or physical injury may result.
Data Control mode

Related function
Active Active Terminal commands assigned Symbol V/f PM codes
ON OFF SLV
0 1000 “SS1
SS1” Y Y
1 1001 Select multistep frequency “SS2
SS2” Y Y
C05 to C19
2 1002 (1 to 15 steps) “SS4
SS4” Y Y
3 1003 “SS8
SS8” Y Y
4 1004 Select ACC/DEC time (2 steps) “RT1
RT1” Y Y F07, F08,
5 1005 Select ACC/DEC time (4 steps) “RT2
RT2” Y Y E10 to E15
6 1006 Select 3-wire

3 wire operation “HLD
HLD” Y Y F02
7 1007 Coast to a stop command “BX
BX” Y Y ―
8 1008 Reset alarm “RST
RST” Y Y ―
1009 9 External alarm “THR
THR” Y Y ―
11 1011 Select frequency setting 2/1 “Hz2/Hz1
Hz2/Hz1” Y Y F01, C30
13 - DC braking command “DCBRK
DCBRK” Y N F20 to F22
F40, F41 E16,
14 1014 Select torque limit 2/ Torque limit 1 “TL2/TL1
TL2/TL1” Y Y
E17
15 ― Switch to commercial power (50Hz) “SW50
SW50” Y N ―
16 ― Switch to commercial power (60Hz) “SW60
SW60” Y N ―
17 1017 UP command “UP
UP” Y Y Frequency
setting:
setting F01, C30
18 1018 DOWN command “DOWN
DOWN” Y Y PID command:
J02
Allow function code editing
19 1019 “WE--KP” Y Y F00
(Data change enabled)
J01 to J19, J57
J5
20 1020 Cancel PID control “Hz/PID
Hz/PID” Y Y
to J62
Appendix
Appendix-135
135
Data Control mode

Related function
ON OFF SLV
21 1021 Switch normal/inverse operation “IVS” Y Y C53, J01
22 1022 Interlock “IL” Y Y F14
Select link operation
24 1024 “LE” Y Y H30, y98
(RS-485, BUS option)
25 1025 Universal DI “U-DI” Y Y ―
26 1026 Select auto search for idling motor speed at starting “STM” Y Y H09, d67
1030 30 Force to stop “STOP” Y Y F07, H56
33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential terms “PID-RST” Y Y J01 to J19, J57
34 1034 Hold PID integral term “PID-HLD” Y Y to J62
(See Section
35 1035 Select local (keypad) command “LOC” Y Y
3.3.6)
38 1038 Run enable “RE” Y Y -
39 ― Dew condensation prevention “DWP” Y Y J21
Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial
40 ― “ISW50” Y N J22
power (50Hz)
Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial
41 ― “ISW60” Y N J22
power (60Hz)
48 ― Pulse train input (Only for X5 terminal (E05)) “PIN” Y Y F01, C30 d62,
49 1049 Pulse train sign (Other than X5 terminal (E01 to E04)) “SIGN” Y Y d63
50 1050 Clear running motor regular switching time “MCLR” Y Y -

72 1072 Count the run time of commercial power-driven motor 1 “CRUN-M1” Y N H44,H94
78 1078 Select speed control parameter 1 “MPRM1” N N d01 to d08
80 1080 Cancel customizable logic “CLC” Y Y E01 toE05, U81
81 1081 Clear all customizable logic timers “CLTC” Y Y to U90
82 1082 Cancel anti-regenerative control “AR-CCL” Y Y H69

87 1087 Run command 2/ 1 “FR2/FR1” Y Y -
88 ― Run forward / stop 2 “FWD2” Y Y -
89 ― Run reverse / stop 2 “REV2” Y Y -
Run forward (Exclusively assigned to [FWD] and [REV]
98 ― “FWD” Y Y
terminals by E98 and E99)
F02
Run reverse (Exclusively assigned to [FWD] and [REV]
99 ― “REV” Y Y
terminals by E98 and E99)
100 ― No function assigned “NONE” Y Y U81 to U90
149 1149 Switch pump control “PCHG” Y Y
150 1150 Enable master motor drive in mutual operation “MEN0” Y Y
151 1151 Enable pump control motor 1 to be driven “MEN1” Y Y
J401 to J493
171 1171 PID control multistage command 1 “PID-SS1” Y Y
J136 to J138
172 1172 PID control multistage command 2 “PID-SS2” Y Y
APPENDICES
Appendix-136
Data Control mode

Related function
ON OFF SLV
181 1181 External PID1 multistage command 1 "EPID--SS1" Y Y
182 1182 External PID1 multistage command 2 "EPID--SS2" Y Y
201 1201 External PID1 ON command "EPID1-ON"

"EPID1 Y Y
202 1202 External PID1 Cancel "%EPID1" Y Y J501 to J553
203 1203 External PID1 Switch normal/inverse operation "EPID1

EPID1-IVS" Y Y
204 1204 External

xternal PID1 reset
eset integral and differential omponents "EPID1
EPID1-RST" Y Y
205 1205 External

xternal PID1 hold integral component “EPID1
EPID1-HLD” Y Y
Negative
egative logic (Active OFF) command cannot be assigned to the functions marked with ““-” in the “Active
OFF” column.
The “External
External alarm”
alarm” (data = 1009) and “Force to stop” (data = 1030) are fail-safe
fail safe terminal commands. In
the case of “External
External alarm”
alarm” when data = 1009, “Active ON” (alarm is triggered when ON); when data = 9,
“Active OFF” (alarm is triggered when OFF).
Terminal function assignment and data setting

■ Select multistep frequency – “SS1”, “SS2”, “SS4”, and “SS8” (Function code data = 0, 1, 2, and 3)
The combination of the ON/OFF states of digital input signals “SS1”, “SS2”, “SS4” and “SS8” selects one of 16
different fre
frequency
uency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19 (Multistep frequency 1 to 15).
With this, the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset frequencies. ( Function codes C05 to C19)
■ Select ACC
ACC/DEC
/DEC time – “RT1” and “RT2” (Function code data = 4 and 5)
These terminal commands switch between ACC/DEC time 1 to 4 (F07, F08 and E10 through E15).
( Functions codes F07 and F08)
■ Select 3
3-wire
wire operation – “HLD” (Function code data = 6)
Turning this term
terminal
inal command ON self-holds
self holds the forward “FWD”, reverse “REV”, run command, to enable 3
3-wire
inverter operation. ( Function code F02)
■ Coast to a stop command -- “BX” (Function code data = 7)

Turning “BX” ON immediately shuts down the inverter output. The mo
motor
tor coasts to a stop, without issuing any
alarm.
■ Reset alarm – “RST” (Function code data = 8)

Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state
state--alarm
alarm output (for any alarm). Turning it OFF erases the
alarm display and clears the alarm hold state. When you turn the “RST” command ON, keep it ON for 10 ms or
more. This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation.
Alarm generated
Inverter operation status Alarm indication illuminated No alarm indication
Alarm hold state (stop) Operable state
Alarm output
(for any alarm) ALM
10 ms min.
Reset alarm RST
Appendix
Appendix-137
137
■ External alarm – “THR” (Function code data = 9)

Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output (so that the motor coasts to a
stop), displays the alarm 0h2, and issues the alarm output (for any alarm) ALM. The THR command is self
self-held,
and is reset when an alarm reset takes place.
Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to immediately shut down the
inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in peripheral equipment.
■ Select frequency setting 2/1 – “Hz2/Hz1” (Function code data = 11)

Turning
ning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency setting
1 (F01) and frequency setting 2 (C30). ( Function code F01)
■ DC braking command – “DCBRK” (Function code data = 13)

This terminal command gives the inverter
inverter a DC braking command through the inverter’s digital input.
(Requirements for DC braking must be satisfied.) ( Function codes F20 to F22)
■ Select torque limit 2/1 – “TL2/TL1” (Function code data = 14)

This terminal command switches between torque limiter 1 (F40 and F41) and torque limiter 22-1, 2-2
2 (E16 and E17).
( Function codes F40 and F41)
■ Switch to commercial power for 50 Hz or 60 Hz – “SW50” and “SW60” (Function code data = 15 and 16)
When an external sequence switches the motor drive power from the commercial line to the inverter, the terminal
command SW50 or SW60 enables the inverter to start running the motor with the current commercial power
frequency, regardless of settings of the reference/output frequency in the inverter. A running motor driven by
commercial power is carried on into inverter operation. This command helps you smoothly switch the motor drive
power source from the commercial power to the inverter power.
For details, refer to the table
e below, “Operation
“Operation timing scheme
scheme””, “Example
Example of Sequence Circuit
Circuit” and “Example
Example of
Operation Time Scheme
Scheme” on the e following pages.
Terminal command assigned Action

Switch to commercial power for 50 Hz “SW50” Starts at 50 Hz. Do not concurrently assign both
Switch to commercial power for 60 Hz “SW60” Starts at 60 Hz. SW50 and SW60.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-138
138
<Operation timing scheme>

• When the motor speed remains almost the same during coast
coast-to-stop:
0.1s 0.2s
s min.
Switch to commercial power “SW50”
Run command “FWD”
Coast to a stop command “BX”

Commercial power
frequency Motor speed Restart mode
ode after momentary
power failure
ailure (H13)
Inverter reference
frequency
Inverter start at commercial

power frequency
• When the motor speed decreases significantly during coast

coast-to-stop
stop (with the current limiter activated)
0.1s min. 0.2s

s min.
Switch to commercial power “SW50”
Run command “FWD”
Coast to a stop command “BX”

Commercial power
frequency Motor speed Restart mode
ode after momentary
power failure
ailure (H13)
Inverter reference
frequency
Inverter start at commercial

power frequency
• Secure more than 0.1 second after turning ON the “Switch to commercial power” signal before turning
ON a run command.
• Secure more than 0.2 second of an overlapping period with both the “Switch to commercial power”
signal and run command being ON.
• If an alarm has been issued or BX has been ON when the motor drive source is switched from the
commercial power to the inverter, the inverter will not be started at the commercial power frequency
and will remain OFF. After the alarm has been reset or “BX” turned OFF, operation at the frequency of
the commercial power will not be continued, and the inverter will be started at the ordinary starting
frequency.
If you wish to switch the motor drive source from the commercial line to the inverter, be sure to turn “BX”
OFF before the “Switch to commercial power” signal is turned OFF.
• When switching the motor drive source from the inverter to commercial power, adjust the inverter’s
reference frequency at or slightly higher than that of the commercial power frequency beforehand,
taking into consideration the motor speed down during the coast-to-stop
coast stop pe
period
riod produced by
switching.
• Note that when the motor drive source is switched from the inverter to the commercial power, a high
inrush current will be generated, because the phase of the commercial power usually does not match
the motor speed at the switching.
switching. Make sure that the power supply and all the peripheral equipment
are capable of withstanding this inrush current.
• If you have enabled “Restart mode after momentary power failure” (F14 = 3, 4, or 5), keep “BX” ON
during commercial power driven oper
operation
ation to prevent the inverter from restarting after a momentary
power failure.
Appendix
Appendix-139
139
<Example of Sequence Circuit>
Main circuit power
Operation switch
Forward run Commercial
command power Coast to a stop Commercial
Run power
Normal Emergency
Stop
Inverter
Alarm
Note 1) Note 2)
Emergency
Normal Emergency Alarm
switch
Commercial
power
(Stop)
(Run)
Control
power
Run command Inverter operation Commercial power operation
Note 1) Emergency switch

Manual switch provided for the event that the motor drive source cannot be switched normally to the
commercial power due to a serious problem of the inverter
Note 2) When any alarm has occurred inside the inverter, the motor drive source will automatically be switched to
the commercial power.
APPENDICES
Appendix-140
<Example of Operation Time Scheme>

Switching to commercial
power due to alarm
Inverter Commercial power Inverter generated during inverter
operation operation operation operation
Run
Stop
Run command
Alarm generated
Alarm
Select commercial power Inverter Inverter

Commercial power
Inverter primary
Inverter secondary
delay timer T3
(on-delay)
Inverter secondary
Switch to commercial
power delay timer T1
(off-delay)
Forward run command
Switch to commercial
power delay timer T2
(off-delay)
Switch to commercial power
Coast to a stop
Commercial power circuit
Normal
acceleration
Inverter output and Motor rotation
motor rotation
Motor coast to a stop Motor coast to a stop Motor coast to a stop
Inverter output
coast to a stop Harmonization
■ “UP” (Increase output frequency) and “DOWN” (Decrease output frequency) commands -- UP and
DOWN (Function code data = 17 and 18)
• Frequency command: Turning the terminal command “UP” or “DOWN” ON causes the output frequency to
increase or decrease, respectively, within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum
frequency. ( Function code F01 data = 7)
• PID command: Turning the terminal command “UP” or “DOWN” ON causes the PID command value to
increase or decrease, respectively, within the range from 0 to 100%.
( Function code J02 (data= 3)
■ Allow function code editing – “WE-KP” (Function code data = 19)

Turning the terminal command “WE-KP” OFF protects function code data from accidentally getting changed by
pressing the keys on the keypad. Only when this terminal command is ON, you can change function code data
from the keypad. ( Function code F00)
Appendix-141
■ Cancel PID control – “Hz/PID” (Function code data = 20)

Turning this terminal command “Hz/PID” ON disables PID control. If the PID control is disabled with this command,
the inverter runs the motor with the reference frequency manually set by any of the multistep frequency, keypad,
analog input, etc.
Terminal command “Hz/PID” Function

OFF Enable PID control
ON Disable PID control (Enable
Enable manual settings)
settings
( Function codes J01 to J19, J57 to J62)
■ Switch normal/inverse operation – “IVS” (Function code data = 21)

This terminal command switches the output frequency control between normal (proportional to the input value) and
inverse in analog frequency setting or under PID process control. To select the inverse operation, turn the IVS ON.
Output frequency
Inverse operation
Normal
operation
Analog input voltage

Analog
log input current
The normal/inverse switching operation is useful for air air-conditioners

conditioners that require switching between
cooling and heating. In cooling, the speed of the fan motor (output frequency of the inverter) is increased
to lower the temperature.
temperature. In heating, the speed of the fan motor (output frequency of the inverter) is
reduced to lower the temperature.
temperature. This switching is realized by the IVS.
• When the inverter is driven by an external

external analog frequency setting sources (terminals [12] and [C1] (C1
function) and [C1] (V2 function)):
Switching normal/inverse operation can apply only to the analog frequency command sources (terminals [12] and
[C1] (C1 function) and [C1] (V2 function))
function)) in frequency setting 1 (F01) and does not affect frequency setting 2 (C30)
or UP/DOWN control. As shown below, the combination of the “Selection of normal/inverse operation for frequency
setting 1” (C53) and the terminal command “IVS” determines the fina finall operation.
C53 data Terminal command “IVS” Action

0: Normal operation OFF Normal
0: Normal operation ON Inverse
1: Inverse operation OFF Inverse
1: Inverse operation ON Normal
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-142
142
• When process control is performed by the PID processor integrated in the inverter:
The terminal command Hz/PID (“Cancel PID control”) can switch PID control between enabled (process is to be
controlled by the PID processor) and disabled (process is to be controlled by the manual frequency setting). In
either case, the combi
combination
nation of the “PID control” (J01) or “Selection of normal/inverse operation for frequency
setting 1” (C53) and the terminal command IVS determines the final operation as listed Table and Table J.2.
J
Table J.7 When PID control is enabled:
The normal/inverse operation selection for the PID processor output (reference frequency) is as follows.
PID control (Mode selection) (J01) Terminal command “IVS

IVS” Action
OFF Normal
1: Enable (normal operation)
ON Inverse
OFF Inverse
2: Enable (inverse operation)
ON Normal
Table J.2 When PID control is disabled:

The normal/inverse operation selection for the manual reference frequency is as follows.
Selection of normal/inverse operation

Terminal command “IVS
IVS” Action
for frequency setting 1 (C53)
0: Normal operation - Normal
1: Inverse operation - Inverse
When process control is performed by the PID control facility integrated in the inverter, the “IVS” is used
to switch the PID processor output (reference frequency) between normal and inverse, and has no effect
on any normal/inverse
normal/inverse operation selection of the manual frequency setting.
( Function codes J01 to J19, J57 to J62)
■ Interlock – “IL” (Function code data = 22)

In a configuration where a magnetic contactor (MC) is installed in the power output (secondary) circuit of the
inverter, the momentary power failure detection feature provided inside the inverter may not be able to accurately
detect a momentary power failure by itself. Using a digital signal input with the interlock command IL assures the
accurate detection. ( Function code F14)
Terminal command “IL” Meaning

OFF No momentary power failure has occurred.
A momentary power failure has occurred. (Restart after a
ON
momentary power failure enabled)
■ Select link operation (RS

(RS-485,
485, BUS option) – “LE” (Function code data = 24)
Turning this terminal command “LE” ON gives priorit
priority to frequency commands or run commands received via the
RS-485
485 communications link (H30) or the fieldbus option (y98). No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the
“LE” being ON. ( Function codes H30 and y98)
■ Universal DI -- “U-DI”
“U DI” (Function code data = 25)
Universal DI “U
“U-DI”
DI” assigned to digital input terminals allow to monitor signals from peripheral equipment
connected to those inputs from an upper controller via an RS-485
485 or fieldbus communications link. Input terminals
assigned to “U
“U-DI”
DI” are simply monitored and do not operate the inverter.
For an access to universal DI via the RS-
RS -485
485 or fieldbus communications link, refer to their respective
Instruction Ma
Manuals.
nuals.
■ Select auto search for idling motor speed at starting – “STM” (Function code data = 26)
This digital terminal command determines, at the start of operation, whether or not to search for idling motor speed
and follow it. ( Function code H09)
Appendix
Appendix-143
143
■ Force to stop – “STOP” (Function code data = 30)

Turning this terminal command “STOP” OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the H56
data (Deceleration time for forced stop). After the motor stops, the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm
er6 displayed. ( Function code F07)
■ Reset PID integral and differential terms – “PID-RST” (Function code data = 33)
Turning this terminal command “PID-RST” ON resets the integral and differential components of the PID processor.
( Function codes J01 to J19, J23, J24, J57 to J62)
■ Hold PID integral term – “PID-HLD” (Function code data = 34)

Turning this terminal command “PID-HLD” ON holds the integral components of the PID processor.
( Function codes J01 to J19, J23, J24, J57 to J62)
■ Select local (keypad) command – “LOC” (Function code data = 35)

This terminal command “LOC” switches the sources of run and frequency commands between remote and local.
For details of switching between remote and local modes, refer to the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 3
“3.3.6 Remote and local modes.”
■ Enable run commands – “RE” (Function code data = 38)

Once this terminal command is assigned to any digital input terminal, the inverter no longer starts running with a
run command only. Upon receipt of a run command, the inverter gets ready to run and outputs an “AX2” signal
("Run command entered").
Entering an “RE” signal ("Enable run commands") when the inverter is ready for running starts the inverter to run.
Input Output
Run command Enable run commands Run command entered Inverter status
(e.g., FWD) RE AX2
OFF OFF OFF Stopped
OFF ON OFF Stopped
ON OFF ON Stopped
ON ON ON Running
Typical operation sequence of RE

(1) A run command “FWD” is given to the inverter.
(2) When the inverter gets ready for running, it outputs an “AX2” signal ("Run command entered").
(3) Upon receipt of the “AX2”, the upper equipment gets ready to operate the peripherals (e.g., opening a
damper).
(4) Upon completion of preparation of the peripherals, the upper equipment gives an “RE” signal ("Enable run
command") to the inverter.
(5) Upon receipt of the “RE”, the inverter starts running.
■ Dew condensation prevention – “DWP” (Function code data = 39)

By turning ON dew condensation prevention “DWP” with the inverter stopped, DC current flows, and the motor
temperature is raised to prevent dew condensation. ( Function code J21)
APPENDICES
Appendix-144
■ Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power for 50 Hz and 60 Hz – “ISW50” and “ISW60”
(Function code data = 40 and 41)
With the terminal command ISW50 or ISW60 assigned, the inverter controls the magnetic contactor that switches
the motor drive source between the commercial power and the inverter output according to the integrated
sequence.
This control is effective when not only ISW50 or ISW60* has been assigned
assigned to the input terminal but also the SW88
and SW52
SW52-2 2 signals have been assigned to the output terminals. (It is not essential to assign the SW52--1 signal.)
* The ISW50 or ISW60 should be selected depending upon the frequency of the commercial power; the fo
former
for 50 Hz and the latter for 60 Hz.
For details about SW88 and SW52-2

SW52 ("Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter
output"), refer to E20
E20, E21 and E27.
For details of these commands, refer to the circuit diagrams and timing sche
schemes
mes on the following pages.
Operation
Terminal command assigned (Switching from commercial power to
inverter)
ISW50
Start at 50 Hz.
Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power (50 Hz)
ISW60
Start at 60 Hz.
Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power (60 Hz)
Do not assign both ISW50 and ISW60 at the same time. Doing so cannot guarantee the result.
Appendix
Appendix-145
145
Circuit Diagram and Configuration
Main Circuit
Configuration of Control Circuit
Summary of Operation
Output
Input
(Status signal and magnetic contactor) Inverter
SW52-1 SW52-2 SW88 operation
ISW50 or ISW60 Run command
52-1 52-2 88
OFF ON ON
OFF OFF OFF
(Commercial power) OFF OFF
ON ON ON
ON ON OFF
(Inverter) OFF OFF
APPENDICES
Appendix-146
Timing Scheme
Switching from inverter operation to commercial-power
commercial power operation
ISW60: ON → OFF
ISW50/ISW60
(1) The inverter output is shut OFF immediately (Power gate IGBT OFF)
(2) The inverter primary circuit SW52-1
SW52 and the inverter secondary side SW52-2
SW52 are turned OFF immediately.
(3) If a run command is present after an elapse of t1 (0.2 sec + time specified by H13), the commercial power
circuit SW88 is turned ON.
Switching from commercial

commercial-power
power operation to inverter operation
ISW50/ISW60: OFF → ON
ISW50/ISW60
(1) The inverter primary circuit SW52-1
SW5 is turned ON immediately.
(2) The commercial power circuit SW88 is turned OFF immediately.
(3) After an elapse of t2 (0.2 sec + time required for the main circuit to get ready) from when SW52-1
1 is turned
ON, the inverter secondary circuit SW52-2 is tur
turned ON.
(4) After an elapse of t3 (0.2 sec + time specified by H13) from when SW52-2 is turned ON, the inverter
harmonizes once the motor that has been freed from the commercial power to the commercial power
frequency. Then the motor returns to the operat
operation
ion driven by the inverter.
t1: 0.2 sec + Time specified by H13 (Restart mode after momentary power failure)
t2: 0.2 sec + Time required for the main circuit to get ready
t3: 0.2 sec + Time specified by H13 (Restart mode after momentary power failure)
Appendix
Appendix-147
147
Selection of Commercial Power Switching Sequence

J22 specifies whether or not to automatically switch to commercial
commercial-power
power operation when an inverter alarm occurs.
Data for J22 Sequence (upon occurrence of an alarm)
0 Keep inverter-operation
inverter operation (Stop due to alarm.)
1 Automatically switch to commercial
commercial-power
power operation
• The sequence operates normally also even when SW52-1 is not used and the main power of the
inverter is supplied at all times.
• Using SW52-1
SW52 requires connecting the input terminals [R0] and [T0] for an auxiliary control power.
Without the connection, turning SW52
SW52-1 OFF loses also the control power.
• The sequence operates normally even if an alarm occurs in the inverter except when the inverteinverter itself
is broken. Therefore, for a critical facility, be sure to install an emergency switching circuit outside the
inverter.
• Turning ON both the magnetic contactor MC (88) at the commercial-power
commercial power side and the MC (52
(52-2) at
the inverter output side at the
the same time supplies main power mistakenly from the output (secondary)
side of the inverter, which may damage the inverter. To prevent it, be sure to set up an interlocking
logic outside the inverter.
Examples of Sequence Circuits

1) Standard sequence
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-148
148
2) Sequence with an emergency switching function
3) Sequence with an emergency switching function --Part 2 (Automatic switching by the alarm output issued by
the inverter)
Appendix-149
■ Pulse train input – “PIN” (Only for X5 terminal (E05)) (Function code data = 48), Pulse train sign –
“SIGN” ((For all terminal except X5 terminal (E05)) (Function code data = 49)
Assigning the command “PIN” to digital input terminal [X5] enables the frequency command by the pulse train input.
Assigning the command “SIGN” to one of the digital input terminals except [X5] enables the pulse train sign input to
specify the polarity of frequency command. ( Function code F01)
■ Clear running motor regular switching time – “MCLR” (Function

(Function code data = 50)
Turning the MCLR ON clears the regular switching time of the running motor. ( Refer to J436.
J436.)
■ Battery/UPS operation valid command “BATRY/UPS” (Function code data = 59)

Battery/UPS
/UPS operation valid command “BATRY/UPS” (Function code data = 59)
The Battery/UPS operation can drive the motor during undervoltage situation.
FRENIC-Ace
Ace has two types of operation and those are selectively used depending on the inverter capacity.
When “BATRY/UPS” is assigned to the digital input terminal, the operation becomes same as F14 = 0 regardless
of F14 setting, and the inverter trips immediately .
When “BATRY/UPS” is on, the input open phase protection operation becomes invalid regardless of the function
code H98 bit 1 setting.
Battery/UPS operation is divided into battery operation and UPS operation. Battery operation assumes that
operation is performed by supplying the main power from the battery, and control power from the UPS. Please note
that depending on the inverter capacity, battery operation and UPS ope operation
ration may not be possible for certain
models.
(1) Connect the battery power supply before or simultaneously with turning on the BATRY/UPS signal.
(2) Between the period from turning on of the BATRY/UPS signal and MC2 (and power supply start
from the battery)
battery) to the state that the battery operation is possible, the delay time “T1” + “T2”
indicated in the above “time chart” occurs.
(3) Do not turn on the BATRY/UPS signal when the voltage is same or higher than the specified
undervoltage level (before lu is indicated after the power failure). If the BATRY/UPS signal is turned
on with the voltage same or higher than the undervoltage value, the specified level,, the short circuit
for charging resistor 73X remains on.
(4) During the battery operation, avoid driv
driving
ing with application of the heavy load. Operate with no load
or braking load.
(Sufficient torque cannot be obtained by the battery voltage, and the motor may stall in such case.)
(5) Operate the motor at a low speed, and pay attention to the battery capacity.
capaci
In addition, when the high voltage is supplied (such as when 300 VDC power supply at 200 V class
inverter and 600 VDC power supply at 400 V class inverter), operate normally without the battery.
(6) During the normal operation, it is required to turn o
off the BATRY/UPS signal. If the main power is
turned on with the BATRY/UPS signal on, the 73X remains ON, causing the rectifier diode getting
damaged.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-150
150
■ UPS operation (Available in FRN0020E2 --2G H / FRN0085E2 -4E

EH / FRN0012E2 -7G H or below )
When this terminal command is turned on, the undervoltage protection is invalidated. In that case, the motor can
be operated by the inverter with undervoltage status by the UPS power.
Also the function codes are able to set during UPS operation. However, please note the following.
Alarm er1 or erf may occur if power supply is turned OFF while the inverter is writing data to memory. In that case,
the function code data are initialized by setting the data of H03 to “1”.
Related function codes Setting

ng range
H111 : UPS operation Level 120 to 220 VDC: (200 V class), 240 to 440 VDC: (400 V class)
Prerequisite of UPS operation

(1) Terminal function BATRY/UPS (data = 59) can be assigned to any digital input terminal.
(2) As shown in Figure , voltage is supplied from the UPS to the main circuit (L1/R
(L1/R-L3/T
L3/T or L2/S-L3/T).
L2/S
(3) Required voltage level will differ depending on the operati
operation
on speed and load.
(4) The terminal that BATRY/UPS (data = 59) is assigned has to be turned on simultaneously with the
MC2.
Figure J.9 Connection diagram example

(FRN0020E2
FRN0020E2 -2G H or below, FRN085
FRN085E2 -4EH or below, FRN0012E2
FRN0 -7G H or below )
Appendix
Appendix-151
151
■ UPS operation UPS operation (When BATRY/UPS = ON)

(1) The inverter can run the motor starting from the voltage level specified with H111.
(2) The RDY (“Inverter ready to run” signal) is forced to go OFF.
(3) The circuit of charging resistor is shorted (73X = ON) after the delay time T1 (0.2 sec) from the timing which
BATRY/UPS terminal being turned on and the DC link bus voltage exceeds UPS operation level (specified
with H111) or above. In addition, after the delay time T2 (max. 0.1 sec.), the UPS operation starts. For T1
specifications, see the table below.
(4) During the UPS operation, the inverter can run the motor.
(5) S-curve acceleration/deceleration becomes invalid.
FRN0020E2 -2G H or below

Power supply condition FRN0085E2 -4EH or below
FRN0012E2 -7G H or below
Time required for turning on the control power supply, switching to the T1=0.2 s
power supply from the battery, and then to turning on the charging
resistor short circuit 73X
Time required from the occurrence of momentary power failure in the
control power supply ON status, switching to the power supply from the
battery, and turning on of the short circuit 73X for the charging resistor
Figure J.10 UPS operation timing chart

APPENDICES
Appendix-152
■ Battery operation
on (Available with
w FRN0059E -4EH
9E2 H or above)
When
hen this terminal command is turned on, the undervoltage protection is invalidated. In that case, the motor can
be operated by the inverter with undervoltage status by the battery power.
In addition, the main power down detection also becomes invalid regardless of H72 setting.
Prerequisite of battery operation
(1) Terminal function BATRY/UPS (data = 59) can be assigned to any digital input terminal.
(2) As shown in Figure and Figure , DC link bus voltage is supplied from the battery to the main
circuit (L1/R-L3/T
(L1/R L3/T or L2/S-L3/T).
L2/S
(3) The specified voltage (sinusoidal waveform or DC voltage) is input to auxiliary power termi
terminal
(R0-T0).
T0).
(4) In case of FRN0203E2 -4EH or above, input the specified power supply (sinusoidal waveform) to
the fan power supply auxiliary input (R1
(R1-T1)
T1) as shown in Figure , and change the fan power supply
switching connector as shown in Figure J.J in order to execute the battery operation.
(5) The
e terminal that BATRY/UPS (data = 59) is assigned has to be turned on simultaneously with the
MC2.
Figure J.11 Connection diagram example (FRN0020E2

(FRN0020E2 -2
2G H or below, FRN0168E2 -4EH or below)
Figure J.12 Connection diagram example ((FRN0203E2 -4EH or above

above)
Figure J.13 Fan power supply switching
Appendix
Appendix-153
153
■ Battery operation (When BATRY/UPS = ON)
(1) Undervoltage protection function (lu )becomes non-operating status.
(2) The inverter can operate the motor even under the undervoltage condition.
(3) Operation ready complete RDY signal is turned off.
(4) The circuit of charging resistor is shorted (73X = ON) after the delay time T1 from the BATRY/UPS terminal
being turned on. In addition, after the delay time T2 (max. 0.1 sec.), the battery operation starts. For T1
specifications, see Table J..
Figure J.J Battery operation timing chart
Table J.9 Power supply condition
Power supply condition FRN0059E2 -4 H or above

Time required for turning on the control power supply, switching to the T1=500 ms
power supply from the battery, and then to turning on the charging
resistor short circuit 73X
Time required from the occurrence of momentary power failure in the
control power supply ON status, switching to the power supply from
the battery, and turning on of the short circuit 73X for the charging
resistor
(5) S-curve acceleration/deceleration becomes invalid.

(6) The operable speed during the battery operation is calculated by using the following expression.
Batteryvoltage − 5[v]
Frequencycommand ≤ × Base frequency(F04) × k
2 × Base voltage(F05)
Here,
Battery voltage : 24 VDC or higher (200 V class)
48 VDC or higher (400 V class)
Rated frequency : F04
Rated voltage : F05 (Motor rated voltage (V))
K : Safety factor (Lower than 1 Approx. 0.8)
APPENDICES
Appendix-154
■ Count the run time o

off commercial power-driven
power driven motor
motor-1 – “CRUN-M1”
M1” (Function code data = 72)
This terminal command enable
enables the inverter to count the cumulative run time of motor-1
motor 1 even when it is driven by
commercial power (not by the inverter).
When the “CRUN-M1”” is ON, the inverter judges that the motor
motor--1
1 is driven by commercial power, respectively, and
counts the run time of the corresponding motor. ( Function codes H44, H94)
■ Select speed control parameter 1 – “MPRM1” (Function code data = 78)

The combination of the ON/OFF states of digital input signal ““MPRM
MPRM1”
1” selects one of 2 different level speed control
parameter sets for vector control PMSM.
PMSM ( Function codes d01 to d08)
Input signal
Speed control parameter
“MPRM1
MPRM1”
OFF Speed control parameter sets 1 : d01

d01～d08
d08
ON Speed control parameter sets 2 : A43

A43～A50
A50
■ Cancel customizable logic – “CLC” (Function code data = 80), Clear all customizable logic timers –
“CLTC” (Function code data = 81)
Terminal command “CLC” stops the operation of customizable logic. Terminal comman
commandd “CLTC” clears all
customizable logic timers. ( Function codes U codes)
■ Cancel anti
anti-regenerative
regenerative control – “AR-CCL”
CCL” (Function code data = 82)
Terminal command “AR
“AR-CCL”
CCL” ON disables
disable anti-regenerative
regenerative control. ( Function code H69)
■ Run command 2/1 – “FR2”/”FR1 FR1” (Function

Function code data = 87)
87), Run forward 2 – “FWD2
FWD2” (Function
Function code
data = 88)
88), Run reverse 2 – “REV2
REV2” (Function
The FR2/FR1 switches between the run command source selected by Run command (FWD and REV) and the one
selected by Run comman
commandd 2 (FWD2 and REV2)
Run command expedient

[FR2/FR1]
Link disable Link enable
OFF By F02 ：FWD/REV
S06：
ON ，[REV2]
[FWD2]， S06：FWD2/REV2
FWD2/REV2
■ Run forward – “FWD” (Function code data = 98)

Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction; turning it OFF decelerates it to stop.
This terminal command “FWD” can be assigned only to E98 or E99.
■ Run reverse – “REV” (Function code data = 99)

Turning this terminal command “REV” ON runs the motor in the reverse direction; turning it OFF decele
decelerates it to
stop.
This terminal command “REV” can be assigned only to E98 or E99.
■ No function assigned – “NONE” (Function code data = 100)

It allows the inverter to run unaffected by ON/OFF of signals. It is used when a signal is externally input using
customizable logic. It is also used to temporarily disable a terminal function.
■ Switch pump control – “PCHG

PCHG” (Function
Turning the PCHG ON enables the pump control switching signal to switch the motor regularly. This command is
available only when J401 (Pump control mode selection) = any of 1 through 3, 11 through 13, and 52. ( Function
code J401
J401.)
Appendix
Appendix-155
155
■ Enable master motor drive in mutual operation – “MEN0” (Function code data = 150)
Turning the MEN0 ON enables the master motor to be driven in mutual operation. Turning it OFF disables the
master motor to stop it. If no MEN0 is assigned, the master motor is capable of being driven. ( Function code
J401.)
■ Enable pump control motor 1 to 4 to be driven – “MEN1” to “MEN4” (Function code data = 151 to 154)
Turning the MEN1 to MEN8 ON enables the corresponding motors to be driven under pump control. Turning them
OFF prohibits the motors from being driven. If MEN1 to MEN8 are not assigned, those motors are capable of being
driven. In mutual operation, slave inverters 1 and 2 correspond to MEN1 and MEN2, respectively. ( Function
code J401.)
■ PID control multistage command 1, 2 – “PID-SS1”, “PID-SS2” (Function code data = 171, 172)
“PID-SS1” and “PID-SS2” can be used to select 4 different PID commands. ( Function codes J136 to J138)
■ External PID multistep command – “EPID-SS1”, “EPID-SS2” (Function code data = 181, 182)
Turning the “EPID-SS1” and “EPID-SS2” ON/OFF selectively switches the external PID multistep commands
(preset by J551 through J553) in three steps. ( Function codes J550 to J553.)
■ External PID control 1 ON command – “EPID1-ON” (Function code data = 201)

Turning the EPID1-ON ON enables external PID control 1. ( Function codes J501.)
■ Cancel external PID control 1 – “%/EPID1 “(Function code data = 202)

Turning the %/EPID1 ON switches from external PID control 1 to manual commands (running at the frequency
selected from the keypad or analog input). ( Function codes J540.)
Terminal command
Function
“%/EPID1”
OFF Enable external PID control 1
ON Disable external PID control 1 (Enable manual commands)
■ Switch normal/inverse operation under external PID control 1 – “EPID1-IVS” (Function code data =
203)
The “EPID1-IVS” switches the output signal of external PID control 1 between normal and inverse operations.
■ Reset external PID1 integral and differential components – “EPID1-RST” (Function code data = 204)
Turning the “EPID1-RST” ON resets the integral and differential terms of the PID processor of external PID control
1.( Function codes J501 thorough J553.)
■ Hold external PID1 integral component – “EPID1-HLD” (Function code data = 205)
When the “EPID1-HLD” is ON, the inverter holds the integral term of the PID processor of external PID control 1.
( Function codes J501 through J553.)
APPENDICES
E10 to E15 Acceleration time 2 to 4, Deceleration time 2 to 4 (Refer to F07)
Appendix-156
Refer to the description of F07.
E16, E17 Torque limiter 2 (driving), 2 (braking) (Refer to F40)
For the torque limiter 2 (driving) and 2 (braking) settings, refer to the description of F40.
Appendix-157
E20 to E2
E21 Terminals [Y1] function to [Y2
2] function
E27 Terminal [30A/B/C] function (Relay output)
E20 through E21 and E27 assign output signals to general

general-purpose,
purpose, programmable output terminals, [Y1], [Y2]
and [30A/B/C]. These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how
the inverter interprets the ON or OFF state
state of each terminal. The factory default setting is normal logic system
“Active ON.”
Terminals [Y1] and [Y2] are transistor outputs and terminals [30A/B/C] are contact outputs. In normal logic, if an
alarm occurs, the relay will be energized so that [30A] and [30C] will be closed, and [30B] and [30C] opened. In
negative logic, the relay will be de
de-energized
energized so that [30A] and [30C] will be opened, and [30B] and [30C] closed.
This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems.
• When negative logic is employed, output signal is OFF(active) while the inverter is powered OFF. To
avoid causing system malfunctions by this, interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external
power supply. Furthermore, the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1.5
seconds (for 22 kW or below) or 3 seconds (for 30 kW or above) after power-ON,
power ON, so introduce such a
mechanism that masks them during the transient period.
• Terminals [30A/B/C] use mechanical contacts. They ccannot
annot stand frequent ON/OFF switching. Where
frequent ON/OFF switching is anticipated (for example, by using frequency frequency arrival signal),
signal use
transistor outputs [Y1] and [Y2] instead.
The service life of a relay is approximately 200,000 times if it is switched
switc hed ON and OFF at one
one-second
intervals. For signals expected to be turned ON/OFF frequently, use terminals [Y1] and [Y2] for output.
The tables given on the following pages list functions that can be assigned to terminals [Y1], [Y2], and [30A/B/C].
The descriptions
scriptions are, in principle, arranged in the numerical order of assigned data. However, the signal is rel
related
has been described together. Refer to the function codes or signals in the “Related function codes/signals (data)”
column, if any.
Explanations of each function are given in normal logic system “Active ON.”
Control
Data Related function
mode
Terminal commands assigned Symbol codes/ Related
Active Active V/f PM signals (data)
ON OFF SLV
0 1000 Inverter running “RUN
RUN” Y Y ―
1 1001 Frequency (speed) arrival “FAR
FAR” Y Y E30
2 1002 Frequency (speed) detected “FDT
FDT” Y Y E31, E32
3 1003 Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped) “LU”
“ Y Y ―
5 1005 Inverter output limiting “IOL
IOL” Y Y ―
6 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure
Auto-restarting “IPF” Y Y F14
7 1007 Motor overload early warning “OL”
“ Y Y E34,, F10, F12
8 1008 Keypad operation enabled “KP”
“ Y Y ―
10 1010 Inverter ready to run “RDY
RDY” Y Y ―
Switch motor drive source between commercial power and
11 ― "SW88" Y N
inverter output (For MC on commercial line) E01 to E05
Switch motor drive source between commercial power and “ISW50”(40)
“ISW50”(40
12 ― "SW52-2"
"SW52 Y N
inverter output (For secondary side) “ISW60”(41)
Switch motor drive source between commercial power and J22
13 ― "SW52-1"
"SW52 Y N
inverter output (For primary side)
15 1015 Switch MC on the input power lines “AX”
“ Y Y ―
16 1016 Pattern operation stage transition “TU”
“ Y Y
17 1017 Pattern operation cycle completed “TO”
“ Y Y
18 1018 Pattern operation stage No. 1 “STG1
STG1” Y Y C21 to C28
STG2” Y Y
STG4” Y Y
25 1025 Cooling fan in operation “FAN
FAN” Y Y H06
26 1026 Auto
Auto-resetting “TRY
TRY” Y Y H04, H05
27 1027 Universal DO “U
U-DO” Y Y ―
APPENDICES
28 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning “OH” Y Y ―

30 1030 Lifetime alarm “LIFE
LIFE” Y Y H42
Appendix
Appendix-158
158
Control
Data Related function
mode
Terminal commands assigned Symbol codes/ Related
Active Active V/f PM signals (data)
ON OFF SLV
33 1033 Reference loss detected “REF
REF OFF”
OFF Y Y E65
35 1035 Inverter outputting “RUN2
RUN2” Y Y RUN (0)
36 1036 Overload prevention controlling “OLP
OLP” Y Y H70
37 1037 Current detected “ID”
“ Y Y E34,, E35, E37,
41 1041 Low current detected “IDL” Y Y E38, E55, E56
42 1042 PID alarm “PID

PID-ALM” Y Y J11 to J13
43 1043 Under PID control “PID
PID-CTL” Y Y J01
44 1044 Under sleep mode of PID control “PID
PID-STP” Y Y J08, J09
45 1045 Low torque detected “U
U-TL” Y Y E80,
80, E81
52 1052 Running forward “FRUN
FRUN” Y Y ―
53 1053 Running reverse “RRUN
RRUN” Y Y ―
(Refer to
FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC
54 1054 Under remote mode “RMT
RMT” Y Y
User’s
’s Manual
Section 3.3.6)
55 1055 Run command entered “AX2
AX2” Y Y
56 1056 Motor overheat detected by thermistor “THM
THM” Y Y H26,
H26 H27
59 1059 Terminal [C1] (C1 function)wire break detected “C1OFF
C1OFF” Y Y ―
68 1068 Motor regular switching early warning "MCHG
MCHG" Y Y J401 to J493
69 1069 Pump control output limit signal "MLIM" Y Y J401 to J493
76 1076 Speed deviation excess “PG-ERR”
“PG N N d21 to d23
77 1077 Low DC link bus voltage detection “U--EDC” Y Y E76
79 1079 During deceleration in momentary power failure “IPF2
IPF2” Y Y F14, F15
84 1084 Maintenance timer counted up “MNT
MNT” Y Y H44,, H78, H79
87 1087 Frequency arrival and frequency
frequency detected “FARFDT” Y Y E30, E31, E32
88 1088 Auxiliary motor drive signal “AUX_L
AUX_L” Y Y
98 1098 Light alarm “L--ALM” Y Y H81, H82
99 1099 Alarm output (for any alarm) “ALM
ALM” Y Y ―
111 1111 “CLO
CLO1” U71 to U75, U81
Customizable logic output signal 1 to 10 Y Y
to 120 to 1120 to “CLO10” to U90
160 1160 Motor 1 being driven by inverter "M1_I
M1_I" Y Y
161 1161 Motor 1 being driven by commercial power "M1_L
M1_L" Y Y
M2_I" Y Y
M2_L" Y Y
M3_I" Y Y
M3_L" Y Y
167 1167 Motor 4 being driven by inverter "M4_L
M4_L" Y Y
J401 to J493
180 1180 In mutual operation "M--RUN" Y Y
181 1181 Alarm in mutual operation "M-ALM" Y Y
211 1211 Under external PID1 control "EPID1
EPID1-CTL" Y Y
212 1212 External PID1 output "EPID1
EPID1-OUT" Y Y
213 1213 Running under external PID1 "EPID1
EPID1-RUN" Y Y
214 1214 External PID1 alarm "EPV1
EPV1-ALM" Y Y
215 1215 External PID1 feedback error "EPV1
EPV1-OFF" Y Y
Any negative logic (Active OFF) command cannot be assigned to the functions marked with ““-” in the
“Active OFF” column.
■ Inverter running – “RUN” (Function code data = 0), Inverter outputting – “RUN2” (Function code data =
35)
These output signals tell the external
external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher.
Appendix
Appendix-159
159
If assigned in negative logic (Acti
(Active
ve OFF),
OFF), these signals can be used to tell the “Inverter being stopped” state.
Output signal Basic function Remarks

These signals come ON when the inverter is running. Goes OFF even during DC
RUN
Under V/f control: These signals come ON if the braking.
inverter output frequency exceeds the starting
frequency, and go OFF if it drops below the stop Comes ON even during DC
RUN2 frequency. The “RUN” signal can also be used as a braking, pre
pre-excitation,
excitation, zero
“Speed valid” signal. speed control.
■ Frequency (speed) arrival–

arrival “FAR” (Function code data = 1)
These output signals come ON when the difference between the output frequency (detected speed) and reference
frequency (reference speed) comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30.
■ Frequency (speed) detected – “FDT” (Function code data = 2)

These output signal FDT come ON when the output frequency (detected speed) exceeds the frequency detection
level specified by E31, E36 or E54, respectively, and go OFF when the output frequency (detected speed) drops
below the “Frequency detection level (E31, E36 or E54) - Hysteresis width (E32).”
( Function codes E31 and E32)
■ Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped) – “LU” (Function code data = 3)

This output signal comes ON wwhen
hen the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage
level. When this signal is ON, the inverter cannot run even if a run command is given. It goes OFF when the
voltage exceeds the level.
■ Inverter output limiting – “IOL” (Function code data = 5)

The output signal IOL comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the
following actions (minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms).
• Torque limiting (F40, F41, E16 and E17, Maximum internal value)
• Current limiting by software (F43 and F44)
• Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware (H12 = 1)
• Automatic deceleration (Anti
(Anti-regenerative
regenerative control) (H69)
When the “IOL” is ON, it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from tthe
he reference
frequency because of the limiting functions above.
■ Auto
Auto-restarting
restarting after momentary power failure – “IPF” (Function code data = 6)
This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period a
after
the inverter detects an undervoltage condition and shuts down the output until restart has been completed (the
output has reached the reference frequency). ( Function code F14)
■ Motor overload early warning – “OL” (Function code data = 7)

signall is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition (alarm code 0l1 ) of the motor so that the user
The OL signa
can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens. ( Function code E34)
■ Keypad operation enabled – “KP” (Function code data = 8)
This output signal comes ON when the / keys are specified as the run command source.
■ Inverter ready to run – “RDY” (Function code data = 10)

This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation (such
as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit) and no protective functions are
activated.
■ Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output – “SW88”, “SW52
“SW52-2” and
“SW52
“SW52-1”
1” (Function code data = 11,
11, 12, and 13)
APPENDICES
Assigning these output signals to transistor output terminals [Y1] and [Y2] enables the terminal command “ISW50”
or “ISW60” that controls the magnetic contactor for switching the motor drive source between the commercial
power and the inverte
inverterr output according to the integrated sequence. ( Function code E01 through E07 (data =
40 and 41).
41).)
Appendix
Appendix-160
160
■ Switch MC on the input power lines – “AX” (Function code data = 15)
In response to a run command FWD, this output signal controls the magnetic contactor on the commercial-power
supply side. It comes ON when the inverter receives a run command. It goes OFF after the motor decelerates to
stop with a stop command received. This signal immediately goes OFF upon receipt of a coast-to-stop command
or when an alarm occurs.
“AX” can be selected where there is control power such as with FRN0045E2E-4EH or above.
Power Motor
Y1 (“AX”)
“FWD” Inverter
Run command FWD
“AX” (52-1)
Preparation to run
(initial charging, etc.)
Inverter status Running
Motor speed
■ Pattern operation stage No. 1 – “STG1” (Function code data = 18), Pattern operation stage No. 2 –
“STG2” (Function code data = 19), Pattern operation stage No. 4 – “STG4” (Function code data = 20)
Outputs the stage (operation process) currently performed during pattern operation.
Output terminal signal

Operation pattern stage No.
STG1 STG2 STG4
Stage 1 ON OFF OFF
Stage 2 OFF ON OFF
Stage 3 ON ON OFF
Stage 4 OFF OFF ON
Stage 5 ON OFF ON
Stage 6 OFF ON ON
Stage 7 ON ON ON
■ Cooling fan in operation – “FAN” (Function code data = 25)

With the cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled (H06 = 1), this output signal is ON when the cooling fan is in
operation, and OFF when it is stopped. This signal can be used to make the cooling system of peripheral
equipment interlocked for an ON/OFF control. ( Function code H06)
■ Auto-resetting – “TRY” (Function code data = 26) This output signal comes ON when auto resetting
(resetting alarms automatically) is in progress.
( Function codes H04 and H05)
Appendix-161
■ Universal DO -- “U-DO” (Function code data = 27)
Assigning this output signal to an inverter's output terminal and connecting the terminal to a digital input terminal of
peripheral equipment, allows an upper controller to send commands to the peripheral equipment via the RS-485 or
the fieldbus communications link. The universal DO can be used as an output signal independent of the inverter
operation.
For the procedure for access to Universal DO via the RS-485 or fieldbus communications link, refer to the
respective instruction manual.
■ Heat sink overheat early warning – “OH” (Function code data = 28)
This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action
before an overheat trip 0h1 actually happens.
ON at [(Overheat trip (0h1 ) temperature) – 5°C (41°F)] or higher
OFF at [(Overheat trip (0h1 ) temperature) - 8°C (46°F)] or lower
This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan (FRN0176E2E-4G H or above for 400 V class
series) is locked.
■ Lifetime alarm – “LIFE” (Function code data = 30)

This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors (DC link bus capacitors
or electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards) or cooling fan has expired. This signal should be used as a
guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan. If this signal comes ON, use the specified maintenance
procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not.
( Function code H42)
This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan (FRN0176E2E-4G H or above for 400 V class
series) is locked.
■ Reference loss detected – “REF OFF” (Function code data = 33)

This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is in a reference loss
state (as specified by E65) due to a wire break or a weak connection. This signal goes OFF when the normal
operation under the analog input is resumed. ( Function code E65)
■ Overload prevention controlling – “OLP” (Function code data = 36)

This output signal comes ON when overload prevention control is activated.
(The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.) ( Function code H70)
■ Current detected – “ID” (Function code data = 37)

When the inverter output current exceeds the level specified by E34 for the period specified by E35, the ID signal
turns ON, respectively. (The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
■ Low current detected – “IDL” (Function code data = 41)

When the inverter output current falls to or below the level specified by E34 for the period specified by E35, the IDL
signal turns ON, respectively. (The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
■ PID alarm – “PID-ALM” (Function code data = 42)

Assigning this output signal enables PID control to output absolute-value alarm or deviation alarm.
( Function codes J11 to J13)
APPENDICES
Appendix-162
■ Under PID control – “PID-CTL”

CTL” (Function code data = 43)
This output signal comes ON when PID control is enabled (“Cancel PID control” (Hz/PID) = OFF) and a run
command is ON. ( Function code J01)
When PID control is enabled, the inverter may stop due to the slow flowrate stopping function or other
reasons. If that happens, the “PID-CTL”
“PID CTL” signal remains ON. As long as the “PID-CTL”
-CTL”
CTL” signal is ON, PID
control is effective, so the inverter may abruptly resume its operation, depending on the feedback value
in PID control.
When PID control is enabled, even if the inverter stops its output during operation because of sensor signals or
other reasons, operation will resume automatically. Design your machinery so that safety is ensured even in
such cases.
■ Under sleep mode of PID control – “PID-STP”

STP” (Function code data = 44)
This output signal is ON when the inverter is in a stopped state due to the slow flowrate stopping function under
PID control.) ( Function codes J15 to J17, J23 J24)
■ Low torque detected – “U-TL”

TL” (Function code data = 45)
This output signal comes ON when the torque
torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command drops below the
level specified by E80 (Low torque detection (Level)) for the period specified by E81 (Low torque detection (Timer)).
(minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms) ( Function codes E80,
E8 E81)
■ Running forward – “FRUN” (Function code data = 52) Running reverse – “RRUN” (Function code data
= 53)
Output signal Assigned data Running forward Running reverse Inverter stopped
“FRUN” 52 ON OFF OFF
“RRUN” 53 OFF ON OFF
■ Under remote mode – “RMT” (Function code data = 54)

This output signal comes ON when the inverter switches from local to remote mode.
For details of switching between remote and local modes, refer to the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC Ace User
User’s
“3.3.
“3.3.6 Remote and local modes.”
■ Run command entered – “AX2
AX2” (Function code data = 55)
This output signal comes ON the moment the inverter is ready to run after receipt of a run command.
Refer to E01 through E07, Function code data = 38.
■ Motor overheat detected by thermistor – “THM” (Fu
(Function
nction code data = 56)
When
hen the PTC thermistor on the motor detects an overheat, the inverter turns this signal ON and continues to run,
without entering the alarm 0h4 state. This feature applies only when H26 data is set to “2.”
( Function codes H26 and H27)
■ Terminal [C1] (C1 function)wire break detected – “C1OFF” (Function code data = 59)
This output signal comes ON when the inverter detects that the input current to terminal [C1] (C1 function) drops
below 2 mA interpreting it as the terminal [C1] wire broken.
■ Motor regular switching early warning – “MCHG

MCHG” (Function code data = 68)
This outputs a motor regular switching early warning signal. ( Function codes J437)
■ Pump control output limit signal – “MLIM”” (Function code data = 69)
When the pump control mode selection is enabled (J401 ≠ 0), all of the enabled motors are to be driven. With all
motors being driven, if the motor increase judgment is established by the motor increase judgment ((Parallel
Judgment F
F)) (J450) and (Duration time)
time) (J451), the inverter issues an “MLIM” signal.
This signal detects the discharge rate (pressure) remaining low due to pump pipe rupture. etc.
Appendix
Appendix-163
163
■ Speed deviation excess detected -- “PG-ERR” (Function code data = 76)

This output signal comes ON when the inverter detects a speed deviation excess error with the d23 (speed
deviation excess error processing) data being set to “0: Continue to run,” in which the inverter does not enter the
alarm state. ( Function codes d21 through d23.)
■ Low DC link bus voltage detection – “U-EDC” (Function code data = 77)
This output signal comes ON when the DC intermediate voltage drops below E76 (DC link bus low-voltage
detection level), and it goes OFF when the DC intermediate voltage exceeds E76. ( Function code E76)
■ During decelerating at momentary power failure – “IPF2” (Function code data = 79)
When F14 data is set to 2 or 3, this output signal comes ON when the DC intermediate voltage drops below H15
(Continue to run level) and continue to run control starts. When the power returns and the DC intermediate voltage
becomes “at least 10 V higher than the voltage specified by H15,” the signal goes OFF.
Even when F14 data is set to 4 or 5, the signal comes ON when the DC intermediate voltage drops below the
undervoltage level, and it goes OFF when the DC intermediate voltage becomes “at least 10 V higher than the
undervoltage level.” ( Function codes F14 and H15)
■ Maintenance timer counted up – “MNT” (Function code data = 84)

Once the inverter’s cumulative run time or the startup times for the motor 1 exceeds the previously specified count,
this output signal comes ON. ( Function codes H78 and H79)
■ Frequency arrival AND frequency detected – “FARFDT” (Function code data = 87)
The FARFDT, which is an AND signal of FAR and FDT, comes ON when both signal conditions are met.
( Function codes E30 to E32)
■ Auxiliary motor drive signal – “AUX_L” (Function code data = 88)

This output signal comes ON when all motors enabled by MEN1 to MEN4 (Enable pump control motor 1 to 4 to be
driven) are running and the frequency of inverter-driven motors reaches the frequency operation level of the
auxiliary motor (J465).
When the frequency of inverter-driven motors drops below the hysteresis width of the auxiliary motor (J466), this
signal goes OFF.
When PID control is disabled (J01 = 0) or pump control is disabled (J401 = 0), this output signal is OFF.
( Function codes J465 to J469.)
■ Light alarm – “L-ALM” (Function code data = 98)

This output signal comes ON when a light alarm occurs. ( Function codes H81 and H82)
■ Alarm output (for any alarm) – “ALM” (Function code data = 99)
This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode.
■ Customizable logic output signal 1 to 10 – “CLO1” to “CLO10” (Function code data =111 to 120)
Outputs the result of customizable logic operation. ( Function codes U codes)
■ Motor 1 to Motor 3 being driven by inverter – “M1_I” to “M3_I” (Function code data = 160, 162, and 164)
These signals are used to find inverter-driven motors in pump operation. Assign these signals for motors to be
driven by the inverter when the "inverter drive motor floating system" (J401 = 2 or 12) or the "inverter drive motor
floating + commercial power-driven motor system" (J401 = 3 or 13) is selected. ( Function code J401.)
■ Motor 1 to Motor 4 being driven by commercial power -- M1_L to M4_L (Function code data = 161, 163,
165, and 167)
These signals are used to find motors being driven by commercial power in pump operation. Assign these signals
for motors to be driven by commercial power when the "inverter drive motor fixed system" (J401 = 1), the "inverter
drive motor floating system" (J401 = 2 or 12), or the "inverter drive motor floating + commercial power-driven motor
system" (J401 = 3 or 13) is selected. ( Function code J401.)
■ In mutual operation – “M-RUN” (Function code data = 180)

APPENDICES
This output signal comes ON when two or more motors are running in mutual operation (J401 = 52 or 54).
( Function code J401 through J404.)
Appendix-164
■ Alarm in mutual operation – “M-ALM” (Function code data = 181)

This output signal comes ON when two or more motors are stopped due to alarm in mutual operation (J401 = 52 or
54). ( Function code J401 through J404.)
■ Under external PID1 control – “EPID1-CTL” (Function code data = 211)

This signal comes ON when external PID control is selected, respectively. ( Function code J501.)
■ External PID1 output -- EPID1-OUT (Function code data = 212)

This signal is duty output of external PID control. ( Function code J501).
■ Running under external PID1 – “EPID1-RUN” (Function code data = 213)

This signal comes ON when external PID is activated. ( Function code J501).
■ External PID1 alarm – “EPV1-ALM” (Function code data = 214)

This signal comes ON when external PID1 alarms occur with external PID control selected. ( Function code
J521, J522, J524.)
■ External PID1 feedback error – “EPV1-OFF” (Function code data = 215)

This signal comes ON when a feedback (PV) level error occurs when external PID control is selected. ( Function
code J529 through J531.)
E30 Frequency arrival detection width (Detection width)
E30 specifies the detection level for the Frequency (speed) arrival signal “FAR”.
E20, E21and
Output signal E27 assigned Operating condition 1 Operating condition 2
data
The signals come ON when the

difference between the output
frequency (estimated/actual speed) FAR always goes OFF when the run
“FAR” 1 and the reference frequency command is OFF or the reference
(reference speed) comes within the speed is “0”.
frequency arrival width specified by
E30.
• Data setting range: E30: 0.0 to 10.0 (Hz)

The operation timings of each signal are as shown below.
Figure J.15
Appendix-165
Frequency setting Frequency setting change
Reference frequency (1)+E30

Reference frequency (1)
Reference frequency (1)-E30
Reference frequency (2)+E30
Reference frequency (2) Output frequency

Reference frequency (2)-E30
Frequency arrival “FAR”
Figure J.16
Figure J.17
APPENDICES
Appendix-166
E31, E32 Frequency detection (level and hysteresis width)
When the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31, the “Frequency (speed)
detection signal” comes ON; when it drops below the “Frequency detection level minus Hysteresis width specified
by E32,” it goes OFF.
The following three settings are available.
Operation level Hysteresis width

E20, E21 and
Name Output signal E27 assigned Range: 0.0 to Range: 0.0 to
data
500.0 Hz 500.0 Hz
Frequency detection “FDT” 2 E31 E32
Output frequency
Reference frequency
Detection level (E31)

Hysteresis width (E32)
Reset level
Time
Frequency detection
signal FDT
Time
Appendix-167
E34, E35 Overload early warning/Current detection (level and timer)

E37, E38 Low current detection (level and timer)
These function codes define the detection level and time for the Motor overload early warning “OL”, Current
detected “ID”, and Low current detected “IDL” output signals.
Motor
E20, E21 Detection level Timer Thermal time constant
Output characteristics
and E27
signal Range:
Assigned data Range: 0.01 to 600.00 s Range: See below Range: 0.5 to 75.0 min
See below
“OL” 7 E34 — F10 F12
“ID” 37 E34 E35
— —
“IDL” 41 E37 E38
• Data setting range

Detection level: 0.00 (Disable), 1 to 150% of inverter rated current
Motor characteristics 1: Enable (For a general-purpose motor with shaft-driven cooling fan)
2: Enable (For an inverter-driven motor, non-ventilated motor, or motor with separately
powered cooling fan)
■ Motor overload early warning signal – “OL”

The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition (alarm code 0l1 ) of the motor so that the user
can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens. The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output
current exceeds the level specified by E34. In typical cases, set E34 data to 80 to 90% against F11 data (Electronic
thermal overload protection for motor 1, Overload detection level). Set the temperature characteristics of the motor
with electronic thermal (motor characteristics selection, thermal time constant).
■ Current detected – “ID”

When the inverter output current exceeds the level specified by E34 for the period specified by E35, the ID signal
turns ON, respectively. When the output current drops below 90% of the specified detection level, the ID turns OFF.
(The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
Detection level
Detection level ×0.9
Output current
Timer
“ID”
■ Low current detected – “IDL”

This signal turns ON when the output current drops below the level specified by E37 (Low current detection, Level)
for the period specified by E38 (Timer). When the output current exceeds the “Low current detection level plus 5%
of the inverter rated current,” it goes OFF. (The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
Output current
Detection level+5%
Detection level
Timer
“IDL”
APPENDICES
Appendix-168
E42 LED display filter
Excluding speed monitor (when E43 = 0), E42 specifies a filter time constant to be applied for displaying the output
frequency, output current and other running status monitored on the LED monitor on the keypad. If the display
varies unstably so as to be hard to read due to load fluctuation or other causes, increase this filter time constant.
E43 LED monitor (Item selection)

Related function code: E48 LED monitor (speed monitor item)
E43 specifies the running status item to be monitored and displayed on the LED monitor.
Specifying the speed monitor with E43 provides a choice of speed-monitoring formats selectable with E48 (LED
monitor).
Display
sample on
Monitor item LED indication Unit Meaning of displayed value E43 data
the LED
monitor
Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED
Speed monitor 0
indicators.
Output frequency 1
(PM: Speed 5*00 Hz A kW Hz Indicated value = Output frequency (Hz) (E48 = 0)
command value)
Output frequency 2
(PM: Speed 5*00 Hz A kW Hz Indicated value = Output frequency (Hz) (E48 = 1)
estimated value)
Reference frequency 5*00 Hz A kW Hz Indicated value = Reference frequency (Hz) (E48 = 2)
120
Motor rotation speed 1500 Hz A kW min
-1
Indicated value = Output frequency (Hz) × (E48 = 3)
P01
Load rotation speed 30*0 Hz A kW min
-1
Indicated value = Output frequency (Hz) × E50 (E48 = 4)
Speed (%) 5*0 Hz A kW % Indicated value = × 100 (E48 = 7)
Maximum frequency
Output current 1"34 Hz A kW A Current output from the inverter in RMS 3

Output voltage 200u Hz A kW V Output voltage (RMS) of the inverter 4
Calculated torque 50 Hz A kW % Motor output torque in % (Calculated value) 8
Input power 1*25 Hz A kW kW Input power to the inverter 9
PID process command 1*0* Hz A kW - PID command and its feedback converted into 10
physical quantities of the object to be controlled
PID feedback value )0* Hz A kW - (e.g. temperature) 12
PID output in % as the maximum frequency (F03)
PID output 10** Hz A kW %
being at 100%
14
Load factor of the motor in % as the rated output

Load factor 50; Hz A kW %
being at 100%
15
Motor output )85 Hz A kW kW Motor output in kW 16

Analog signal input An analog input to the inverter in a format suitable
monitor
8"00 Hz A kW -
for a desired scale.
17
Input watt - hour (kWh)

Input watt-hour 10*0 Hz A kW kWh Indicated value = 25
100
External PID1 process
command (final) (physical 1*0* Hz A kW - External PID1 control command value or PID 60
value) feedback value converted into physical quantities
External PID1 feedback of the object to be controlled and then displayed.
value (physical value)
)0* Hz A kW - 61
External PID1 control output displayed as

External PID1 output (%) 8"00 Hz A kW % percentage with maximum output frequency (F03) 62
being 100%.
External PID1 control command value displayed
External PID1 manual
command (%)
8"00 Hz A kW % as percentage with maximum output frequency 63
(F03) being 100%.
Illuminated, Not illuminated
Appendix-169
E44 LED monitor (display when stopped)
E44 specifies whether the specified value (data = 0) or the output value (data = 1) will be displayed on the LED
monitor of the keypad when the inverter is stopped. The monitored item depends on the E48 (LED monitor, Speed
monitor item) setting as shown be
below.
low.
Inverter stopped
E48 data Monitored item
E44 = 0 Specified value E44 = 1 Output value
0 Output frequency 1 Reference frequency Output frequency 1

(PM:
PM: Speed command value)
value (PM:
PM: Speed command value
value)
1 Output frequency 2 Reference frequency Output frequency 2
(PM:
PM: Speed estimated value) (PM:
PM: Speed estimated value
value)
2 Reference frequency Reference frequency Reference frequency
3 Motor rotation speed Reference motor rotation Motor rotation speed
speed
4 Load rotation speed Reference load rotation speed Load rotation speed
7 Speed
peed (%) Reference display speed Display Speed
E48 LED monitor (speed monitor item) (refer to E43)
For details about LED Monitor (Speed monitor item), refer to the description of E43.
E50 Display coefficient for speed monitor
E50 specifies the coefficient that is used when the load shaft speed or line speed is displayed on the LED monitor.
(Refer
Refer to the description of E43.)
Load shaft speed [min-1
-
] = (E50: Display coefficient for speed monitor) × (Output frequency
fre quency Hz)
Line speed [m/min] = (E50: Display coefficient for speed monitor) × (Output frequency Hz)
E51 Display coefficient for “Input

nput watt
watt-hour
hour data”
data
watt hour data ( 5_10 ) in a part of

E51 specifies a display coefficient (multiplication factor) for displaying the input watt-hour
maintenance information on the keypad.
Input watt
watt-hour
hour data = Display coefficient (E51 data) × Input watt
watt-hour
hour (100kWh)
• Data setting range: 0.000 (cancel/reset) 0.001 to 9999
Setting E51 data to 0.000 clears the input watt
watt-hour
hour and its data to “0.” After clearing, be sure to restore
E51 data to the previous value; otherwise, input watt
watt-hour
hour data will not be accumulated.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-170
170
E52 Keypad (Menu display mode)
E52 provides a choice of three menu display modes for the standard keypad as listed below.
E52 data Menu display mode Menus to be displayed

0 Function code data editing mode Menus #0, #1 and #7
1 Function code data check mode Menus #2 and #7
2 Full-menu mode Menus #0 through #7
E52 specifies the menus to be displayed on the standard keypad. There are eight menus as shown in the table
below.
Menu # LED monitor shows: Function Display content
0 *.fnc Quick setup Quick setup function code

1 !.f__ Data setting F to o F to o group function code
2 ".rep Data check Modified function code
3 #.ope Operation monitor Operation status indication
4 $.i_o I/O check DIO, AIO status indication
5 %.che Maintenance Maintenance information indication
6 &.al Alarm information Alarm information indication
7 ' cpy Data copy Data copy function (only optional keypad )
For details of each menu item, refer to the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 3 “OPERATION USING THE
KEYPAD.”
Appendix-171
E59 Terminal [C1] function selection (C1 function//V2 function)
Specifies whether terminal [C1] is used with current input +4 to +20 mA/0 to 20 mA or voltage input 0 to +10 V. In
addition, switch SW7 on the interface board must be switched.
E59 data Input form Switch SW7
0 Current input: 4 to 20 mA/0 to 20 mA (C1 function) C1

1 Voltage input: 0 to 10 V (V2 function) V2
When using terminal [C1] as a PTC thermistor input, specify E59 = 0.
For using terminal [C1] for the C1, V2 or PTC function, switching as shown below is necessary.
Terminal [C1] SW3 SW4 E59 H26 C40

For use of C1 function (4 to 20 mA) C1 AI 0 0 0,10
For use of C1 function (0 to 20 mA) C1 AI 0 0 1, 11
For use of V2 function (0 to +10 V) V2 AI 1 0 Does not matter
For use of PTC function C1 PTC Does not matter 1,2 Does not matter
For details about SW3 and SW4, refer to the FRENIC-Ace

Ace User’s
User’s Manual Chapter 2, Section 2.2.
2.2.88.
Failure to correctly switch as shown above may cause a wrong analog input value
value, possibly leading to
unexpected operation of the inverter.
Injuries may occur.
Failure may occur.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-172
172
E61 to E63 Terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function), [C1] (V2 function) (extended function)
Select the functions of terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function) and [C1] (V2 function).
There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources.
E61, E62, E63

Function Description
data
0 None —
Auxiliary frequency input to be added to the reference frequency given
Auxiliary frequency by frequency setting 1 (F01). Will not be added to any other reference
1
command 1 frequency given by frequency setting 2 and multistep frequency
commands, etc. 100%/full scale
Auxiliary frequency input to be added to all frequenc
frequencyy commands.
commands Will
Auxiliary frequency
2 be added to frequency command 1, frequency command 2, multistep
command 2
frequency commands, etc. 100%/full scale
PID process Inputs command sources such as temperature
temper ature and pressure under PID
3
command control. You also need to set function code J02. 100%/full scale
Inputs feedback values such as temperature and pressure under PID
5 PID feedback value
control. 100%/full scale
By inputting analog signals from various sensors such as the
temperature sensors in air conditioners to the inverter, you can monitor
Analog signal input the state of external devices via the communications link. By using an
20
monitor appropriate display coefficient, you can also have various value
values to be
converted into physical quantities such as temperature and pressure
before they are displayed. 100%/full scale
External PID Inputs command values such as temperature and pressure for external
41
process command PID control. 100%/full scale
External PID Inputs feedback such as temperature and pressure for external PID
42
feedback value control. 100%/full scale
External PID Inputs manual command values such as temperature and pressure for
43 manual command external PID control. 100%/full sca
scale
le
(%)
If these terminals have been set up to have the same data, E61 is given priority. For E62 and E63, only
the terminal selected with E59 is enabled.
E64 Saving of digital reference frequency
E64 specifies how to save the reference frequency specified in digital format by the / keys on the keypad as
shown below.
E64 data Function

0 The reference frequency will be automatically saved when the main power is turned OFF. At the
next power-on,
power the reference frequency at the time of the previous power-off
power off applies.
1 Saving by pressing key. Pressing the key saves the reference frequency. If the control
power is turned OFF without pressing the [image] key, the data will be lost. At the next po wer-ON,
the inverter uses the reference frequency saved the key was pressed.
Appendix
Appendix-173
173
E65 Reference loss detection (continuous running frequency)
When the analog frequency command (setting through terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function) or [C1] (V2 function) has
dropped below 10% of the reference frequency within 400 ms, the inverter presumes that the analog frequency
command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by
E65 to the reference frequency. And “REF OFF” signal comes on.
( Function codes E20, E21 and E27, data = 33)
When the frequency command level (in voltage or current) returns to a level higher than that specified by E65, the
inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continue
continues
s to run following the frequency command.
400 ms
Analog frequency
command
Reference
ence loss
detection REF OFF
Normal frequency
command
Frequency command
(internal data)
In the diagram above, f1 is the level of the analog frequency command sampled at any given time. The sampling is
repeated at regular intervals to continually monitor the wiring connection of the analog frequency command.
• Data setting range:0 (Decelerate to stop) 20 to 120 % 999 (Disable)
Avoid an abrupt voltage or current
current change for the analog frequency command. An abrupt change may be
interpreted as a wire break.
Setting E65 data at “999” (Disable) allows the REF OFF signal (“Reference loss detected”) to be issued,
but does not allow the reference frequency to change. (T (The
he inverter runs at the analog frequency
command as specified.)
When E65 = “0” or “999,” the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is
“f1 × 0.2.”
When E65 = “100” (%) or higher, the reference frequency level at which the wire is recognized as fixed is
“f1 × 1.”
The reference loss detection is not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment (filter time
constants: C33, C38, and C43).
E76 DC link bus low-voltage

low voltage detection level
“U-EDC”
EDC” signal comes ON when the DC intermediate voltage drops below E76 (DC link bus low
low-voltage
voltage detection
level), and it goes OFF when the DC intermediate voltage exceeds E76.
( Function codes E20, E21 and E27, data = 77)
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-174
174
E80, E81 Torque detection 2/low torque detection (level and timer)
E80 specifies the operation level and E81 specifies the timer, for the output signal “U-TL”.
In the inverter’s low frequency operation, as a substantial error in torque calculation occurs, no low torque can be
detected within the operation range at less than 20% of the base frequency (F04). (In this case, the result of
recognition before entering this operation range is retained.) The U-TL signal goes off when the inverter is stopped.
Since the motor parameters are used in the calculation of torque, it is recommended that auto-tuning be applied by
function code P04 to achieve higher accuracy.
Detection level Timer

Output signal Assigned data
Range: 0 to 300% Range: 0.01 to 600.00 s
“U-TL” 45 E80 E81
■ Low torque detected – “U-TL”

This output signal comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command drops below the
level specified by E80 (Low torque detection (Level)) for the period specified by E81 (Low torque detection (Timer)).
The signal turns OFF when the calculated torque exceeds “the level specified by E80 or E80 plus 5% of the motor
rated torque.” (The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
Calculated torque or
torque command value
Detection level+5%
Detection level
Timer
“U-TL”
E98, E99 Terminal [FWD] function, Terminal [REV] function (refer to E01 to E05)
For details, refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05.
Appendix-175
J.3 C codes (Control functions)
C01 to C04 Jump frequency 1, 2 and 3, Jump frequency (Skip width)
These function codes enable the inverter to jump over three different points on the output frequency in order to skip
resonance caused by the motor speed and natural frequency of the driven machinery (load).
• While increasing the reference frequency, the moment the reference frequency reaches the bottom of the jump
frequency band, the inverter keeps the output at that bottom frequency. When the reference frequency exceeds
the upper limit of the jump frequency band, the internal reference frequency takes on the value of the reference
frequency. When decreasing the reference frequency, the situation will be reversed. Refer to the left figure
below.
• When more than two jump frequency bands overlap, the inverter actually takes the lowest frequency within the
overlapped bands as the bottom frequency and the highest as the upper limit. Refer to the right figure below.
Internal reference frequency Internal reference frequency
Jump frequency
skip width
Jump frequency Actual jump

Jump frequency Jump frequency
skip width frequency 3 skip width skip width
Jump
Jump
frequency Jump frequency 2
skip width frequency 2
Jump
Jump frequency 1
frequency 1
Reference frequency Reference frequency
■ Jump frequency 1, 2 and 3 (C01, C02 and C03)

Specify the center of the jump frequency band.
• Data setting range: 0.0 to 500.0 (Hz) (Setting to 0.0 results in no jump frequency band.)
■ Jump frequency skip width (C04)

Specify the jump frequency skip width.
• Data setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 (Hz) (Setting to 0.0 results in no jump frequency band.)
APPENDICES
Appendix-176
C05 to C19 Multistep frequency 1 to 15
■ These function codes specify 15 frequencies required for driving the motor at frequencies 1 to 15.
Turning terminal commands “SS1”, “SS2”, “SS4” and “SS8” ON/OFF selectively switches the reference frequency
of the inverter in 15 steps. To use this features, you need to assign “SS1”, “SS2”, “SS4” and “SS8” (“Select
multistep frequency”) to the digital input terminals with E01 to E05 (data = 0, 1, 2, and 3).
■ Multistep frequency 1 to 15 (C05 through C19)

The combination of “SS1”, “SS2”, “SS4” and “SS8” and the selected frequencies is as follows.
“SS8” “SS4” “SS2” “SS1” Selected frequency command

OFF OFF OFF OFF Other than multistep frequency*
OFF OFF OFF ON C05 (Multistep frequency 1)
OFF OFF ON OFF C06 (Multistep frequency 2)
OFF OFF ON ON C07 (Multistep frequency 3)
OFF ON OFF OFF C08 (Multistep frequency 4)
OFF ON OFF ON C09 (Multistep frequency 5)
OFF ON ON OFF C10 (Multistep frequency 6)
OFF ON ON ON C11 (Multistep frequency 7)
ON OFF OFF OFF C12 (Multistep frequency 8)
ON OFF OFF ON C13 (Multistep frequency 9)
ON OFF ON OFF C14 (Multistep frequency 10)
ON OFF ON ON C15 (Multistep frequency 11)
ON ON OFF OFF C16 (Multistep frequency 12)
ON ON OFF ON C17 (Multistep frequency 13)
ON ON ON OFF C18 (Multistep frequency 14)
ON ON ON ON C19 (Multistep frequency 15)
* “Other than multistep frequency” includes frequency setting 1 (F01), frequency setting 2 (C30) and other
frequency command sources except multistep frequency commands.
Appendix-177
C21 Pattern operation mode selection

C22 to C28 Stage 1 to 7
Pattern operation is a function of automatic operation according to the predefined run time, rotational direction,
acceleration/deceleration time and reference frequency.
When using this function, set the frequency setting (F01) to 10 (pattern operation).
The following operatio
operation
n patterns are available:
C21:Setting Operation pattern

0 Pattern operation performed for one cycle and stopped after the cycle.
1 Pattern operation repeatedly performed and immediately stopped with a stop command
2 Pattern operation performed for one cycle and operation continued at the reference
frequency after the cycle.
Run command
Setting value:
value 0 1 cycle completed
source
Forward
direction
Output Time
frequency 0
Reverse
direction
Run command 2 2cycles

Setting value:
value 1 1 cycle completed cyclecompleted
completed
source
Forward
direction
Time
Output
frequency 0
Reverse
direction
Run command
Setting value:
value 2 1 cycle completed
source
Forward
direction
Output Time
frequency
0
Reverse
direction
■ C22 to C28 Stage 1 to Stage 7

Specify the run time for Stage 1 to Stage 7.
Press the key three times for each function code to set the following three data.
Setting Description
1st Specifies the run time between 0.0 and 3600 s.
2nd 2nd: Specifies the rotational direction F (forward) or r (reverse)
3rd 3rd: Specifies the acceleration/deceleration time between 1 and 4.
1: F07/F08 2: E10/E11 3: E12/E13 4: E14/E15
If the key is pressed to exit the function code before the three data are specified by pressing the key three
times, no data are updated.
For any unused stage, specify 0.0 as the run time. The stage is skipped and the next stage becomes ready for
setting.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-178
178
■ Reference
eference frequency
Multistep frequenc
frequencies 1 to 7 are assigned to the reference frequency of Stage 1 to 7.
■ Example of pattern operation setting
Rotational Acceleration/deceler
C21 Run time Operation (reference)
Stage No. direction ation time
(Mode selection) frequency
Setting value Setting value Setting value
Stage 1 60.0 F 2 C05 Multistep frequency 1

Stage 2 100 F 1 C06 Multistep frequency 2
Stage 3 65.5 r 4 C07 Multistep frequency 3
0 Stage 4 55.0 r 3 C08 Multistep frequency 4
The figure below illustrates the operation.

F o r w a r d d ir e c tio n
R un com m and
s o u rc e
(9 )
C10
Output frequency
C06 (8 )
C11 S e t a c c o r d in g to ( 1 ) to ( 1 0 )
A c c e le r a t io n tim e o r d e c e le r a tio n
C09
(1 0 ) tim e
C 05 (2 ) (3 ) (7 ) (1 ) A c c e le r a t io n tim e : E 1 0
Motor speed)
0
T im e
speed
(1 ) (2 ) A c c e le r a t io n tim e : F 0 7
(4 )
C07 (5 )
(6 )
(Motor
(3 ) D e c e le r a tio n tim e : E 1 5
C08
(4 ) A c c e le r a t io n tim e : E 1 4
R e v e rs e
6 0 .0 S 100S 6 5 .5 S 5 5 .0 S 5 0 .0 S 7 2 .0 S 3 5 .0 S
d ir e c tio n
(6 ) D e c e le r a tio n tim e : E 1 1
S e ttin g
v a lu e : 1 6
0 .1 S (8 ) A c c e le r a t io n tim e : E 1 4
Y 1 to Y 2 te r m in a ls o u tp u t s ig n a l (9 ) D e c e le r a tio n tim e : E 1 1
S e ttin g v a lu e :
17 (1 0 ) D e c e le r a tio n tim e : F 0 8
0 .1 S
F08 Deceleration time 1 setting is used as deceleration time for deceleration to stop after the completion of one
cycle.
To run or stop, use input from the key of the keypad or by switching the control terminal. W
When
hen using the
keypad, press the key to run. Press the key to suspend the progression of stages. Press the key
again to resume operation according to the stages from the point where it was suspended. For alarm stop,
press the key to reset the inverter protective functions. Then press the key. The suspended progression
of the cycle resumes. If a need arises for operation from the first stage “C22 (Stage 1 runtime)” and “C82 (Stage
1 rotational direction and acceleration/deceleration time)” during operation, input a stop command and press the
key.
When operation from the first stage is necessary after an al alarm

arm stop, press the key for resetting the
protective functions and press the key again. For operation with input terminals,
terminals, use of the “RST” terminal
(set “8 (Active ON)” or “1008 (Active OFF)” for any of E01 to E05) function the same way.
• Pattern operation can be started by either a forward run command (specify F02 = 2 and press the
key, or specify F02 = 1 and turn the FWD terminal ON) or reverse run command (specify F02 = 3 and
press the key, or specify F02 = 1 and turn the REV terminal
termina l ON). However, the rotational
direction is as specified by C82 to C88 regardless the operation is started by a forward run command
or reverse run command.
• If using FWD or REV terminal,
terminal, please use the alternate
alternate-type
type switch because it is not self
self-holding.
holding.
Appendix
Appendix-179
179
When pattern operation is started by specifying C21 = 0 and turning the FWD (REV) terminal ON, the motor
stops after the completion of the last stage even if the FWD (REV) terminal is kept turned ON.
In this case, modifying the value for F01 or C30 or switching the control terminal “Hz2/Hz1” ON/OFF without
turning the FWD (REV) terminal OFF causes the operation to be immediately resumed according to the
reference frequency after the change.
change
An accident or physical injury may result.
C30 Frequency setting 2 (refer

refer to F01)
For details of frequency setting 2, refer to the description of F01.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-180
180
C31 to C35 Analog input adjustment (terminal [12])

(offset, gain, filter time constant, gain base point, polarity)
C36 to C40 Analog input adjustment (terminal [C1] C1 function)
(offset, gain, filter time constant, gain base point, range/polarity)
C41 to C45 Analog input adjustment (terminal [C1] V2 function)
(offset, gain, filter time constant, gain base point, polarity)
(refer to F01 for frequency setting)
C55, C56 Bias (for PID, frequency command 2 (terminal [12])) (bias, bias base point) (refer to F01)
C61, C62 Bias (for PID, frequency command 2 (terminal [C1]) (C1 function))
(bias, bias base point)(refer to F01)
C67, C68 Bias (for PID, frequency command 2 (terminal [C1]) (V2 function))
(bias, bias base point)(refer to F01)
You can adjust the gain, bias, polarity, filter time constant and offset which are applied to analog inputs (voltage
inputs to terminals [12] and [C1] (V2 function) and current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function)).
Adjustable items for analog inputs (excluding those for frequency command 1)
Input Bias Gain Filter time

Input range Polarity Offset
terminal Bias Base point Gain Base point constant
[12] 0 to +10 V, -10 to +10 V C55 C56 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
[C1] (C1) 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA C61 C62 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
[C1] (V2) 0 to +10 V C67 C68 C42 C44 C45 C43 C41
■ Offset (C31, C36, C41)

C31, C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage/current input.
• Data setting range: -5.0 to +5.0 (%)
■ Filter time constant (C33, C38, C43)

C33, C38, and C43 provide the filter time constants for the voltage and current of the analog input. The larger the
time constant, the slower the response. Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response
speed of the machine (load). If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises, increase the time constant.
■ Polarity Terminal [12] (C35)

C35 and C45 configure the input range for analog input voltage.
0 -10 to +10 V
1 0 to +10 V (negative value of voltage is regarded as 0 V)
■ Polarity [C1] (V2 function) (C45)
0 0 to +10 V
When the bias is specified to be a negative value, makes a point lower than 0
effective as a negative value.
1 0 to +10 V (factory default)
When the bias is specified to be a negative value, limits a point lower than 0 to 0.
Appendix-181
■ Gain
Reference
ence frequency
Gain
Point
X
Analog input
Gain base
point
To input bipolar analog voltage (0 to ±10 VDC) to terminal [12], set C35 data to “0.” Setting C35 data to
“1” enables only the voltage range from 0 to +10 VDC and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to
-10
10 VDC as 0 V.
■ Terminal [C1] (C1 function) range / polarity selection(C40)

Selects the range of current input terminal [C1](C1 function).
C40 data Terminal input range When specified bias is negative

0 4 to 20 mA (factory default)
Limits a point lower than 0 to 0.
1 0 to 20 mA
10 4 to 20 mA Makes a point lower than 0 effective as a negative
11 0 to 20mA value.
For using terminal [C1] for the C1, V2 or PTC function, it is necessary to make the settings as shown below.
Terminal [C1] SW3 SW4 E59 H26 C40

For use of V2 function (0 to +10V) Does not
V2 AI 1 0
matter
For use of PTC function Does not Does not
C1 PTC 1, 2
matter matter
For details about SW3 and SW4, refer to the FRENIC

FRENIC-Ace
Ace User’s
User’s Manual Chapter 2, Section 2.2.8.
Expected operation may not be obtained if the settings above are not switched correctly. Use sufficient caution. APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-182
182
■ Gain/bias
Terminal PID command, feedback, analog monitor

Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
[12] Bias
Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
[C1] (C1 function) Bias

Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
[C1] (V2 function) Bias

Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
These are biases and bias base points used for PID command, PID feedback, frequency command 2 and analog
monitor. For details, refer to the description of F01 and J01.
Bias (C55, C61, C67)
• Data setting range: -100.00 to 100.00 (%)
Bias base point (C56, C62, C68)
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 100.00 (%)
Specifying the bias as a negative value allows an input to be specified as bipolar for a unipolar analog input. By
setting C40 data to 10 or 11 for terminal [C1] (C1 function) or C45 data to 1 for terminal [C1] (V2 function), an input
value for an analog input equal to or lower than 0 point is specified to have negative polarity.
C50 Bias (Frequency setting 1) (Bias base point) (refer to F01)
C53 Selection of normal/inverse operation (frequency setting 1)
Switches between the between normal and inverse operation of frequency setting 1 (F01) .
For details, refer to E01 through E05 (data = 21) for the terminal command IVS (“ Switch normal/inverse
operation – “IVS””).
Appendix-183
C58 Analog input adjustment (for analog monitor (terminal [12])) (Display unit)
C64 Analog input adjustment (for analog monitor (terminal [C1])) (C1 function) (Display unit)
C70 Analog input adjustment (for analog monitor (terminal [C1])) (V2 function) (Display unit)
The units for the respective analog inputs can be displayed when a multi-function keypad (TP-A1-E2C) is used. Set
these codes to use for command and feedback values of the PID control and the analog input monitor. Use the
multi-function keypad to display the SV and PV values of the PID control and the analog input monitor on the main
and sub-monitors. Indications are given in the specified units.
C58, C64,
Unit C58, C64, C70 Unit C58, C64, C70 Unit
C70
— — 23 L/s (flowrate) 45 mmHg (pressure)

1 No unit 24 L/min (flowrate) 46 Psi (pressure)
2 % 25 L/h (flowrate) 47 mWG (pressure)
4 r/min 40 Pa (pressure) 48 inWG (pressure)
7 kW 41 kPa (pressure) 60 K (temperature)
3
20 m /s (flowrate) 42 MPa (pressure) 61 °C (temperature)
3
21 m /min (flowrate) 43 mbar (pressure) 62 °F (temperature)
22 m3/h (flowrate) 44 bar (pressure) 80 ppm (concentration)
C59, C60 Analog input adjustment (terminal [12]) (Maximum scale, Minimum scale)
C65, C66 Analog input adjustment (terminal [C1] (C1 function)) (Maximum scale, Minimum scale)
C71, C72 Analog input adjustment (terminal [C1] (V2 function)) (Maximum scale, Minimum scale)
Values of the analog input monitor (terminals [12] and [C1] (C1 and V2 functions) can be converted into easily
recognizable physical quantities for display. This function can also be used for PID feedback and PID command
values.
• Data setting range: (maximum scale and minimum scale) -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00
Indicated value
Maximum scale
(C59)
Minimum scale
(C60) Analog input
(terminal [12])
APPENDICES
Appendix-184
J.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters)

To use the integrated automatic control functions such as auto torque boost, torque calculation monitoring, auto
energy saving operation, torque limiter, automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), and auto search for
idling motor speed, it is necessary to build a motor model in the inverter by specifying proper motor parameters
including the motor capacity and rated current.
The FRENIC-Ace, provides built-in motor parameters for Fuji standard motors 8-series. To use these Fuji motors, it
is enough to specify motor parameters for P99 (Motor 1 selection). If the cabling between the inverter and the
motor is long (generally, 20 m (66 ft) or longer) or a reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter, however,
the apparent motor parameters are different from the actual ones, so auto-tuning or other adjustments are
necessary.
For the auto-tuning procedure, refer to the FRENIC-Ace Instruction Manual, the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual
Chapter 4 “TEST RUN PROCEDURE.”
When using a motor made by other manufacturers or a Fuji non-standard motor, obtain the datasheet of the motor
and specify the motor parameters manually or perform auto-tuning.
P01 Motor 1 (No. of poles)
P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor. Enter the value given on the nameplate of the motor. This setting is
used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor and to control the speed (refer to E43). The following
expression is used for the conversion.
-1
Motor rotational speed (min ) = 120/No.of poles x Frequency (Hz)
• Data setting range: 2 to 22 (poles)
P02 Motor 1 (Rated capacity)
P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor. Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor.
P02 data Unit Function

kW When P99 (Motor 1 selection) = 0, 4, 20 or 21
0.01 to 1000
HP When P99 (Motor 1 selection) = 1
When accessing P02 with the keypad, take into account that the P02 data automatically updates data of P03, P06
through P08, P53 and H46.
P03 Motor 1 (Rated current)
P03 specifies the rated current of the motor. Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor.
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 2000 (A)
Appendix-185
P04 Motor 1 (Auto-tuning

( tuning)
The inverter automatica

automatically
lly detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory. Basically, it is not
necessary to perform tuning when a Fuji standard motor is used with a standard connection with the inverter.
There are two types of auto
auto-tuning
tuning as listed below. Se
Select the appropriate one considering the limitations in your
equipment and control mode.
P04 data Auto-tuning

tuning Action Motor parameters to be tuned
0 Disable — —
Primary resistance (%R1) (P07)
IM
Leakage reactance (%X) (P08)
Tune the motor Tunes while the motor is Armature resistance (P60)
1
while it is stopped stopped. d-axis
axis inductance (P61)
PM
q-axis
Reserved (P84, P88)
No-load
load current (P06)
IM Primary resistance (%R1) (P07)
After tuning the motor in a Leakage reactance (%X) (P08)
Tune the motor stopped state, retunes it Armature resistance (P60)
2
while it is rotating. running at 50% of the base
frequency. d-axis
PM
q-axis
Reserved (P84, P88)
Tune the motor Tunes while the motor is Primary resistance (%R1) (P07)
5 IM
while it is stopped stopped. Leakage reactance (%X) (P08)
For details of auto

auto-tuning, refer to the FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace User’s
’s Manual Chapter 4 “TEST RUN PROCEDURE.”
In any of the following cases, perform auto

auto-tuning
tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of
Fuji standard motors so that the best performance cannot be obtained under some conconditions..
• The motor to be driven is a non-Fuji
non Fuji motor or a non
non-standard
standard motor.
• Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long. (Generally, 20 m (66 ft) or longer)
• A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter.
Other applicable cases
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-186
186
■ Functions whose performance is affected by the motor parameters
Function Related function codes (representative)
Auto torque boost F37

Output torque monitor F31, F35
Load factor monitor F31, F35
Auto energy saving operation F37
Torque limit control F40
Anti-regenerative
regenerative control (Automatic deceleration) H69
Auto search H09
Low torque
orque detection E80
E to E81
P05 Motor 1 (Online

( nline tuning)
tuning
When vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector) or slip compensation control is used for
long-time
time operation, the motor parameters change along with motor temperature rise.
If motor parameters change, the amount of speed compensation may change to cause the motor speed to be
different from the initial speed.
Enabling auto
auto-tuning
tuning allows the identification of the motor parameters that match the change in the m
motor
temperature, which minimizes the motor speed variation.
To use this function, specify “2” for auto-tuning
auto tuning (P04).
Online tuning is enabled only when F42 = 1 (Vector control without speed sensor) or F42 = 2 (V/f control
with slip compensation active) and F37 = 2, 5 (auto torque boost).
Appendix
Appendix-187
187
P06 to P08 Motor 1 (No-load

( load current,
current, %R1 and %X)
P06 through P08 specify nono-load

load current, %R1 and %X, respectively. Obtain the appropriate values from the test
report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor. Performing auto-tuning
auto tuning automatically sets these
parameters.
• No-load
load current: Input the value obtained from the motor manufacturer.
• %R1: Enter the value calculated by the following expression.
R1 + Cable R1
=
%R1= × 100 (%)
V / ( 3 ×I )
R1: Primary resistance of the motor (Ω)

((Ω
Cable R1: Resistance of the output cable (Ω)
(
V: Rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: Rated current of the motor (A)
• %X: Enter the value calculated by the following expression.

X1+ X2 × XM / (X2 + XM) + Cable X
%X = × 100 (%)
V / ( 3 ×I )
X1: Primary leakage reactance of the motor (Ω)

(
X2: Secondary leakage reactance of the motor (converted to primary) ((Ω)
XM: Exciting reactance of the motor (Ω)
((Ω
Cable X: Reactance of the output cable (Ω)
(
V: Rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: Rated current of the motor (A
(A)
For reactance, use the value at the base frequency (F04).
P09 to P11 Motor 1 (slip compensation gain for driving, slip compensation response time and slip
compensation gain for braking)
P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in % for driving and braking individually and adjust the slip
amount from internal calculation. Mode of 100% fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor. Excessive
compensation (100% or more) may cause hunting (undesirable oscillation of the system), so caref
carefully
ully check the
operation on the actual machine.
P10 determines the response time for slip compensation. Basically, there is no need to modify the default setting. If
you need to modify it, consult your Fuji Electric representatives.
Function code Operation (slip compensation)

P09 Slip compensation gain for Adjust the slip compensation amount for driving.
driving Slip compensation amount for driving =
Rated slip × Slip compensation gain for driving
P11 Slip compensation gain for Adjust the slip compensation amount for braking.
braking Slip compensation amount for braking =
Rated slip × Slip compensation gain for braking
P10 Slip compensation Specify the slip compensation response time. Basically, there is no
response time need to modify the setting.
For details about slip compensation control, refer to the description of F42.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-188
188
P12 Motor 1 (rated slip frequency)
P12 specifies rated slip frequency. Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the
manufacturer of the motor. Performing auto-tuning automatically sets these parameters.
• Rated slip frequency: Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following
expression and enter the converted value.
(Note: The motor rated value on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value.)
(Synchrono us speed - Rated speed)
Rated slip frequency (Hz) = × Base frequency
Synchronou s speed
For details about slip compensation control, refer to the description of F42.
P13 Motor 1 (iron loss factor 1)
The combination of P99 (Motor 1 selection) and P02 (Motor 1 rated capacity) data determines the standard value.
Basically, there is no need to modify the setting.
Appendix-189
P30 PMSM drive Motor 1 (Magnetic pole position detection mode)

codes:
P74:PMSM Motor 1 (Reference current at starting)
P87:PMSM Motor 1 (Reference current for polarity discrimination)
P30 specifies the magnetic pole position detection mode. Select the appropriate mode that matches the PMSM to
be used.
Data for P30 Function Remarks
No magnet pole position detection is made.

At the start of driving the motor, the inverter supplies current
specified by P74 to pull in the magnetic pole position.
0: Pull-in
in by current —
In this position detection mode, the motor may rotate slightly in
the direction opposite to the commanded d direction
irection depending
upon the current motor shaft position.
The inverter starts the motor with the magnetic pole position
1: For IPMSM (Interior detection suitable for IPMSM.
permanent magnet —
synchronous motor) The reference current for polarity discrimination specified by P87
applies. Usually it is not necessary to change the factory default.
2: For SPMSM (Surface The inverter starts the motor with the magnetic pole position
permanent magnet detection suitable for SPMSM. —
synchronous motor)
The inverter starts the motor with the magnetic pole position
3: Pull-in
in by current for detection suitable for IPMSM causing no magnetic saturation.
IPMSM (Interior
In this position detection mode, the motor may rotate slightly
s lightly in —
permanent magnet
synchronous motor) the direction opposite to the commanded direction depending
upon the current motor shaft position.
The reference current for polarity discrimination specified by P87 applies. Usually it is not necessary to
change the factory default.
During the magnetic pole position pull-in

in operation or the magnetic pole position detection, the motor
cannot generate enough torque. When applying to the application which needs torque at start, engage
the mechanical brake by using brake signal BRKS until magnetic pole position pull-in in operation is
completed. ( Function
unction code E20)
P53 Motor 1 (%X correction factor 1)
This is a factor for correcting the variation of leakage reactance %X. Basically, there is no need to modify the
setting.
P60
60 to P64 PMSM Motor 1 (Armature resistance, d
d-axis
axis inductance, q-axis
q axis inductance, Induced
voltage and Iron loss )
voltage,
P60 through P64 specify the a armature

rmature resistance, d
d-axis
axis inductance, q-axis
q axis inductance, induced voltage and iron
loss of the motor
motor,, respectively.
The combination of P99 (Motor 1 selection) and P02 (Motor 1 rated capacity) data determines the standard value.
P65,
65, P85 PMSM Motor 1 (d-axis
(d axis inductance magnetic saturation correction, Flux limitation value)
These are the control parameter for PMSMs. Normally, it is not necessary to change the data of these function
codes.
P74 PMSM Motor 1 (Reference

Reference current at starting
starting)
APPENDICES
Refer to P30.
Appendix
Appendix-190
190
P83, P84, PMSM Motor 1 (Reserved)

P86, P88,
P89
These function codes are displayed, but they are reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise specified,
do not access these function codes.
P90 PMSM Motor 1 (Overcurrent protection level)
A PMSM has a current limit to prevent demagnetization of permanent magnet. If a current exceeding that limit
flows through the motor, it weakens the magnet force of permanent magnet so that the motor does not get the
desired characteristics.
To prevent it, P90 specifies the overcurrent protection level. If a current flows exceeding the level, the inverter
causes an overcurrent protection alarm 0c1, 0c2 or 0c3.
P99 Motor 1 selection
P99 specifies the motor type to be used.
P99 data Function

0 Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard IM, 8-series)
1 Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating IMs)
4 Other IMs
20 Other PMSMs
21 Motor characteristics PM (Fuji standard PMSM, GNB-series)
To select the motor drive control or to run the inverter with the integrated automatic control functions such as auto
torque boost and torque calculation monitoring, it is necessary to specify the motor parameters correctly.
First select the motor type with P99 from Fuji standard motors 8-series, set P02 (capacity) and then initialize the
motor parameters with H03. This process automatically configures the related motor parameters (P01, P03, P06
through P08, P53 and H46).
The data of F09 (Torque boost 1), H13 (Restart mode after momentary power failure (Restart time)), and F11
(Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 (Overload detection level)) depends on the motor capacity, but
the process stated above does not change them. Specify and adjust the data during a test run if needed.
Appendix-191
J.5 H codes (High performance functions)
H02, H03 Data initialization (Method, Tar

Target)
Related function codes: H193,H194 User initialization data (Save, Protect)
Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults. The motor parameters are also initialized.
To change the H02/ H03 data, it is necessary to press the + / keys (simultaneous keying).
H03 data Function

0 Disable initialization (Settings manually made by the user will be retained.)
1 Initialize all function codes (initialization
(initialization in accordance with function code H02 setting)
2 Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 (Rated capacity) and P99 (Motor 1 selection)
11 Limited initialization (initialization other than communications function codes): Communication can
be continued after initialization.
12 Limited initialization (initialization of customizable logic function U codes only)
• When all function codes are initialized, select the initialization method in advance with function code H02.
H02
Selection of H02 Initialization method when 1 is set to H03

Initialize all function codes with the Fuji Electric standard factory
Data=0 Fuji standard initial value
defaults.
Initialize the value with the user setting value saved by H194.
Data=1 User initial value If the user initial value is not saved, initialize it with Fuji standard initial
value (H02=0
H02=0).
For saving the user initial value, refer to items in function codes H193 and H194.
• To initialize the motor parameters, set the related function codes as follows.
Function code
Step Item Data
1st motor
(1) Motor selection Selects the motor type P99
(2) Motor (rated capacity) Sets the motor capacity (kW) P02
(3) Data initialization Initialize motor parameters H03 = 2
Function code data to be initialized P01, P03, P06
P0 to P08,, P30, P60 to P65,
Please refer to the F42 when using PMSM drive (F42=15) P74,P83 to P90, H46
• Upon completion of the initialization, the H03 data reverts to “0” (factory default).
• If P02/A16 data is set to a value other than the standard nominal applied motor rating, data initialization with
H03 internally converts the specified value parameters values to the standard nominal applied motor rating.
(See “I.4
I.4 Motor constant.”)
constant
• Motor parameters to be initialized are for motors listed below under V/f control. When the base frequency, rated
voltage, and the number of poles are different from those of the listed motors, or when non non-Fuji
Fuji motors or
non-standard
standard motors are used, change the rated current data to that printed on the motor nameplate.
Motor selection V/f control data

Data = 0 or 4 Fuji standard motors, 8-series
series 4 poles 400 V/50 Hz
Data = 1 HP rating motors 4 poles 460 V/60 Hz
When accessing P02 with the keypad, take into account that the P02 data automatically updates data of
P03, P06 through P08,
P , P53 and H46. Also, when accessing function code A16 for the 2nd motor, data of
related function codes for each are automatically updated.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-192
192
H193, User initial value (save, protection)

H194 Relevant function code: Initialization of H02 and H03 data
(initial value selection and target)
The value can be saved in the nonnon--volatile

volatile memory in the inverter so that customers may use the setting value
changed from the Fuji Electric standard factory default value as the initial value for inverter initialization.
The setting value saved and prote
protected
cted here can be selected as the user initial value for initialization with function
code H03
H03. When this function is used, set H02 data
data=1.
If initialization is performed without saved/protected setting data, it is initialized to the Fuji Electric standard factory
default regardless of the H02 value.
For data initialization, refer to function codes H02 and H03.
H03
To change the data of function codes H02，H193 and H194,, it is necessary to operate double keys “ key + /
key”..
To save the user setting value, set 1 (saved as the user initial value) to function code H02 in advance. In addition,
function code H194 must be set to 0 (save enable).
H02 data H194 data Function when 1 is set to H193

0 Optional User setting value is not saved.
1 ：Save enable
0： User setting value is saved.
：Protected
1：Protected (save disable) User setting value is not saved.
User initial value save procedures

(1) Set all function codes and determine the user setting value for initialization.
(2) Sett H02=1 and H194=0.
H194=0
(3) Sett H193=1. The user setting value is saved.
(4) Set H194=1.. The user setting value is protected.
When the setting value of the function code has already saved by H193 and the step of H193 is repeated
again, the saved data is overwritten. Be careful for error operation. To prevent overwriting by error, it is
recommended to protect the data with H194 data=1 after saving.
Appendix
Appendix-193
193
H04, H05 Auto

Auto-reset (Times
imes and reset interval)
H04 and H05 specify the auto

auto-reset
reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to reset the tripped state
and restart without issuing an alarm output (for any alarm) even if any protective function subject to reset is
activated and the inverter enters the forced-to-stop
forced stop state (tripped st
state).
ate). If the protective function is activated in
excess of the times specified by H04, the inverter will issue an alarm output (for any alarm) and not attempt to
auto-reset
reset the tripped state.
Listed below are the protective functions subject to auto
auto-reset.
Protective function LED monitor displays: Protective function LED monitor displays:
Overcurrent protection 0c1, 0c2, 0c3 Braking resistor overheat dbh

Overvoltage protection 0u1, 0u2, 0u3 Motor overload 0l1, 0l2
Heat sink overheat 0h1 Inverter overload 0lu
Step-out/
Step Magnetic pole
Inverter internal overheat 0h3 erd
position detection failure
Motor overheat 0h4
■ Number of reset times (H04)

H04 specifies the number of reset times for the inverter to automatically attempt to escape the tripped state. When
H04 = 0, the auto
auto-reset
reset function will not be activated.
• Data setting range: 0 (Disable), 1 to 20 (times)
If the “auto
“auto-reset”
reset” function has been specified, the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped
due to a trip fault, depending on the cause of the tripping. Design the machinery so that human body and
peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto auto-resetting
resetting succeeds.
■ Reset interval (H05)

(s)
H05 specifies the reset interval time between the time when the inverter enters the tripped state and the time when
it issues the reset command to attempt to auto-reset
auto reset the state. Refer to ““Operation
Operation timing scheme
scheme”” below.
<Operation timing scheme>

• In the figure below, normal operation restarts in the 4
4-th
th retry.
Protective function
Tripped state
Tripped state reset

command
ommand
1st 2nd
nd 3rd 4th
Inverter output
frequency
Auto-resetting
resetting
[TRY]
Time
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-194
194
• In the figure below, the inverter failed to restart normal operation within the number of reset times specified by
H04 (in this case, 3 times (H04 = 3)), and issued the alarm output (for any alarm) ALM.
Protective function
Tripped state
Tripped state reset

command
1st 2nd 3rd
Inverter output
frequency
Auto-resetting
[TRY]
Alarm output (for any alarm)

[ALM]
Time
• The auto-reset operation can be monitored from the external equipment by assigning the digital output signal
TRY to any of the programmable, output terminals [Y1], [Y2] or [30A/B/C] by setting E20, E21 or E27
respectively (data = 26).
H06 Cooling fan ON/OFF control
To prolong the service life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running, the cooling fan stops when the
temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops. However, since frequent
switching of the cooling fan shortens its service life, the cooling fan keeps running for at least 10 minutes once
started.
H06 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to enable ON/OFF control.
H06 data Function

0 Disable (Always in operation)
1 Enable (ON/OFF controllable)
■ Cooling fan in operation -- FAN (E20, E21 and E27, data = 25)
With the cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled (H06 = 1), this output signal is ON when the cooling fan is in
operation, and OFF when it is stopped. This signal can be used to make the cooling system of peripheral
equipment interlocked for an ON/OFF control
H07 Curve acceleration/ deceleration (refer to F07)
For details, refer to the description of F07.
H08 Rotational direction limitation
H08 inhibits the motor from running in an unexpected rotational direction due to miss-operation of run commands,
miss-polarization of frequency commands, or other mistakes.
H08 data Function

0 Disable
1 Enable (Reverse rotation inhibited)
2 Enable (Forward rotation inhibited)
Appendix-195
H09, d67 Starting mode (Auto search)

Related function codes: H49 (Starting mode, auto search delay time 1)
H46 (Starting mode, auto search delay time 2)
Specify the mode for auto search without stopping the idling motor. The mode can be specified for each restart
after momentary power failure and each start of normal operation. The starting mode can be switched by assigning
“STM” to a general-purpose digital input signal. If it is not assigned, “STM” is regarded to be OFF. (Data = 26)
■ H09/d67 (Starting mode, auto search) and terminal command “STM” (“Enable auto search for idling
motor speed at starting”)
The combination of H09 data and the “STM” status determines whether to perform the auto search as listed below.
Function code Drive control Factory default
H09 V/f control (F42 = 0) 0: Disable

d67 Vector control for synchronous motor without pole position 2: Enable
sensor nor speed sensor (F42 = 15)
Enable auto search for idling Auto search for idling motor speed at starting
H09/d67 data motor speed at starting Restart mode after momentary
“STM” For normal startup
power failure (F14 = 3 to 5)
0: Disable OFF Disable Disable
1: Enable OFF Enable Disable
2: Enable OFF Enable Enable
― ON Enable Enable
When “STM” is ON, auto search for idling motor speed at starting is enabled regardless of the H09/d67 setting.
( Function codes E01 to E05, data =26)
Auto search for idling motor speed to follow

Starting the inverter (with a run command ON, BX OFF, auto-reset, etc.) with STM being ON searches for the idling
motor speed for a maximum of 1.2 seconds to run the idling motor without stopping it. After completion of the auto
search, the inverter accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the frequency command and
the preset acceleration time.
Frequency command
Motor speed
1.2 s max.
Motor speed
estimation
“STM”
“FWD”
APPENDICES
Appendix-196
■ Starting mode (auto search delay time 1) (H49)

Auto search does not function normally when performed with the residual voltage remaining in the motor.
Accordingly, time to allow the residual voltage to disappear must be ensured.
When operation is started by turning a run command ON, auto search is started after the period specified with the
starting mode (auto search delay time 1) (H49) has elapsed. When switching between two inverters for controlling
one motor and if the motor is coasting to stop at the time of switching to start by auto search, by specifying H49
eliminates the need for timing the run command.
■ Starting mode (auto search delay time 2) (H46)

At the restart after a momentary power failure, at the start by turning the terminal command “BX” (“Coast to a stop”)
OFF and ON, or at the restart by auto-reset,
auto , the inverter applies the delay time specified by H46. The inverter will
not start unless the time specified by H46 has elapsed, even if the starting conditions are satisfied. The inverter
starts after the auto search delay time has elapsed.
Power Power
failure restoration
DC link bus
voltage
Motor
or speed/output
frequency
Output
frequency Motor speed
Under auto search control, the inverter searches the motor speed with the voltage applied at the motor start and
the current flowing in the motor, based on the model built with the motor parameters. Therefore, the search is
greatly influenced by the residual voltage in the motor.
H46 is available for motor 1 only. At factory shipment, H46 data is preset to a correct value according to the motor
capacity for the general
general-purpose
purpose motor, and basically there is no need to modify the data.
Depending on the motor characteri
characteristics,
stics, however, it may take time for residual voltage to disappear (due to the
secondary thermal time constant of the motor). In such a case, the inverter starts the motor with the residual
voltage remaining, which will cause an error in the speed search a
and
nd may result in occurrence of an inrush current
or an overvoltage alarm.
If it happens, increase the value of H46 data and remove the influence of residual voltage.
(If possible, it is recommended to set the value around two times as large as the factory default value allowing a
margin.)
• Be sure to auto-tune
tune the inverter preceding the start of auto search for the idling motor speed.
• When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency, the inverter
disables auto search and starts running the motor with the maximum frequency or the upper limit
frequency, whichever is lower.
• During auto search,
search, if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs, the inverter restarts the suspended
auto search.
• Perform auto search at 60 Hz or
or below.
Note that auto search may not fully provide the performance depending on load conditions, motor
parameters, wiring length, and other external factors.
Appendix
Appendix-197
197
H11 Deceleration mode
H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF.
H11 data Action
0 Normal deceleration
1 The inverter immediately shuts down its output, so the motor stops according to the
inertia of the motor and machinery (load) and their kinetic energy losses.
When reducing the reference frequency, the inverter decelerates the motor according to the deceleration
commands even if H11 = 1 (Coast-to-stop).
(Coast stop).
H12 Instantaneous overcurrent limiting ((Mode

ode selection) (refer to F43)
Refer to the descriptions of F43 and F44.
H13, H14 Restart mode after momentary power failure ((Restart

estart time, frequency fall rate)
H15, H16 Restart mode after momentary power failure ((Continue
Continue to run level,
level, allowable
momentary power failure time) (refer to F14)
For how to set these function codes (Restart time, Fr Frequency

equency fall rate, Continue to run level and Allowable
momentary power failure time), refer to the description of F14.
H26, H27 Thermistor (for motor) (Mode

( ode selection and level)
These function codes specify the PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor embedded in the motor. The
thermistor is used to protect the motor from overheating or output an alarm signal.
■ Thermistor (for motor) (mode selection) (H26)

H26 selects the function operation mode (protection or alarm) for the PTC thermistor as shown below.
H26 data Action

0 Disable
1 When the voltage sensed by PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level, motor
protective function (alarm 0h4 ) is triggered, causing the inverter to enter an alarm stop
state.
2 When the voltage sensed by the PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level, a motor
alarm signal is output but the inverter continues running.
You need to assign the “Motor overheat detected by thermistor” signal (“THM”) to one
of the digital output terminals beforehand, by which a temperature
temperatu re alarm condition is
indicated to the peripheral equipment (E20, E21 and E27, data = 56).
If H26 data is set to “1” or “2” (PTC thermistor), the inverter monitors the voltage sensed by PTC thermistor and
protects the motor even when the 2nd motor is selected.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-198
198
■ Thermistor (for motor) (level) (H27)

H27 specifies the detection level (expressed in voltage) for the temperature sensed by the PTC thermistor.
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 (V)
The alarm temperature at which the overheat protection becomes activated depends on the characteristics of the
PTC thermistor. The internal resistance of the thermistor will significantly change at the alarm temperature. The
detection level (voltage) is specified based on the cha
change
nge of the internal resistance.
PTC thermistor
internal resistance
Temperature
Alarm temperature
Figure J.18
Suppose that the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature is Rp, the detection level
(voltage) Vv2 is calculated by the expression below. Set the value of Vv2 to function code H27.
Rp
VV 2 = × 10.5( V )
1000 + 5 × Rp
Connect the PTC thermistor as shown below. The voltage obtained by dividing the input voltage on terminal [C1]
with a set of internal resistors is compared with the detection level voltage specified by H27.
Mode
selection
H26
Comparator
PTC thermistor
Thermistor detection level

H27
Figure J.19
When using the terminal [C1] for PTC thermistor input, also set SW4 on the control printed circuit board
to the PTC side. For details, refer to the FRENIC-Ace
Ace User’s
User’s Manual Chapter 2,, Section 2.2.8
2.2.8..
Appendix
Appendix-199
199
H30 Communication link function (Mode selection)

Related function codes: y98 bus link function (mode selection)
Using the RS-485 communications link, or fieldbus (option) allows you to issue frequency commands and run
commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location, as well as monitor the inverter running information and
the function code data. It is possible to sets the source that specifies the frequency and run commands with H30
and y98. H30 and y98 set the sources that specify RS-485 communications and fieldbus respectively.
“LE”
Selected setting
(frequency command
Inverter /run command)
RS-485 communications link

(port 1: RJ-45) Setting specified by H30 or
y98 applies when “LE” is
RS-485 communications link not assigned.
(port 2: RJ-45 or terminal)
Fieldbus (option)
Table J.10 Command sources selectable
Command sources Data
Inverter itself Sources except RS-485 communications link and fieldbus

Frequency setting source: Specified by F01/C30, or multistep frequency
command
Operation method source: Via the keypad or digital input terminals selected by
F02
Via RS-485 communications Via the standard RJ-45 port used for connecting a keypad
link (port 1)
Via RS-485 communications Terminals DX+ and DX-
link (port 2)
Via fieldbus(option) Via fieldbus (DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table J.31 Command sources specified by H30 (Communications link function, Mode selection)
H30 data Frequency command Run command source
0 Inverter itself (F01/C30) Inverter itself (F02)

1 RS-485 communications link (port 1) Inverter itself (F02)
2 Inverter itself (F01/C30) RS-485 communications link (port 1)
3 RS-485 communications link (port 1) RS-485 communications link (port 1)
4 RS-485 communications link (port 2) Inverter itself (F02)
6 Inverter itself (F01/C30) RS-485 communications link (port 2)
APPENDICES
Appendix-200
Table J.12 Command sources specified by y98 (Bus link function, Mode selection)
y98 data Frequency command Run command source
0 Follow H30 data Follow H30 data

1 Via fieldbus (option) Follow H30 data
2 Follow H30 data Via fieldbus (option)
3 Via fieldbus (option) Via fieldbus (option)
Table J.13 H30 and y98 settings by combination of sources
Frequency command
Via RS-485 Via RS-485
Via fieldbus
Inverter itself communications communications
(option)
link port 1 link port 2
H30 = 0 H30 = 1 H30 = 4 H30 = 0 (1, 4)

Inverter itself
y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 1
Run command source
Via RS-485
H30 = 2 H30 = 3 H30 = 5 H30 = 2 (3, 5)
communications link
y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 1
(port 1)
Via RS-485
H30 = 6 H30 = 7 H30 = 8 H30 = 6 (7, 8)
communications link
y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 1
(port 2)
H30 = 0 (2, 6) H30 = 1 (3, 7) H30 = 4 (5, 8) H30 = 0 (1 to 8)
Via fieldbus (option)
y98 = 2 y98 = 2 y98 = 2 y98 = 3
For details, refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s Manual, the Field Bus (Option) Instruction Manual or
the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 9.
• When the terminal command “LE” (“Select link operation (RS-485, BUS option)”) is assigned to a digital input
terminal, turning “LE” ON makes the settings of H30 and y98 enabled. When LE is OFF, those settings are
disabled so that both frequency commands and run commands specified from the inverter itself take control.
(Function codes E01 to E05, data = 24)
No “LE” assignment is functionally equivalent to the “LE” being ON.
Appendix-201
H42, H43, Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor, Cumulative run time of cooling fan
H48 Cumulative run time of capacitors on printed circuit boards
Related function codes: H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor
H98 Protection/maintenance function
■ Life prediction function

The inverter has the life prediction function for some parts which measures the discharging time or counts the
voltage applied time, etc. The function allows you to monitor the current lifetime state on the LED monitor and
judge whether those parts are approaching the end of their service life. The life prediction function can also issue
early warning signals if the lifetime alarm command LIFE is assigned to any of the digital output terminals by any of
E20, E21 and E27.
The predicted values should be used only as a guide since the actual service life is influenced by the surrounding
temperature and other usage environments.
Object of life On the LED

Prediction function End-of-life criteria Prediction timing
prediction monitor
DC link bus Calculating the capacitance of 85% or lower of the initial At periodic 5_05
capacitor DC link bus capacitor capacitance at shipment inspection (Capacitance)
Measures the discharging time (See “[ 1 ] Measuring the H98 bit3 = 0
of the DC link bus capacitor capacitance of DC link bus
when the main power is shut capacitor in comparison
down and calculates the with initial one at
capacitance. shipment” on page 204.)
85% or lower of the During ordinary 5_05
reference capacitance operation (Capacitance)
under ordinary operating H98 bit3 = 1
conditions at the user site
(See “[ 2 ] Measuring the
capacitance of DC link bus
capacitor under ordinary
operating conditions at
power shutdown” on page
205.)
ON-time counting of DC link bus Exceeding 87,600 hours During ordinary 5_26
capacitor (10 years) operation (Elapsed time)
Counts the time elapsed when (ND mode: 61,320 hours 5_27
the voltage is applied to the DC (7 years))
link bus capacitor, while (Remaining
correcting it according to the hours)
capacitance measured above.
Electrolytic Counts the time elapsed when Exceeding 87,600 hours During ordinary 5_06
capacitors on the voltage is applied to the (10 years) operation (Cumulative
printed circuit capacitors, while correcting it (ND mode: 61,320 hours run time)
boards according to the surrounding (7 years))
temperature.
Cooling fans Counts the run time of the Exceeding 87,600 hours During ordinary 5_07
cooling fans. (10 years) operation (Cumulative
(ND mode: 61,320 hours run time)
(7 years))
APPENDICES
Appendix-202
■ Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor (H42)
Calculating the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor

• The discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor depends largely on the inverter’s internal load conditions, e.g.
options attached or ON/OFF of digital I/O signals. If actual load conditions are so different from the ones at
which the initial/reference capacitance is measured that the measurement result falls out of the accuracy level
required, then the inverter does not perform measurin
measuring.
• The capacitance measuring conditions at shipment are extremely restricted, e.g., all input terminals being OFF
in order to stabilize the load and measure the capacitance accurately. Those conditions are, therefore, different
from the actual operating conditions in almost all cases. If the actual operating conditions are the same as those
at shipment, shutting down the inverter power automatically measures the discharging time; however, if they are
different, no automatic measurement is performed. To pe perform
rform it, put those conditions back to the factory default
ones and shut down the inverter. For the measuring procedure, see ““[ 1 ] Measuring the capacitance of DC link
bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment
shipment” on page 204.
• To measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is
turned OFF, it is necessary to set up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measure the reference
capacitance
acitance (initial setting) when the inverter is introduced. For the reference capacitance setup procedure, see
“[[ 2 ] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions at power
shutdown
shutdown”” on page 205.. Performing the setup procedure automatically detects and saves the measuring
conditions of the DC link bus capacitor.
Setting bit 3 of H98 data to 0 restores the inverter to the measurement in comparison with the initial capacitance
measured at shipment.
When the inverter uses an auxiliary control power input, the load conditions widely differ so that the
discharging time cannot be e accurately measured. In this case, measuring of the discharging time can be
disabled with the function code H98 (Bit 4 = 0) for preventing unintended measuring. (For details, refer to
H98.)
ON-time
time counting of DC link bus capacitor
• In a machine system where the inverter main power is rarely shut down, theth e inverter does not measure the
discharging time. For such an inverter, the ON
ON-time
time counting is provided. If the capacitance measurement is
made, the inverter corrects the ON-time
ON time according to the capacitance measured. The ON ON-time
time counting result
can be re
represented
presented as “elapsed time” and “remaining time” before the end of life.
Appendix
Appendix-203
203
[1] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at
shipment
When bit 3 of H98 data is 0, the measuring procedure given below measures the capacitance of DC link bus
capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment when the power is turned OFF. The measuring result can be
displayed on the keypad as a ratio (%) to the initial capacitance.
--------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------Capacitance
Capacitance measuring procedure
procedure----------------------------------------
----------------------------------------
1) To ensure validity in the comparative measurement, put the condition of the inverter back to the state at
factory shipment.
• Remove the option card (if already in use) from the inverter.
• In case another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P(+) and N(-)
N( ) terminals of the main circuit,
disconnect the wires. (You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor (optional), if any.)
• Disconnect power wires for the auxiliary input to the control circuit (R0, T0).
• In case the standard keypad has been replaced with an optional multi-function
multi function keypad TP
TP-A1
A1 after the
purchase, put back the original standard keypad.
• Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals [FWD], [REV], and [X1] through [X5] of the control
circuit
• If a potentiometer is connected to terminal [13], disconnect it.
• If an external apparatus is attached to terminal [PLC], disconnect it.
• Ensure that transistor output signals [Y1],
[Y1] , [Y2] and relay output signal [30A/B/C] will not be turned ON.
• Disable the RS
RS-485
485 communications links.
If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals, they are considered
ON when the inverter is not running. Specify positpositive
ive logic for them.
• Keep the surrounding temperature within 25 ±10 ℃.
2) Turn ON the main circuit power.
3) Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state.
4) Turn OF
OFF
F the main circuit power.
5) The inverter automatically starts the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor. Make sure
that “ . . . . ” appears on the LED monitor.
If “ . . . . ” does not appear on the LED monitor, the measurement has not started. Check the
conditions listed in 1).
6) Afte
Afterr “ . . . . ” has disappeared from the LED monitor, turn ON the main circuit power again.
7) Select Menu #5 “Maintenance Information” in Programming mode and note the reading (relative capacitance
(%) of the DC link bus capacitor).
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-204
204
[2] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating
conditions at power shutdown
When bit 3 of H98 data is 1, the inverter automatically measures the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor
under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF. This measurement requires setting up the load
conditions for ordinary operation and measuring the reference capacitance when the inverter is introduced to the
practical operation, using the setup procedure given below.
Function code Name Data
H42 Capacitance of DC link bus • Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor (measured

capacitor value)
• Start of initial capacitance measuring mode under
ordinary operating conditions (0000)
• Measurement failure (0001)
H47 Initial capacitance of DC link • Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor (measured
bus capacitor value)
• Start of initial capacitance measuring mode under
ordinary operating conditions (0000)
• Measurement failure (0001)
When replacing parts, clear or modify the H42 and H47 data. For details, refer to the maintenance related
documents.
---------------------------------------
---------------------------------------Reference
Reference capacitance setup procedure
procedure--------------------------------------
--------------------------------------
1) Set function code H98 (Protection/maintenance function) to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria
for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor (Bit 3 = 1) (refer to function code H98).
2) Turn OFF all run commands.
3) Make the inverter ready to be turned OFF und
under
er ordinary operating conditions.
4) Set both function codes H42 (Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor) and H47 (Initial capacitance of DC link
bus capacitor) to “0000”.
5) Turn OFF the inverter, and the following operations are automatically performed.
The
he inverter measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and saves the result in function code
H47 (Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor).
The conditions under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved.
During the measurement, “ . . . . ” will appear on the LED monitor.
6) Turn ON the inverter again.
Confirm that H42 (Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor) and H47 (Initial capacitance of DC link bus
capacitor) hold right values. Shift to Menu #5 “Maintenance Information” and confirm that the relative
capacitance (ratio to full capacitance) is 100%.
If the measurement has failed, “0001” is entered into both H42 and H47. Remove the factor of the failure
and conduct the measurement again.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hereafter, each time the inverter is turned OFF, it automatically measures the discharging time of the DC link bus
capacitor if the
he above conditions are met. Periodically check the relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor
(%) with Menu #5 “Maintenance Information” in Programming mode.
The condition given above tends to produce a rather large measurement error. If this mode gives you a
lifetime alarm, set H98 (Protection/maintenance function) back to the default setting (Bit 3 (Select life
judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor) = 0) and conduct the measurement under the condition at
the time of factory shipment.
Appendix
Appendix-205
205
■ Cumulative run time of capacitors on printed circuit boards (H48)
H48 Cumulative run time of Displays the cumulative run time of capacitor on the
capacitors on printed circuit printed circuit board in units of ten hours.
boards • Data setting range: 0 to 9999 (0 to 99990 hours)
When replacing capacitors on printed circuit boards, clearing or modifying H48 data is required. For details, refer to
the maintenance related documents.
■ Cumulative run time of cooling fan (H43)
H43 Cumulative run time of Displays the cumulative run time of cooling fan in units of
cooling fan ten hours.
• Data setting range: 0 to 9999 (0 to 99990 hours)
When replacing the cooling fan, clearing or modifying H43 data is required. For details, refer to the maintenance
related documents.
H44 Startup count for motor 1
H44 counts the number of inverter startups and displays it in hexadecimal format. Check the displayed number on
the maintenance scree
screen of the keypad, and use it as a guide for maintenance timing for parts such as belts. To
start the counting over again, e.g. after a belt replacement, set the H44 data to “0000.”
H45 Mock alarm

Related function codes: H97 (Clear alarm data)
H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly
at the time of machine setup. Setting the H45 data to “1” displays mock alarm err on the LED monitor. It also
issues alarm output (for any alarm) “ALM” (if assigned to a digital output terminal by any of E20, E21 and E27).
Accessing the H45 data requires simultaneous keying of the key + key. After that, the H45 data
automatically reverts to “0,” allowing you to reset the alarm.
Same as other alarms that could occur when running the inverter, the inverter saves mock alarm data, enabling
you to confirm the mock alarm status.
To clear the m
mock
ock alarm data, use H97. (Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of the key +
key.) H97 data automatically returns to “0” after clearing the alarm data.
A mock alarm can be issued also by simultaneous keying of the key + key on the kkeypad
eypad for 5
seconds or more.
H46 Starting mode (A

(Auto
uto search delay time 2) (refer to H09)
For details, refer to the description of H09.
H47, H48 Initial capacitance of DC link

ink bus capacitor, Cumulative run time of capacitors on
printed circuit boards (refer to H42)

APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-206
206
H49 Starting mode (Auto search delay time 1) (refer to H09)
H50, H51 Non-linear V/f 1 (Frequency and voltage) (refer to F04)

H52, H53 Non-linear V/f 2 (Frequency and voltage)
H56 Deceleration time for forced stop (refer to F07)
H63 Low limiter (Mode selection) (refer to F15)
H64 Low limiter (Lower limiting frequency)
H64 specifies the lower limit of frequency to be applied when the current limiter, torque limiter, or overload
prevention control is activated. Normally, it is not necessary to change this data.
H68 Slip compensation 1 (Operating conditions) (refer to F42)
Appendix-207
H69 Anti--regenerative
regenerative control (Mode
ode selection)
Related function codes: H76 (Torque limiter) (Frequency
( requency rising limit for braking)
Enable the automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative

(anti regenerative control) with this function code. In the inverter not equipped
with a PWM converter or braking unit, if the regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter’s braking capability,
an overvoltage trip occ
occurs. Turning digital input “AR
“AR-CCL”
CCL” ON cancels anti-regenerative
anti regenerative control.
( Function codes E01 to E05, data =82)
If anti-regenerative
regenerative control is selected, the output frequency is controlled to suppress the regenerative energy for
avoiding an overvoltage trip.
Function
H69 Force
Force-to-stop
stop with actual deceleration time AR-CCL
CCL
Control mode
exceeding three times the specified one
0 Disable automatic deceleration — OFF

2 Torque limit control Enable OFF
3 DC link bus voltage control Enable OFF
4 Torque limit control Disable OFF
5 DC link bus voltage control Disable OFF
— Disable automatic deceleration — ON
FRENIC-Ace
Ace is equipped with two control modes: torque limiter and DC link bus voltage control.
Understand the features of the respective modes and select the appropriate one.
Control mode Control operation Operation mode Characteristics
Torque limiter Controls the output Enabled during Features high response and makes
(H69 = 2, 4) frequency so that the acceleration, less prone to overvoltage trips under
braking torque is constant speed impact load.
approximately 0. operation and
deceleration.
DC link bus Controls the output Enabled only during Regenerative capability of the
voltage control frequency so that the DC deceleration inverter will be maximum use.
(H69 = 3, 5) link bus voltage is Disabled during Deceleration time will be shorter
decreased when it constant speed than the torque limit control.
exceeds the limit level. operation
■ Torque limiter (Frequency rising limit for braking) (H76)

.0 (Hz)
With the torque limiter, the inverter increases the output frequency to limit the output torque. Excessive increase of
the output frequency may cause danger,
danger and therefore the frequency increment limit for braking (H76) is provided.
This prevents the output frequency from increasing to exceed the “reference frequency + H76.” If the limit is
reached, however, anti
anti-regenerative
regenerative control is restricted and an overvoltage
overvoltag e trip may occur. Increasing the
frequency increment limit for braking improves the anti
anti-regenerative
regenerative capability.
If a run command is turned OFF, the anti-regenerative
anti regenerative control causes the frequency to increase and operation may
not stop depending on the loa load
d conditions. For safety, a function is provided in which the anti
anti-regenerative
regenerative control
is forced to be disabled if the actual deceleration time becomes three times the deceleration time currently selected
forcing the operation to stop. The function can be enabled/disabled by the setting of H69.
• The deceleration
deceleration time may be automatically increased by anti
anti-regenerative
regenerative control.
• Disable the anti-regenerative
anti regenerative control when a braking unit is connected. Otherwise, the
anti-regenerativ
regenerativee control may be activa
activated
ted at the same time as the operation of the braking unit,
resulting in a deceleration time not in accordance with the setting.
• An excessively short deceleration time causes the DC link bus voltage of the inverter to rise too fast
for the anti-regenerative
anti regenerative control to function. In that case, specify a longer deceleration time.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-208
208
H70 Overload prevention control
Specifies the rate of decrease of the output frequency of overload prevention control. Before the inverter generates
a heat sink overheat or overload trip (alarm 0h1 or 0lu ), the output frequency of the inverter is decreased for
avoiding a trip. This is a
applied
pplied when operation is required to continue in a system in which the load decreases as
the output frequency decreases, such as a pump.
H70 data Function
0.00 Uses the deceleration time currently selected (F08, E11, E13, E15, etc.).
0.01 to 100.0 Decelerates at a deceleration rate of 0.01 to 100.0 (Hz/s).
999 Cancel overload prevention control
■ Overload prevention controlling – “OLP” (E20, E21 and E27, data = 36)
Outputs “OLP”, which is a signal that turns ON during overload prevention control, in order to inform that the
overload prevention control has been activated and the output frequency has changed.
No effect can be expected in a system in which the load d
does
oes not decrease even if the output frequency
decreases. Do not use this function.
H71 Deceleration characteristic
Enable hard braking control with this function code.

During motor deceleration, if the regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter’s braking capability, an
overvoltage trip occurs. When hard braking control is selected, the motor loss is increased and the deceleration
torque is increased during motor deceleration.
H71 data Function
0 Disable
1 Action
This function suppresses the torque during deceleration and is not effective if braking load is applied.
When anti-regenerative
regenerative control of the torque limiter is enabled (H69 = 2, 4), the deceleration
characteristic is disabled.
H72 Main power shutdown detection ((Mode

ode selection)
This function monitors the AC input power supply of the inverter to see if the AC input power supply (main circuit
power) is established and prevents inverter operation when the main circuit power is not established.
Available FRN0045E2E
2E-4EH or above.
above
H72 data Function
0 Disables main circuit power cutoff detection

1 Enables main circuit power cutoff detection
With power supply via a PWM converter or DC link bus, there is no AC input. When the data for H72 is “1,” the
inverter cannot operate. Change the data for H72 to “0.”
For single-phase
phase supply, consult your Fuji Electric representatives.
Appendix
Appendix-209
209
H76 Torque limiter (Braking) (Frequency rising limiter for braking) (refer to H69)
H77 Service life of DC link bus capacitor (Remaining time)
Indicates the time remaining (in units of ten hours) before the end of service life of the DC link bus capacitor.
Transfer the DC link bus capacitor life data when replacing the printed circuit board.
• Data setting range: 0 to 8760 (in units of 10 hours 0 to 87,600 hours)
H78 Maintenance interval (M1)

H94 Cumulative motor run time 1
Specify the maintenance interval in hours with the maintenance interval (M1) (H78).
Specify in units of 10 hours. Up to 9999 x 10 hours can be spec
specified.
• Data setting range: 0 (disable), 1 to 9999 (in units of 10 hours)
■ Maintenance timer counted up – “MNT” (E20, E21 and E27, da

data
ta = 84)
When the cumulative motor run time 1 (H94) reaches the value specified by the maintenance interval (H78), the
inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal “MNT”.
■ Cumulative motor run time 1 (H94)

The cumulative run time of the motor can be indicated by keypad operation. It can be used for management of the
machinery or maintenance. Specifying an arbitrary time for the cumulative motor run time 1 (H94) allows an
arbitrary value to be specified for the cumulative motor run time. It can be replaced
repl aced with the initial data to use as a
guide for the replacement of machine parts or inverter. S
Setting “0” allows the cumulative motor run time to be reset.
<For half yearly maintenance>
Cumulative motor run time (H94)
(8760 h=a
=a year)
(4380 h=halt
=halt year)
Time
Maintenance timer
“MNT”
If the maintenance interval is reached, set a new value in H78 and press the key to reset the output
signal and restart measurement.
This function is exclusively applied to the 1st motor.
■ Count the run time of commercial power-driven

power driven motor 1 – “CRUN-M1”
M1” (E01 to E05, data = 72)
Even when a motor is driven by commercial power, not by the inverter, it is possible to count the cumulative motor
run time 1 (H94) by detecting the ON/OFF state of the auxiliary ccontact
ontact of the magnetic contactor for switching to
the commercial power line.
Check the cumulative motor run time with 5_23 on Menu #5 “Maintenance Information” of the keypad.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-210
210
H79 Preset startup count for maintenance (M1)

Related function codes: H44 Startup count for motor 1
H79 specifies the number of inverter startup times to determine the next maintenance timing, e.g., for replacement
of a belt.
Set the H79 and H44 data in hexadecimal. The maximum setting count is 65,535 (FFFF in hexadecimal.)
• Data setting range: OFF (disable), 0001 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
■ Maintenance timer counted up – “MNT” (E20, E21 and E27, data = 84)
When the startup counter for motor 1 (H44) reaches the number specified by H79 (Preset startup count for
maintenance (M1)), the inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal “MNT” (if assigned to any digital terminal
with any to E20, E21 and E27) to inform the user of the need of the maintenance of the machinery.
< Maintenance every 1,000 times of startups >
Startup counter 1(H44)
(2000 times)
(1000 times)
Startup co
counter
Maintenance timer
“MNT”
If the startup counter reaches the specified value, set a new value for the next maintenance in H79 and
press the key to reset the output signal and restart counting.
This function is exclusively applied to the 1st motor.
H80 Output current fluctuation damping gain for motor 1
The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics and/or backlash in the
machinery (load). Modifying the H80 data adjusts the controls in order to suppress such fluctuation. However, as
incorrect setting of this gain may cause larger current fluctuation, do not modify the default setting unless it is
necessary.
ssary.
Appendix
Appendix-211
211
H81, H82 Light alarm selection 1 and 2
If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state “light alarm”, it can continue the current operation without tripping
while displaying the “light alarm” indication l-al on the LED monitor. In addition to the indication l-al, the inverter
blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED. Function codes H81 and H82 specify which alarms should be categorized as
“light alarm.”
The table below lists alarms selectable as “light alarm.”
Code Name Description
0h1 Heat sink overheat Heat sink temperature increased to the trip level.
An error that has occurred in peripheral equipment
0h2 Enable external alarm trip
turned the external alarm signal THR ON.
The temperature inside the inverter abnormally has
0h3 Inverter internal overheat
increased.
Estimated temperature of the coil in the braking
dbh Braking resistor overheat
resistor exceeded the allowable level.
Motor temperature calculated with the inverter output
0l1 Overload of motor 1
current reached the trip level.
Communications error between the inverter and an
er4 Option communications error
option.
er5 Option error An option judged that an error occurred.
er8 RS-485 communications error
RS-485 communications error in COM ports 1 or 2.
erp (COM port 1, 2)
cof PID feedback wire break The PID feedback signal wire(s) is broken.
fal Detect DC fan lock Failure of the air circulation DC fan inside the inverter
0l Motor overload early warning Early warning before a motor overload
0h Heat sink overheat early warning Early warning before a heat sink overheat trip
It is judged that the service life of any one of the
capacitors (DC link bus capacitors or electrolytic
capacitors on the printed circuit boards) or cooling fan
lif Lifetime alarm has expired.
Or, failure of the air circulation DC fan inside the
inverter.
ref Reference loss Analog frequency command was lost.
Warning related to PID control (absolute-value alarm
pid PID alarm
or deviation alarm)
Output torque drops below the low torque detection
uTl Low output torque detection
level for the specified period.
The PTC thermistor on the motor detected a high
pTc PTC thermistor activated
temperature.
Machine life (Cumulative run The motor cumulative run time reached the specified
rTe
time) level.
cnT Machine life (Number of startups) Number of startups reached the specified level.
Set data for selecting “light alarms” in hexadecimal. For details on how to select the codes, see the next page.
• Data setting range: 0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
APPENDICES
Appendix-212
■ Selecting light alarm factors

To set and display the light alarm factors in hexadecimal format, each light alarm factor has been assigned to bits 0
to 15 as listed in Table and Table . Set the bit that corresponds to the desired light alarm factor to “1.” Table
shows the
he relationship between each of the light alarm factor assignments and the LED monitor display.
Table gives the conversion table from 4-bit
4 bit binary to hexadecimal.
Table J.14 Light Alarm Selection 1 (H81), Bit Assignment of Selectable Factors
Bit Code Data Bit Code Data
15 0h6 Charging resistor overheat 7 — —
14 — — 6 — —
RS-485
RS 485 communications error (COM
13 erp 5 0l1 Overload of motor 1
port 2)
RS-485
RS 485 communications error (COM
12 er8 4 dbh Braking resistor overheat
port 1)
11 er5 Option error 3 — —
10 er4 Option communications error 2 0h3 Inverter internal overheat
9 — — 1 0h2 External alarm
8 — — 0 0h1 Heat sink overheat
Table J.15 Light Alarm Selection 2 (H82), Bit Assignment of Selectable Factors
Bit Code Data Bit Code Data
15 — — 7 lif Lifetime alarm
14 — — 6 0h Heat sink overheat early warning
13 cnT Inverter life (Number of startups) 5 0l Motor overload early warning
12 rTe Inverter life (Cumulative run time) 4 fal Detect DC fan lock
11 pTc PTC thermistor activated 3 cof PID feedback wire break
10 uTl Low output torque detection 2 — —
9 pid PID alarm 1 — —
8 ref Reference loss 0 — —
Table J.16 Display of Light Alarm Factor

(Example) Light alarm factors “RS-485
“RS 485 communications error (COM port 2),” “RS-485
“RS 485 communications error (COM
port 1),” “Option communications error,” “Overload of motor 1” and “Heat sink overheat” are selected by
H81.
LED No. LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Code — — erp er8 er5 er4 — — — — O0l1 dbh — 0h3 O0h2 O0h1
Binary 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
Sample indication
Hexadecimal
* Refer to 3 4 2 1
Table
Hexadecimal
on the LED
monitor
Appendix
Appendix-213
213
■ Hexadecimal expression
A 4-bit
bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format (hexadecimal digit). The table below shows the
correspondence between the two notations.
Table J.16 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion
Binary Hexadecimal Binary Hexadecimal
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 9
0 0 1 0 2 1 0 1 0 a
0 0 1 1 3 1 0 1 1 b
0 1 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 c
0 1 0 1 5 1 1 0 1 d
0 1 1 0 6 1 1 1 0 e
0 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 f
When H26 = 1 (PTC (The inverter immediately trips with 0h4 displayed)), if the PTC thermistor is
activated, the inverter stops without displaying ll-al,
al, blinking the KEYPAD CONTROL LED, or outputting
L-ALM
ALM signal, regardless of the assignment of bit 11 (PTC thermistor activated) by H82 (Light Alarm
Selection 2).
■ Light alarm – “L-ALM”

ALM” (E20, E21 and E27, data = 98)
This output signal “L
“L-ALM”
ALM” comes ON when a light alarm occurs.
H89 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor – data retention
When the electronic thermal overload protection for motor is used, whether to clear the cumulative value of the
thermal by inverter power
power-off
off or retain the value after power
power-off
off can be specified.
Data for H89 Function
0 Clears cumulative value of thermal by inverter power-off.

power
1 Retains cumulative value of thermal after inverter power-off

power off (factory default).
H86, H90 Reserved for particular manufacturers
H86 and H90 are reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise specified, do not access these function
codes.
H91 PID feedback wire break detection
Using the terminal [C1] (C1 function) (current input) for PID feedback signal enables wire break detection and
alarm (cof) issuance. H91 specifies whether the wire break detection is enabled, or the duration of detection. (The
inverter judges an input curr
current
ent to the terminal [C1] below 2 mA as a wire break.)
This function does not work unless C40 is set to 0.
• Data setting range: 0.0 (Disable wire break detection)
0.1 to 60.0 s (Detect wire break and issue cof alarm within the time)
H92, H93 Continuous running at the momentary power failure (P, I) (refer to F14)
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-214
214
H94 Cumulative motor run time 1 (refer to H78)
Refer to the description of H78.
H95 DC braking (Braking

( raking response mode) (refer to F20 to F22)
Refer to the descriptions of F20 through F22.
H96 STOP key priority/Start

priority/Start check function
H96 specifies a functional combination of “ STOP key priority” and “Start check function” as listed below.
H96 data STOP key priority Start check function
0 Disable Disable
1 Enable Disable
2 Disable Enable
3 Enable Enable
■ STOP key priority

Even when run commands are entered from the digital input terminals or via the RS-485
RS 485 communications link (link
operation), pressing the key forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor. After that, er6 appears on
the LED monitor.
■ Start check fun

function
ction
For safety, this function checks whether any run command has been turned ON or not in each of the following
situations. If one has been turned ON, the inverter does not start up but displays alarm code er6 on the LED
monitor.
• When the power to the inverter is turned ON.
• When the key is pressed to release an alarm status or when the digital input terminal command “RST”
(“Reset alarm”) is turned ON.
• When the run command source is switched by a digital input terminal command such as “LE” (“Enable
communications link via RS
RS-485
485 or fieldbus”) or “LOC” (“Select local (keypad) operation”).
H97 Clear alarm data

Related function codes: H45 Mock alarm
H97 clears alarm data (alarm history and relevant information) stored in the inverter.
To clear alarm data, simultaneous keying of “ key + key” is required.
H97 data Function
0 Disable
1 Enable (Setting “1” clears alarm data and then returns to “0.”)
Appendix
Appendix-215
215
H98 Protection/Maintenance function ((Mode

ode selection)
H98 specifies whether to enable or disable automatic lowering of carrier frequency, input phase loss protection,
output phase loss protection, judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor, judgment on the life of DC link
bus capacitor, DC fan lock detection and braking transistor error detection by setting a bit combination
combination.
Automatic lowering of carrier frequency (Bit 0)

This function should be used for critical machinery that requires keeping the inverter running. Even if a heat si
sink
overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load, abnormal surrounding temperature, or cooling system failure,
enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping ( 0h1, 0h3 or 0lu ). Note that enabling this
function results in increas
increased
ed motor noise.
Input phase loss protection (lin ) (Bit 1)

This function detects the voltage unbalance
balance between the phases and phase loss of 3-phase
3 phase power supply. And an
alarm displays lin to stop the inverter when it detects.
In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected, phase loss or line
line-to-line
voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus
connected to the main circuit.
Output phase loss protection (0pl) (Bit 2)

Upon detection of output phase loss while the inverter is running, this feature stops the inverter and displays an
alarm 0pl.
Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit, if the
t he magnetic contactor goes OFF
during operation, all the phases will be lost. In such a case, this protection function does not work.
Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor (Bit 3)

Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the lif
life
e of the DC link bus capacitor between the factory default
setting and a user
user-defined
defined setting.
Before specifying a user-defined
user defined threshold, measure and confirm the reference level in advance.
( Function code H42)
Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor

capa citor (Bit 4)
Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is judged by measuring the discharging time after power
OFF. The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the
inverter. Therefore
Therefore,, if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly, the discharging time cannot be accurately
measured. As a result, it may be mistakenly determined that the DC link bus capacitor has reached the end of its
life. To avoid such an error, you can disable
disable the judgment based on the discharging time. (Even if it is disabled, the
judgment based on the “ON “ON-time
time counting” while the voltage is applied to the DC link bus capacitor is performed.)
perform
For details about the life prediction function, refer to H42.
Since load may fluctuate significantly in the cases described below,

below, disable the judgment on the life during
operation even in user--defined
defined setting mode.
mode. During periodical maintenance, either conduct the measurement with
the judgment enabled under appropriate
appropriate conditions or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions
matching the actual ones.
• Auxiliary input for cont
control
rol power is used.
• An option card is used
used.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-216
216
Reserve (bit 5)
Braking transistor error detection (Bit 6)

(dba FRN0060E2E-4EH or below )
Upon detection of a built-in braking transistor error, this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm dba. Set
data of this bit to “0” when the inverter does not use a braking transistor and there is no need of entering an alarm
state.
To set data of function code H98, assign the setting of each function to each bit and then convert the 8-bit binary to
the decimal number. Refer to the assignment of each function to each bit and a conversion example below.
Bit Function Data = 0 Data = 1 Factory default
Bit 0 Lower the carrier frequency Disable Enable 1: Enable

automatically
Bit 1 Detect input phase loss Continue to run Enter alarm 1: Enter alarm
processing processing
Bit 2 Detect output phase loss Continue to run Enter alarm 0: Continue to run
processing
Bit 3 Select life judgment threshold Factory default User-defined setting 0: Factory default
of DC link bus capacitor
Bit 4 Judge the life of DC link bus Disable
Enable 1: Enable
capacitor
Bit 5 reserve Enter alarm Continue to run 0: Enter alarm
processing processing
Bit 6 Detect braking transistor Continue to run Enter alarm 0: Continue to run
breakdown processing
Decimal and binary conversion

6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Decimal = Bit 6 × 2 + Bit 5 × 2 + Bit 4 × 2 + Bit 3 × 2 + Bit 2 × 2 + Bit 1 × 2 + Bit 0 × 2
= Bit 7 × 128 + Bit 6 × 64 + Bit 5 × 32 + Bit 4 × 16 + Bit 3 × 8 + Bit 2 × 4 + Bit 1 × 2 + Bit 0 × 1
= 64 + 0 × 32 + 1 × 16 + 0 × 8 + 0 × 4 + 1 × 2 + 1 × 1
= 16 + 2 + 1
= 19
Appendix-217
H99, Password 2 setting/check

H197, H198 User password 1 (selection of protective operation, setting check)
H199 User password protection valid
The password function is the function to hide the function code entirely/partially which is set for the inverter. When
this function is used, perform correct settings
settings after familiarizing yourself with the following details. If incorrect
settings are made, the function code cannot be changed or checked. An alarm may also occur and the inverter
may stop. Perform the operation carefully.
If the objective is to prevent
prevent inadvertent rewriting of the setting value from the touch panel, it is
recommended to use the data protective function with function code F00 rather than the password
function. For details of the data protection, refer to the items in F00..
If a password is inadvertently set, the setting values cannot be changed from the remote touch panel,
multi-function
function touch panel or external device using the link function.. Be careful for setting.
If an incorrect password setting value is entered and yoyou
u failed to decode the password, the password
protection state cannot be released. In addition, failure to decode the password consecutively 5 times
results in minor failure l-al
al.
To prevent the password decoding by an ill
ill-disposed
disposed third party, failure to decode the password for the
specified number of times results in lok alarm, which disables the inverter operation. Therefore, it is
recommended to decode the password during stop of the system. If it is necessary to decode the
password during operation, perform decoding carefully.
We are not able to know the passwords set by customers. If you have forgotten the password setting
value, the only way to decode the password is initialization of the function code. S
Sett and control the
password carefully.
■ Password
assword 1 (Rewrite disable protection)
Function code setting values excluding some codes can be protected as rewrite disable.
Select the target function code which is protected by H197 and set the password (hexadecimal
( hexadecimal 4 digits) with
function code H198.. When function code H199 is set to 1, password 1 protective status (rewrite disable protection)
is active.
Function code Name Remarks
0: Displays all function codes, however, changes are prohibited.

1: Only function codes applicable to quick setup can be displayed or
Protection operation
H197 changed.
selection
2: Only function codes for customize logic settings are hidden, and
changes are prohibited.
H198 Set/verify 0000 to FFFF
0: Disable
H199 Protection enable
1: Protect
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-218
218
■ Temporary decoding of password 1 (rewrite disable protection)
When password 1 protective status is shown and the same value as the password set for function code H198 is
entered in H198, password 1 protective status is temporarily released and the function code setting value can be
rewritten.
If password 2 is set at the same time, it is necessary to decode password 2 with H99 in advance.
Figure J.20 Relation chart of password 1 protection status
■ Password 2 (Read/write disable protection)

Setting values of all function codes not by selecting function code H197 can be protected as read disable and
rewrite disable. (Exceptionally, partial function codes are not protected.)
Set the password with function code H99 and set function code H199 to 1. Password 2 protective status (read/write
disable protection) is active.
The function code of read/write disable does not allow writing of the setting value to the inverter with a remote
touch panel, multi-function touch panel or external device using serial communication, or reading of the setting
value.
■ Temporary decoding of password 2 (read/write disable protection)

When password 2 protective status is shown and the same value as the password (hexadecimal 4 digits) set for
function code H99 is entered in H99, password 2 protective status is temporarily decoded and the function code
value can be read and it can be displayed on the touch panel.
If password 1 protection (rewrite disable protection) is also set, the function code can be rewritten by temporarily
decoding password 1 protective status continuously.
Appendix-219
■ Failure of temporary decoding of passwords 1 and 2

In password 1 protective status or password 2 protective status, if the password value entered in function code
H198 or H99 is incorrect when trying to temporarily cancel the protective status, temporary decoding is disabled.
In both function codes H198 and H99, nsecutive failures of password input result in minor failure l-al
H99 5 consecutive al.
Password not set

Password
Protection + Occurrence (Function
Function code read enable
enable)
of LoK alarm (Function
Function code Set
Set the
the password
password to
to function
function code
code
read/write
write disable
disable) H99.
(Inverter
Inverter operation
disable)
Perform data initialization

[H03=1] with Fuji Electric
Set incorrect passwords standard initial value [H02=0].
to function code H 99.
(No. of specified times ).
Set incorrect passwords to
function code H 99
99. (Less than
5 times)
Set
Set the
the correct
correct password
password to
to
function code H 99.
Perform data initialization
[H03=1] with Fuji Electric
standard initial value
[H02=0]. Password temporary
Password protection
decoding
(Function
Function code read
read/write
(Function
Function code read
After 20 minutes , disable)
enable)
release the minor
failure.
Set 1 to function code H 199 or or the

the specified
specified
period
period of
of time
time has
has passed
passed after
after temporary
temporary
decoding of the password .
Password
Protection + Occurrence
of minor failure (Function
Function code
read/write
write disable
disable) Set incorrect passwords to
(Inverter
Inverter operation function code H 99. (5 times)
enable)
Figure J.21
J. Relation chart of password 2 protection status
In our factory default status, passwords are not provided excluding special products. Therefore, if the
password set for H198 or H99 is unknown or forgotten, we do not answer or inform you of the password
or its decoding method from protective status.
For this reason, set and control the password at your own risk. If a password is set at the delivery of the
product and its decoding is required, please contact the dealer you purchased or the unit manufacturer.
(We
We are not able to know the passwords set by customers.)
■ Setting
tting passwords 1 and 2 with multi-function
multi function touch panel and temporary decoding
Setting or temporary decoding of passwords 1 and 2 using the multi-function
multi function touch panel is performed by the
special menu on the multi
multi-function
function touch panel. Therefore, function codes
c H99，H198 and H199 are not displayed
on the function code list of the function
nction code setting menu or function code check menu on the multi
multi-function
function touch
panel (H197
H197 is displayed).
For the special password menu of the multi
multi-function
function touch panel, refer to the instruction manual of the
multi
multi-function
function touch panel.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-220
220
H101 Destination
Refer to Chapter 4 “4.4 Destination Setting” of Frenic-Ace User’s Manual.
H111 UPS operation Level
Refer to the description of “ UPS operation (Available in FRN0020E2 -2G H / FRN0085E2 -4EH /
FRN0012E2 -7G H or below )
” in E01 to E05.
• Data setting range: 120 to 220 VDC: (200 V class), 240 to 440 VDC: (400 V class)
H114 Anti-regenerative control (Level) Related function code: H69
Allows the adjustment of the level when anti-regenerative control by torque limiter is performed with H69 = 2, 4.
Data for H114 Function
0.0 to 50.0% Adjusted level: Increasing the value increases the frequency operation.
999 Standard level
Appendix-221
H116 Fire Mode (Mode selection)

H117 (Confirmation time)
H118 (Reference frequency)
H119 (Rotation direction)
H120 (Start method)
H121 (Reset interval)
Set when enabling forced operation (Fire Mode). In an emergency, operation at a specified speed can be
performed. Even when an alarm of the inverter is generated, operation is continued. In such a case where instant
overcurrent protection occurs, the retry function is to be used to restart the operation.
Assigning the FMS to a digital input terminal and turning the FMS ON enables forced operation (Fire Mode).
(Function
ion code E01 to E07; data = 134)
When the inverter is running with the FMS being ON, the protective function is disabled.
Therefore, the inverter keeps running even if an alarm occurs so that the inverter could
be broken or a fire could occur.
Fire Mode (Mode selection) (H116)

- Data setting range: 0 to 2
Turning FMS ON enables forced operation (Fire Mode). Three different operation selections are possible.
Data 0: Enabled with FMS ON; disabled with FMS OFF
method Enabled with FMS ON/OFF; disabled with the next FMS ON/OFF
Data 1: Toggle method;
Data 2: Latch method;; Enabled with FMS ON (This status is kept

kept)
Fire Mode (Confirmation time) (H117)

- Data setting range: 0.5 to 10.0 (s)
Set ON/OFF setting time for FMS signals. If FMS is turned ON/OFF in time shorter than the specified value, forced
operation (Fire Mode) is not enabled. FMS signals are to be kept ON longer than the H117 confirmation time.
H116 data
0
FMS ON
1
FMS toggle method
2
FMS latch method
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-222
222
Fire Mode (Reference frequency) (H118)

- Data setting range: Inherit, 0.1 to 500.0 (Hz)
Specify speed (reference frequency) at which operation is to be performed when forced operation (Fire Mode) is
enabled.
H118 data Function

The frequency selected through frequency setting 1 (F01) and 2 (C30) is
Inherit
followed.
0.1 to 500.0 Arbitrary frequencies can be set in 0.1 Hz steps.
Fire Mode (Rotation direction) (H119)

- Data setting range: 0, 2, 3
Set an operation instruction (rotation direction) to be followed when forced operation (Fire Mode) is enabled.
H119 data Function

Follows the operation instruction selected through drive operation (F02).
0 * When the operation instruction is OFF, operation is not performed at the
frequency specified with H118 (reference frequency). Note, however, that
the mode at that time is forced operation execution status.
Operation through forward rotation (FWD)
2 * Forward rotation is forcibly performed irrespective of presence and absence
of an operation instruction.
Operation through reverse rotation (REV)
3 * Reverse rotation is forcibly performed irrespective of presence and absence
of an operation instruction.
Fire Mode (Start method) (H120)

- Data setting range: 0, 1
Set the start method to be followed when Fire Mode is enabled.
H120 data Function

Follows the start methods specified with instant power failure restart (F14)
0
and H09 (starting mode).
STM mode (auto search for idling motor speed to run the idling motor without
1
stopping it)
Fire Mode (Reset interval) (H121)

Set time delay to auto cancel of trip status for a case where the inverter enters trip status and stops during forced
operation (Fine Mode).
Appendix-223
H193,H194 User initialization data (Save, Protect) Related function code: H02,H03
Refer to H02, H03.
H195 DC braking (Braking timer at the startup) Related function code: F21
DC braking can be activated at startup. For details, refer to the description of F21.
H197,H198 User password 1 (selection of protective operation, setting check)

H199 User password protection valid Related function code: H99
Refer to H99.
APPENDICES
Appendix-224
J.6 A codes (Motor 2 parameters)

FRENIC-Ace has two sets of speed control parameter. They can be selected by “MPRM1” signals.
For the description of speed control parameters, refer to function code d01.
Speed control parameter sets

Name
set1 set2
Speed control (Speed command filter) d01 A43

(Speed detection filter) d02 A44
(P gain) d03 A45
(Integral time) d04 A46
■ Select speed control parameter 1 – “MPRM1” (E01 to E05 data = 78)

The combination of the ON/OFF states of digital input signals “MPRM1” selects one between 2 different speed
control parameter sets .
input signals
Selected speed control parameter set
“MPRM1”
OFF d01 to d04 speed control parameter set1
ON A43 to A50 speed control parameter set2
Appendix-225
J.7 J codes (Applied functions)

J01 PID control (Mode selection)
Under PID control, the inverter detects the state of a control target object with a sensor or similar device and
compares it with the commanded value (e.g., temperature control command). If there is any deviation between
them, PID control operates so as to minimize it. That is, it is a closed loop feedback system that matches a
controlled variable (feedback amount).
PID control expands the application area of the inverter to process control (e.g., flow control, pressure control, and
temperature control).
If PID control is enabled (J01 = 1 or 2), the frequency control of the inverter is switched from the drive frequency
command generator block to the PID command generator block
■ Mode Selection (J01) J01 data Function

J01 selects the PID control mode. 0 Disable
1 Process control (normal operation)
2 Process control (inverse operation)
<PID process control block diagram>
Frequency
command
PID process command PID processor
PID feedback
• Using J01 allows switching between normal and inverse operations for the PID control output, so you can
specify an increase/decrease of the motor rotating speed depending on the difference (error component)
between the commanded (input) and feedback amounts, making it possible to apply the inverter to air
conditioners. The terminal command IVS can also switch operation between normal and inverse.
For details about the switching of normal/inverse operation, refer to the description of “ Switch
normal/inverse operation – “IVS”” (E01 to E05, data = 21).
APPENDICES
Appendix-226
J02 PID Control (Remote command )

Related function code J105: PID control (Display unit)
J106: PID control (Maximum
( aximum scale)
J107: PID control (Minimum
( inimum scale)
J136 to J138: PID control multistep command 1 to 3
J02 sets the source that specifies the command value (SV) under PID control.
J02 data Function
Keypad
0
Specify the PID command by using the / keys on the keypad.
PID command 1 (Analog input: Terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function), [C1] (V2 function))
Voltage input to the terminal [12] (0 to ±10 VDC, 100% PID command/ ±10 VDC)
1
Current input to the terminal [C1] (C1 function) (4 to 20 mA DC, 100% PID command/ 20 mA DC)
Voltage input to the terminal [C1] (V2 function) (0 to +10 VDC, 100% PID command/ +10 VDC)
Terminal command UP/DOWN
3 Using the “UP” or “DOWN” command in conjunction with PID minimum scale to maximum scale
(specified by J106 and
and J107) with which the command value is converted into a physical quantity,
etc., you can specify 0 to 100% of the PID command.
Command via communications link
4 Use function code S13 to specify the PID command by communications. The transmission data of
20000d (decimal) is equal to 100% (maximum set point value) of the PID command.
[1] PID command with the / keys on the keypad (J02 = 0, factory default)
Using the / keys on the keypad in conjunction with PID minimum / maximum scale (specified by J1
J106 and
J107), you can specify 0 to 100% of the PID command in an easy
easy-to-understand,
understand, converted command format.
For details of operation, refer to the FRENIC-Ace
Ace User
User’s
’s Manual Chapter 3 “3.3.5 setting up PID commands from
the keypad.”
[2] PID command by analog inputs (J02 = 1)

When any analog input (voltage input to terminals [12] and [C1] (V2 function), or current input to terminal [C1] (C1
function)) for PID command 1 (J02 = 1) is used, it is possible to arbitrary specify the PID command by multiplying
by the gain and adding the bias. The polarity can be selected and the filter time constant and offset can be adjusted.
In addition to J02 setting, it is necessary to select PID process command 1 for analog input (specified by any of
E61 to E63, function code dat
data a = 3). For details, refer to the descriptions of E61 to E63.
Table J.4
J Adjustable elements of PID command
Bias Gain
Input terminal Input range Polarity Filter Offset
Bias Base point Gain Base point
0 to +10V,
[12] C55 C56 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
-10 to +10V
4 to 20mA,
[C1] (C1) C61 C62 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
0 to 20mA
[C1] (V2) 0 to +10V C67 C68 C42 C44 C45 C43 C41
■ Offset (C31, C36, C41)

C31, C36 or C41 configure the offset for an analog voltage/current input.
■ Filter (C33, C38, C43)

C33, C38, and C43 provide the filter time constants for the voltage and current of the analog input. The larger the
setting of time constant is, the slower the response is. Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the
response
ponse speed of the machine (load). If an analog input signal fluctuates due to line noises, increase the filter time
constant.
Appendix
Appendix-227
227
■ Polarity selection for terminal [12] (C35)

C35 configures the input range for analog input voltage of terminal [12].
0 -10 to +10V
1 0 to +10 V(negative value of voltage is regarded as 0 V)
■ Range / polarity selection for terminal [C1] (C1 function) (C40)

C40 configures the input range for analog input current of terminal [C1] (C1 function).
C40 data Range of terminal inputs Handling when a bias value is configured as minus
0 4 to 20 mA (Factory default)
Limits any value lower than 0 to 0.
1 0 to 20 mA
10 4 to 20 mA
Enables any value lower than 0 as minus value.
11 0 to 20 mA
■ Polarity selection for terminal [C1] (V2 function) (C45)

C45 configures the input range for analog input voltage of terminal [C1] (V2 function).
C45 data Modes for terminal inputs When bias is specified to be negative
0 0 to +10V Makes a value lower than 0 effective as a negative value.

1 0 to +10V (factory default) Limits a value lower than 0 to 0.
APPENDICES
Appendix-228
■ Gain and bias
Terminal Data
Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
[12] Bias
Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
[C1] (C1) function Bias

Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
[C1] (V2 function) Bias

Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
(Example) In order to allocate for the range of 0 to 100% to the range of 1 to 5 V at terminal [12], set as follows.
Process command
Gain
Gain base point
Bias base point
Bias
Terminal [12] input
Appendix-229
[3] PID command with UP/DOWN control (J02 = 3)

When UP/DOWN control is selected as a PID speed command, turning the terminal command “UP” or “DOWN”
ON causes the PID set point value to change within the range from minimum scale to maximum scale.
The PID set point value can be specified in physical quantity units (such as temperature or pressure) with the
minimum scale (J106) and maximum scale (J107).
To select UP/DOWN control as a PIPID
D set point value
value,, the “UP” and “DOWN” should be assigned to the digital input
terminals [X1] to [X5]. ( Function codes E01 to E05 data = 17, 18)
“UP” “DOWN”
Action
Data = 17 Data = 18
OFF OFF Retain PID set point value

value.
ON OFF Increase PID set point value at a rate between 0.1%/0.1 s and 1%/0.1 s.
OFF ON Decrease PID set point value at a rate between 0.1%/0.1 s and 1%/0.1 s.
ON ON Retain PID set point value
value.
The inverter internally holds the PID command value set by UP/DOWN control and applies the held
value at the next restart (including powering ON).
[4] PID command via communications link (J02 = 4)

Use function code S13 to specify the PID command by communications.
communications. The transmission data of 20000 (decimal)
is equivalent to 100% (maximum set point
poin value)) of the PID command. For details of the communications format,
refer to the RS-485
485 Communication User’s Manual.
• Other than the remote command selection by J02, the PID multistep commands 1, 2 or 3 (specified by
J106, J137 or J138, respectively) selected by the PID multistep commands “PID
“PID-SS1”
SS1” and “PID-SS2”
“PID
can also be usedd as preset set point value
values for the PID command.
command.
Selecting Feedback Terminals

For feedback control, determine the connection terminal according to the type of the sensor output.
• If the sensor is a current output type, use the current input terminal [C1] (C1 function) of the inverter.
• If the se
sensor
nsor is a voltage output type, use the voltage input terminal [12] of the inverter, or switch over the
terminal [C1] (V2 function) to the voltage input terminal and use it.
For details, refer to the descriptions of E61 to E63.
<Application example: Proc

Process
ess control> (for air conditioners, fans and pumps)
The operating range for PID process control is internally controlled as 0% through 100%. For the given feedback
input, determine the operating range to be controlled by means of gain adjustment.
Example: When the external sensor has the output range of 1 to 5 V:
• Use terminal [12] as the input terminal in voltage.
• Set the gain (C32 for analog input adjustment) to 200% 00% in order to make 5V of the maximum output of the
external sensor to be 100% of input scale.
s
For the input specification of terminal 12, 0-10V
0 10V is equivalent to 0
0-100%.Therefore
100%.Therefore the gain has to be set 200%
(= 10 V / 5 V *100). Note also that any bias setting does not apply to feedback control.
Feedback
APPENDICES
Terminal [12] input
Appendix
Appendix-230
230
PID display coefficient and Monitoring

To monitor the PID command and its feedback value, set the scale to convert the values into easy-to-understand
physical quantities such as temperature. The display unit is invalid on the standard keypad (TP-M2). The display
unit is used with the multi-function keypad (TP-A1-E2C).
Display unit Maximum scale Minimum scale
Terminal [12] C58 C59 C60

Terminal [C1] (C1) C64 C65 C66
Terminal [C1] (V2) C70 C71 C72
Refer to function codes C59, C60, C65, C66, C71 and C72 for details on scales, and to E43 for details on
monitoring.
■ Display unit (J105)

J105 can select the display units for monitoring PID feedback value with the multi-function keypad (TP-A1-E2C).
Setting “0” selects the factory default unit for the PID feedback value.
J105 Display unit J105 Display unit J105 Display unit
0 * (Factory default) 23 L/s (flow) 45 mmHg (pressure)

1 No unit 24 L/min (flow) 46 Psi (pressure)
2 % 25 L/h (flow) 47 mWG (pressure)
3
20 m /s (flow) 42 MPa (pressure) 61 °C (temperature)
3
21 m /min (flow) 43 mbar (pressure) 62 °F (temperature)
3
22 m /h (flow) 44 bar (pressure) 80 ppm (density)
* The unit and scale for feedback values are used.
■ Maximum scale/minimum scale (J106, J107)

The PID control values can be converted to a physical quantity that is easy to recognize and displayed accordingly.
Set the maximum scale “PID command value/ display for 100% of a PID feedback value” with J106 and the
minimum scale “PID command value/ display for 0% of a PID feedback value” with J107
The displayed value is determined as follows:
Display value = (PID command value (%)) / 100 * (Max. scale - Min. scale) + Min. scale
• Data setting range: (Max. scale and min. scale) -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00
■ PID multistep command 1 to 3 (J136, J137 and J138)

A PID command value can be given by the PID multistep command and selected by digital inputs programmed with
“PID-SS1” and “PID-SS2” functions. Assign the digital input terminals with “PID-SS1” and “PID-SS2” ( Function
codes E01 to E05, data =171 and 172 respectively).
PID-SS2 PID-SS1 PID multistep command
OFF OFF Not selected

OFF ON J136: PID multistep command 1 setting range: -999.0 to 0.00 to 9990
ON OFF J137: PID multistep command 2 setting range: -999.0 to 0.00 to 9990
ON ON J138: PID multistep command 3 setting range: -999.0 to 0.00 to 9990
Appendix-231
J03 to J06 PID Control P (Gain), I ( Integral time), D (Differential time), Feedback filter
■ P gain (J03)
J03 specifies the proportional gain for the PID processor.
• Data setting range: 0.000 to 30.000 (times)
P (Proportional) action
An operation in which the MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the deviation is called P
action, which outputs the MV in proportion to deviation. However, P action alone cannot eliminate deviation.
Gain is data that determines the system response level against the deviation in P action. An increase in gain
speeds up response, but an excessive gain may oscillate the inverter output. A decrease in gain delays response,
but it stabilizes the inverter output.
Deviation
Time
Manipulated
value
Time
■ I integral time (J04)

J04 specifies the integral time for the PID processor.
0.0 indicates that the integral component is ineffective
I (Integral) action
An operation in which the change rate of the MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the
integral value of deviation is called I action, which outputs the MV that integrates the deviation. Therefore, I action
is effective in bringing the feedback value close to the commanded value. For the system whose deviation rapidly
changes, however, this action cannot make it respond quickly.
The effectiveness of I action is expressed by integral time as parameter, that is J04 data. The longer the integral
time, the slower the response. The reaction to the external disturbance also becomes slow. The shorter the integral
time, the faster the response. Setting too short integral time, however, makes the inverter output tend to oscillate
against the external disturbance.
Deviation
Time
Manipulated
value
Time
APPENDICES
Appendix-232
■ D differential time (J05)

J05 specifies the differential time for the PID processor.
0.00 indicates that the differential component is ineffective.
D (Differential) action
An operation in which the MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the differential value of the
deviation is called D action, which outputs the MV that differentiates the deviation. D action makes the inverter
quickly respond to a rapid change of deviation.
The effectiveness of D action is expressed by differential time as parameter, that is J05 data. Setting a long
differential time will quickly suppress oscillation caused by P action when a deviation occurs. Too long differential
time makes the inverter output oscillation more. Setting short differential time will weakens the suppression effect
when the deviation occurs.
Deviation
Time
Manipulated
value
Time
The combined uses of P, I, and D actions are described below.
(1) PI control
PI control, which is a combination of P and I actions, is generally used to minimize the remaining deviation caused
by P action. PI control always acts to minimize the deviation even if a commanded value changes or external
disturbance steadily occurs. However, the longer the integral time of I action, the slower the system response to
quick-changed control. P action can be used alone for loads with very large part of integral components.
(2) PD control
In PD control, the moment that a deviation occurs, the control rapidly generates greater MV (manipulated value:
output frequency) than that generated by D action alone, to suppress the deviation increase. When the deviation
becomes small, the behavior of P action becomes small. A load including the integral component in the controlled
system may oscillate due to the action of the integral component if P action alone is applied. In such a case, use
PD control to reduce the oscillation caused by P action, for keeping the system stable. That is, PD control is
applied to a system that does not contain any damping actions in its process.
(3) PID control

PID control is implemented by combining P action with the deviation suppression of I action and the oscillation
suppression of D action. PID control features minimal control deviation, high precision and high stability. In
particular, PID control is effective to a system that has a long response time to the occurrence of deviation.
Follow the procedure below to set data to PID control function codes.
It is highly recommended that you adjust the PID control value while monitoring the system response waveform of
the PID feedback with an oscilloscope or equivalent. Repeat the following procedure to determine the optimal
solution for each system.
• Increase the data of J03 (PID control P (Gain)) within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate.
• Decrease the data of J04 (PID control I (Integral time)) within the range where the feedback signal does not
oscillate.
• Increase the data of J05 (PID control D (Differential time)) within the range where the feedback signal does not
oscillate.
Appendix-233
The method for refining the system response from the waveforms is shown below.
1) Suppressing overshoot
Increase the data of J04 (Integral time) and decrease that of J05 (Differential time).
After
refinement
Response
Before
refinement
Time
2) Quick stabilizing (Moderate overshoot is allowable.)

Decrease the data of J03 (Gain) and increase that of J05 (Differential time).
After
refinement
Response
Before
refinement
Time
3) Suppressing oscillation whose period is longer than the integral time specified by J04
Increase the data of J04 (Integral time).
After
refinement
Response
Before
refinement
Time
4) Suppressing oscillation whose period is approximately the same as the time specified by J05 (Differential
time)
Decrease the data of J05 (Differential time).
Decrease the data of J03 (Gain), if the oscillation cannot be suppressed even though the differential time is
set at 0 sec.
After
refinement
Response
Before
refinement
Time
■ Feedback filter (J06)

J06 specifies the time constant of the filter for feedback signals under PID control.
• This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop. Setting a too long time constant makes the system
response slow.
APPENDICES
Appendix-234
J10 PID Control (Anti-reset windup)
J10 suppresses overshoot in control with the PID processor. As long as the error between the feedback and the
PID command is beyond the preset range, the integrator holds its value and does not perform integration
operation.
• Data setting range: 0 to 200 (%)
PID feedback value (PV)
Integral action held in this range.
PID command value Integral action performed in this range.

(SV)
Integral action held in this range.
Time
Appendix-235
J11 to J13 PID Control (Select warning

g output, Upper limit of warning (AH) and Lower limit of
warning (AL))
The inverter can output two types of warning signals (caused by process command value or PID error value)
associated with PID control if the digital output signal “PID
“PID-ALM”
ALM” is assigned to any of the programmable, output
terminals with any of E20, E21 and E27 (data = 42).
J11 specifies the warning output types. J12 and J13 each specify the upper and lower limits for warnings.
■ PID Control (Select warnin

warning
g output) (J11)
J11 specifies one of the following alarms available.
J11 data Alarm Data
0 Warning caused by process While PV < AL or AH < PV, “PID-ALM

ALM” is ON
command value
PID feedback value
(PV)
PID control (lower PID control
control (upper
(upper
level alarm (AL)) level
level alarm
alarm (AH))
(AH))
(J13) (J12)
1 Warning caused by process Same as above (with Hold)

command value with hold
2 Warning caused by process Same as above (with Latch)
command value with latch
3 Warning caused by process Same as above (with Hold and Latch)
command value with hold and
latch
4 Warning caused by PID error While PV < SV - AL or SV + AH < PV, “PID-ALM
ALM” is ON.
value
PID control (lower PID control (upper
level alarm (AL)) level alarm (AH))
(J13) (J12)
PID feedback value

(PV)
PID command value
(SV)
5 Warning caused by PID error Same as above (with Hold)

value with hold
6 Warning caused by PID error Same as above (with Latch)
value with latch
7 Warning caused by PID error Same as above (with Hold and Latch)
value with hold and latch
Hold: During the power

power-on
on sequence, the alarm output is kept OFF (disabled) even when the monitored quantity
is within the alarm range. Once it goes out of the alarm range, and comes into the alarm range again, the
alarm is enabled.
Latch: Once the monitored quantity comes into the alarm range and the alarm is turned ON, the alarm will remain
ON even if it goes out of the alarm range. To release the latch, perform a reset by using the key on
keypad or turning the terminal command RST ON. R Resetting
esetting can be done by the same way as resetting an
alarm.
■ PID Control (Upper limit of warning (AH)) (J12)

J12 specifies the upper limit of warning (AH) in percentage (%) of the feedback value.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-236
236
■ PID Control (Lower limit of warning (AL)) (J13)
J13 specifies the lower limit of warning (AL) in percentage (%) of the feedback value.
The value displayed (%) is the ratio of the upper/lower limit to the full scale (10 V or 20 mA) of the
feedback amount (in the case of a gain of 100%).
Upper limit of wa
warning
rning (AH) and lower limit of warning (AL) also apply to the following alarms.
How to handle the warning

Alarm Data
Select warning output (J11) Data setting
Upper limit (process ON when AH < PV Warning caused by process AL = 0

command) command
Lower limit (process ON when PV < AL AH = 100%
command)
Upper limit (PID error ON when SV + AH < PV Warning caused by PID error AL = 100%
value) value
Lower limit (PID error ON when PV < SV - AL AH = 100%
value)
Upper/lower limit (PID ON when |SV - PV| > AL AL = AH
error value)
Upper/lower range limit ON when SV - AL < PV < Warning caused by PID error
(PID error value) SV + AL value
A negative logic
Upper/lower range limit ON when AL < PV < AH Warning caused by process signal should be
(process command) command assigned to
“PID-ALM”.
Upper/lower range limit ON when SV - AL < PV < Warning caused by PID error
(PID error value) SV + AH value
Appendix
Appendix-237
237
J15 PID control (Sleep frequency)

J16 PID control (Sleep timer)
J17 PID control (Wakeup frequency)
J23 PID control (Wakeup level of PID error)
J24 PID control (Wakeup timer)
Sleep function (J15 to J17, J23, J24)

J15 to J17 configure the sleep function in pump control, a function that stops the inverter when the discharge
pressure increases, causing the volume of water to decrease.
When the discharge pressure has increased, decreasing the reference frequency (output of the PID processor)
below the sleep level (J15) for the period specified sleep timer (J16), the inverter decelerates to stop, while PID
control itself continues to operate. When the discharge pressure decreases, increasing the reference frequency
(output of the PID processor) above the wakeup frequency (J17), the inverter resumes operation.
The restarting conditions can be adjusted with J23 and J24.
■ PID control (Sleep frequency) (J15)

J15 specifies the frequency which triggers slow flowrate stop of inverter.
■ PID control (Sleep timer) (J16)

J16 specifies the period from when the PID output drops below the frequency specified by J15 until the inverter
starts deceleration to stop.
■ PID control (Wakeup frequency) (J17)

J17 specifies the wakeup frequency. Set J17 to a frequency higher than the sleep frequency (J15). If the specified
wakeup frequency is lower than the sleep frequency, the sleep frequency is ignored; the sleep function is triggered
when the output of the PID processor drops below the specified wakeup frequency.
■ Assignment of “PID-STP” (“Under sleep mode of PID control”) (E20, E21 and E27, data = 44)
“PID-STP” (“Under sleep mode of PID control”) is ON when the inverter is in a stopped state due to the sleep
function under PID control. PID-STP should be assigned if it is necessary to output a signal to indicate that the
inverter is stopped.
For the sleep function, see the chart below.
Output frequency
Acceleration time Deceleration time setting

setting
Starting
frequency
Sleep timer MV increased

PID output (MV) again by
decrease of
pressure (PV)
Wakeup frequency
Sleep frequency
Feedback (PV)
Pressure in pipeline
Pressure decrease
started by opening tap Pressure increased by
inverter restart
Run command
Under sleep mode of PID
control PID-STP
Time
APPENDICES
Appendix-238
■ PID control (Wakeup level of PID error) (J23)

■ PID control (Wakeup timer) (J24)
When both of the two conditions below are satisfied (AND), the inverter is restarted.
• The discharge pressure has decreased, increasing the frequency (output of the PID processor) to or above the
wakeup frequency (J17) and the wakeup timer (J24) has elapsed.
• The absolute error of the PV (feedback value) against to the SV (command value) is equal to or higher than the
wakeup level of PID error (J23), and the wakeup time (J24) has elapsed.
Figure J.22 PID control operation
J18, J19 PID Control (Upper limit of PID process output, Lower limit of PID process output)
The upper and lower limiters can be specified to the PID output, exclusively used for PID control. The settings are
ignored when PID cancel “Hz/PID” is enabled and the inverter is operated at the reference frequency previously
specified. ( Function codes E01 to E05 data = 20)
■ PID Control (Upper limit of PID process output) (J18)

J18 specifies the upper limit of the PID processor output limiter in Hz. If the value of “999” is specified to J18, the
setting of the frequency limiter (Upper) (F15) will serve as the upper limit.
■ PID Control (Lower limit of PID process output) (J19)

J19 specifies the lower limit of the PID processor output limiter in Hz. If the value of “999” is specified to J19, the
setting of the frequency limiter (Lower) (F16) will serve as the lower limit.
Appendix-239
J21 Dew condensation Prevention
With the inverter stopped, dew condensation can be prevented by applying DC current at fixed intervals to raise
the motor temperature.
If using the dew condensation prevention function, it is necessary to assign dew condensation prevention "DWP"
to the general-purpose digital input terminal. ( Function code data = 39)
■ Enabling conditions
Turn ON dew condensation prevention “DWP” while the inverter is stopped to enable and start the dew
condensation prevention function.
■ Dew condensation prevention

The current flowing to the motor is based on DC braking (braking level) (F21), and duty control is performed based
on the dew condensation prevention duty (J21) ratio with respect to DC braking (time) (F22).
DC braking (time) (F22)×100

Dew condensation prevention duty (J21) =
T
DC braking (time)
(F22)
DC braking (braking level)
(F21)
Figure J.23 Dew condensation prevention operation
J105 to J107 PID control (Display unit, Maximum scale, Minimum scale)
Refer to the description of J02.
J136 to J138 PID control 1 (PID multistep command 1 to 3)
For details, refer to the description of J02.
APPENDICES
Appendix-240
[5] Pump control

Applying the FRENIC-Ace to a water supply system configured with two or more pumps combined with a header
enables the FRENIC-Ace to control those pumps for operating the water supply system with optimum electric
power.
Cascade control and mutual operation control are available for controlling two or more pumps. Understanding the
features of each control and selecting the appropriate control allows the FRENIC-Ace to provide high economic
efficiency.
Control Features
J401 = 1 or 11 A single FRENIC-Ace drives a maximum of 5 pump motors.
Cascade control No. of pumps driven by inverter at variable speed: 1 (fixed)
(Inverter drive motor No. of commercial power-driven pumps: 4 max. (fixed)
fixed system)
No. of auxiliary pumps (commercial power-driven): 1 (fixed)
No. of magnetic contactors required: "No. of commercial power- driven pumps x 1"
Pressure fluctuation at the time of adding/subtracting pumps: Large
When J401 = 1, adding/subtracting pumps is judged with the ID controller output.
When J401 = 11, adding/subtracting pumps is judged with the output frequency.
Cascade control No. of pumps driven by inverter at variable speed: 1 (floating)
(Inverter drive motor No. of commercial power-driven pumps: 2 max. (floating)
floating system)
No. of magnetic contactors required: "No. of inverter drive pumps floating x 2 + 1 (for
auxiliary pump)"
Pressure fluctuation at the time of adding/subtracting pumps: Small
Cascade control No. of pumps driven by inverter at variable speed: 1 (floating)
(Inverter drive motor No. of commercial power-driven pumps: 2 max. (floating)
floating + commercial
power-driven motor
system) No. of magnetic contactors required: "No. of inverter drive pumps floating x 2 + 1 (for
auxiliary pump)"
Pressure fluctuation at the time of adding/subtracting pumps: Small
No. of magnetic contactor ON/OFF times: Small
J401 = 52 Number of pumps controllable: 4 max.
Mutual operation All pumps driven by inverter at variable speed (The same number of inverters is
control required.)
(Communications- All FRENIC-Ace units to be linked via RS-485
linked inverter drive
No magnetic contactor required.
motor floating system)
Start/stop sequence cycles under PID control.
J401 = 54 Number of pumps controllable: 4 max.
Mutual operation All pumps driven by inverter at variable speed (The same number of inverters is
control required.)
(Communications- All FRENIC-Ace units to be linked via RS-485
linked all motors
No magnetic contactor required.
simultaneous PID
control system) All pumps operated at the same speed simultaneously.
Closed-loop cycling pumps managing not pressure control but flowrate control,
which provides large energy saving effect.
Details of each control are given on the following pages.
Appendix-241
■ J401 = 1 or 11 Cascade control (Inverter drive motor fixed system)

Configure such a pump drive system that drives a particular pump (M0 in the configuration figure given below) with
the FRENIC-Ace and drives other pumps (M1 to M4) with commercial power by turning magnetic contactors ON
with the digital output signals issued by the FRENIC-Ace.
The FRENIC-Ace drives the M0 under PID control. If the frequency rises due to a PV signal level drop to satisfy the
pump adding conditions, the FRENIC-Ace outputs pump start signals to turn the magnetic contactors ON, thereby
starting commercial power-driven pumps successively. After starting all pumps, the inverter can further drive a
single auxiliary pump (MA).
If the PV signal level rises and the frequency of the inverter-driven pump drops to satisfy the pump subtracting
conditions, the FRENIC-Ace cancels pump start signals to turn the magnetic contactors OFF, thereby stopping
commercial power-driven pumps successively.
The number of start signal lines available on the FRENIC-Ace is a total of three transistor output lines and two
relay output lines in a standard configuration, so the FRENIC-Ace can control a total of five pumps (one pump
driven by inverter at variable speed and four commercial power-driven pumps) in a standard configuration.
The advantage of this system is low cost since the number of controllable pumps is large and the number of
magnetic contactors is one per pump. The disadvantage is large pressure fluctuation since adding/subtracting of
pumps targets commercial power-driven pumps.
The start/stop sequence of commercial power-driven pumps is changeable so that the operating time of pumps
can be averaged.
< Maximum number connection configuration of inverter drive motor fixed system (J401 = 1) >
Figure J.24 Configuration diagram

APPENDICES
Appendix-242
< Operation timing scheme of inverter drive motor fixed system (J401 = 1) >
Figure J.25
Appendix-243
< Pump operation time chart of inverter drive motor fixed system (J401 = 1 or 11) >
APPENDICES
Figure J.26
Appendix-244
< Function code configuration required for the inverter drive motor fixed system >
(1) Function codes to be configured

Configuring the following function codes as listed below activates the inverter drive motor fixed system under
cascade control.
Function code Name Data Description

J401 Pump control 1, 11: Inverter drive
mode motor fixed
selection system
J01 to J138 PID control 1 Depends on each code These function codes configure PID control in
setting accordance with the system design.
E21, E21, [Y1], [Y2], 88: AUX_L (Auxiliary These function codes assign commercial drive
E27 [30A/B/C] motor drive signal) start signals to the output terminals according to
161, 163, 165, 167: the number of commercial power-driven pumps.
M1_L to M4_L For a maximum configuration, the optional relay
(Motor 1 to 4 being output card is required.
driven by AUX_L is a drive signal for auxiliary pump.
commercial power)
J411 to J414 Motor 1 to 1: Enable These function codes configure motor modes
Motor 4 mode according to the number of commercial
selection power-driven pumps.
Only motors enabled can be control targets.
(2) Function codes recommended to be configured

J425 Motor 1: Equal operating time This function code automatically adjusts the
switching start/stop sequence of commercial power-driven
procedure pumps to equalize the operating times of pumps.
(3) Function codes for individual adjustments

Configure the following function codes as needed.

J450 Motor increase 0 to 500 Hz, This function code adjusts the motor adding
judgment 999: Depends on conditions.
(Parallel J18 If the frequency of the inverter-driven pump
Judgment F) exceeds the setting of J450 and keeps it for the
J451 Motor increase 0.00 to 3600 s setting of J451, commercial power-driven motor
judgment adding conditions are met.
(Duration time) The default is that if the frequency reaches the
setting of J18 (PID upper limiter), the adding
conditions are immediately met.
J452 Motor decrease 0 to 500 Hz, 999: This function code adjusts the motor subtracting
judgment Depends on J19 conditions.
(Parallel If the frequency of the inverter-driven pump drops
Judgment F) below the setting of J452 and keeps it for the
J453 Motor decrease 0.00 to 3600 s setting of J453, commercial power-driven motor
judgment subtracting conditions are met.
setting of J19 (PID lower limiter), the subtracting
J461 Motor increase/ 0.0: Disable If the deviation between SV and PV values is less
decrease 0.1 to 50.0% than the setting of J461, no increase/ decrease
switching judgment is made.
judgment
non-responsive
area width
Appendix-245

J455 Motor increase 0.01 to 3600 s, This function code adjusts the sequence to apply
switching time 0.00: Depends on at the time of adding motors. If the adding
(Deceleration F08 conditions of commercial power-driven pumps are
time) met, the inverter decelerates according to the
setting of J455. If the inverter decelerates to the
J456 Motor increase 0 to 100%
setting of J456, it turns the commercial
switching level
power-driven pump start signal ON. After that, the
J457 Motor increase 0 to 500 Hz, inverter continues to decelerate. When it reaches
PID control start 999: Depends on the setting of J457, it restarts PID control.
frequency J452 J456 is a percentage within the PID control range
(lower to upper limits).
The initial speed decelerates according to the
deceleration time selected. When it drops to the
PID lower limit frequency, the start signal comes
ON.
J458 Motor decrease 0.00 to 3600 s, This function code adjusts the sequence to apply
switching time 0.00: Depends on at the time of motor decrease. If the subtracting
(Acceleration F07 conditions of commercial power-driven pumps are
time) met, the inverter accelerates according to the
setting of J458. If the inverter accelerates to the
J459 Motor decrease 0 to 100%
switching level 999: Depends on power-driven pump start signal ON. After that, the
J456 inverter continues to accelerate. When it reaches
the setting of J460, it restarts PID control.
J460 Motor decrease 0 to 500 Hz,
PID control start J459 is a percentage within the PID control range
999: Depends on
frequency (lower to upper limits).
J450
The initial speed accelerates according to the
acceleration time selected. When it rises to the
PID upper limit frequency, the start signal comes
ON.
J430 Stop of 0: Stop commercial This function code specifies whether to stop
commercial power-driven commercial power-driven motors when an inverter
power-driven motors run command is turned OFF or the inverter stops
motors 1: Stop commercial due to an alarm.
power-driven Regardless of this setting, entering a coast-to-stop
motors only command BX stops all commercial power-driven
when an inverter pumps.
alarm occurs The initial setting is that inverter stop conditions
2: Continue to run satisfied stops commercial power-driven pumps.
J436 Motor regular 0.1 to 720.0 h If feedback signals are kept stabilized, commercial
switching time power-driven pumps are not added or subtracted
so that a particular pump is driven for a long time.
Specifying the time to this function code forcibly
adds or subtracts pumps if no adding or
subtracting occurs for the specified time.
E01 to E05 [X1] to [X5] 151 to 154: MEN1 These function codes individually separate pumps
to MEN4 from the inverter drive motor fixed system with
Pump control external signals.
motor 1 to 4 Only pumps whose MEN signals are ON are
subject to this system.
J465 Auxiliary motor 0.1 to 500 Hz When all pumps subject to this system are
(Frequency 0.0: Disable operating and the inverter output exceeds the
operation level) setting of J465, the auxiliary pump start signal
comes ON.
J466 Auxiliary motor 0.0 to 500 Hz
(Hysteresis If the inverter decelerates from the setting of J465
width) by the setting of J466, the auxiliary pump start
signal goes OFF.
APPENDICES
Each function code is detailed separately.
Appendix-246
■ J401 = 2 or 12 Cascade control (Inverter drive motor floating system)

To switch a maximum of three pumps between inverter drive and commercial power drive by a single FRENIC-Ace,
configure two magnetic contactors per pump.
The FRENIC-Ace drives the first pump at variable speed under PID control. If the frequency rises due to a PV
signal level drop to satisfy the pump adding conditions, the FRENIC-Ace switches the inverter-driven pump to
commercial power drive and drives the newly added pump. After starting all pumps, the inverter can further drive a
single auxiliary pump (MA). If the PV signal level rises and the frequency of the inverter-driven pump drops to
satisfy the pump subtracting conditions, the FRENIC-Ace cancels start signals of the pumps being driven by
commercial power, thereby stopping them successively. At the time of decreasing pumps, the FRENIC-Ace
continues to drive the last added pump.
In this system, each of pumps to be controlled requires two signal lines for inverter drive and commercial power
drive. To operate the pump drive system in a maximum configuration, an auxiliary pump start signal line is further
required.
The number of start signal lines available on the FRENIC-Ace is a total of three transistor output lines and two
relay output lines in a standard configuration, so the FRENIC-Ace can control a total of two pumps in a standard
configuration.
To operate the pump drive system using three pumps, it is necessary to add the optional relay output card
(OPC-F2-RY) to the FRENIC-Ace. It can add three relay output lines.
The advantage of this system is that the operating times of pumps can be averaged since the FRENIC-Ace cycles
through pump motors.
■ J401 = 3 or 13 Cascade control (Inverter drive motor fixed + commercial power-driven motor system)
This system is the same as the inverter drive motor floating system in the basic configuration, except that it fixes
the inverter drive pump according to the slow flowrate unit and switches the inverter drive pump when the system is
started at the next time.
The advantage of this system is that the ON/OFF times of the magnetic contactors can be reduced. Therefore, this
system is suitable for clean water supply systems repeating slow flowrate stops frequently.
< Maximum number connection configuration of inverter drive motor floating system >
Figure J.27
Appendix-247
< Operation timing scheme of inverter drive motor floating system (J401 = 2) >
Figure J.28
< Operation timing scheme of inverter drive motor floating + commercial power-driven motor system (J401 = 3) >
Figure J.29
APPENDICES
Appendix-248
< Pump operation time chart of inverter drive motor floating system (J401 = 2) >
Figure J.30
Appendix-249
< Pump operation time chart of inverter drive motor floating + commercial power-driven motor system (J401 = 3) >
APPENDICES
Figure J.31
Appendix-250
< Function code configuration required for the inverter drive motor floating system and the inverter drive motor
floating + commercial power-driven motor system >
(1) Function codes to be configured

J401 Pump control 2: Inverter drive motor
mode floating system
selection 3: Inverter drive motor
floating + commercial
power-driven motor
system
J01 to J138 PID control 1 Depends on each code These function codes configure PID control in
setting accordance with the system design.
E20, E21, [Y1], [Y2], 88: AUX_L (Auxiliary These function codes assign inverter drive start
E27 [30A/B/C] motor drive signal) signals and commercial drive start signals to the
160 to 164: M1_l to output terminals according to the number of
M3_l (Motor 1 to 4 pumps.
being driven by For a maximum configuration, the optional relay
inverter) output card is required.
161 to 165: M1_L to AUX_L is a drive signal for auxiliary pump.
M3_L (Motor 1 to 3
being driven by
commercial power)
J411 to J413 Motor 1 to 1: Enable These function codes configure motor modes
Motor 3 mode according to the number of pumps.
selection Only motors enabled can be control targets.

J425 Motor 1: Equal operating This function code automatically adjusts the
switching time start/stop sequence of commercial power-driven
procedure pumps to equalize the operating times of pumps.

Configure the following function codes as needed.
Function Name Data Description

code
J450 Motor increase 0 to 500 Hz This function code adjusts the motor adding
judgment 999: Depends on J18 conditions.
(Parallel If the frequency of the inverter-driven pump
Judgment F) exceeds the setting of J450 and keeps it for the
J451 Motor increase 0.00 to 3600 s setting of J451, commercial power-driven motor
judgment adding conditions are met.
J452 Motor decrease 0 to 500 Hz This function code adjusts the motor subtracting
judgment 999: Depends on J19 conditions.
(Parallel If the frequency of the inverter-driven pump drops
Judgment F) below the setting of J452 and keeps it for the
J453 Motor decrease 0.00 to 3600 s setting of J453, commercial power-driven motor
judgment subtracting conditions are met.
setting of J19 (PID lower limiter), the subtracting
Appendix-251

code
J461 Motor increase/ 0.1 to 50.0% If the deviation between SV and PV values is less
decrease 0.0: Disable than the setting of J461, no increase/ decrease
switching judgment is made.
judgment
non-responsive
area width
J454 Contact restart 0.01 to 2.00 s Taking into account the contactor delay at the time
time when of adding motors, the start of an inverter output
switching the can be delayed. Adjust this value when the
motor inverter trips due to a contactor delay.
J455 Motor increase 0.00 to 3600 s This function code adjusts the sequence to apply
switching time 0.00: Depends on at the time of adding motors. If the adding
(Deceleration F08 conditions of commercial power-driven pumps are
time) met, the inverter decelerates according to the
setting of J455. If the inverter decelerates to the
J456 Motor increase 0 to 100%
switching level
J457 Motor increase 0 to 500 Hz inverter continues to decelerate. When it reaches
PID control start the setting of J457, it restarts PID control.
999: Depends on
The initial speed decelerates according to the
deceleration time selected. When it drops to the
PID lower limit frequency, the start signal comes
ON.
J458 Motor decrease 0.00 to 3600 This function code adjusts the sequence to apply
switching time 0.00: Depends on at the time of motor decrease. If the subtracting
(Acceleration F07 conditions of commercial power-driven pumps are
time) met, the inverter accelerates according to the
setting of J458. If the inverter accelerates to the
J459 Motor decrease 0 to 100%
switching level
J460 Motor decrease 0 to 500 Hz inverter continues to accelerate. When it reaches
PID control start the setting of J460, it restarts PID control.
999: Depends on
The initial speed accelerates according to the
acceleration time selected. When it rises to the
PID upper limit frequency, the start signal comes
ON.
J430 Stop of 0: Stop commercial This function code specifies whether to stop
commercial power-driven commercial power-driven motors when an inverter
power-driven motors run command is turned OFF or the inverter stops
motors 1: Stop commercial due to an alarm.
power-driven Regardless of this setting, entering a coast-to-stop
motors only when command BX stops all commercial power-driven
an inverter alarm pumps.
occurs The initial setting is that inverter stop conditions
2: Continue to run satisfied stops commercial power-driven pumps.
J436 Motor regular 0.1 to 720.0 h If feedback signals are kept stabilized, commercial
switching time power-driven pumps are not added or subtracted
so that a particular pump is driven for a long time.
Specifying the time to this function code forcibly
adds or subtracts pumps if no adding or
subtracting occurs for the specified time.
APPENDICES
Appendix-252

code
E01 to E05 [X1] to [X5] 151 to 155: MEN1 to These function codes individually separate pumps
MEN3 from the inverter drive motor fixed system with
Pump control motor 1 external signals.
to 3 Only pumps whose MEN signals are ON are
subject to this system.
J465 Auxiliary motor 0.1 to 500 Hz When all pumps subject to this system are
(Frequency 0.0: Disable operating and the inverter output exceeds the
operation level) setting of J465, the auxiliary pump start signal
comes ON.
J466 Auxiliary motor 0.0 to 500 Hz
(Hysteresis If the inverter decelerates from the setting of J465
width) by the setting of J466, the auxiliary pump start
signal goes OFF.
J467 Auxiliary motor 0.00 to 9999.0 When an inverter drive motor is switched in the
J468 (PV operation 0.00 to 2.00 s inverter drive motor floating system, the pressure
J469 level, Connection 0.00 to 2.00 s may decreases. If it happens, run the auxiliary
timer, motor to compensate the pressure decrease.
Interrupting timer For details, refer to the description of function
codes given later.
■ J401 = 52 Mutual operation control (Communications-linked inverter drive motor floating system)
This system controls up to three pumps which are individually connected with the FRENIC-Ace units in multidrop
connection via RS-485.
The FRENIC-Ace specified as a master performs PID control and sends run commands and frequency commands
to other two slaves.
If the frequency rises due to a PV signal level drop to satisfy the pump adding conditions, the second inverter is
started. After the start of a total of three inverters, the master can output a start signal to drive an auxiliary pump.
The start/stop sequence of pumps cycles.
Even if the master stops due to an alarm, the slaves can continue running.
The advantage of this system is very small pressure fluctuation at the time of adding/subtracting pumps and small
load to piping since all pumps are driven by inverters. The disadvantage is high cost since each pump requires an
inverter.
■ J401 = 54 Mutual operation control (Communications-linked all motors simultaneous PID control
system)
This system is configured in the same way as the communications-link inverter drive motor floating system except
that all motors are driven under PID control with the same frequency at the same time.
Even if an alarm occurs, the remaining inverters continue to run. If the pressure is insufficient, the inverter outputs
a start signal to an auxiliary pump to add one pump.
The advantage of this system is that driving two or more pumps under PID control at the same time can deliver
water with low power for optimum watt hour in the cooling water cycling system managing the flowrate.
Appendix-253
< Maximum number connection configuration of mutual operation (J401 = 52 or 54) >
Pressure sensor
L1/R Acc./Dec. U Pump

L2/S controller V
L3/T W
Command PID
Feedback
DX+/DX-
RTU communication
L1/R Acc./Dec.
U Pump
L2/S controller V
L3/T W
DX+/DX-
Command
L1/R Acc./Dec. U Pump

L2/S controller V
L3/T W
DX+/DX-
Command
L1/R U Pump
Acc./Dec. V
L2/S
controller
L3/T W
DX+/DX-
Command
Figure J.32
APPENDICES
Appendix-254
< Operation timing scheme of communications-linked inverter-drive motor floating system >
Figure J.33
Appendix-255
< Operation timing scheme of communications link total simultaneous PID control method >
APPENDICES
Figure J.34
Appendix-256
< Function code configuration required for the communications-linked inverter drive motor floating system and
communications-linked all motors simultaneous PID control system >
(1) Function codes to be configured (Different between master and slaves)
For master

J401 Pump control 52: Communications-
mode selection linked inverter drive
motor floating
system
54: Communications-
linked all motors
simultaneous PID
control system
J01 to J138 PID control 1 Depends on each code These function codes configure PID control
setting in accordance with the system design.
J403 Number of slaves 1 to 3
y20 RS-485 50: Communications
communication 2 link pump control
protocol
For slaves

J401 Pump control 52: Communications-
mode selection linked inverter drive
motor floating
system
54: Communications-
linked all motors
simultaneous PID
control system
H30 Communications 8: Frequency command Ready to receive run commands and
link function (RS-485) and run frequency command.
command (RS-485)
J402 Communication 1: Communication
master/slave slave inverter
selection
y11 Station address 1 to 3
y20 RS-485 50: Communications
communication 2 link pump control
protocol

J425 Motor switching 1: Equal operating time This function code automatically adjusts
procedure the start/stop sequence of commercial
power-driven pumps to equalize the
operating times of pumps.
Appendix-257

Configure the following function codes as needed. No configuration is required for all motors simultaneous PID
control system.

J450 Motor increase 0 to 500 Hz This function code adjusts the motor adding
judgment (Parallel 999: Depends on J18 conditions.
Judgment F) If the frequency of the inverter-driven pump
J451 Motor increase 0.00 to 3600 s exceeds the setting of J450 and keeps it for the
judgment setting of J451, commercial power-driven
(Duration time) motor adding conditions are met.
The default is that if the frequency reaches the
J452 Motor decrease 0 to 500 Hz This function code adjusts the motor
judgment (Parallel 999: Depends on J19 subtracting conditions.
Judgment F) If the frequency of the inverter-driven pump
J453 Motor decrease 0.00 to 3600 s drops below the setting of J452 and keeps it for
judgment the setting of J453, commercial power-driven
(Duration time) motor subtracting conditions are met.
The default is that if the frequency reaches the
setting of J19 (PID lower limiter), the
subtracting conditions are immediately met.
J461 Motor 0.1 to 50.0% If the deviation between SV and PV values is
increase/decrease 0.0: Disable less than the setting of J461, no increase/
switching decrease judgment is made.
judgment
non-responsive
area width
J436 Motor regular 0.1 to 720.0 h If feedback signals are kept stabilized,
switching time commercial power-driven pumps are not
added or subtracted so that a particular pump
is driven for a long time. Specifying the time to
this function code forcibly adds or subtracts
pumps if no adding or subtracting occurs for
the specified time.
APPENDICES
Appendix-258
J401 Pump Control Mode Selection

E01 to E05
E0 Terminals X1 to X5
X5 (Function selection)
E20,
E20 E21 Terminals Y1 to Y2
Y2 (Function selection)
E27 Terminal 30A/B/C (Ry output)
H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Restart time)
J01 PID Control (Mode selection)
J401 selects the pump control mode.

Data for
Function Description
J401
0 Disable Pump quantity control (switching motor) is not performed.

Enable Perform cascade control in the inverter drive motor fixed system.
1 (Inverter drive motor fixed Adding/subtracting pumps is judged with the PID processor output.
system)
Enable Perform cascade control in the inverter drive motor floating
2 (Inverter drive motor floating system.
system) Adding/subtracting pumps is judged with the PID processor output.
Enable Perform ca
cascade
scade control in the inverter drive motor floating +
(Inverter drive motor floating + commercial power
power-driven
driven system.
3
commercial power-driven
power driven motor Adding/subtracting pumps is judged with the PID processor output.
system)
Enable Perform cascade control in the inverter drive motor fixed system.
11 (Inverter drive motor fixed Adding/subtracting pumps is judged with the output frequency.
system)
Enable Perform cascade control in the inverter drive motor floating
12 (Inverter drive motor floating system.
system) Adding/subtracting pumps is judged with the output frequency.
Enable Perform cascade control in the inverter drive motor floating +
(Inverter drive motor floating + commercial power
power-driven
driven system.
13
commercial power-driven
power driven motor Adding/subtracting pumps is judged with the output frequency.
system)
Enable Perform mutual operation control in the communications
communications- linked
(Communica
(Communications- inverter drive motor floating system.
52
linked inverter drive motor
floating system)
Enable Perform mutual operation control in the communications
communications- linked all
(Communications
(Communications- motors simultaneous PID control system.
54
linked all motors simultaneous
PID control system)
• The default setting cannot be modified during operation.

• When performing pump control, specify the pump control mode selection (J401), PID control 1 (mode
selection) (J01).
• During mutual operation, if the slave unit generates an alarm (SLA: slave alarm), the master unit
generates a "light alarm."
Appendix
Appendix-259
259
Functions for different J401 operating formats

Some functions are disabled, depending on the J401 operating format. The chart below indicates whether
functions are enabled or disabled.
J401:
Function code Pump control operation mode selection
1, 11 2, 12 3, 13 52 54
J01 to J138 Y
Communication master/slave selection (J402) N Y
Number of slave units (J403) N Y
Master input transmission selection (J404) N Y
Motors 1 to 4 drive selection (J411 to J414) Y N
Motor switching sequence (J425) Y N
Stop of commercial power-driven motors (J430) Y N
Motor fixed-period switch (J435 to J437) Y N
Motor increase judgment (J450, J451) Y N
Motor decrease judgment (J452, J453) Y N
Motor switching time contact wait period (J454) N Y N
Motor increase switching time (deceleration time) (J455) Y N Y N
Motor increase switching level (J456) Y N Y N
Motor increase PID control start frequency (J457) Y N Y N
Motor decrease switching time (acceleration time) (J458) Y N Y N
Motor decrease switching level (J459) Y N Y N
Motor decrease PID control start frequency (J460) Y N Y N
Motor increase/decrease judgment dead zone (J461) Y N
Abnormal unit judgment time (J462) N Y N
Auxiliary motor (J465 to J467) Y
Auxiliary motor (J468, J469) N Y N N
Y: Enabled, N: Disabled
APPENDICES
Appendix-260
J402 Communication Master/Slave Selection
J402 defines inverters as a master or slave in mutual operation. This function code only needs to be set during
mutual operation. Set the inverter used as the master unit to “0,” and the inverter used as the slave unit to “1.”
- Data setting range: 0, 1
0: Master inverter
1: Slave inverter
J403 Number of slaves
J403 specifies the number of slave inverters in mutual operation. This function code only needs to be set during
mutual operation. (This is required only for master, not for slave.)
J404 Master Input Permeation Selection
During mutual operation, the input terminals for making these settings on the slave units (X1 to X X5,, FWD, REV),
the master unit terminal input information is reflected via the master unit operation command (S06). As a result,
terminall input on the master unit allows simultaneous terminal input on the slave unit. As terminal input on the
master unit is also input on the slave unit, the same settings are applied to the master and slave for terminals X1 to
X5,, FWD, REV (function selectio
selection)
n) (E01 to E05,
E0 , E98, E99).
007F
F (hexadecimal display)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 REV FWD
(All bits are 1, and master unit input information reflection is enabled.)
(Example)
If master units X1, X2 and X4 are reflected in slave unit 1 and
master units X4 and XX55 are reflected in slave unit 2
The setting for slave unit 1 is 0010 1100 (binary) = 2C (hexadecimal), so J404 = 002C, and the setting for slave unit
2 is 0110 0000 (bina
(binary)
ry) = 60 (hexadecimal), to J404 = 0 0060.
• When FWD and REV are set on J404, do not set function codes: E98 and E99 for terminals FWD and
REV for both the master and slave to FWD, REV, FWD2 and REV2. While number of terminals in
operation for the master unit
unit is (F02 = 1) and the run command is entered, the run command remains
entered on the slave unit, so the slave unit will not operate as commanded by the master unit pump
control commands.
Appendix
Appendix-261
261
J411 to J41
J414 Motor 1 Mode Selection to Motor 4 Mode Selection
For motor mode selection, select the motor operation subject to pump control. When specifying "2" with forced
drive (forced commercial power drive) ON, the pump commercial power driving signal can be output regardless of
run command. This function code only needs to be set during cascade operation.
Data for J411 to J41

J414 Function
0 Disable (off at all times)

1 Enable
2 Forced drive ON (forced commercial power drive)
• Forced drive ON (forced commercial power drive) is a function to turn on the relay output forcibly to
connect the motor to the commercial power supply. Thus, even if the run command is off, turn on the
relay output to drive the motor by commercial power.
■ Pump control drive motor permission commands 1 to 4 of pump control motor ("MEN1"
("MEN1" to "MEN
"MEN4")
As mode selection of pump control motors, there are pump control drive motor permission commands 1 to 8
("MEN1" to "MEN8") by terminal input. A combination of the pump control drive motor permission command and
the motor mode selection e enables
nables motor degradation. Degradation is a state in which the system is under
operation continually with only the corresponding motor stopped.
< Action block diagram of pump control drive motor permission command >
J411
411 (Motor 1 mode selection
selection) = 1 (Enable))
Motor
Motor 1 mode enable
J411
411 (Motor 1 mode selection
selection) = 2 (Forced
Forced ON:
ON Forced commercial power drive) Motor
Motor 1 forced ON enable
(Forced
Forced commercial
commercial power
power drive
drive)
Without
Allowed ON Allowed
（=1）（=1
1）
Prohibited OFF With
（=0）
Pump control motor 1 In terminal function configuration, assign pump

drive permission control motor 1 drive permission command. Note) When
When two
two or
or more
more motors
motors are
are assigned
assigned
, AND action will be
command (terminal
terminal input) implemented
implemented with
with respect
respect to
to the
the permission
permission.
(All
All
All assigned
assigned terminal
terminal inputs
inputs are
are turned
turned ON
ON and
and permitted
permitted
.)
■ PID contro
controll action
In the inverter
inverter-driven
driven motor floating system (J401 = 2), the following state (1) or (2) is developed depending on the
setting of motor mode selection (J411 to J414).
J41
(1) Driving of all motors are not permitted
When driving of all motors is not permitted (pump control drive motor permission commands 1 to 4 = OFF
("MEN1" to "MEN
"MEN4")
") or the motors are set to disable with motor mode selection (J411 to J41
J414),
), PID control
will not start because no motors can control the pump.
(2) All motors are driven by commercial power forcibly
On changing all motors from forced commercial power drive state to enable state ("2 ⇒ 1" for J411 to J414)
J41
with the run command tu
turned
rned ON, motor increase/decrease judgment will be performed immediately based
on the PID control.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-262
262
J425 Motor Switching Procedure
In pump control, two or more motors are operated while switching them. When increasing or decreasing the
number of operating motors, specify the motors to be driven and the motors to be stopped in the motor switching
procedure (J425). This allows cumulative run time for each motor to be equalized.
Data for J425 Function
Fixing procedure
<When the number of motors increases>
The number increases successively in order of increasing the motor number. (motor 1 ⇒
0 motor 2, motor 3...)
<When the number of motors decreases>
The number decreases successively in order of decreasing the motor number. (motor 3 ⇒
motor 2, motor 1...)
Equal operating time (Cumulative run time of each motor is equalized.)
<When the number of motors increases>
1 Of the motors that are not running, turn on the motor having the shortest operating time.
<When the number of motors decreases>
Of the motors that are running, turn off the motor having the longest operating time.
Fixing procedure (Switching the motor at slow flowrate stop)
2 Mode selection is the same when J425 is configured to 0. However, the drive motor
switches to the subsequent motor not only when motors are increased, but also during slow
flowrate stop.
Equal operating time (Switching the motor at slow flowrate stop)
3 The operation is the same as when J425 =1 is selected. However, the drive motor switches
to the motor with least operating time not only when motors are increased, but also during
slow flowrate stop.
Appendix-263
J430 Stop of Commercial Power-driven Motors J411 to J418 (Motor mode selection)
J430 specifies whether to stop commercial power-driven motors when an inverter run command is turned OFF or
the inverter stops due to an alarm under cascade control.
Data for Description

Type of stop
J430 Inverter-driven motor Commercial power-driven motor
The motor will decelerate and stop. Motor commercial power driving signals
When run
Inverter drive motor signals ("M1_I" to ("M1_L" to "M4_L") are turned off at a
command is
"M3_I") are turned off in concurrence with time as soon as the inverter stops the
turned off
inverter output stop. output.
0
Output to the motor is stopped and motor Motor commercial power driving signals
When alarm inverter drive signals ("M1_I" to "M3_I") ("M1_L" to "M4_L") are turned off at a
is generated are turned off. time as soon as the inverter stops the
output.
The motor will decelerate and stop. Operation is continued.
When run
Inverter drive motor signals ("M1_I" to
command is
"M3_I") are turned off in concurrence with
turned off
inverter output stop.
1
Output to the motor is stopped and motor Motor commercial power driving signals
When alarm inverter drive signals ("M1_I" to "M3_I") ("M1_L" to "M4_L") are turned off at a
is generated are turned off. time as soon as the inverter stops the
output.
The motor will decelerate and stop. Operation is continued.
When run
Inverter drive motor signals ("M1_I" to
command is
"M3_I") are turned off in concurrence with
turned off
inverter output stop.
2
Output to the motor is stopped and Operation is continued.
When alarm inverter drive motor signals ("M1_I" to
is generated "M3_I") are turned off.
APPENDICES
Appendix-264
Commercial power-driven motors (including forced on motor) can be stopped in the following methods.
(1) When turning off commercial power-driven motors individually
- Set motor mode selection to disable (J411 to J418 = 0).
- Turn off the pump control motor drive permission command ("MEN1" to "MEN4").
(2) When turning off commercial power-driven motors at a time
- Set pump control to disable (J401 = 0 or J01 = 0).
- Perform BX input.
The above-mentioned function codes (J401, J01) cannot be changed during operation.
Appendix-265
J435 Motor Regular Switching Mode Selection

J436 Motor Regular Switching Time
J437 Motor Regular Switching Signal Output Time
J401 (Pump Control Mode Selection)
J411 to J414 (Motor Mode Selection)
J425 (Motor Operating Time Procedure)
J454 (Contactor Restart Time during Motor Switching)
J458 (Motor Decrease Switching Time (Acceleration time))
J480 to J484 (Operating Time Cumulative Run Time)
When the number of motors under operation remains unchanged for a period of the motor regular switching time
(J436), switch one motor under operation to another motor under suspension. This allows to equalize the operating
time of the pump connected to each motor.
■ Motor regular switching mode selection (J435)

When the inverter drive motor floating system (J401 = 2) or inverter drive motor floating + commercial power-driven
motor system (J401 = 3), communication link inverter floating method (J401 = 52) is specified in pump control
mode selection, if the number of motors under operation remains unchanged switching, specifies the motor.
When the inverter drive motor fixed system (J401 = 1) is specified in pump control mode selection, commercial
drive motors will be subject to switching. (Same as when J435 is configured to 2.)
Data for J435 Description
Inverter-driven motors are subject to switching during cascade operation.

1
During mutual operation, PID controlled units are subject to switching.
During cascade operation, commercial drive motors are subject to switching.
2
During mutual operation, units in highest frequency operation are subject to switching.
During cascade operation, all motors (inverter-driven motors /commercial power-driven
motors) are subject to switching.
3
During mutual operation, all motors (PID controlled units/units in highest frequency operation)
are subject to switching.
■ Motor regular switching time (J436)

The time for judging the regular switching operation of the motor is specified on a 0.1-hour basis. If the period
specified for regular motor switching (J436) elapses without any change in the number of motors in operation,
regular motor switching is performed.
- Data setting range: 0.0, 0.1 to 720.0 h, 999
0.0 Disabled
0.1 to 720.0 h Enable: Switching time
999 Enable: Switching time fixed to three minutes
■ Motor regular switching signal output time (J437)

Motor regular switching signal output time (duration time) is specified. After a lapse of motor regular switching time
(J436), switching forecast signal "MCHG" is output and switching operation is implemented.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 600.00 second
APPENDICES
Furthermore, the motors in which forced on (forced commercial power drive) (J411 to J414 = 2) is selected in motor
mode selection shall not be subject to motor operating time switching.
Appendix-266
■ Motors subject to motor operating time switching

After the number of motors remains unchanged for motor operating time switching time (J436), switching operation
will be implemented on the following motors.
Motor regular
switching time Description
(J436)
0.0 Motor regular switching operation is not implemented.
After the number of motors under operation remains unchanged for a period specified in the
motor regular switching time (J436), motor regular switching operation will be implemented.
The motor under operation with the maximum cumulative run time is stopped and then the
motor under suspension with the minimum cumulative run time is driven.
However, when the motor subject to stop has a shorter (or the same) cumulative run time than
the motor subject to operation, no switching will be implemented.
When there are two or more motors in which the maximum cumulative run time is the same
with the minimum cumulative run time, the motor with smaller motor number will be subject to
switching.
Pump control Motor regular
Motor subject to switching
mode selection switching mode selection
during operation
(J401) (J435)
1: Fixed system - Commercial drive motor
2: Floating system 1: Subject to commercial Commercial drive motor

3: Floating + commercial power-driven pump
0.1 to 720.0 h power-driven motor
2: Subject to inverter-driven Inverter drive motor
system
pump
3: Subject to all pumps Inverter drive motor

Commercial drive motor
52: Communication link 1. Subject to commercial Unit in highest-frequency
inverter floating method drive pumps operation
2. Subject to inverter drive PID-controlled unit
pumps
3. Subject to all pumps PID-controlled unit
Unit in highest-frequency
operation
54: Method in which all Regular motor switching not performed.
communication links
simultaneously controlled
by PID
Switching operation is implemented as in the case with motor regular time switching function
operation (J436 = 0.1 to 720.0 h) However, operating motor switching operation will be
999
implemented after the number of motors under operation remains unchanged for three
minutes. This setting is a function used for operation check upon start-up of the inverter.
Appendix-267
■ Cancel regular switching operation

Operating time is counted during which there are no changes in the number of motors. When this count reaches
the specified motor operation switching time (J436), regular switching occurs. Clearing this count by changing the
regular switching time clearing command “MCLR” from ON to OFF cancels this regular switching. While the
switching warning signal “MCH
“MCHG”G” is being output, the regular switching time clearing command “MCLR” can be
turned from ON to OFF to cancel regular switching.
• When the motor regular switching time clearing command "MCLR" remains tuned on continually, the
time in which the number of operating motors remains unchanged is always cleared, which prevents
motor regular switching from running.
■ Regular switching via input terminal

Even if there are no changes in the number of motors and the specified motor operation switching time (J436) is
not reached, changing the pump control switching command “PCHG” from ON to OFF allows regular switching to
be performed. In this case, the count of the time during which the number of motors in operation remains
unchanged is cleared.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-268
268
J450 Motor Increase Judgment (Parallel

Parallel Judgment F)
F
J451 (Duration time)
J452 Motor Decrease Judgment (Parallel
Parallel Judgment F)
F
J453 (Duration time)
During cascade operation (J401 = 1, 2, 3) or during communication link inverter floating method (J401 = 52) in
mutual operation, changes in the number of motors are implemented when the motor increase/decrease judgment
(duration time) (J451/J453) has elapsed over the inverter operation frequency (PID output (MV)) higher or lower
the motor increase/decrease judgment (Parallel
( lel Judgment FF)) (J450/J452).
When J401 = 11, 12 or 13, the judgment uses the actual output frequency instead of MV.
• When the deviation between the PID command value (SV value) and the PID feedback value is within
the non-responsive
responsive area, switching oper
operations
ations are not performed based on the motor change
judgment.
• When the deviation between the PID command value (SV value) and the PID feedback value is
negative, the number of motors is not increased based on the motor increase judgment. When the
deviation
n between the PID command value (SV value) and the PID feedback value is positive, the
number of motors is not decreased based on the motor decrease judgment.
< Action block diagram of upper and lower limiters >
J451
Holding time
monitoring
* When J18 < J450
450, motor
motor increase
increase condition
condition is
is not
not met
met
Motor increase
J18
18 F15 F03
or more ?
PID process
command PID J450 PID output
(specified
PID feedback signal

control J452
frequency)
frequency
J19
19 or less ? F16
Motor decrease
Holding time * When J19 > J452
452, motor
motor increase
increase condition
condition is
is not
not met
met
monitoring
J453
■ Motor increase judgment (Parallel

(Parallel Judgment F
F) (J450)
Motor increase Parallel Judgment F is specified.
0 to 500 Hz Motor increase Parallel Judgment F

999 Depends on the PID control (PID output limiter upper limit) (J18)
■ Motor increase judgment (Duration time) (J451)

The duration time of motor increase Parallel Judgment F is specified.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 3600 s
■ Motor decrease judgment ((Parallel

Parallel Judgment F
F)) (J452)
Motor decrease Parallel Judgment F is specified.
Data for J45

J452 Description
0 to 500 Hz Motor decrease Parallel Judgment F

999 Depends on the PID control (PID output limiter upper limit) (J19)
(J1
Appendix
Appendix-269
269
■ Motor decrease judgment (Duration time) (J453)

The duration time of motor decrease Parallel Judgment F is specified.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 3600.00 s
J454 Contactor Restart Time when Switching the Motor
■ Contactor restart time during motor switching (J454)

In the inverter drive motor floating system (J401 = 2, 12) and inverter drive motor floating + commercial
power-driven motor system (J401 = 3, 13), the motors are operated by delaying starting inverter-driven motors or
commercial power-driven motors when the number of motors is increased or regular switching is implemented. The
delay time (relay or contactor activation delay time) is specified.
- Data setting range: 0.01 to 2.00 s
J455 Motor Increase Switching Time (Deceleration time)

J456 Motor Increase Switching Level
J457 Motor Increase PID Control Start Frequency
■ Motor increase switching time (Deceleration time) (J455)

When the number of motors increases in the inverter drive motor fixed system (J401 = 1, 11) or the inverter drive
motor floating + commercial power-driven motor system (J401 = 3, 13), the inverter-driven motor is slowed down
during the motor increase switching time (deceleration time) (J455), and after the commercial power-driven motor
is driven the output frequency reaches the motor increase PID start frequency (J457), and deceleration stops. At
this point, PID control recommences, and the inverter-driven motor operates with the PID control MV frequency.
0.01 to The deceleration time of the inverter-driven motor before commercial power-driven motor is
3600.00 s driven with motor increase judgment.
Depend on F08 (Deceleration time 1).
0.00
When RT1 is ON, the time depends on E11 (Deceleration time 2)
■ Motor increase switching level (J456)

motor floating + commercial power-driven motor system (J401 = 3, 13), if the output frequency of the inverter
driven motor is below the motor increase switching level (J456), the contactors for the increased units is turned
ON.
- Data setting range: 0 to 100%
Switching frequency [Hz] = (J456/100%) × (J18 - J19) + J19
Note: J18: PID control 1 (PID output limiter upper limit), J19: PID control 1 (PID output limiter lower limit)
■ Motor increase PID control start frequency (J457)

motor floating + commercial power-driven motor system (J401 = 3, 13), the frequency is set to create PID control.
PID control start frequency after driving the commercial power-driven motor with motor
0 to 500 Hz
increase judgment
The motor decrease judgment (Parallel Judgment F) (J452) depends on the motor increase
999
PID control start frequency.
APPENDICES
Appendix-270
J458 Motor Decrease Switching Time (Acceleration time)

J459 Motor Decrease Switching Level
J460 Motor Decrease PID Control Start Frequency
■ Motor decrease switching time (Acceleration time) (J458)

During motor decrease during cascade operation, the inverter-driven motor is accelerated at motor deceleration
switching time (acceleration time) (J458). After the commercial driven motor is interrupted, acceleration stops when
output frequency reaches the motor decrease PID start frequency (J460). At this point, PID control recommences,
and the inverter-driven motor operates with the PID control MV frequency.
0.01 to The acceleration time of inverter-driven motor before stopping the commercial power-driven
3600.00 s motor with motor decrease judgment.
0.00 F07: Depends on acceleration time 1 (When RT1 is turned ON, E10: acceleration time 2)
■ Motor decrease switching level (J459)

When motors are decreased ruing cascade operation, if the output frequency of the inverter-driven motor is above
that of the motor decrease switching level (J459), the contacts for the decreased units are turned OFF.
The inverter-driven motor frequency level when the commercial power-driven motor is stopped
0 to 100%
with motor decrease judgment.
The motor increase switching level (J456) depends on the motor decrease switching level
999
(J459).
Switching frequency [Hz] = (J459/100%) × (J19) - J18) + J19
■ Motor decrease PID control start frequency (J460)

When motors are decreased ruing cascade operation, the PID control start frequency is specified.
The PID control start frequency after the commercial power-driven motor is stopped with motor
0 to 500 Hz
decrease judgment.
999 Depends on the motor increase judgment (Parallel Judgment F) (J450)
J461 Motor Increase/Decrease Switching Judgment Non-responsive Area Width
In the PID control, no motor increase/decrease judgment will be performed as long as the deviation between the
PID command value (SV value) and the PID feedback value is less than the specified value.
Deviation between PID command value (SV value) and PID feedback value, assuming 100%
0.1 to 50.0%
of PID feedback full scale.
0.0 Disable (Always perform motor increase/decrease judgment)
Appendix-271
J462 Failure Inverter Judgment Time
In the communications-linked inverter drive motor floating system (J401 = 52), if PID control comes to be at the
hold state in the inverter running under PID control due to the limiter (e.g., current limit), then it is judged whether to
exclude the PID control inverter.
If any other ready-to-run inverter exists in the system and the failure inverter judgment time (J462) has elapsed, the
current PID control inverter will be switched to the other one.
This switching does not involve increase/decrease of inverters or regular switching even if their conditions are met.
If J462 = OFF, no switching occurs. During auto search for idling motor speed, no PID control inverter will be
switched even if PID control comes to be at the hold state.
- Data setting range: OFF, 0.5 to 600.0 s
J463 PID control start frequency
After inputting a run command, the motor accelerates without performing PID control until the frequency set in J463
is reached. PID control is started after the value set in J463 is reached.
0 Disable
1 to 500 Hz Start frequency
999 Depends on J19
J465 Auxiliary Motor (Frequency operation level)

J466 (Hysteresis width)
When all the set motors are under operation, the output frequency (for cascade operation: inverter-driven motor
output frequency; for mutual operation: output frequency of units during PID control) reaches the auxiliary motor
(frequency operation level) (J465), the auxiliary motor drive signal "AUX_L" is turned on and output. When the
frequency is lowered below the auxiliary motor (frequency operation level) by more than the auxiliary motor
(hysteresis width) (J466), the auxiliary motor drive signal "AUX_L" is turned OFF. However, when the configuration
is set to disable (J01 = 0) in PID mode selection, or the configuration is set to disable (J401 = 0) in the pump control
mode selection, the auxiliary motor drive signal "AUX_L" is turned OFF at all time.
■ Auxiliary motor (frequency operation level) (J465)

The frequency for determining the auxiliary motor drive is specified. When the frequency of the inverter-driven
motor exceeds this value, the auxiliary motor is driven.
When the configuration is set to 0.0, the frequency at the frequency detection operation level (E31) is specified.
- Data setting range: OFF, 0.1 to 500.0 Hz
APPENDICES
Appendix-272
■ Auxiliary motor (hysteresis width) (J466)

The frequency width for determining the auxiliary motor stop is specified. When the frequency is lowered below the
auxiliary motor (frequency operation level) (J465) by more than this value, the auxiliary motor is stopped.
When the configuration is set to 0.0, the frequency detection hysteresis width (E32) is specified.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 500.0 Hz
J467 Auxiliary Motor (PV operation level)

J468 (Connection timer)
J469 (Interrupting timer)
For the inverter drive motor floating system (J401 = 2, 12) in the pump control mode selection, the inverter-driven
motor is allowed to free-run before increasing the number of motors. The auxiliary motor is driven to control the
pressure variation during a time period until the motor is commercial power-driven (contactor restart time during
motor switching (J454)). Furthermore, when the number of motors is decreased, the auxiliary motor is not driven.
The timing to drive and stop the auxiliary motor is determined by the connection level and the interrupting level.
This judgment is implemented continually for a given period of time after allowing the inverter-driven motor to
free-run. This period of time is ten times the larger value of the contactor restart time during motor switching (J454)
or the auxiliary motor (connection timer) (J468).
Appendix-273
J480 to J484 Motor Cumulative Run Time (Motor 0 to 4)
In the pump control, each motor cumulative run time (J480 to J484) is cumulated. The motor cumulative run time
can be used for maintenance plan.
The motor cumulative run time is counted when the gate is turned ON and the dew condensation prevention
function is not operated.
This is counted even during commercial operation due to the output signal, “M _L” from the inverter.
The cumulative run time is cumulated in the range from 0 to 65,535 hours and reset to zero as it exceeds 65,535
hours, and then the time is cumulated continually. For the display of cumulative run time, 1 hour is displayed as 1
hours in the keypad.
The cumulative run time can be specified to any value from the keypad. The initial time of replacing machine parts
or inverter can be specified to any value.
The chart below indicates cumulative operating times and corresponding motor numbers for each pump control
mode selection (J401) setting.
Pump control mode selection (J401)

Function code
1, 11 2, 3, 12, 13 52, 54
J480 Cumulative operating time (Motor 0) Inverter drive motor - Master unit
M1_I and M1_L
J481 Cumulative operating time (Motor 1) M1_L motor Slave unit 1
motor
M2_I and M2_L
motor
M3_I and M3_L
motor
J484 Cumulative operating time (Motor 4) M4_L motor - -
APPENDICES
Appendix-274
J490 Y terminal ON Maximum Cumulation Count (Y1 Y2)

J492 (30A/B/C)
J493 (Y6RY to Y12
12RY)
Y terminal output and relay output option ON/OFF cumulation count can be monitored. This serves as a guide for
the operating life of each relay. The cumulation count stops when 1 million is reached. Furthermore, the relay time
can be reset by the user by clearing the relay ON cumulation count and using the keypad. This is operational only
when cascade opeoperation
ration is enabled (J401 = 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13). The count is stored in units of 16 when the power is
off, so the maximum deviation is 16 each time the power is turned off.
• The relay ON maximum cumulation count (J490 to J493) is resettable by keypad ope
operation.
ration.
■ Y terminal ON maximum cumulation count (Y1 Y2) (J490)

The larger of the cumulation counts of Y terminal outputs (E20 and E21)) ON of inverter main body is displayed.
The display of "1.000" indicates 1000 times.
■ Relay ON cumulation count (30A/B/C)

(30A ) (J492)
The cumulatio
cumulation count of 30A/B/C relay outputs (E27) ON of inverter main body is displayed. The display of "1.000"
indicates 1000 times.
■ Relay ON maximum cumulation count (Y6RY to Y

Y12RY)
RY) (J493)
The larger of the relay ON cumulation counts on the relay output option (OPC-F2-RY)
(OPC RY) is displayed. The display of
"1.000" indicates 1000 times.
Output terminals Lifetime of contacts Capacity of contacts

Transistor outputs Depends upon the specifications of the relay to be
-
(Y1, Y2) connected.
Relay outputs 200000 times 250 VAC 0.3A
(30A/B/C) (when turned ON/OFF at one
one-second
second intervals) 48 VDC 0.5A
Relay output option 200000 times 250 VAC 0.3A
OPC
OPC-F2-RY (when turned ON/OFF at one
one-second
second intervals) 48 VDC 0.5A
Appendix
Appendix-275
275
J501 External PID Control 1 (Mode selection)
Apart from PID control specified by J01, the inverter has three channels of PID control to control external devices
such as dampers and valves so that no external PID controllers are required.
Under PID control, the inverter detects the state
state of a control target object with a sensor or the similar device and
compares it with the commanded value (e.g., temperature control command). If there is any deviation between
them, PID control operates to minimize it. That is, it is a closed loop feedback
feedbac k system that matches controlled
variable (feedback amount). PID control expands the application area of the inverter to process control (e.g., flow
control, pressure control, and temperature control).
Data for J501 Function
0 Disable
1 Enable process control (Normal operation)
2 Enable process control (Inverse operation)
Enable process control, interlocking with inverter running (Normal operation)
11
When the output signal RUN ("Inverter running") is ON, the process control operates.
Enable process control, interlocking with inverter running (Inverse operation)
12
When the output signal RUN ("Inverter running") is ON, the process control operates.
Enable process control by external digital signal (Normal operation)
21 command EPID1-ON
Turning ON the terminal command ON ("External
"External PID control 1 ON command"
command")
operates the process control.
Enable process control by external digital signal (Inverse operation)
22 Turning ON the terminal command EPID1-ON
ON ("External
command")
operates the process control.
Enable process control by external digital signal, interlocking with inverter running (Normal
operation)
31
Turning ON the terminal command EPID1-ON ON ("External
command") when
the output signal RUN ("Inverter running") is ON, the process control operates.
Enable process control by external digital signal, interlocking with inverter running (Inverse
operation)
32
Turning ON the terminal command EPID1-ON ON ("External
command") when
the output signal RUN ("Inverter running") is ON, the process control operates.
To use "External PID control 1 ON command", you need to assign the terminal command EPID1
EPID1-ON to any of the
general-purpose
purpose digital input terminals, respectively. ( E01 to E05)
E0
External PID control: "External PID control 1 ON command" EPID1-ON
EPID1 (data
data = 201)
201
• If data 11, 12, 31, 32 are set, during inverter deceleration the PID control is put on hold (I item hold).
PID control is put on hold only during decelerating to stop when the run command is OFF. PID control
is not put on hold when decelerating to stop if the set frequency is changed.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-276
276
J502 External PID Control 1 (Remote command selection)
J502 selects the source that specifies external PID control command 1, respectively. The table below lists the
external PID control command sources.
Data for
External PID control command sources
J502
Keypad
0
Specify the external PID command by using the / keys on the keypad.
Terminal command UP/DOWN
3 With the UP and DOWN commands, 0 to 100% of an external PID control command value can
be set as a value converted into physical quantity in terms of the display unit and scale.
Command via communications link
4 For J502, use function code S30. The transmission data of 20000 (decimal) is equal to 100% of
the PID command.
Analog input
[12] 0 to ±10
Voltage input to terminal [12]: 10 VDC, 100% PID command/ ±10
10 VDC
51 Current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function): 4 to 20 mA DC, 100% PID command/ 20 mA DC
DC,
0 to 20 mA DC, 100%
100% PID command/ 20 mA DC
Voltage input to the terminal [C1](
[C1](V2function):
function): 0 to 10 VDC, 100% PID command/ 10 VDC)
(1) External PID command with the / keys on the keypad (J502, data = 0 (factory default))
With the / keys on the keypad, 0 to 100% of an external PID control command value can be set as a value
converted into easy
easy-to--understand,
understand, physical quantity in terms of the display unit and scale.
For scale setting for terminals [12], [C1](C1
[C1] (C1 function) or [C1](V2
[C1]( function),
function), refer to function codes C59 and
C60, C65 and C66, or C71 and C72, respectively.
(2) External PID command with UP/DOWN control (J502, data = 3)

When the UP/DOWN control is selected as an external PID command, turning the terminal command UP or
DOWN ON causes the external PID command to change between the minimum scale and maximum scale.
The PID command can be specified in mnemonic physical quantities with the display unit (J505) and scale
(J506/J507)
(J506/J507).
To select the UP/DOWN control as an external
external PID command, the UP and DOWN should be assigned to the digital
input terminals [X1] to [X
[X5]. ( E01 to E05,
E0 , data = 17, 18)
UP DOWN
Function
Data = 17 Data = 18
OFF OFF Retain the current external PID command value.

ON OFF Increase external PID command value at a rate between 0.1%/0.1 s and 1%/0.1 s.
OFF ON Decrease external PID command value at a rate between 0.1%/0.1 s and 1%/0.1 s.
ON ON Retain the current external PID command value.
Command settings via the UP/DOWN control are common to PID control 1(J02).
(3) External PID command via communications link (J502, data = 4)

Use function code S30 that specifies the communications function code. The transmission data of 20000 (decimal)
is equal to 100% of the PID command.
For details of tthe
he communications format, refer to the RS--485
485 Communication User's Manual.
Appendix
Appendix-277
277
(4) External PID command by analog inputs (J502, data = 51)

When any analog input (voltage input to terminals [12] and [V2], or current input to terminal [C1]) for an external
PID command is used, it is possible to arbitrary specify the PID command by multiplying the gain and adding the
bias. The polarity can be selected and the filter time constant and offset can be adjusted. In addition to J502, J602
and J652 settings, it is necessary to select external PID command 1, 2 or 3 for analog input (specified by any of
E61 to E63, function code data = 3). For details, refer to the descriptions of E61 to E63.
Adjustable elements of PID command
Bias Gain Filter

Input Input
Input range Bias Base Gain Base Polarity time Offset
terminal range
point point constant
0 to +10 V,
[12] C55 C56 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31 -
-10 to +10 V
[C1](C1) 4 to 20 mA,
C61 C62 C37 C39 - C38 C36 C40
0 to 20 mA
[C1](V2) 0 to +10 V C67 C68 C42 C44 C45 C43 C41 -
■ Offset (C31, C36, C41)

C31, C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage/current input. The offset also applies to signals sent
from the external equipment.
■ Filter time constant (C33, C38, C43)

C33, C38, and C43 provide the filter time constants for the voltage and current of the analog input. Choose
appropriate values for the time constants considering the response speed of the machinery system, as large time
constants slow down the response. If the input voltage fluctuates because of noise, specify large time constants.
■ Polarity (C35, C45)

C35 and C45 specify the input range for analog input voltage.
Data for C35/C45 Terminal input specifications
0 -10 to +10V
With [C1] (V2 function), 0 to +10 V is converted to -100% to +100% based on the
minus bias setting.
1 0 to +10V (negative value of voltage is regarded as 0 V)
■ Terminal [C1] input range selection (C40)

C40 specifies the input range for terminal [C1] (analog input current).
Data for C40 Terminal input range
0 4 to 20 mA (factory default)
1 0 to 20 mA
APPENDICES
Appendix-278
■ Gain and bias
Terminal Action
[12]
[C1](C1 function)
[C1](V2 function)
(Example) Mapping the range of 1 through 5 V at terminal [12] to 0 through 100%
Appendix-279
Selecting Feedback Terminals

For feedback control, determine the connection terminal according to the type of the sensor output.
• If the sensor is a current output type, use the current input terminal [C1]
[C1](C1
(C1 function) of the inverter.
• If the sensor is a voltage output type, use the voltage input terminal [12] of the inverter, or switch over the
terminal [[C1](V2 function) to the voltage input terminal and use it.
For details, refer to the descriptions of E61 through E63.
Application example: Process control (for air conditioners, fans and pumps)
The operating range for PID process control is internally controlled as 0% through 100%. For the given feedback
input, determine the operating range to be controlled by means of gain adjustment.
(Example) When the output level of the external sensor is within the range of 1 to 5 V:
• Use terminal [12] designed for voltage input.
• Set the gain (C32 for analog input adjustment) at 200% in order to make the maximum value (5 V) of the
external sensor's output correspond to 100%. Note that the input specification for terminal [12] is 0 to 10 V
factor of 200% (= 10 V ÷ 5 V × 100) should be specified. Note also that
corresponding to 0 to 100%; thus, a gain factor
any bias setting does not apply to feedback control.
(Example 1) When the output level of the external sensor is ±7

7 VDC:
• Use terminal [12] since the voltage input is of bipolar.
• When the external sensor's output is of bipolar, the inverter controls the speed within the range of ±100%.
± To
convert the output ±7
± VDC to ±100%,
100%, set the gain (C32 for analog input adjustment) at 143% as calculated
below.
10 V
≈ 143%
7V
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-280
280
(Example 2) When the output level of the external sensor is 0 to 10 VDC:

• Use terminal [12] designed for voltage input.
• When the external sensor's output is of unipolar, the inverter controls the speed within the range of 0 to 100%.
PID Display Coe

Coefficient
fficient and Monitoring
To monitor the PID command and its feedback value, set a display unit, maximum scale, and minimum scale to
convert the values into easy
easy-to-understand
understand physical quantities (such as temperature).
• Function code of display unit, maximum
maximum scale, and minimum scale, for each terminal

Terminal [C1]
[C1](C1) C64 C65 C66
Terminal [[C1](V2) C70 C71 C72
For the monitor, refer to function code K10.
Appendix
Appendix-281
281
J505 External PID Control 1 (Display unit)
J505 selects a display unit for external PID control 1.

Under external PID control, the external PID command setting value (SV), feedback value (PV), manipulated value
(MV) and others can be monitored on the keypad. For these values, select the display units.
For the setting procedure of the monitor display, refer to the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC Ace User’s
User ’s Manual Chapter 5, Section 5.5.1
"Monitoring the running status."
When external PID control is to be performed with the same unit and scale as for ffeedback
eedback values, the
J505 settings need not be changed. (Factory default: In accordance with the unit and scale used for
feedback values)
Configure the J505 to use different unit and scale from feedback values.
Data for Data for Data for

Display unit Display unit Display unit
J505 J505 J505
0 (Factory default)* 23 L/s (flowrate) 45 mmHg (pressure)

1 No unit 24 L/min (flowrate) 46 Psi (pressure)
2 % 25 L/h (flowrate) 47 mWG (pressure)
°C
3
20 m /s (flowrate) 42 MPa (pressure) 61 C (temperature)
°F
3
21 m /min (flowrate) 43 mbar (pressure) 62 F (temperature)
3
22 m /h (flowrate) 44 bar (pressure) 80 ppm (density)
* In accordance with the unit and scale used for feedback values
For feedback value selection, see function codes E61 to E63.
The table below lists function codes to be used for setting a unit and scale for feedback values.

Terminal [C1]
[C1](C1
(C1 function) C64 C65 C66
Terminal [V2]
[V2](V2
(V2 function) C70 C71 C72
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-282
282
J506, J507 External PID Control 1 (Maximum scale, Minimum scale)
J506/J507 specify the maximum/minimum scale for external PID control 1.

Set the maximum scale "External PID command value / Display value at 100% of external PID feedback value"
with J506, and the minimum scale "External PID command value / Display value at 0% of external PID feedback
value" with J507.
Display values are calculated with the following expres
expression.
Display value = (External PID control value (%)) / 100 x (Maximum scale - Minimum scale) + Minimum scale
- Data setting range: (Maximum scale and minimum scale) -999
999 to 0.00 to 9990
Figure J.35
When external PID control is to be performed with the same unit and scale as for feedback values, the
J506 or J507 settings need not be changed. (Factory default: In accordance with the unit and scale used
for feedback values. Refer to J505.)
Configure the J506 and J507 to use different unit and scale fro
from
m feedback values.
Appendix
Appendix-283
283
J510 External PID Control 1 P (Gain)

J511 I (Integral time)
J512 D (Differential time)
J513 (Feedback filter)
The table below lists function codes to be used for setting the P (gain), I (integral time), D (differential time) and
feedback filter for external PID controls.
I D
P (gain) Feedback filter
(integral time) (differential time)
External PID control 1 J510 J511 J512 J513
For details of P action, I action, D action, as well as their coordinated controls and adjusting method, see the
description of J10, J11, and J12. Note that the P (gain) of External PID (J510) correspond to J10. Also, I (integral
time) (J511) correspond to J11, and the D (differential time) (J512) correspond to J12.
■ P gain (J510)
J510 specifies the gain for the external PID processor.
- Data setting range: 0.000 to 30.000 (times), 999: ON/OFF control
ON/OFF control
Setting the P gain (J510) to "999" enables ON/OFF control. If the feedback value (PV) exceeds the threshold value
"Command setting value SV + Hysteresis width (J515)," the manipulated value (MV) switches between two
positions 0% and 100%.
● Normal operation ● Reverse operation
Manipulated value J515 J515 Manipulated value J515 J515

(MV) (MV)
ON ON
100% 100%
OFF OFF
0% 0%
Feedback value (PV) Feedback value (PV)

Command value (SV) Command value (SV)
■ I integral time (J511)

J511 specifies the integral time for the external PID processor.
0.0 means that the integral component is ineffective.
■ D differential time (J512)

J512 specifies the differential time for the external PID processor.
0.00 means that the differential component is ineffective.
■ Feedback filter (J513)

J513 specifies the time constant of the filter for feedback signals under the external PID control.
- This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop. Setting too long a time constant makes the system
response slow.
APPENDICES
Appendix-284
J514 External PID Control 1 (Anti-reset wind-up)
J514 suppresses overshoot under external PID control 1 using an external PID processor. As long as the deviation
between the PID command and its feedback is out of the preset range, the integrator holds its value and does not
perform integration operation.
- Data setting range: 0.00, 0.01 to 9990 (The setting range is restricted by the maximum scale and minimum
scale.)
J515 External PID Control 1 (ON/OFF control hysteresis width)
J515 specifies the hysteresis width for ON/OFF control under external PID control 1 in a physical quantity.
Setting the P gain (J510) to "999" enables ON/OFF control. If the feedback value (PV) exceeds the threshold value
"Command setting value SV + Hysteresis width (J515)," the manipulated value (MV) switches between two
positions 0% and 100%.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 9990 (The setting range is restricted by the maximum scale and minimum scale.)
Manipulated value J515 J515 Manipulated value J515 J515

(MV) (MV)
ON ON
100% 100%
OFF OFF
0% 0%

Appendix-285
J516 External PID Control 1 (Proportional operation output convergent value)
Exclusively for external PID control, this setting value can be added to the external PID output. J516 sets external
PID controls 1 respectively.
- Data setting range: 0 to 150 (%)
Also, by disabling I (integral time) and D (differential time) to enable only P (gain) and this value, the following
comparison is possible.
Manipulated value Manipulated value

(MV) (MV)
ON ON
100% 100%
P gain P gain
%
J516 J516
OFF
0% 0%
OFF

J517 External PID Control 1 (Proportional cycle)
J517 specifies the output cycle (Tc) of pulse outputs under output duty control for external PID control 1.
- Data setting range: 1 to 150 (s)
Output cycle (Tc)

Terminals Y1-Y3
Terminal Y5A/C
Terminal 30A/B/C ON OFF ON OFF
The ON and OFF times are calculated by the following expressions.

ON time = Output cycle (Tc) x Manipulated value (MV) / 100
OFF time = Output cycle (Tc) - ON time
(Example) If output cycle (Tc) = 60 s, MV = 35%

ON time = 60 s x 35% / 100 = 21 s
OFF time = 60 s -21 s = 39 s
To use the proportional cycle, it is necessary to assign EPID1-OUT to any of digital output terminals as duty control
output with any of E20, E21 and E27.
APPENDICES
- External PID control 1: EPID1-OUT (E20, E21 and E27, data = 212)
Appendix-286
J518 External PID Control 1 (Upper limit of PID process output)

J519 (Lower limit of PID process output)
J520 (Upper and lower limits)
J518/J519/J520 defines the upper and lower limiters for the external PID output, which exclusively apply to
external PID control 1.
When external PID control is cancelled with %/EPID1 and manual command is used to operate, the upper and
lower limiters are effective.
E01 to E05, data = 202 (%/EPID1)
■ PID Control 1 (Upper limit of PID process output) (J518)

- Data setting range: -10 to 110 (%)
J518 specifies the upper limit of the external PID processor output limiter in %.
■ PID Control 1 (Lower limit of PID process output) (J519)

- Data setting range: -10 to 110 (%)
J519 specifies the lower limit of the external PID processor output limiter in %.
■ PID Control 1 (Upper and lower limits) (J520)

J520 specifies the upper and lower limits of the external PID processor output limiter.
Data for PID output limiter

J520 Upper limit Lower limit
0 J518 J519
1 J518 data or above ⇒ 110% Less than J519 data ⇒ -10%
Appendix-287
J521 External PID Control 1 (Alarm output selection)

J522 (Upper level alarm (AH))
J524 (Lower level alarm (AL))
J521/J522/J524 define two types of alarm signals (absolute-value and deviation alarms) that the inverter can
output for external PID control 1.
To use the alarm output, it is necessary to assign EPV1-ALM to any of digital output terminals as duty control
output with any of E20, E21 and E27. To generate a light alarm, the following digital output signals can be extracted
without setting the light alarm selection 4 (H184). For details of light alarms, see the description of function codes
H181 to H184.
- External PID control 1: EPV1-ALM (E20, E21 and E27, data = 214)
J521 specifies the alarm output types. J522 and J524 specify the upper and lower limits for alarms.
■ PID control 1 (Alarm output selection) (J521)

J521 specifies one of the following alarms available.
Data for J521 Alarm Description
0 Absolute-value alarm (PV) While PV < AL or AH < PV, EPV1-ALM is ON.
1 Absolute-value alarm (PV) (with Same as above (with Hold)

Hold)
2 Absolute-value alarm (PV) (with Same as above (with Latch)
Latch)
3 Absolute-value alarm (PV) (with Same as above (with Hold and Latch)
Hold and Latch)
4 Deviation alarm (PV) While PV < SV - AL or SV + AH < PV, EPV1-ALM is ON.
5 Deviation alarm (PV) (with Hold) Same as above (with Hold)

6 Deviation alarm (PV) (with Latch) Same as above (with Latch)
7 Deviation alarm (PV) (with Hold Same as above (with Hold and Latch)
and Latch)
8 Absolute-value alarm (SV) While SV < AL or AH < SV, EPV1-ALM is ON.
APPENDICES
Appendix-288
Data for J521 Alarm Description
9 Absolute-value alarm (SV) (with Same as above (with Hold)

Hold)
10 Absolute-value alarm (SV) (with Same as above (with Latch)
Latch)
11 Absolute-value alarm (SV) (with Same as above (with Hold and Latch)
Hold and Latch)
12 Absolute-value alarm (MV) While MV < AL or AH < MV, EPV1-ALM is ON.
13 Absolute-value alarm (MV) (with Same as above (with Hold)

Hold)
14 Absolute-value alarm (MV) (with Same as above (with Latch)
Latch)
15 Absolute-value alarm (MV) (with Same as above (with Hold and Latch)
Hold and Latch)
SV: Process command value, PV: Feedback value, MV: Manipulated value
Hold: During the power-on sequence, the alarm output is kept OFF (disabled) even when the monitored quantity
is within the alarm range. Once it goes out of the alarm range, and comes into the alarm range again, the
alarm is enabled.
Latch: Once the monitored quantity comes into the alarm range and the alarm is turned ON, the alarm will remain
ON even if it goes out of the alarm range. To release the latch, perform a reset by using the key or
turning the terminal command RST ON. Resetting can be done by the same way as resetting an alarm.
■ External PID control 1 (Upper level alarm (AH) (J522)

J522 specifies the upper limit (AH) for alarms in a physical quantity.
- Data setting range: OFF: Disable, -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00
The physical quantity is dependent on the display unit and maximum/minimum scale specified by the following
function codes.

External PID control 1 J505 J506 J507
Appendix-289
■ External PID control 1 (Lower level alarm (AL) (J524)

J524 specifies the lower limit (AL) for alarms in a physical quantity. The physical quantity is dependent on the
display unit and maximum/minimum scale specified by the function codes listed above.
- Data setting range: OFF: Disable, -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00
Upper level alarm (AH) and lower level alarm (AL) also apply to the following alarms.
How to handle the alarm:
Alarm Description
Select alarm output (J521) Parameter setting
Upper limit ON when AH < PV Absolute-value alarm AL = 0

(absolute) ON when AH < SV
ON when AH < MV
Lower limit ON when PV < AL AH = 100%
(absolute) ON when SV < AL
ON when MV < AL
Upper limit ON when SV + AH < PV Deviation alarm AL = 100%
(deviation)
Lower limit ON when PV < SV - AL AH = 100%
(deviation)
Upper/lower limit ON when |SV - PV| > AL AL = AH
(deviation)
Upper/lower ON when SV - AL < PV < SV + AL Deviation alarm
range limit A negative logic signal
(deviation) should be assigned to
Upper/lower ON when AL < PV < AH Absolute-value alarm EPV1-ALM
range limit ON when AL < SV < AH
(absolute) ON when AL < MV < AH
Upper/lower ON when SV - AL < PV < SV + AH Deviation alarm
range limit
(deviation)
APPENDICES
Appendix-290
J527 External PID Control 1 (Feedback error detection mode)

J529 (Feedback error upper-limit)
J530 (Feedback error lower-limit)
J531 (Feedback error detection time)
Under external PID control, the inverter can detect abnormal feedback values (PV).
In the case of external PID control 1, if the error level of a PV signal (Upper limit: J529, Lower limit: J53) is kept for
the feedback error detection time (J531), the inverter regards it as an error, then stops or continues running
according to the mode specified by J527.
Feedback error Feedback error Feedback error

Error detection time
detection mode upper limit lower limit
External PID control 1 J527 J529 J530 J531
■ External PID control 1 (Feedback error detection mode) (J527)

J527 specifies the error processing to be performed if a feedback error occurs.
Data for J527 Error processing
0 Disable: Turn ON the following output signal and continue to run.

EPV1-OFF for external PID control 1
1 Enable: Coast to a stop (PVA trip)
2 Enable: Decelerate to a stop and cause a PVA trip.
Feedback errors can be monitored from the external equipment by assigning the digital output signal EPV1-OFF,
to any of the output terminals [Y1], [Y2], and [30A/B/C] with any of E20, E21 and E27.
- External PID control 1: EPV1-OFF (E20, E21 and E27, data = 215)
■ External PID control 1 (Feedback error lower-limit) (J529)

J529 specifies the upper limit for feedback errors in a physical quantity.
- Data setting range: -999.00 to 0.00 to 999.00, Auto = 105%
function codes.

■ External PID control 1 (Feedback error lower-limit) (J530)

J530 specifies the lower limit for feedback errors in a physical quantity. The physical quantity is dependent on the
display unit and maximum/minimum scale specified by the function codes listed above.
- Data setting range: -999.00 to 0.00 to 999.00, 999: -5%
■ External PID control 1 (Feedback error detection time) (J531)

J531 specifies the feedback error detection time for the upper-limit (J529) and lower-limit (J530). If the detection
time has elapsed after a feedback error occurred, the inverter regards it as an error.
- Data setting range: 0 to 300.0 (s)
Appendix-291
J540 External PID Control 1 (Manual command)
■ External PID control 1 (Manual command) (J540)

J540 specifies the source that specifies a manual command to apply when external PID command is canceled.
Data for
Manual command sources
J540
Keypad
0
Keypad (Balanceless-bumpless)
(Balanceless
8
External PID command 1 (Analog input: Terminals [12], [C1]
[C1](C1
(C1 function) and [C1](V2 function)
function
Function codes E61 to E63 (terminal [12], [C1]
[C1](C1)
(C1), [C1](V2) Extended function selection): Data
= 43
51 Voltage input to terminal [12] (0 to ±10
10 VDC, 100% PID command/ ±10
10 VDC)
Current input to terminal [C1](C1
[C1](C1 function) (4 to 20 mA DC, 100% PID command/ 20 mA DC
DC)
(0 to 20 mA DC, 100% PID command/ 20 mA DC)
[C1](V2 function) (0 to ±10
Voltage input to the terminal [C1]( 10 VDC, 100% PID command/ ±10
10 VDC)
VD
To cancel external PID controls, assign digital input signals %/EPID1 to digital input terminals with E01 to
E05
5 (data = 202) beforehand.
J551 External PID Multistep Command (Multistep command 1)

J552 (Multistep command 2)
J553 (Multistep command 3)
J551, J552 and J553 define an external PID control command as a preset value (3 steps).
■ External PID multistep command (Multistep command 1 to 3) (J551, J552, J553)
J551/J552/J553 specifies a multistep command in a physical quantity.
- Data se
setting range: -999.00
-999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00
• External PID command
EPID
EPID-SS2 EPID-SS1
SS1 Command
OFF OFF Command by J502

J5
OFF ON J551 (Multistep 1)
ON OFF J552 (Multistep 2)
ON ON J553 (Multistep 3)
function codes.

Note: Factory default value is set at J505, J605, J655=0 (according to the PID control 1 feedback value unit
unit/scale).
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-292
292
J.8 d codes (Applied functions 2)

[1] Speed control (Vector control without speed or pole position sensor for PMSM)
d01/A43 Speed control 1, and 2 (Speed command filter)
d02/A44 (Speed detection filter)
d03/A45 P (Gain)
d04/A46 I (Integral time)
Related function code: d25:ASR switching time
These function codes are used to set up the speed control for vector control without speed sensor nor pole position
sensor for PMSM.
■ Block diagram of the speed control algorithm
Torque command
■ Speed command filter (d01/A43)

d01 specifies the time constant determining the first order delay of the speed command filter.
Modify this data when an excessive overshoot occurs against the change of the reference speed.
Increasing the filter time constant stabilizes the reference speed and reduces overshoot against the change of the
reference speed, but it slows the response speed of the inverter.
■ Speed detection filter (d02/A44)

d02 specifies the time constant determining the first order delay of the speed detection filter.
Modify this data when the control target (machinery) is oscillatory due to deflection of a drive belt or other causes
so that ripples (oscillatory components) are superimposed on the detected speed, causing hunting (undesirable
oscillation of the system) and blocking the PI processor gain from increasing (resulting in a slow response speed of
the inverter).
Increasing the time constant stabilizes the detected speed and allows to raise the PI processor gain even with
ripples superimposed on the detected speed. However, speed detection itself is delayed, resulting in a slower
speed response, larger overshoot, or hunting.
Appendix-293
■ P(Gain) (d03/A45), I(integral time) (d04/A46)

d03 and d04 specify the gain and integral time of the speed regulator (PI processor), respectively.
• Data setting range: (d03) 0.1 to 200.0 (times)
(d04) 0.001 to 9.999 (s), 999 (Cancel integral term)
P(Gain)
Definition of “P gain = 1.0” is that the torque command is 100% (100% torque output of each inverter capacity)
when the speed deviation (reference speed – detected speed) is 100% (equivalent to the maximum speed).
Determine the P gain according to moment of inertia of machinery loaded to the motor output shaft. Larger moment
of inertia needs larger P gain to keep the flat response during whole operation.
Specifying a larger P gain improves the quickness of control response, but may cause a motor speed overshooting
or hunting (undesirable oscillation of the system). Moreover, mechanical resonance or vibration sound on the
machine or motor could occur due to excessively amplified noise. If it happens, decreasing P gain will reduce the
amplitude of the resonance/vibration. A too small P gain results in a slow inverter response and a speed fluctuation
in low frequency, which may prolong the time required for stabilizing the motor speed.
I(Integral time)
Specifying a shorter integral time shortens the time needed to compensate the speed deviation, resulting in quick
response in speed. Specify a short integral time if quick arrival to the target speed is necessary and a slight
overshooting in the control is allowed; specify a long time if any overshooting is not allowed and taking longer time
is allowed.
If a mechanical resonance occurs and the sound from the motor or gears is abnormal, setting a longer integral time
can transfer the resonance point to the low frequency zone and suppress the resonance in the high frequency
zone.
■ Select speed control parameter 1 – “MPRM1” (E01 toE05 data = 78)

The combination of the ON/OFF states of digital input signals “MPRM1” selects one between 4 different speed
control parameter sets.
■ ASR switching time (d25)

Speed control parameters switching by “MPRM1” and “MPRM2” signals is possible even during motor drive
operation. For example, speed control P (Gain) and I (Integral time) listed can be switched. Switching these
parameters during operation may cause an abrupt change of torque and result in a mechanical shock, depending
on the driving condition of the load. To reduce such a mechanical shock, the inverter decreases the abrupt torque
change using the ramp function of ASR switching time (d25).
APPENDICES
Appendix-294
d21, d22 Speed deviation excess detected (Hysteresis width,

width detection timer)
d23 Speed deviation excess detected processing
peed deviation excess detected signal “PG-ERR

These function codes specify the detection levels of the speed ERR”.
Speed deviation excess detected signal “PG-ERR

ERR” (E20,, E21 and E27, data = 76)
■ Hysteresis width (d21), Detection timer (d22) and PG error
rror processing
rocessing (d23))
• Data setting range: (d21) 0.0 to 50.0 (%), in (%) of the maximum speed
(d22) 0.00 to 10.00 (s)
(d23) 0 to 2
If the speed regulator’s deviation (between the reference speed and estimated one) is out of the specified range
(d21) for the period specified by d22, the inverter judges it as a PG error.
d23 defines the detection condition (and exception), processing after error detection, and hysteresis width as listed
below.
Detection condition Processing after error Hysteresis width for error

d23 Function
(and exception) detection detection
0 Continue to run 1 When the inverter cannot The inverter outputs the Hysteresis width = d21,
follow the reference speed Speed deviation excess which is constant, even if
(even after soft-starting)
soft starting) detected signal “PG--ERR” the speed command is
due to a heavy overload or and continues to run. above the base frequency
similar, so that the detected (F04).
1 Stop running with The inverter initiates a
speed is less than the
alarm 1 motor coast to stop, with
reference speed, the
the ere alarm.
inverter does not interpret
this situation as a Speed It also outputs the Speed
deviation excess detected. deviation excess detected
signal “PG-ERR”.
2 Stop running with No exception.
alarm 2
Enabling an operation limiting function such as the torque limit will increase the deviation caused by a
huge gap between the reference speed and detected one. In this case, the inverter may trip interpreting
this situation as a PG error, depending on the running state. To avoid this incident, set the d23 data to “0”
(Continue to run) to prevent the inverter from tripping even if any of those limiting functions is activated.
d25 ASR switching time (Refer to d01)
Refer to the description of d01.
d32, d33 Speed limits / Over speed level 1 and 2
Under speed control, the over speed detection levels are specified with 120% of these function codes.
• Forward overspeed level = Maximum frequency 1 (F03) × Speed limit 1 (d32) × 120 (%)
• Reverse overspeed level = Maximum frequency 1 (F03) × Speed limit 2 (d33) × 120 (%)
• Data setting range: (d32,d33)

(d ) 0 to 110 (%)
Appendix
Appendix-295
295
d35 Over speed detection level
Setting d35 data to “999(factory default)” causes the inverter to issue an over speed alarm if either of the above
conditions are satisfied.
or
Motor speed = 200 Hz (120Hz at [ND] mode) × (d32 or d33) × 120(%)
d35 specifies the over speed detection level by percentage of the maximum frequency (F03/A01).
• Over speed level = Maximum frequency 1 (F03/A01) × d35
d51 Reserved for particular manufacturers

d55, d69,
d79,
d91 to d92,
d99
These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise specified, do not access these
function codes.
d61 to d63 Command (Pulse train input)

(Filter time constant, Pulse scaling factor 1 and Pulse scaling factor 2) (Refer to F01.)
Refer to the description of the function code F01 for details on the pulse rate input.
d67 PMSM starting mode (Auto search)
Refer to the description of the function code H09 for details on the PMSM starting mode.
APPENDICES
Appendix-296
J.9 U codes (Customizable logic operation)
The customizable logic function allows the user to form a logic or operation circuit for digital/analog input/output
signals, customize those signals arbitrarily, and configure a simple relay sequence inside the inverter.
In the cust
customizable
omizable logic, one step (component),
(component) depending on the type, is composed of:
(1) Digital 2 input
inputs,, digital
digital 1 output + logical operation (including timer)
(2) Analog 2 input
inputs,, analog
analog 1 output/digital 1 output + numerical operation
(3) Analog 1 input, digita
digitall 1 input, analog 1 output
output
ut + numerical operation, logical operation
and a total of 200 steps can be used to configure a sequence.
■ Modes
Item Modes
Terminal command Digital 2 input

inputs Analog 2 inputs
input Analog 1 input
Digital 1 input
Operation block Logical operation, Numerical operation, Selector, hold, etc.:
counter, etc.: 13 types comparator, limiter, 12 types
Timer: 5 types etc.: 25 types
Output signal Digital 1 output Analog 1 output/ Analog 1 output
Digital 1 output
Number of steps 200 steps
Customizable logic output signal 10 outputs
Customizable logic processing 2 ms (max. 10 steps), 5 ms (max. 50 steps),
time 10 ms (max. 100 steps), 20ms (max. 200 steps)
Can be selected with a function code.
Customizable logic cancellation Allows to stop all the customizable logic operations by assigning “CLC” to
command “CLC” a general-purpose
purpose input terminal and turning
turn it ON.
It is used when you want to deactivate the customizable logic temporarily.
Customizable logic timer Resets
esets the timer, counter and all the previous values used in customizable
cancellation command “CLTC” logic by assigning “CLTC” to a general-purpose
purpose input terminal and turning
it ON. It is used when a customizable logic is changed or if you want to
synchronize it with external sequen
sequence.
If you use the customizable logic cancellation command and customizable logic timer cancellation
command, the inverter can unintentionally start because the speed command is unmasked, depending
on the structure of the customizable logic. Be sure to turn OFF the operation command to turn it ON.
A physical injury may result.
A damage may result.
Appendix
Appendix-297
297
■ Block diagram
Analog input
(12
12, C1, V2 Analog output
(FM terminals)
terminals ) Internal input Internal output
signal signal
12 FOUT1
FOUT FM1
FSUB1
C1 FSUB2 FM2
Inverter FOUT2
FOUT
V2 SV1 IOUT
Application
PV1 Process VOUT
TLIMA MV1
Customizable logic
Step 1 Output
Input 1 (U02)
signal
Operation block *1 (U71
71)
(U01, U04, U05)
S
S001
CL01(U81)
Input 2 (U03) (U72
72)
CL02(U82)
Input 1 Operation
block
Input 2 S
S002
Terminal
command Step 3 Customizable *1 (U71)
Input 1
Operation *2 (U73
73) logic Disable 0
block Output signal 1
S
S003 S001
CL03(U83) S002 2 CL01
CL
Input 2 (U74
74)
Step 4
CL04(U84)
Input 1 Operation
block
S
S004
Input 2 S0200 2200
Step 5
CLO10
Operation S
S005 (U90)
Input 1
block
(U80) *2 (U73)
Input 2
Disable 0
S001 1
2
Step 200 S002
3
S003
Input 1 Operation 4
S004 CL03
CL
block
Input 2 S
S0200
2200
S0200
Digital input Digital output

(X
X terminal ) (Y terminal )
X1 SS1 RUN Y1
X2 SS2 FAR Y2
X3 SS4 FDT Y3
X4 IOL
SS8
X5
RT1
Inverter SW88
88
Sequence SW52
52-2
FWD RT2
processor
REV BX ID
STOP RDY
Hz2/Hz1 LIFE
PID-ALM
ALM Y5
FWD
TD1
Internal input signal Internal output signal
Mode selection function codes for enabling customizable logic can be modified during operation but the
customizable logic output may become temporarily unstable due to the setting modification. Therefore,
since unexpected operation can be performed, change the settings if possible when the inverter is
stopped.
APPENDICES
A physical injury may result.

A damage may result.
resu
Appendix
Appendix-298
298
U00 Customizable logic (Mode selection)

U01 to U70 Customizable logic: Step 1 to 14 (Mode setting)
U71 to U80 Customizable logic: Output signal 1 to 10 (Output selection)
U81 to U90 Customizable logic: Output signal 1 to 10 (Function selection)
U91 Customizable logic: Timer monitor (Step selection)
U92 to U97 Customizable logic: The coefficients of the approximate formula
U100 Customizable logic: Task process cycle setting
U101 to U106 Customizable logic: Operating point 1 to 3
U107 Customizable logic: Auto calculation of the coefficients of the approximate formula
U121 to U140 Customizable logic: User parameter 1 to 20
U171 to U175 Customizable logic: Storage area 1 to 5
U190 to U195 Customizable logic: Step 15 to 200 setting
■ Customizable Logic (Mode selection) (U00)

U00 specifies whether to enable the sequence configured with the customizable logic function or disable it to run
the inverter only via its input terminals or others.
U00 data Function
0 Disable
1 Enable (Customizable logic operation)
The ecl alarm occurs when changing U00 from 1 to 0 during operation.
■ Customizable Logic (Mode Setting) (U01 to U70, U190 to U195)

In the customizable logic, the steps are categorized in the following three types:
[Input: digital] Block selection (U01, U06, U11, etc.) = 1 to 1999
[Input: analog] Block selection (U01, U06, U11, etc.) = 2001 to 3999
[Input: digital, analog] Block selection (U01, U06, U11, etc.) = 4001 to 5999
Appendix-299
The function code settings for each step are as follows:

• Step 1 to 14
Note)
Step No. Block selection Input 1 Input 2 Function 1 Function 2 Output
Step 1 U01 U02 U03 U04 U05 “SO01”

= 1 to 1999 Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Time setting Not required Digital output
= 2001 to 3999 Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Value 1 Value 2 Analog/digital
output
= 4001 to 6999 Analog input 1 Digital input 2 Value 1 Value 2 Analog output
Step 2 U06 U07 U08 U09 U10 “SO02”
Step 3 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 “SO03”
Step 4 U16 U17 U18 U19 U20 “SO04”
Step 5 U21 U22 U23 U24 U25 “SO05”
Step 6 U26 U27 U28 U29 U30 “SO06”
Step 7 U31 U32 U33 U34 U35 “SO07”
Step 8 U36 U37 U38 U39 U40 “SO08”
Step 9 U41 U42 U43 U44 U45 “SO09”
Step 10 U46 U47 U48 U49 U50 “SO10”
Step 11 U51 U52 U53 U54 U55` “SO11”
Step 12 U56 U57 U58 U59 U60 “SO12”
Step 13 U61 U62 U63 U64 U65 “SO13”
Step 14 U66 U67 U68 U69 U70 “SO14”
Note) Output is not a function code. It indicates the output signal symbol.
• Step 15 to 200
Specify a step number in U190, and set the block selection, input 1, input 2, function 1, function 2 in U191 to U195
respectively.
Block
Step No. U190 Input 1 Input 2 Function 1 Function 2 Output
selection
Step 15 15 “SO15”
Step 16 16 “SO16”
･･････ U191 U192 U193 U194 U195 ･･･
Step 199 199 “SO199”

Step 200 200 “SO200”
APPENDICES
Appendix-300
[Input: digital] Block function code setting

■ Block selection (U01 etc.) (Digital)
Any of the following items can be selected as a logic function block (with general-purpose timer):
The data can be logically inverted by adding 1000.
Data Logic function block Description
0 No function assigned Output is always OFF.

10 Through output + Only a general-purpose timer. No logic function block exists.
General-purpose timer
(No timer)
11 (On-delay timer) Turning the input signal ON starts the on-delay timer. When the
period specified by the timer has elapsed, the output signal turns
ON. Turning the input signal OFF turns the output signal OFF.
12 (Off-delay timer) Turning the input signal ON turns the output signal ON.
Turning the input signal OFF starts the off-delay timer. When the
period specified by the timer has elapsed, the output signal turns
OFF.
13 (One-shot pulse output) Turning the input signal ON issues a one-shot pulse whose
length is specified by the timer.
14 (Retriggerable timer) Turning the input signal ON issues a one-shot pulse whose
length is specified by the timer.
If the input signal is turned ON again during the preceding
one-shot pulse length, however, the logic function block issues
another one-shot pulse.
15 (Pulse train output) If the input signal turns ON, the logic function block issues ON
and OFF pulses (whose lengths are specified by the timer)
alternately and repeatedly. This function is used to flash a
luminescent device.
20 to 25 Logical AND + AND function with 2 inputs and 1 output, plus general-purpose
General-purpose timer timer.
30 to 35 Logical OR + OR function with 2 inputs and 1 output, plus general-purpose
40 to 45 Logical XOR + XOR function with 2 inputs and 1 output, plus general-purpose
50 to 55 Set priority flip-flop + Set priority flip-flop with 2 inputs and 1 output, plus
General-purpose timer general-purpose timer.
60 to 65 Reset priority flip-flop + Reset priority flip-flop with 2 inputs and 1 output, plus
70, 72, 73 Rising edge detector + Rising edge detector with 1 input and 1 output, plus
This detects the rising edge of an input signal and outputs the ON
signal for 5 ms (*1).
80, 82, 83 Falling edge detector + Falling edge detector with 1 input and 1 output, plus
This detects the falling edge of an input signal and outputs the
ON signal for 5 ms (*1).
90, 92, 93 Rising & falling edges Rising and falling edge detector with 1 input and 1 output, plus
detector + general-purpose timer.
General-purpose timer This detects both the falling and rising edges of an input signal
and outputs the ON signal for 5 ms (*1).
*1: Equals the task cycle: 2 ms for a task cycle of 2 ms, 5 ms for 5 ms, 10 ms for 10 ms, and 20 ms for 20 ms.
Appendix-301
Data Logic function block Description
100 to 105 Hold + General-purpose Hold function of previous values of 2 inputs and 1 output, plus
timer general-purpose timer.
If the hold control signal is OFF, the logic function block outputs
input signals; if it is ON, the logic function block retains the
previous values of input signals.
110 Increment counter Increment counter with reset input.
By the rising edge of the input signal, the logic function block
increments the counter value by one. When the counter value
reaches the target one, the output signal turns ON.
Turning the reset signal ON resets the counter to zero.
120 Decrement counter Decrement counter with reset input.
By the rising edge of the input signal, the logic function block
decrements the counter value by one. When the counter value
reaches zero, the output signal turns ON.
Turning the reset signal ON resets the counter to the initial value.
130 Timer with reset input Timer output with reset input.
If the input signal turns ON, the output signal turns ON and the
timer starts. When the period specified by the timer has elapsed,
the output signal turns OFF, regardless of the input signal state.
Turning the reset signal ON resets the current timer value to zero
and turns the output OFF.
The data can be logically inverted by adding 1000.
The block diagrams for individual functions are given below.

(Data=1 ) Through output (Data=2 ) Logical AND (Data=3 ) Logical OR
General-purpose timer
Input 1 Output
Input 2
(Data=4 ) Logical XOR (Data=5 ) Set priority flip-flop

Previous
Input 1 Input 2 Output Remarks
output
Hold
OFF OFF previous
OFF value
OFF
ON ON
ON － OFF
Set
ON －－ ON
priority
(Data=6 ) Reset priority flip-flop
Previous
Input 1 Input 2 Output Remarks
output
Hold
OFF OFF previous
OFF OFF value
ON ON
Reset
－ ON － OFF
priority
ON OFF － ON
APPENDICES
Appendix-302
(Data=7 ) Rising edge detector (Data=8 ) Falling edge detector (Data=9 ) Rising & falling edges detector
(Data=10 ) Hold (Data=110) Increment counter (Data=120) Decrement counter
(Data=130) Timer with reset input
ON Timer
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Input 1 Output Input 1
OFF ON OFF
Input 2
Reset
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Output
Input 2
Timer
Time setting
Appendix-303
■ Operation of general-purpose timer(Digital)

The operation schemes for individual timers are shown below.
(End 1) On-delay timer (End 2) Off-delay timer
(End 3) One-shot pulse output (End 4) Retriggerable timer
(End 5) Pulse train output
APPENDICES
Appendix-304
■ Inputs 1 and 2 (U02, U03, etc.)(Digital)

The following digital signals are available as input signals. Value in ( ) is in negative logic.
Data Selectable Signals
0000 (1000) General-purpose output signals Same as the ones specified by E20, e.g., “RUN” (Inverter
to running), FAR (Frequency (speed) arrival signal), “FDT” (Frequency (speed) detected),
“LU” (Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped)), “B/D” (Torque polarity detected)
0099 (1099)
Note: 27 (Universal DO) is not available.
0160 (1160)
Note: Customizable logic output signals from 111 (1111) to 120 (1120) cannot be selected.
to
0215 (1215)
2001 (3001) Output of step 1 “SO01”
to to
2200 (3200) Output of step 200 “SO200”
4001 (5001) Terminal X1 input signal “X1”
4010 (5010) Terminal FWD input signal FWD
4011 (5011) Terminal REV input signal REV
6000 (7000) Final RUN command “FL_RUN” (ON when a run command is given)
6001 (7001) Final FWD run command “FL_FWD” (ON when a run forward command is given)
6002 (7002) Final REV run command “FL_REV” (ON when a run reverse command is given)
6003 (7003) During acceleration “DACC” (ON during acceleration)
6004 (7004) During deceleration “DDEC” (ON during deceleration)
6005 (7005) Under anti-regenerative control “REGA” (ON under anti-regenerative control)
6007 (7007) Alarm factor presence “ALM_ACT” (ON when there is no alarm factor)
Appendix-305
■ Function 1 (U04 etc.)(Digital)

U05 and other related function codes specify the general-purpose timer period or the increment/decrement counter
value.
Data Function Description
Timer The period is specified in seconds.

0.00 to +600 The specified value is multiplied by 100 times.
Counter value
(If 0.01 is specified, it is converted to 1.)
-9990 to -0.01 — The timer or counter value works as 0.00. (No timer)
+601 to +9990 Timer The period is specified in seconds.
[Input: analog] Block function code setting

■ Block selection, function 1, function 2 (U01, U04, U05, etc.)(Analog)
The following items are available as operation function block.
Note that if the upper and lower limits have the same value, there are no upper and lower limits.
Block
Function 1 Function 2
selection Function block Description
(U04 etc.) (U05 etc.)
(U01 etc.)
0 No function This function always outputs 0% (or logical “0: False”; Not Not
assigned OFF). required required
2001 Adder Addition function with two inputs (input 1 and input 2). Upper limit Lower limit
This function has output limiters (upper/lower) specified
with two function codes.
The 1st function code provides upper limit value and the
2nd one provides lower limit value.
2002 Subtracter Subtraction function with two inputs (input 1 and input 2). Upper limit Lower limit
2003 Multiplier Multiplication function with two inputs (input 1 and input 2). Upper limit Lower limit
2004 Divider Division function with two inputs (input 1 and input 2). Upper limit Lower limit
Input 1 is dividend and input 2 is divisor. This function has
output limiters (upper/lower) specified with two function
codes.
2005 Limiter Upper and lower limit functions of single input (input 1). Upper limit Lower limit
2006 Absolute value Absolute value function of single input (input 1). Upper limit Lower limit
of input Negative input numbers become positive.
APPENDICES
Appendix-306
Block
(U04 etc.) (U05 etc.)
(U01 etc.)
2007 Inverting adder Inverting addition function with single input (input 1). Subtraction Addition
This function subtracts the input 1 to the value specified value value
with the 1st function code, inverts the result. And (former) (latter)
furthermore, the function adds the result to the value
specified with the 2nd function code and outputs the
result.
2008 Variable limiter Variable limit function of single input (input 1). Step Not
Input 1 provides upper limit value and input 2 provides number required
lower limit value.
2009 Linear function Linear function of single input (input 1). Factor KA Factor KB
This function receives single input (input 1), calculates -9990.0 to -9990.0 to
pre-defined first-order polynomial, and outputs the result. +9990.0 +9990.0
The 1st and 2nd function codes provide the coefficients of
the polynomial.
The polynomial is represented by the following formula.
y = KA × χ + KB
The output is limited within the range between -9990 and
9990 by the internal limiter.
2051 Comparator 1 Comparison function with hysteresis. Threshold Hysteresis
This function compares the differential value between value width
input 1 and input 2 with the threshold value specified with
the 1st function code. The 2nd function code provides
hysteresis width.
If the differential value is (threshold value + hysteresis
width) or bigger, this function outputs logical “1: True”. On
the other hand, if the differential value is (threshold value -
hysteresis width) or smaller, this function outputs logical
“0: False”.
This function compares the differential value between value width
input 1 and input 2 with the threshold value specified with
the 1st function code. The 2nd function code provides
hysteresis width.
If the differential value is bigger than (threshold value +
hysteresis width), this function outputs logical “1: True”.
On the other hand If the value is smaller than (threshold
value - hysteresis width), the function outputs logical “0:
False”.
This function compares the absolute differential value value width
between input 1 and input 2 with the threshold value
specified with the 1st function code. The 2nd function
code provides hysteresis width.
This function works like as comparator 1
This function compares the absolute differential value value width
between input 1 and input 2 with the threshold value
specified with the 1st function code. The 2nd function
code provides hysteresis width.
This function works like as comparator 2
Appendix-307
Block
(U04 etc.) (U05 etc.)
(U01 etc.)

Input 1 is the input value of this function and input 2 is not value width
used.
The 1st function code provides threshold value and the
2nd one provides hysteresis width.
If input 1 is (threshold value) or bigger, this function
outputs logical “1: True”. On the other hand If input 1 is
smaller than (threshold value - hysteresis width), this
function outputs logical “0: False”.
Input 1 is the input value of this function and input 2 is not value width
used.
The 1st function code provides threshold value and the
2nd one provides hysteresis width.
If input 1 is (threshold value) or smaller, this function
outputs logical “1: True”. On the other hand If input 1 is
bigger than (threshold value + hysteresis width), this
function outputs logical “0: False”.
2071 Window Comparison function with limits. Upper Lower
comparator 1 Whether the value of the input is within a preselected threshold threshold
range specified with two function codes determines the
status of the output.
Input 1 is the input value of this function and input 2 is not
used.
The 1st function code provides upper threshold value and
the 2nd one provides lower threshold value.
If input 1 is within the range (defined with two function
codes), this function outputs logical “1: True”. On the other
hand If input 1 is outside of this range, this function
outputs logical “0: False”.
2072 Window Comparison function with limit. Upper Lower
comparator 2 This function has the inverting logic of “Window threshold threshold
comparator 1”.
2101 High selector High selector function. Upper limit Lower limit
This function receives two inputs (input 1 and input 2),
selects the higher one automatically, and outputs it.
The 1st function code provides the upper limit value and
the 2nd one provides the lower one.
2102 Low selector Low selector function. Upper limit Lower limit
This function receives two inputs (input 1 and input 2),
selects the lower one automatically, and outputs it.
2103 Average of Average function. Upper limit Lower limit
inputs This function receives two inputs (input 1 and input 2),
averages them, and outputs the result.
APPENDICES

Appendix-308
Block
(U04 etc.) (U05 etc.)
(U01 etc.)
2151 Loading Loading function from the function code S13 with scale Maximum Minimum
function from conversion function. scale scale
S13 This function loads the setting value of the function code
S13, maps the pre-selected range which is specified with
two function codes, and outputs the result.
The 1st function code provides the maximum scale value
of the range and the 2nd one provides the minimum scale
value of the range.
The function code S13 is the PID process command value
via communications in (%).
2201 Clip and map This function receives single input (input 1), clips a Upper limit Lower limit
function pre-selected range which is specified with two function
codes from it, maps 0.00 to 100.00%, and outputs the
result.
The 1st function code provides the upper limit value of the
range and the 2nd one provides the lower limit value of the
range.
This function can be connected to analog outputs (8000 to
8021) only, and only two of these functions can be used.
2202 Scale converter Scale conversion function with single input (input 1). Maximum Minimum
This function receives single input (input 1), maps an scale scale
pre-selected range which is specified with two function
codes, and outputs the result.
The 1st function code provides the maximum scale value
of the range and the 2nd one provides the minimum scale
value of the range.
This function can be connected to analog outputs (8000 to
8021) only, and only two of these functions can be used.
3001 Quadratic Quadratic function with limit. Upper limit Lower limit
function This function receives single input (input 1), calculates
pre-defined second-order polynomial represented by the
following formula, limits the value, and outputs the result.]
K A × (Input 1) + K B × input 1 + K C
2
the 2nd one provides the lower limit value.
The coefficients of the polynomial are given by the
function codes U92 to U97.
Either (3001) or (3002) is available to use, and only one of
these functions can be used.
3002 Square root Square root function with limit. Upper limit Lower limit
function This function receives single input (input 1), calculates
pre-defined square root function represented by the
following formula, limits the value, and outputs the result.
Input1 + K A
× KC
KB
the 2nd one provides the lower limit value.
The coefficients of the polynomial are given by the
function codes U92 to U97.
Either (3001) or (3002) is available to use, and only one of
these functions can be used.
Appendix-309
The block diagrams for each operation function block are given below. The setting value for functions 1 and 2 is
indicated with U04 and U05.
(2001) Adder (2002) Subtracter (2003) Multiplier
(2004) Divider (2005) Limiter (2006) Absolute value of inputs
(2007) Inverting adder (2008) Variable limiter (2009) Linear function
Input 1
Output
Input 2
(2051) Comparator 1 (2052) Comparator 2
ON is prioritized when both conditions are satisfied.
(2053) Comparator 3 (2054) Comparator 4 (2055) Comparator 5
|With Input 1-Input 2| > U04+|U05|

Input 1
Output
Input 2
|With Input 1-Input 2| < U04-|U05|
APPENDICES
ON is prioritized when both conditions are satisfied.
Appendix-310
(2056) Comparator 6 (2071) Window comparator 1 (2072) Window comparator 2
(2101) High selector (2102) Low selector (2103) Average of inputs
Input 1 output Input 1 output (Input 1 + Input 2) / 2 output

Input 1 when Input 1 ≥ Input 2 when Input 1 ≤ Input 2 Input 1
Input 1
U04 U04 U04

Output Low Output Output
selector
U05 U05 U05
Input 2 Input 2 Input 2
Input 2 output Input 2 output
when Input 1 < Input 2 when Input 1 > Input 2
(2151) Loading function from S13 (2201) Clip and map function (2202) Scale converter
Input 1
U04
Output
U05
Input 2 0 100.00
* Use to connect to analog output * For input 1 signal selection, only

terminals. settings 8000 to 8085 can be
* The maximum number of steps used.
used is 2. * The maximum number of steps
used is 2.
(3001) Quadratic function (3002) Square root function
K A × Input 12 + K B × Input 1 + K C Input1 + K A

× KC
KB
* The maximum number of steps used is 1 for either (3001) or (3002).
Appendix-311
■ Inputs 1 and 2 (U02, U03, etc.)(Analog)

The following signals are available as analog input signals.
Data Selectable Signals
8000 General-purpose analog output signal (same as signals selected in F31 and F35: output
frequency 1, output current, output torque, Input power, DC link bus voltage, etc.)
to
Example: For output frequency 1, maximum frequency (100%) is input as 100.00.
8065
Example: For output current, 200% of the inverter rated current is input 100.00.
Note: 10 (Universal AO) is not available.
2001 to 2200 Output of step 1 to 200 “SO01” to “SO200”
9001 Analog 12 terminal input signal [12]
9002 Analog C1 terminal input signal [C1] (C1 function)
9003 Analog C1 terminal input signal [C1] (V2 function)
9004 Analog 32 terminal input signal [32] (on option card, OPC-AIO)
9005 Analog C2 terminal input signal [C2] (on option card, OPC-AIO)
9006 temperature detect channel 1 [PT1]
9007 temperature detect channel 2 [PT2]
■ Function 1, Function 2 (U04, U05, etc.)(Analog)

Sets the upper limit and lower limit of operation function block.
Data Function Description
Reference value
Hysteresis width
Upper limit
Lower limit
-9990 to 0.00 to Setting values for the operation of the function block (selected with
Upper threshold
+9990 the corresponding function code such as U01).
Lower threshold
Setting value
Maximum scale
Minimum scale
■ The coefficients of the conversion functions (U92 to U97) (Analog)

Sets the factor of conversions function (3001, 3002) of operation function block.
Function code Name Data setting range Factory default
U92 Mantissa of KA Mantissa: -9.999 to 9.999 0.000

U93 Exponent part of KA Exponent part: -5 to 5 0
U94 Mantissa of KB 0.000
U95 Exponent part of KB 0
U96 Mantissa of Kc 0.000
U97 Exponent part of Kc 0
U92 to U97 can automatically be calculated based on measured data. For details, refer to the descriptions of U101
to U107 (page 322).
APPENDICES
Appendix-312
[Input: digital, analog] Block function code setting

■ Lock selection, function 1, function 2 (U01, U04, U05, etc.) (digital,analog)
The following items are available as function block.
Note that if the upper and lower limits are identical, there are no upper and lower limits.
Block
(U04 etc.) (U05 etc.)
(U01 etc.)
4001 Hold Function to hold analog input 1 based on digital input Upper limit Lower limit
1.
4002 Inverting adder Function to reverse analog input 1 based on digital Subtracted Addition value
with enable input 1. value (latter)
(former)
4003 Selector 1 Function to select analog input 1 and setting value Setting Not
based on digital input 1. value required
4004 Selector 2 Function to select setting value 1/2 based on digital Setting Setting
input 1. value 1 value 2
4005 LPF Value of an analog input 1 is filtered through LPF Time Fixed as 0
(Low pass filter) (time constant U04) when the digital input 1 is “1”. constant
with enable When the digital input 1 is “0”, the analog input 1 is 0: No filter
directly output. 0.01 to 5.00s
(LPF maintains the previous output value. Therefore,
when the digital 1 input changes from 0 to 1, the
output will be the value with the previous output value
added as the initial value of LPF.)
(No upper/lower limiter)
4006 Rate limiter with Value of an analog input is limited with change rate Upward Downward
enable specified in functions 1 and 2 when the digital input 1 change rate change rate
is “1”. When the digital input 1 is “0”, the analog 1 Time taken Time taken to
input is directly output. When setting the initial value, to change change
carry out an operation with the initial value for input 1 100% 100%
and 0 applied to input 2. Then, reflect the result as the
initial value (= previous output value) with 1 applied to 0: No limit 0: The same
input 2. 0.01 to 600 s change rate
as function 1
During the initialization or when the CLC terminal is
ON, the previous output value is cleared to 0. 0.01 to 600 s
5000 Selector 3 Function to select analog input 2 based on “SO01” to Step No. Not required
“SO200”.
5100 Selector 4 Function to select analog input 1 and “SO01” to Step No. Not required
“SO200” based on digital input 1.
6001 Reading Function to read the content of arbitrary function 0 to 255 0 to 99
function codes code. Use the 1st function code (such as U04) to
specify a function code group, and the 2nd one (such
as U05) to specify the last two digits of the function
code number. For the function code settings, refer to
“ Configuration of function codes” in page 319.
Both input 1 and input 2 are not used. Data formats
that can be read correctly are as follows (the values
are restricted between -9990 and 9990 and, for [29],
20000 is indicated as 100%):
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], [8], [9], [10], [12], [22], [24],
[29], [35], [37], [45], [61], [67], [68], [74], [92] and [93]
Data formats other than the above cannot be read
correctly. Do not use any other format.
Appendix-313
Block
(U04 etc.) (U05 etc.)
(U01 etc.)
6002 Writing function This function writes the value of input 1 to a function 39 71 to 75
codes code (U171 to U175) on the volatile memory (RAM)
when the input 2 becomes “1: True”. When the input 2
becomes “0: False”, this function stops to write to the
function code (U171 to U175) and maintains the
previous value. The value of input 1 is stored to the
non-volatile memory (EEPROM) when the inverter
detects undervoltage.
Because the access arbitration from some steps at a
time is not possible, only one step is allowed to
access to the same function code in the customizable
logic. If the access to the target function code from
different steps at a time is executed, the alarm is
displayed.
6003 Temporary This function reflects the value of the specified 0 to 255 0 to 99
change of function code on the volatile memory (RAM) when the
function code input 2 becomes “0: False”. On the other hand when
the input 2 does not become “0: False”, this function
reflects the value of input 1 in the place of the function
code.
Refer to “ Specific function codes” for the applicable
function code on page 318.
The value on the volatile memory (RAM) is cleared
when the inverter is powered off.
And the value is read from the non-volatile memory
and restored when the inverter is powered on.
Set the function code group (function type code) to
the1st function code (U04, etc.).
Set the lower 2 digits of the function code No. to the
2nd function (U05, etc.).
If the specified function code (U04, U05, etc.) is not
applicable one, this function outputs zero value.
Because the access arbitration from some steps at a
time is not possible, only one step is allowed with to
access to the same function code in the customizable
logic.
When the function code is temporarily changed using
6003 during the customize logic operation and if the
PC loader is read or copy to the touch panel is
performed, the temporary changed data, not the
non-volatile memory data, may be copied.
Stop the customize logic before these operations. APPENDICES
Appendix-314
(4001) Hold (4002) Inverting adder with enable (4003) Selector 1
(4004) Selector 2 (4005) Low pass filter with enable (4006) Rate limiter with enable
(5000) Selector 3 (5100) Selector 4
(6001) Reading function codes (6002) Writing function codes
(6003) Temporary change of function code
Appendix-315
■ Output signal (Digital,analog)

In the customizable logic, outputs from steps 1 to 10 are issued to SO01 to SO200, respectively.
SO01 to SO200 differ in configuration depending upon the connection destination, as listed below. To relay those
outputs to any function other than the customizable logic, route them via customizable logic outputs CL01 to
CLO010.
Connection destination of each

Configuration Function code
step output
ut
Input of customizable logic Select one of the internal step output signals “SO01” to Such as U02
“SO200” in customizable logic input setting. and U03
Input of inverter sequence Select one of the internal step output signals “SO01” to
processor “SO200” to be connected to customizable logic output U71 to U80
(such as multistep speed “SS1” signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”).
or operation command “FWD”) Select an inverter’s sequence processor input function to
which one of the customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 U81 to U90
(“CL01” to “CLO10”) is to be connected. (Same as in E01)
Analog input Select one of the internal step output signals “SO01” to
(such as auxiliary frequency “SO200” to be connected to customizable logic output U71 to U80
commands or PID process signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”).
commands) Select an analog input function to which one of the
customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to U81 to U90
“CLO10”) is to be connected. (Same as in E61)
General
General-purpose
purpose digital output Select one of the internal step output signals “SO01” to
([Y] terminals) “SO200” to be connected to customizable logic output U71 to U80
signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”).
To specify a general
general-purpose
purpose digital output function (on [Y]
terminals) to which one of the customizable logic output
E20,, E21,
signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”) is to be connected,
E27
select one of “CLO1” to “CLO
“CLO10”” by specifying the
general-purpose
purpose digital output function on any Y terminal.
General
General-purpose
purpose analog output Select one of the internal step output signals “SO01” to
([FM1] terminals) “SO200” to be connected to customizable logic output U71 to U80
signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”).
To specify a general
general-purpose
purpose analog output function (on
[FM1] terminals) to which one of the customizable logic
output signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”) is to be
F31, F35
connected, select one of “CLO1” to “CLO10” by specifying
the general-purpose
purpose digital output function on any [FM1]
terminal.
General-purpose
purpose digital outputs (on [Y] terminals) are updated every 5 ms. To securely output a
customizable logic signal via [Y] terminals, include onon- or off-delay
delay timers in the customizable logic.
Otherwise, short ON or OFF signals may not be reflecte
reflected
d on those terminals.
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-316
316
Function Factory
Name Data setting range
codes default
U71 Customizable logic output signal 1 0: Disable 0

(Output selection) 1: Output of step 1, “SO01”
U72 Customizable logic output signal 2 2: Output of step 2, “SO02” 0
(Output selection) •••
U73 Customizable logic output signal 3 199: Output of step 199, “SO199” 0
(Output selection) 200: Output of step 200, “SO200”
U74 Customizable logic output signal 4 0
(Output selection)
(Output selection)

(Output selection)

(Output selection)
(Output selection)
(Output selection)
(Output selection)
U81 Customizable logic output signal 1 If a step output is digital 100

(Function selection) The same value as E98 can be specified.
U82 Customizable logic output signal 2 0(1000): Select multistep frequency (0 to 1 steps) “SS1” 100
(Function selection) 1(1001): Select multistep frequency (0 to 3 steps) “SS2”
2(1002): Select multistep frequency (0 to 7 steps) “SS4”
(Function selection) 3(1003): Select multistep frequency (0 to 15 steps)
U84 Customizable logic output signal 4 4(1004): Select ACC/DEC time (2 steps) “RT1” 100
(Function selection)
5(1005): Select ACC/DEC time (4 steps) “RT2”
U85 Customizable logic output signal 5 6(1006): Enable 3-wire operation “HLD” 100
(Function selection) 7(1007): Coast to a stop command “BX”
U86 Customizable logic output signal 6 8(1008): Reset alarm “RST” 100
(Function selection) 9(1009): Enable external alarm trip “THR”
(9=Active OFF/1009=Active ON)
(Function selection) and so on.
If a step output is analog
8001: Auxiliary frequency command 1
8002: Auxiliary frequency command 2
U89 Customizable logic output signal 9 8003: PID process command 100
U90 Customizable logic output signal 10 8006: Ratio setting 100
(Function selection) 8007: Analog torque limit value A
8008: Analog torque limit value B
8020: Analog monitor
Appendix-317
■ Specific function codes

The following function codes can take values on memory by using the customizable logic “Function code switch
(6003)”. Overwritten values are cleared with power off.
Code Name Code Name
F07 Acceleration time 1 H52 Non-linear V/f 2 (Frequency)

F08 Deceleration time 1 H53 Non-linear V/f 2 (Voltage)
F15 Frequency limiter (Upper) H57 1st S-curve acceleration range (At starting)
F16 Frequency limiter (Lower) H58 2nd S-curve acceleration range (At arrival)
F21 DC braking 1 (Braking level) H59 1st S-curve deceleration range (At starting)
F22 DC braking 1 (Braking time) H60 2nd S-curve deceleration range (At arrival)
F23 Starting frequency 1 H91 PID feedback wire break detection
F24 Starting frequency 1 (Holding time) J03 PID control P (Gain)
F25 Stop frequency J04 PID control I (Integral time)
F40 Torque limiter 1 (Driving) J05 PID control D (Differential time)
F41 Torque limiter 1 (Braking) J06 PID control (Feedback filter)
F44 Current limiter (Level) J10 PID control (Anti-reset windup)
E10 Acceleration time 2 J12 PID control (Upper limit of warning (AH))
E11 Deceleration time 2 J13 PID control (Lower limit of warning (AL))
E12 Acceleration time 3 J15 PID control (Sleep frequency)
E13 Deceleration time 3 J16 PID control (Sleep timer)
E14 Acceleration time 4 J17 PID control (Wakeup frequency)
E15 Deceleration time 4 J18 PID control (Upper limit of PID process output)
C05 Multistep frequency 1 J19 PID control (Lower limit of PID process output)
C06 Multistep frequency 2 d01 Speed control 1 (Speed command filter)
C07 Multistep frequency 3 d02 Speed control 1 (Speed detection filter)
C08 Multistep frequency 4 d03 Speed control 1 (P (Gain))
C09 Multistep frequency 5 d04 Speed control 1(I (Integral time))
H50 Non-linear V/f 1 (Frequency) d05 Speed control 1 ( FF (Gain))
H51 Non-linear V/f 1 (Voltage) APPENDICES
Appendix-318
■ Function codes for the customizable logic
Function code Name Range Minimum unit Remarks

number
U121 to U140 User parameter 1 to 20 -9990.00 to 9990.00 0.01 to 10

Effective number are 3 digits.
U171 to U175 Storage area 1 to 5 -9990.00 to 9990.00 0.01 to 10 Memorize the data
Effective number are 3 digits. when powered off.
■ Configuration of function codes

Set a function code group (code from the following table) to function 1 (such as U04) and set the last two digits of
the function code number to function 2 (such as U05) to specify individual function codes.
Group Code Name Group Code Name

F 0 00H Basic function U1 39 27H For customizable logic
E 1 01H Terminal function y 14 0EH Link function
C 2 02H Control function K 28 1CH Touch panel function
P 3 03H Motor1 M 8 08H Monitor data
H 4 04H High performance function o 6 06H Option function
H1 31 1FH High performance function 1 d 19 13H Applied function 2
A 5 05H Speed control 2 U 11 0BH Customizable logic
J 13 0DH Applied function 1 W 15 0FH Monitor 2
J1 48 30H Applied function 1 X 16 10H Alarm 1
Z 17 11H Alarm 2
■ Task process cycle setting (U100)
U100 data Data
0 Automatically adjusts the task cycle from 2 ms to 10 ms depending on the number of used
steps. This is the factory default. It is recommended to use this value.
2 2 ms: Up to 10 steps. If it exceeds 10 steps, the customizable logic does not work.
20 20 ms Up to 200 steps.
Note that if it exceeds the steps defined in 2, 5 or 10, the customizable logic does not work.
Appendix-319
■ Operating precautions
The customizable logics are executed within 2 ms to 20 ms (according to U100) and processed in the following
procedure:
(1) First, latch the external input signals for all the customizable logics from step 1 to 200 to maintain
synchronism.
(2) Perform logical operations sequentially from step 1 to 200.
(3) If an output of a step is an input to the next step, outputs of step with high priority can be used in the same
process.
(4) The customizable logic simultaneously updates 10 output signals.
2 to
o 20 ms
s cycle
Input signal Logical operation Simultaneous Input signal

latch Step 1 → 2 → 3 · · · 200 update of latch
output signals
Note that if you do not consider the process order of customizable logic when configuring a function block, the
expected output may not be obtained, the operation can be slower or a hazard signal can occur, because the
output signal o
off a step is not available until the next cycle
cycle.
Changing a functional code related to the customizable logic (U code etc.) or turning ON the customizable logic
cancel signal “CLC” causes change in operation sequence depending on the setting, which may ssuddenlyuddenly start
an operation or start an unexpected action. Fully ensure it is safe before performing the operation.
An accident or physical injury may occur.
■ Customizable logic timer monitor (Step selection) (U91, X89 to X93)

The monitor function codes can be used to monitor the I/O status or timer’s operation state in the customized
customize
logics.
Table J.18
.18 Selection of monitor timer
Function code Function Remarks

U91 0: Monitor not active (the monitor data is 0) The setting value is cleared to 0 when
1 to 200: set the step No. to monitor powered off.
Table JJ.19 Monitor method
Monitor method Function code Data
Communication X89 customizable logic Digital I/O data for the step defined in U91
(digital I/O) (only for monitoring)
X90 customizable logic Data of the timer/counter value for the step defined in U91
(timer monitor) (only for monitoring)
X91 customizable logic Analog input 1 data for the step defined in U91
(analog input 1) (only for monitoring)
X92 customizable logic Analog input 2 data for the step defined in U91
(analog input 2) (only for monitoring)
X93 customizable logic Analog output data for the step defined in U91
(analog output) (only for monitoring)
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-320
320
■ Cancel customizable logic “CLC” (function codes E01 to E05 Data = 80)
Customizable logic operations can temporarily be disabled so that the inverter can be operated without the
customizable logic’s logical circuit and timer operation, for example during maintenance.
“CLC” Function
OFF Customizable logic enabled (according to U00 setting)

ON Customizable logic disabled
If you turn ON the customizable logic cancellation signal “CLC”, a sequence by the customizable logic is
cleared, which can suddenly start operation depending on the settings.
setting . Ensure the safety and check the
operation before switching the signal.
s
■ Clear all customizable logic timers “CLTC” (function codes E01 to E05 Data = 81)
If the CLTC terminal function is assigned to a general
general-purpose
purpose input terminal and this input is turn ON, all the
general-purpose
purpose timers and counters in the customizable logic are reset. It is used to reset and restart the system,
when, for example, the timing of external sequence cannot be consistent with internal customizable logic due to a
momentary
tary power failure.
“CLTC” Function
OFF Normal operation

Resets all the general-purpose
general purpose timers and counters in the customizable logic.
ON
(To reactivate it, turn it OFF again.)
Appendix
Appendix-321
321
J.10 U1 codes (Customizable logic operation)
Customizable logic
U101 to U106
(Operating point 1 (X1, Y1), Operating point 2 (X2, Y2), Operating point 3 (X3, Y3))
2
By using function block 3001, quadratic function KA·x + KB·x + KC is calculated relative to the input signal x as
shown in the following diagram, allowing the output to be obtained. Here, KA, KB, and KC are coefficients, and they
can be set with function codes.
Coefficients KA, KB, KC

2
Coefficients KA, KB, KC for quadratic function KA·x + KB·x + KC can be set within the following ranges.
Setting range
5 5
Coefficient KA -9.999×10 to 9.999×10
5 5
Coefficient KB -9.999×10 to 9.999×10
5 5
Coefficient KC -9.999×10 to 9.999×10
These coefficients are set using function codes U92 to U97.
Function code Name Setting range

U92 Coefficient KA mantissa portion -9.999 to 9.999
U93 Coefficient KA exponent portion -5 to 5
U94 Coefficient KB mantissa portion -9.999 to 9.999
U95 Coefficient KB exponent portion -5 to 5
U96 Coefficient KC mantissa portion -9.999 to 9.999
U97 Coefficient KC exponent portion -5 to 5
Instead of setting the coefficients individually, they can be calculated and set automatically in function codes U92 to
U97, by changing U107 from 0 to 1 after setting the arbitrary three sets of operating point data P1 (X1, Y1), P2 (X2,
Y2), and P3 (X3, Y3) from the above diagram in function codes U101 to U106.
Function code Name Setting range

U101 Operating point data P1 (X1) -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00
U102 Operating point data P1 (Y1) -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00
APPENDICES

U107 Automatic calculation 0: No calculation, 1: Calculation
Appendix-322
U107 Auto calculation of the coefficients of the quadratic function

Set “1” to U107 in order to fit the approximate coefficients of the quadratic function (3001)
( A Input 12 + K B × Input 1 + K C ) to a characteristic represented by three operating points which are given by
K ×
function codes U101 to U106. Coefficients (KA, KB, KC) of the polynomial are automatically calculated and the
results are stored inside the function codes U92 to U97, and U107 reverts to “0”.
U107 data Function
0 Invalid
1 Execute calculation
(to get the coefficients (KA, KB, KC) of the following polynomial
K A × Input12 + KB × Input1+ K C
)
■ Setting examples of customizable logic

Setting example 1: Use one switch to change multiple signals
If you use one switch to change the frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1 and torque limit 2/torque limit 1
simultaneously, replace an external circuit that is conventionally needed with a customizable logic reducing the
general-purpose input terminals used to a single terminal.
Inverter
Hz2/Hz1
Customizable logic
Step 1
To configure this customizable logic, set the function codes as follows. (Timer selection) and (Timer setting) do not
need to be modified if no change is made.
Setting
Function code Settings Remarks
value
E01 Terminal [X1] function 11 Select frequency command Can be used in

2/1 “Hz2/Hz1” parallel as
general-purpose
input terminals
U00 Customizable Logic (Mode selection) 1 Enable
U01 Customizable logic: (Block 10 Through output + Mode selection

Step 1 selection) General-purpose timer
U02 (Input 1) 4001 Terminal [X1] input signal X1
U71 Customizable logic: (Output 1 Output of step 1, “SO01”

Output signal 1 selection)
U81 (Function 14 Select torque limiter level 2/1
selection) “TL2/TL1”
Appendix-323
Setting example 2: Bring multiple output signals in a single signal

If the general-purpose RUN signal is kept ON at restart after momentary power failure, replace an external circuit
that is conventionally needed with a customizable logic sequence to reduce the general-purpose output terminals
and external relays.
Inverter
Customizable logic
Step 1
Setting
value
E20 Terminal [Y1] function 111 Customizable logic output

signal 1 “CL01”
U01 Customizable logic: (Block 30 Logical OR + Mode selection

Step 1 selection) General-purpose timer
U02 (Input 1) 0 During operation “RUN”
U03 (Input 2) 6 Auto-restarting after
momentary power failure “IPF”
U71 Customizable logic (Output 1 Output of step 1, “SO01”

output signal 1 selection)
U81 (Function 100 No function assigned “NONE”
selection)
APPENDICES
Appendix-324
Setting example 3: One

One-shot
shot operation
The required operation is as follows: SW-FWD
SW FWD or SW SW-REV
REV switch is short-circuited
short circuited to start the operation and the
SW-STOP
STOP switch is short
short-circuited
circuited to stop the operation (equivalent to / keys/ key on keypad), if the
above ope
operation
ration is required, replace an external circuit that is conventionally needed with customizable the
customized logic.
Setting
value
F02 Operation method 1 External signal
E01 Terminal [X1] function
unction 100 No function assigned “NONE
NONE”
E98 Terminal [FWD]] function
f 100 No function assigned “NONE
NONE”
E99 Terminal [REV]] function
f 100 No function assigned “NONE
NONE”
U01 Customizable logic: (Block selection) 3
30 Logical OR + General-purpose
General purpose timer Mode selection
Step 1
U02 (Input 1) 4011 Terminal REV input signal “SW-REV”
U03 (Input 2) 4001 Terminal X1 input signal “SW-STOP”
60 Reset priority flip-flop
flip flop + General-purpose
Step 2
U07 (Input 1) 4010 Terminal FWD input signal “SW-FWD”
U08 (Input 2) 2001 Output of step 1 “SO01”
30 Logical OR + General-purpose
Step 3
U12 (Input 1) 4010 Terminal FWD input signal “SW-FWD”
U13 (Input 2) 4001 Terminal X1 input signal “SW-STOP”
60 Reset priority flip-flop
flip flop + General-purpose
Step 4
U17 (Input 1) 4011 Terminal REV input signal “SW-REV”
U18 (Input 2) 2003 Output of step 3 “SO03”
U71 Customizable logic (Output selection) 2 Output of step 2 “SO02” “FWD
FWD”
output signal 1 command
U72 Customizable logic 4 Output of step 4 “SO04” “REV
REV”
output signal 2 command
U81 Customizable logic (Function 98 Run forward/stop command “FWD”
output signal 1 selection)
U82 Customizable logic 99 Run reverse/stop command “REV”
output signal 2
Appendix
Appendix-325
325
J.11 y codes (Link functions)

y01 to y20 RS-485 setting 1, RS-485 setting 2
In the RS-485 communication, two systems can be connected.
Equipment that can be

System Connection method Function code
connected
Standard/ optional keypad

First Via RS-485 communication link (port 1) Inverter supporting loader
y01 to y10
system (RJ-45 connector to connect keypad) Host equipments (upper
equipments)
Host equipments (upper
equipments)
Second Via RS-485 communications link (port 2)
y11 to y20 Other inverters at mutual
systems Via digital input terminal blocks (DX+, DX-) operation
Inverter supporting loader
Overview of the equipments is given below.

(1) Standard /optional keypad
Standard / optional keypad can be connected to operate and monitor the inverter.
Regardless of the y code settings, standard / optional keypad is available.
(2) Inverter supporting loader (FRENIC loader)
Inverter supporting (monitor, function code editing, test operation) can be performed by connecting a
computer with the FRENIC loader installed.
For the y codes setting, refer to the function codes y01 to y10.
(3) Host equipments (upper equipments)

Host equipments (upper equipments) such as PLC and controller can be connected to control and monitor
the inverter. Modbus RTU* protocol, BACnet protocol or Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol can be
selected for communication.
(4) Other inverters in mutual operation
*: Modbus RTU is a protocol defined by Modicon.
For details, refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s Manual.
■ Station addresses (y01, y11)

Set the station addresses for the RS-485 communication. The setting range depends on the protocol.
Protocol Range Broadcast
Modbus RTU 1 to 247 0

Protocol for loader commands 1 to 255 —
Fuji general-purpose inverter 1 to 31 99
N2 protocol 1 to 255 —
BACnet 0 to 127 255
• When specifying a value out of range, no response is returned.

• The settings to use inverter supporting loader should match with the computer’s settings.
APPENDICES
Appendix-326
■ Communications error processing (y02, y12)

Select an operation when an error occurs in the RS-485 communication.
The RS-485 errors are logical errors such as address error, parity error and framing error, transmission errors and
disconnection errors (the latter specified in y08 and y18). These errors occur only when the inverter is configured
to receive the operation command or frequency command via the RS-485 communication. If the operation
command or frequency command is not issued via the RS-485 communication, or when the inverter is stopped, the
system does not determine an error.
y02, y12 data Function
Displays the RS-485 communication error (er8 for y02, erp for y12), and immediately
0
stops the operation (trip by alarm).
Operates for a period specified in the error process timer (y03, y13), and then displays the
1 RS-485 communication error (er8 for y02, erp for y12), and stops the operation (trip by
alarm).
Retries the communication for a period specified in the error process timer (y03, y13), and
if the communication is recovered, the operation continues. Displays the RS-485
2
communication error (er8 for y02, erp for y12) if the communication is not recovered, and
immediately stops the operation (trip by alarm).
3 Continues the operation if a communication error occurs.
For details, refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s Manual.
■ Error process timer (y03, y13)

Sets the error process timer, as explained above for the communications error processing parameters (y02, y12).
Refer also to the section of disconnection detection time (y08, y18).
■ Baud rate (y04, y14)
Sets the transmission baud rate. y04 and y14 data Function
• For inverter supporting loader (via RS-485):
0 2400 bps
Match the value with the computer setting.
1 4800 bps
2 9600 bps
3 19200 bps
4 38400 bps
■ Data length selection (y05, y15)
Sets the character length. y05 and y15 data Function

• For inverter supporting loader (via RS-485): 0 8 bits
The value does not need to be set since it automatically
becomes 8 bits. (It also applies to Modbus RTU.) 1 7 bits
■ Parity selection (y06, y16)
Sets the parity. y06 and y16 data Function

• For inverter supporting loader (via RS-485): No parity bit
The value does not need to be set since it 0
(2 bits of stop bit for Modbus RTU)
automatically becomes even parity.
Even parity
1
(1 bit of stop bit for Modbus RTU)
Odd parity
2
(1 bit of stop bit for Modbus RTU)
No parity bit
3
(1 bits of stop bit for Modbus RTU)
Appendix-327
■ Stop bit selection (y07, y17)
Sets the stop bit. y07 and y17 data Function
• For inverter supporting loader (via RS-485):
RS
0 2 bits
The value does not need to be set since it automatically
becomes 1 bit. 1 1 bit
For Modbus RTU: The value does not need to be set since it
is automatically determined in conjunction
conju nction with the parity bit
(function
function y06, y16
y16).
■ Communication time
time-out
out detection timer (y08, y18)
Sets a period from the time when the system detects y08 and y18 data Function
communication time
time-out
out (for
for any reason such as
disconnection in equipment that periodically access to the Disconnection is not
0
station within a specific time)
time during the operation using the detected
detected.
RS-485
485 communication, until the time when the system
Detection time from 1 to
processes the communication errors. 1 to 60
60 (s)
For details on proces
processing
sing communication errors, refer to y02
and y12.
■ Response interval time (y09, y19)

Sets a period from the time when the system receives a request from host equipment (upper equipment such as
computer or PLC) until the time when it returns a response. In case of the host equipments that are slow to process
the task from completed transmission to completed reception preparation, a timing can be synchr
synchronized
onized by setting
a response interval time.
Host device Request
Inverter Response
T1
T1 = Response interval time + α

α: Processing time inside the inverter. It varies depending on the timing and command.
For details, refer to the RS-485
To set an inverter by the inverter supporting loader via the RS-485

RS 485 communication, consider the
performance and condition of the computer and converter (such as USB-RS-485
USB 485 converter
converter).
(Some converters monitor communication status and switch transmission and reception with timer.)
■ Protocol selection (y10, y20)

Selects a communication protocol. y10 and y20 data Function
0 Modbus RTU protocol

1 FRENIC Loader protocol
2 Fuji general-purpose
purpose inverter protocol
3 N2 protocol
5 BACnet protocol
50 Mutual operation (only y20)
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-328
328
y60,
60, y61 BACnet Device instance number (Upper and Lower)
Lower
These settings specify Device instance number for identifying itself on the application layer of BACnet protocol.
Setting method is different by y61 setting value as below:

*1
Data for y61 Device instance number Setting range
*2
0 (y60 * 1000) + MAC address (y60 * 1000) + (0 to 127)
128 to 999 (y60 * 1000) + y61 (y60 * 1000) + (128 to 999)
*1 Maximum setting range for device instance number is: 0 to 4194302.
*2 MAC address is specified by y01 or y11.
y95 Data clear processing

rocessing for communications
ommunications
If any of the communication error alarms (er8, erp , er4, er5, ert) occurs in RS-485
RS 485 or bus option, the data of
communication command function codes (S codes) can automatically be cleared.
Since the frequency and operation commands are also disabled when the data is cleared, the inverter does not
start unintentionally when an alarm is released.
y95
95 data Function
When a communication error alarm occurs, the function code Sxx data is not cleared
0
(compatible with the conventional mode).
When a communication error alarm occurs, the function codes S01, S05 and S19 data is
1
cleared.
When a communication error alarm occurs, the bit
bits assigned in function code S06 for
2
operation command is cleared.
3 Clear operations of 1 and 2 above are performed.
y97 Communication data storage selection
The inverter memory (non

(non-volatile
volatile memory) has a limited rewritable times (100 thousand to 1 million times). If the
count immo
immoderately
derately increases, the data cannot be modified or saved, causing a memory error.
If the data should frequently be overwritten via communication, it can be written in the temporar
temporaryy memory instead
of the non
non-volatile
volatile memory. This allows saving rewritable times to the non-volatile
volatile memory, which can avoid a
memory error.
If y97 is set to “2”, the data written in the temporary memory is stored (All Saved) in the non
non-volatile
volatile memory.
To change th
the
e y97 data, it is necessary to press the + / keys (simultaneous keying).
y97 data Function
0 Store into nonvolatile memory (Rewritable times are limited)

1 Write into temporary memory (Rewritable times are unlimited)
Store all data from temporary memory to nonvolatile memory
2
(After storing all
a data,, the y97 data return to 1)
y98 Bus function (Mode

( ode selection) (Refer to H30)
For details on setting the y98 bus function (mode sel

selection), refer to the description of H30.
Appendix
Appendix-329
329
y99 Loader link function (Mode selection)
Function code to switch the links to the inverter supporting loader software (FRENIC Loader). Rewriting y99 with
the inverter supporting loader software (FRENIC Loader) enables the frequency command and operation
command from the inverter supporting loader software (FRENIC Loader). You do not need to use the keypad since
the data is rewritten from the inverter supporting loader.
If the operation command is configured to be given from the inverter supporting loader software, and if the
computer starts to go out of control during the operation and a stop command from the loader software is ignored,
remove the communication cable connected to the computer that runs the inverter supporting loader software, and
connect the keypad to set the y99 data to 0. By setting the y99 data to 0, the operation is isolated from the inverter
supporting loader software's commands, switching to the commands of inverter's own settings (such as function
code H30).
The y99 data is not saved in the inverter; the setting is lost and returned to 0 when powered off.
Function
y99 data
Frequency command Run command source
0 From function codes H30 and y98 From function codes H30 and y98
1 Command issued from FRENIC loader From function codes H30 and y98
2 From function codes H30 and y98 Command issued from FRENIC loader
3 Command issued from FRENIC loader Command issued from FRENIC loader
APPENDICES
Appendix-330
Appendix K Overview of RS-
RS-485
485 Communication
Appendix K Overview of RS-485
RS 485 Communication
The FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace
Ace has two RS-485
RS 485 communication ports at the locations shown below.
(i) Communication port 1
1: RJ-45 connector for the keypad (modular jack)
(ii) Communication port 2 2:
RJ--45 RS 485 communication (modular jack) * only for type FRN--E2■-2/4/7GA/A/E/U/K
45 connector for RS-485 7GA/A/E/U/K,
-2/4/7J
2/4/7J-H;
RS--485
485 terminals (control circuit terminals SD, DX
DX-,, DX+) * only
only for FRN-E2
FRN ■-2/4/7GB,
/7GB, -4C-H
RS-485
485 terminals (SD, DX-,
DX , and
and DX+)
DX+)
RJ-45 RJ-45 (which facilitate multi-drop
multi drop connection.)
connection.)
connector connector
COM port 1 COM port 2
Using the RS
RS-485
485 communication ports shown above enables the extended functions listed below.
• Remote operation from a keypad at the remote location (COM port 1)
The standard keypad enables remote operation by mounting the keypad on a remote panel and connecting the
keypad to RJ
RJ-45
45 connector with an extension cable (maximum cable len
length:
gth: 20 m)
• Operation by FRENIC Loader oader (COM ports 1 and 2)
It is possible to edit and monitor the function codes by connecting the RJ
RJ-45
45 connector (RS
(RS-485
485 communication)
in the inverter and PC and using the inverter support loader (FRENIC Loader, see “Appendix
“ Appendix L FRENIC Loader
Overview
verview”).
• Control via host equipment (COM ports 1 and 2)
Connecting the inverter to the host equipment (upper controller), such as a computer and programmable
controller (PLC), enables to control the inverter as a subordinate device.
Besides the communication port 1 (RJ-45
45 connector) shared with the keypad, the FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace has the RS-485
RS
communication port 2 by default.
The protocols for controlling inverters support the Modbus RTU protocol (compliant to the protocol established
by Modicon Inc.) that is widely used and
and the Fuji Electric’s general
general-purpose
purpose inverter protocol that is common to
Fuji Electric’s inverters including conventional series.
• Connecting the keypad to the COM port 1 automatically switches to the keypad protocol; there is no
need to modify the function code setting.
• When using FRENIC Loader, which requires a special protocol for handling Loader commands, you
need to set up some communication function codes accordingly.
For details, refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual.
For details of RS--485

485 communication, refer to the RS-485
Appendix -331
33
Appendix K Overview of RS-485 Communication
K.1 RS-485 common specifications

Item Specifications
Protocol FGI-BUS Modbus RTU FRENIC Loader Metasys N2 BACnet

(support only for
standard)
Compliance Fuji Modicon Modbus Dedicated Jonson control ASHRAE/ANSI
general-purpose RTU-compliant protocol N2 prtocol /ISO-compliant
inverter protocol (only in RTU mode) (Not disclosed)
Connection quantity Host device: 1, Inverters: Up to 31
Electrical mode EIA RS-485
Connection to RJ-45 connector or terminal block
RS-485
Synchronization Asynchronous
Communication Half-duplex
system
Transmission 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bps 9600 bps 9600, 19200,
speed (bps) 38400 and
76800bps
Max. transmission 500 m (1640 ft)
cable length
Station No. 1 to 31 1 to 247 1 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 127
Message frame FGI-BUS Modbus RTU FRENIC Loader Metasys N2 MS/TP frame
format format
Frame Header Detection of Header Header Detection of
synchronization character no-data time character character two header
detection (SOH) (for 3 detection detection characters
characters (Start code: (Start code: (preamble)
period) 96H) 3EH) (0×55, 0×FF)
Frame length Normal Variable length Variable length Variable length Variable length
transmission:
16 bytes (fixed)
High-speed
transmission: 8
or 12 bytes
Max. transfer Write: 1 word Write: 100 words Write: 41 words Write: 1 words Write: 50 words
data Read: 1 word Read: 100 words Read: 41 words Read: 1 words Read: 50 words
Messaging Polling/Selecting/Broadcast Command Polling/Selecting Polling/Selecting
system message /Broadcast
Transmission ASCII Binary Binary ASCII Binary
character *Data of character
format string read: ASCII
Character 8 or 7 bit 8 bits (fixed) 8 bits (fixed) 8 bits (fixed) 8 bits (fixed)
length Selectable with
the function code
Parity Even, Odd, or None (selectable by Even (fixed) None None
the function code)
Stop bit length 1 or 2 bit Parity none: 2/1 bit 1 bit (fixed) 1 bit (fixed) 1 bit (fixed)
Selectable with Parity: 1 bit
the function Select by parity
code
APPENDICES
setting.
Error checking Sum-check CRC-16 Sum-check Sum-check Header CRC
Data CRC
Appendix-332
RS-485
485 Communication
K.2 Terminal specifications
[1] RS
RS-485
485 communication port 1 (for connecting the keypad)
The port designed for a standard keypad uses an RJ
RJ-45
45 connector having the following pin assignment:
Pin Signal name Description
1 Vcc Power source for the keypad (5 V)

2 GND Ground signal
3 NC Not connected
4 DX-- RS
RS-485
485 signal, low side *2
5 DX+ RS
RS-485
485 signal, high side *2
6 NC Not connected
7 GND Ground signal
8 Vcc Power source for the keypad (5 V)
Terminating
RJ-45
45 connector
connector
resistor
RJ-45
45 connector
resistor 112 Ω is built in. Open/close with SW2. *

* The terminating resis
For details about SW6, refer to the FRENIC-AceAce User’s Manual Chapter 2, “2.2.8
“2. Operating slide switches
switches.”
The power supply for keypad is available in the RJ-45
45 connector for RS-485
RS 485 communication (Pins 1, 2,
7, and 8). When connecting other devices to the RJ
RJ--45
45 connector, take care not to use those pins. Use
pins 4 and 5 only.
[2] RS
RS-485
485 communication port 2 (terminal block)
Terminal symbol Description Remarks
DX
DX- RS-485
485 signal, low side in terminating resistor: 112 Ω
Built-in
DX+ RS-485
485 signal, high side Open/close with SW6*
SW
resistor 112 Ω is built in. Open/close with SW

* The terminating resis SW6. *
For details about SW
SW6, refer to the FRENIC-Ace ce User’s Manual Chapter 2 of, “2.2.8
2.8 Operating slide switches
switches”.
Appendix -333
RS-485
485 Communication
K.3 Connection method
• Up to 31 inverters can be connected to one host equipment.
• The protocol is common
commonly
ly used in the FRENIC series of general
general-purpose
purpose inverters, so programs for similar host
equipment can run/stop the inverter.
(The parameters modes may differ depending on the equipment.)
• Fixed-length
length transmission frames facilitate developing communicati
communication
on control programs for hosts.
For details of RS
RS--485
485 communication, refer to the RS-485
Multi-drop
drop connection using the RS
RS-485
485 communication port 1 (for connecting the keypad)
For connecting inverters in multi
multi-drop
drop connection, use the branch adapters for multi-drop
multi drop connection as shown
below.
FRENIC-Ace
Branch adapter for
multi-drop
RS-232C/RS
232C/RS-485
converter Terminating resistor
switchSW2 OFF
Terminating resister ON RJ-45

RJ connector
120 Ω)
(100-120 Ω
FRENIC-Ace
Terminating resistor
switch SW2 OFF
Computer RJ-45
RJ connector
(FRENIC Loader)
FRENIC-Ace
switch SW2 OFF
RJ-45
RJ connector
Figure K.3-1 Multi-drop

Multi Connection
onnection for RS
RS-485 Communication
ommunication Port
ort 1 (Using
( sing the RJ
RJ-45 Connector)
onnector)
• The power supply for keypad is available in the RJ-4545 connector for RSRS-485
485 communication
(COM port 1) (pins 1, 2, 7 and 8). When connecting other devices to the RJ
RJ-45
45 connector, take
care not to use those pins. Use pins 4 and 5 only. (refer to “K.2 Terminal
erminal specifications”)
specifications
• When selecting additional devices to prevent the damage or malfunction of the control PCB
caused by external noises or eliminate the influence of common mode noises, be sure to see
“K.4
.4 RS-485
485 connection devices
devices”
• The maximum wiring length must be 500 m.
• Use the cables and converters meeting the modes for connecting the RS RS-485 communication
mmunication
ports. (Refer to “[
“ 2 ] Requirements for the cable (COM port 1: for RJ-45
RJ 45 connector)
connector)” in “ K.4 ”)
APPENDICES
Appendix -334
RS-485
485 Communication
Multi-drop
drop connection using the RS-485
RS 485 communication port 2 (RJ
(RJ-45 FRN-E2 ■
45 connector) (only for FRN
-2/4/7GA/A/E/U/K
7GA/A/E/U/K, J-H))
For connecting inverters in multi-drop
multi drop connection, use the branch adapters for multi-drop
multi drop connection as shown
below. For connecting inverters in multi-drop
multi drop connection, use the branch adapters
ad apters for multi
multi-drop
drop connection as
shown below.
Branch adapter for FRENIC-Ace

multi-drop
RS-232C/RS
232C/RS-485
converter Terminating resistor
switch SW6 OFF
Terminating resister ON
RJ-45
RJ connector
120 Ω)
(100-120 Ω
FRENIC-Ace
switch SW6 OFF
Computer
RJ-45
RJ connector
(FRENIC Loader)
FRENIC-Ace
switch SW6 OFF
RJ-45
RJ connector

Multi Connection
onnection for RS
RS-485 Communication
ommunication Port 2 (Using
sing the RJ
RJ-45 Connector)
onnector)
Use the cables and converters meeting the modes for connecting the RS-485
RS 485 communication ports.
(Refer to “[[ 2 ] Requirements for the cable (COM port 1: for RJ-45
45 connector)”
connector) ” in “K.4 ”)
Appendix -335
RS-485
485 Communication
Multi-drop
drop connection using the RS
RS-485 FRN-E2■
485 communication port 2 (on the terminal block) (only for FRN
-2/4/7GB,
/7GB,-4C-H)
Host equipment Host equipment

USB or RS-232C
232C RS-485
(4 wires)
TXD RXD SD OUT- OUT+ IN- IN+
Terminating
USB - RS-485
485 converter resistor FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace
Ace series
(112 Ω) Shield
or Inverter 1
RS-232C
232C - RS-485
485 converter TRD+ Station No.
No.: 01
Off
Off-the-shelf
shelf one TRD- (2 wires)
DX+
(2 wires) FG
DX-
SD
Using the built
built-in
terminating resistor
FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace
Ace series
Inverter 2
Station No.
No.: 02
DX+ (2 wires)
DX-
SD
Up to 31
inverters
FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace
Ace series
Inverter n
Station No.: n
DX+ (2 wires)
DX-
SD
Terminating
erminating resistors switch
SW6 ON
(112 Ω)

drop Connection
onnection Diagram (C
Connecting
onnecting to the Terminal
erminal Block)
Use the cables and converters meeting the modes for connecting the RS-485
RS communication ports.
(Refer to “[[ 3 ] Requirements for the cable (COM port 2: for RS
RS-485
485 connector)”
connector)” in “K.4 "
APPENDICES
Appendix -336
RS-485
485 Communication
K.4 RS-485
485 connection devices
This section describes the devices required for connecting the inverter to a PC having no RS
RS-485
485 interface or for
connecting two or more inverters in multi-drop
multi drop network.
[1] Converter
In general, PC is not equipped with an RS-485
RS 485 port. Therefore, an RS-232C– –RS-485 or USB
USB–RS-485
485 converter is
required. To us
use
e the equipment properly, be sure to use the converter which meets the mode below. Be careful that
a converter not recommended may not work properly.
Requirements for recommended converters

Send/receive switching system: Auto-switching
Auto switching by monitoring the tr
transmission
ansmission data at PC (RS
(RS-232C)
Electric isolation: Electrically isolated from the RS
RS-485 port
Fail-safe:
safe: Fail-safe
Fail safe facility (*)
Other requirements: Superior noise immunity
Note: The fail

fail-safe
safe function refers to a feature that ensures the RSRS-485
485 receiver’s output is at “logic high” even if
the RS
RS-485485 receiver’s input is opened or short
short-circuited
circuited or all the RS-485
RS 485 drivers are inactive. (Refer to
“Figure
Figure K.4-1 Communication Level Conversion
onversion”.)
Recommended converters
System Sacom Sales Corporation (Japan) : KS-485PTI
485PTI ((RS-232C
232C-RS-485
485 converter)
converter
: USB
USB-485I RJ45-T4P
T4P (USB-RS-
(USB -485
485 converter)
Send/receive switching system

The RS-485
485 co
communication
mmunication system of the inverter acts in half
half-duplex
duplex mode (2-wire),
(2 wire), so the converter must have a
send/receive switching function. Generally, the switching system may be either one of the followings.
(1) Auto
Auto-switching
switching by monitoring the transmitted data
(2) Switching by RS
RS--232C
232C control signal (RTS or DTR) from the computer
Computer Driver
Driver
Receiver input
Receiver input
Level conversion
Driver
Send/ receive enable Driver enable
switch
Receiver output
Receiver output
Receiver enable
Receiver enable
Receiver
Receiver
RS--232C—RS-485
485 converter FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace
(two
(two-wire system)
Figure K.4-1 Communication Level

L Conversion
onversion
[2] Requirements for the cable (COM port 1: for RJ

RJ-45
45 connector)
Use a standard 10BASE-T/100BASE
10BASE T/100BASE-TX
TX LAN cable (US ANSI/TIA/EIA
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A
568A category 5 compliant, straight cable).
The power supply for keypad is available in the RJ-45
45 connector for RS-485
RS 485 communication (COM port
1) (pins 1, 2, 7 and 8). When connecting other devices to the RJ-45
RJ 45 connector, take care not to use
those pins. Use pins 4 and 5 only.
[3] Requirements for the cable (COM port 2: for RS

RS-485
485 connector)
To ensure the reliability of connection, use twisted pair shield cables for long distance transmission AWG 16 to 26.
Recommended
mmended LAN cable manufacturer:
FURUKAWA Electric Co., LTD AWM2789 cable for long distance connection
Type (Product code): DC23225-2PB
DC23225
Appendix -337
Appendix K Overview of RS-485 Communication
[4] Branch adapter for multi-drop

The RJ-45 connector is used as the communication connector. To use a standard LAN cable for multi-drop
connection, use the branch adapter for the RJ-45 connector.
Recommended branch adapter
SK Koki (Japan): MS8-BA-JJJ
K.5 RS-485 noise suppression

Depending on the operating environment, the malfunction may occur due to the noise generated by the inverter.
Possible measures to prevent such malfunction are: separating the wiring, use of shielded cable, isolating the
power supply, and adding an inductance component. The description shown below is an example of adding an
inductance.
Refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s Manual, The FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 2, Section
2.2.4 “Precautions for long wiring (between inverter and motor)” for details.
Adding inductance components

Keep the impedance of the signal circuit high against the high-frequency noises by inserting an inductance
component, such as by inserting a choke coil in series or passing the signal line through a ferrite core.
Ferrite core
RS-485 communications cable
RS-485 Inverter
converter
Pass the wiring through the ferrite core or

wind the ferrite core with the wiring a few times
Figure K.5-1 Adding an Inductance Component
APPENDICES
Appendix-338
Appendix L FRENIC Loader Overview
Appendix L FRENIC Loader

oader Overview
verview
FRENIC Loader is a software tool that supports the operation of the inverter via an RS-485
RS 485 communication.
This software allows you to edit, set, and manage the inverter function codes, monitor running data, and remotely
operate the operation and stop, as well as monitor the running status and alarm history.
With special order-made
order made inverters, FRENIC Loader may not be able to display some function codes
normally.
For details, refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual.
L.1 Modes
Item Modes Remarks
Name Inverter support loader (FRENIC Loader)
Supported inverter FRENIC-MEGA/Multi/
FRENIC MEGA/Multi/VP/Mini/Ace
/Ace/GX1/HF/ (Note 1)
eHVAC
Number of connected USB connection: 1
inverters RS-485
485 connection: Up to 31
Recommended cable Cable (10BASE-T
(10BASE T or more) compliant with For the RS
RS-485
485 interface
EIA568
RJ-45
RJ 45 connector
CPU Intel Pentium III 600 MHz or later (Note 2)
OS Microsoft Windows XP (32 bit) (Note 3)
Operating environment
Microsoft Vista (32 bit)

Microsoft 7 (32 bit, 64 bit)
Memory RAM area with 512 MB or more 1GB or more is recommended.
Hard disk 40 MB or more of empty area
COM port RS-232C
232C (conversion to RS
RS-485
485
communication is required to connect
inverters) or USB
Monitor 800 x 600 or higher XGA (1024×768) 32 bit Color or
more monitor is recommended.
COM port COM1 to COM255 PC COM ports assigned to
Loader
Transmission speed USB connection: 19200 bps or more is
Between loader and keypad recommended
Transmission requirements
= fixed at 12 Mbps (Note 4)

Between keypad and inverter
= fixed at 19200 (bps)
RS-485
485 connection:
38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400 (bps)
Character length 8 bit Prefixed
Stop bit length 1 bit Prefixed
Parity Even Prefixed
No. of retries None or 1 to 10 No. of retry times before
detecting communication error
Timeout setting 100 ms, 300 ms, 500 ms, 1.0 s to 1.5 s to 1.9 Set longer than the “Response
s, 2.0 to 9.0 s, 10.0 to 60.0 s interval time y09”
Note 1: The loader model is unavailable which does not support the protocol for loader commands (SX protocol).
Note 2: Use a PC with as high a performance as possible, since some slow PCs may not properly refresh the
operation monitoring and test-running
test running windows.
Note 3: Only Microsoft Windows XP service pack 2 (SP2) or later is supported.
Note 4: To connect to the network where there is a FRENIC
FRENIC-Mini
Mini inverter, choose 19200 bps or below.
Appendix -339
Appendix M Options for communication and operation overview
L.2 Connection
By connecting a number of inverters to one PC, you can control one inverter at a time or a number of inverters
simultaneously. You can also simultaneously monitor a number of inverters on the multi monitor.
For information how to connect a PC to one or more inverters, refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s
Manual (MEH448).
L.3 Function overview

[1] Configuring inverter’s function code
You can set, edit, and check the setting of the inverter’s function code data.
List and Edit

In List and edit, you can list and edit function codes with function code No., name, set value, set range, and factory
default.
You can also list function codes by any of the following groups according to your needs:
• Function code group
• Function codes that have been modified from their factory defaults
• Result of comparison with the settings of the inverter
• Result of search by function code name
• User-specified function code set
etc.
Comparison
You can compare the function code data currently being edited with that saved in a file or stored in the inverter.
To perform a comparison and review the result displayed, click the Comparison tab and then click the Compared
with inverter tab or click the Compared with file tab, and specify the file name.
The result of the comparison will be displayed also in the Comparison Result column of the list.
APPENDICES
Appendix-340
File information
Clicking the File information tab displays the property and comments for identifying the function code editing file.
(1) Property
Shows file name, inverter model, inverter’s capacity, date of readout, etc.
(2) Comment
Displays the comments you have entered. You can write any comments necessary for identifying the file.
[2] Multi-monitor
This feature lists the status of all the inverters that are marked “connected” in the configuration table.
Multi-monitor
Allows you to monitor the status of more
than one inverter in a list format.
Appendix-341
[3] Running status monitor

The running status monitor offers four monitor functions: I/O monitor, System monitor, Alarm monitor, and Meter
display. You can choose an appropriate monitoring format according to the purpose and situation.
I/O monitor
Allows you to monitor the ON/OFF states of the digital input
signals to the inverter and the transistor output signals.
System monitor
The inverter’s system information (version, type, maintenance
information, etc.) can be confirmed.
Alarm monitor
The alarm monitor shows the alarm status of the selected inverter.
In this window you can check the details of the alarm currently
active and related information.
Meter display
Displays analog readouts of the selected inverter (such as output
frequency) on analog meters. The example on the right displays
the reference frequency and the output frequency.
APPENDICES
Appendix-342
[4] Test-running
The Test-running feature allows you to test-run the motor in the forward or reverse direction while monitoring the
running status of the selected inverter.
Operation status Select monitor item Frequency command I/O terminal status
Shows FWD, REV, Select what is to be displayed (e.g., (updated) Shows the status of the
STOP and alarm output frequency or current) here using Transmits the frequency programmable digital I/O
codes. the pull-down menu. entered to the inverter terminals of the inverter.
Switch the frequency and running

Operation buttons* Select monitor item Update with latest inverter commands (updated)
Select the operation status information (updated) Select the frequency and run
information to be monitored in Click the Refresh button to command sources and click Apply.
real-time. refresh the contents of this
window to show the latest
inverter status.
*: The table below lists the details of the operation buttons.
Button Functionality
STOP Stop the motor.

FWD The motor runs in the normal rotation. (depressed state indicates running state.)
REV The motor runs in the reverse rotation. (depressed state indicates running state.)
RESET Reset all alarm information saved in the selected inverter.
Appendix-343
[5] Real
Real-time
time trace
When continuously observing the running state of inverters while the sampling time can be selected between 1 ms
to 200 ms, up to 4 analog channels and up to 8 digital channels are available (up to 8 channels in total).
(Maximum waveform amount: 15360 sample/channel)
Type of trace
• Cursor Cursor position Save data
• Adjustment of graph Tracing type Hardcopy of waveform monitor
Cursor scroll bar
positions Tracing status
START/STOP Advanced Cursor A Cursor B Monitor window

the historical trace waveform settings
for each channel Scope scroll Bar
Optimize Y-axis
Y axis origin of each channel
• The station No can not be changed while tracing waveforms real time.
• The detailed waveform can not be changed while tracing waveforms real time.
• Change the real time trace window to change the size of monitor window.
• The scrolling and cursor moving are unavailable in the waveform monitoring window while tracing
waveforms real time.
APPENDICES
Appendix -344
[6] Historical trace

The sampling ttime
ime can be selected between 1 ms to 200 ms. When observing the running state of inverters in
much finer continuous waveforms than real-time
real time trace, up to 4 analog channels and up to 8 digital channels are
available (up to 8 channels in total).
• Amount of saved
aved data: 2 kbyte
(Waveform
aveform capturing capability: Max. 500 sample/channel)
Type of trace
• Cursor Cursor position Save data
• Adjustment of graph Tracing type Hardcopy of waveform monitor
positions Cursor scroll bar
Tracing status
START/STOP Advanced wave Scope scroll Bar Cursor B

the historical trace form settings for Cursor A Monitor window
each channel
channe
Optimize Y-axis
Y axis origin of each channel
• The station No can not be changed while tracing waveforms historically.

• The detailed waveform can not be changed while tracing waveforms historically.
• Change the historical trace window to change the size of monitor window.
Appendix -345

In FRENIC-Ace it is possible to install one communication card and one terminal block type option card. A
mounting adapter is required to install the communication card to the inverter.
M.1 Mounting adapter (for communication option card)

This adapter is required for mounting the communication option card to FRENIC-Ace.
Table M.1-1
Type Option Name Functions
FRN0001E2■-2Hto FRN0020E2■-2H.
Option card mounting adapter for small-size
OPC-E2-ADP1 FRN0002E2■-4H to FRN0044E2■-4H.
inverter.
FRN0001E2■-7H to FRN0011E2■-7H.
Option card mounting adapter for mid-size FRN0059E2■-4H and FRN0072E2■-4H
OPC-E2-ADP2
inverter.
Option card mounting adapter for large-size FRN0085E2■-4H or above.
OPC-E2-ADP3
inverter.
M.2 Communication option cards (required mounting adapter required)

Table M.2-1
Type Option Name Functions Refer
DeviceNet This card enables the FRENIC-Ace to interface with DeviceNet
OPC-DEV Section M.5
communications card and the FRENIC-Ace can be operated as a DeviceNet slave.
CC-Link This card enables the FRENIC-Ace to interface with CC-Link and
OPC-CCL Section M.6 0
communications card the FRENIC-Ace can be operated as a CC-Link slave.
DI: The frequency set-point can be given by 8, 12 bits binary
code or BCD code (0 to 99.9/0 to 999) and extended 13
Digital I/O
OPC-DIO digital inputs are available mounting this card. Section M.7
interface card
DO: The monitoring with 8bit binary code and the extended
digital outputs (up to 8 outputs) are available.
Analog I/O interface This card enables the FRENIC-Ace to input analog set-points to
OPC-AIO Section M.8
card the inverter and output analog monitors.
OPC-PT RTD card This card enables the FRENIC-Ace to input RDT. Section M.9
This card enables the FRENIC-Ace to interface with LonWorks
OPC-LNW LonWorks card Section M.10
and the FRENIC-Ace can be operated as a LonWorks slave.
This card enables the FRENIC-Ace to interface with PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS-DP
OPC-PDP3 DP and the FRENIC-Ace can be operated as a PROFIBUS DP Comming soon.
communications card
slave.
EtherNet/IP This card enables the FRENIC-Ace to interface with EtherNet

OPC-ETH2 communications and the FRENIC-Ace can be operated as a EtherNet slave. Comming soon.
card
ProfiNet-RT This card enables the FRENIC-Ace to interface with ProfiNet-RT

OPC-PRT communications and the FRENIC-Ace can be operated as a ProfiNet-RT slave. Comming soon.
card
CANopen This card enables the FRENIC-Ace to interface with CANopen

OPC-COP2 communications and the FRENIC-Ace can be operated as a CANopen slave. Comming soon.
card
This card enables the FRENIC-Ace to keep the TP-A1 and

OPC-E2-D24 Power option communications supplied by 24DC when the main power is Comming soon
shutdown.
APPENDICES
Appendix-346
M.3 Terminal block type options
Table M.3-1
OPC-F2-RY Relay output card This card provides three relay output (1A relay). Section M.11
OPC-E2-RS RS485 This card provides two RS-485 connectors for multi-drop Section M.12
communications connection.
card
M.4 Option keypad

Table M.4-1
TP-E1U Keypad with USB The operation keypad adopted large-sized 7 segments LED to Section M.13
port. improve the visibility.
Allows connecting a computer directly with a commercial USB
cable (mini B) to be able to use FRENIC Loader software.
Additional converter is not required.
TP-E1U cannot be directly mounted on FRENIC-Ace. It can be
connected only through a cable.
TP-A1 Multi-functional The operation keypad adopted LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) with Section M.14
keypad a back light. The keypad corresponds to multi-languages.
TP-A1-E2C cannot be directly mounted on FRENIC-Ace. It can
be connected only through a cable.
Appendix-347
M.5 DeviceNet communications card (OPC

(OPC-DEV)
DEV)
The DeviceNet communications card is used to connect the FRENIC-Ace Ace series to a DeviceNet master via
DeviceNet. Mounting the communications card on the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC Ace enables the user to control the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC
as a slave unit by configuring and monitoring run and frequency commands and accessing inverter
inverter’’s function
codes from the DeviceNet master.
Note: Two or more communication cards cannot be mounted simultaneously.
simultaneously And this card requires a mounting
adapter
adapter; refer to Section
S Appendix M .
DeviceNet specifications
Table M.5-1
Item Specifications
Number of nodes connectable Max. 64 (including the master)

MAC ID 0 to 63
Insulation 500 VDC (photocoupler insulation)
Transmission rate 500, 250, or 125 kbps
Transmission rate 500 kbps 250 kbps 125 kbps
Maximum cable length Trunk line length 100 m (328

328 ft ) 250 m (820
820 ftft) 500m (1600 ft)
(When using thick cables) Drop line length 6 m (20
( ft)
Total length of drop lines 39 m (128 ft) 78 m (256
256 ftft) 156 m (512 ft)
1. I/O Message
essage (Poll, Change of State)
Messages supported
2. Explicit Message
Vendor ID 319 (Registered
Registered name: Fuji Electric Group)
Device type AC drive (code: 2)
Product code 9219
Applicable device profile AC Drive
Max. 8 bytes for each of input and output.
Number of input/output bytes
Depending on the format selected. Refer to Instruction manual of OPC
OPC-DEV.
CIP Specifications
Applicable DeviceNet
Specifications Volume 1, Edition 2.2 Japanese version and Volume 3, Edition 1.1 Japanese
version
Node type Group 2 only server (noncompliant with UCMM)
80 mA, 24 VDC
Network power consumption
(Note) The network power is supplied by an external power source.
For the items not contained in the table above, the DeviceNet Specifications apply.
APPENDICES
Appendix -348
Appendix L Options for communication and operation overview
M.6 CC-Link communications card (OPC-CCL)

CC-Link (Control & Communication Link) is an FA open field network system. The CC-Link communications card
connects the inverter to a CC-Link master via CC-Link using a dedicated cable. It supports the transmission speed
of 156 kbps to 10 Mbps and the total length of 100 to 1,200 m so that it can be used in wide range of systems
requiring a high-speed or long-distance transmission, enabling a flexible system configuration.
Note: Two or more communication cards cannot be mounted simultaneously. And this card requires a mounting
adapter; refer to Section Appendix M .
CC-Link specifications
Table M.6-1
Item Specifications
Applicable controller Mitsubishi Electric sequencer, etc. (CC-Link master)

CC-Link version 1.10 and 2.0
Transmission system
(Broadcast polling system)
Number of inverters connectable Max. 42 units (one station occupied/unit)
CC-Link version 1.10: 1 station occupied
Number of stations occupied CC-Link version 2.0: 1 station occupied
(Selectable from among 2×, 4× and 8× settings)
Transmission speed (Baud rate) 10 Mbps/5 Mbps/2.5 Mbps/625 kbps/156 kbps
Maximum cable length 10 Mbps 5 Mbps 2.5 Mbps 625 kbps 156 kbps
(When using the CC-Link 1200 m (3900
dedicated cable) 100 m (328 ft) 150 m (492 ft) 200 m (656 ft) 600 m (2000 ft)
ft)
Insulation 500 VDC (photocoupler insulation)
Station type Remote device station
Remote device type Inverter (0x20)
For items not contained in the above table, the CC-Link specifications apply.
Appendix-349
M.7 Digital I/O interface card (OPC-DIO)

(OPC DIO)
This interface card can provide following features to the FRENIC-Ace

FRENIC series.
(1) Available to set frequency point with binary (8,12bit) or BCD code.
(2) Available to monitor with binary (8bit) code.
(3) Available to extend the digital input terminals as I1 to I13.
(4) Available to extend the transistor output terminals as O1 to O8.
Note: Two or more communication cards cannot be mounted simultaneously.
simultaneously And this card requires a
mounting adapter;
adapter; refer to Section M.7
.7.
Applicable ROM version

This card is applicable to inverters with a ROM version 0300 or later.
Table M.7
.7-1 Terminal functions
Symbol Name Function

Terminals for setting input
I1 to I13 Signal input
Extended digital input signals
M1 External power supply connect External power supply connect
Common of input
CM Common terminal for setting input
The terminal CM is isolated to terminal M2.
Terminals for output monitor
O1 to O8 Output
Extended transistor output signals
Common of Output
M2 Common terminals for output monitor
The terminal M2 is isolated to terminal CM.
Input terminal Output terminal
Figure M.7-1
1 Terminal allocation on the DIO option interface card
Table M.7-2
2 Electrical Specifications
Specification
Terminal Symbol Item
min. max.
ON level 0V 2V
Operating voltage (SINK)
OFF level 22V 27V
ON level 22V 27V
I1 to I13 Operating voltage (SOURCE)
OFF level 0V 2V
Operating current at ON. 2.5mA 4.5mA
Allowable leakage current at OFF - 0.5mA
At ON level - 2V
Operating voltage
At OFF level - 27V
O1 to O8
Maximum current at ON - 50mA
APPENDICES
Leakage current at OFF - 0.1mA
Appendix -350
Table M.7-3 Connecting Method input terminals
Connecting Method
Power
Supply
Sink Source
Internal
External
Table M.7-4 Connecting Method output terminals

Sink
Source
Appendix-351
M.8 Analog interface card (OPC-AIO)

(OPC AIO)
The analog interface card has the terminals listed below. Mounting this
th interface card on the FRENIC-Ace
Ace enables
analog input and analog output to/from the inverter
inverter.
• One analog voltage input point (0 to ±10 V)
• One analog current input point (4 to 20 mA)
• One analog voltage output point (0 to ±10 V)
• One analog current output point (4 to 20 mA)
Applicable ROM version

This interface card is applicable to inverters with a ROM version 0300 or later.
Table M.8
.8-1 Terminal functions
Classifi-
cations
Symbol Name Functions Remarks
Power supply for frequency command potentiometer

Power supply for (Variable resistor: 1 to 5 kkΩ)
[P10]
the potentiometer
(10 VDC, 10 mA DC max.)
• Used as analog voltage input from external Input

equipment. impedance:
0 to ±10
10 VDC/0 to ±100%
100% 22kΩ
(0 to ±5
5 VDC/0 to ±100%)
100%) Max. input:
• One of the following signals can be assigned to this ±15
15 VDC
terminal.
• Auxiliary frequency command
Analog voltage • PID command
command, PID feedback value
[32]
input • Ratio setting
• Torque limiter level
level, Torque bias amount
• Torque command
command,, Torque current command
• Speed limit value of FWD
FWD, Speed limit value of
REV
Analog input
• Analog input monitor

• Resolution: 1/3000
• Used as analog current input from external Input

equipment. impedance:
mpedance:
4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 100% 250Ω
• One of the following signals can be assigned to this Max. input:
terminal. 30 mA DC
• Auxiliary frequency command
• PID command
command, PID feedback value
Analog current
[C2] • Ratio setting
input
• Torque limiter level
level, Torque bias amount
• Torque command
command,, Torque current command
• Speed limit value of FWD
FWD, Speed limit value of
REV
• Analog input monitor
Equipotent with
[31] Analog common • Reference terminal for [P10], [32], [C2]. the inverter’s
terminal [11]
APPENDICES
Appendix -352
Table M.8-1 Terminal functions (cont.)

Classifi-
cations
Symbol Name Functions Remarks
• Outputs the monitor signal of analog DC voltage (0

to ±10 VDC).
• One of the following signals can be issued from this
terminal.
• Output frequency
• Output current, Output voltage, Output torque
• Load factor, Input power
• PID feedback value
• Actual speed / Estimated speed
• DC link bus voltage
Analog voltage • Universal AO
[Ao+]
output (+)
• Motor output
• Analog output test
• PID command, PID output
• Position deviation in master•follower operation
• Heat sink temperature
• PG feedback value
• Customizable logic output signal 1 to 4
* Capable of driving up to two analog voltmeters with
10 kΩ impedance.
Analog output
Equipotent with
Analog voltage
[Ao-] • Reference terminal for [Ao+]. the inverter’s
output (-)
terminal [11]
• Outputs the monitor signal of analog DC current Isolated from

(4 to 20 mA DC) terminals [31],
• One of the following signals can be issued from this [Ao-], and [11]
terminal.
• Output frequency
• Output current, Output voltage, Output torque
• Load factor, Input power
• PID feedback value
<Control circuit>
• Actual speed / Estimated speed Current
[CS+]
Analog current • DC link bus voltage 24 VDC
[CS+] Ａ
output (+) • Universal AO [CS-] Ammeter
• Motor output
Current
• Analog output test source
• PID command, PID output [CM]

([CM] on the inverter)
• Position deviation
in master-follower operation
• Heat sink temperature
• PG feedback value
• Customizable logic output signal 1 to 4
Analog current * Input impedance of the external device: Max. 500Ω

[CS-]
output (-)
Appendix-353
Table M.8
.8-2 Connection example
Symbol Connection of shielded wire
Shielded wire
[P10]
Potentiom eter
[32] 1k to 5kΩ [32]
[31]
Shielded wire
[C2]
Constant
current source
[C2]
4 to 20 m A
[31]
Shielded wire
[Ao+]
[Ao] V
[Ao-]
[Ao
Shielded wire
[CS+]
[CS] A
[CS-]
[CS
APPENDICES
Appendix -354
M.9 RTD Card (OPC-PT)
The RTD card (OPC-PT) makes it possible to connect up to two resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) to the
FRENIC-Ace and digitalize temperatures. The following five types of RTDs can be connected: JPt100, Pt100,
Ni100, Pt1000, and Ni1000.
The mounting of this card requires a mounting adapter. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual, which will be
provided with the card.
RTD Card specifications
Item Specifications
Number of 2 channels
input channels
Types of JPt100, Pt100, Ni100, Pt1000, and Ni1000 (3-wire type)
RTDs connectable * The types of RTDs are set with function codes.
RTD excitation current JPt100, Pt100, and Ni100: 1 mA
Pt1000 and Ni1000: 0.5 mA
* Selected by switching.
Measurement -20 to +100ºC (-4 to +212ºF, 253 to 373 K)
temperature range
Resolution 0.01ºC (0.01ºF, 0.01 K)
Accuracy ±0.3% FS (inverter ambient temperature: at 23°C (at 73.4°F, 296 K))
±0.7% FS (inverter all temperature specification range)
* RTD errors are not included.
Sampling period Max. 700 ms/2 channels
Input filter time *1 Hardware (time constant): max. 50 ms
Digital filter time: 0.0 to 100.0 s
(Can be set in 0.1-s increments (default value: 1.0 s))
Insulation method Between the sensor input terminal and the internal logic Photo-coupler insulation
Between sensor input terminals and CM, 11, CMY Transformer insulation
Between sensor terminals None
Error detection Possible to detect sensor disconnection/short-circuiting and incorrect switching
settings. *2
*1 Input filtering time does not affect the display.

*2 Make sure that sensor selection settings (o10 and o15) are the same as the sensors in use. Do not perform
wiring across channels, or otherwise error detection may not be possible. In addition, the error display will
indicate “-30°C.”
Appendix-355
M.10 LonWorks Card (OPC-LNW)

(OPC
The LonWorks card (OPC(OPC-LNW)

LNW) is an interface card that connects the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC to peripheral devices (e.g.,
the master) through the LonWorks. The use of this communications card makes it possible to make run command
and frequency settings or monitor them through the master equipment connected through the LonWorks, change
settings of function codes required for the
the operation of the system and confirm the changes. Furthermore, the card
allows data exchange with the peripheral devices.
The mounting of this card requires a mounting adapter. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual, which will be
provided with th
thee card.
LonWorks specifications
Item Specifications
Communications baud rate 78 kbps

Profile LonMark 3.3
Variable Speed Motor Drive functional Profile Ver. 1.1
Communications topology Free topology
Network variable (NV) 62 variables (node objects: 3, VSD objects: 59)
Communications IC Smart transceiver (FT3120
(FT3120--E4S40)
Communications transceiver TP/FT-10
10 (free topology)
Communications protocol LonTalk protocol
Configuration property (CP) 24
APPENDICES
Appendix -356
L.11 Relay Output Card (OPC
(OPC-F2-RY)
M.11 Relay Output Card (OPC-F2-RY)

(OPC RY)
This card adds three relay output points to the FRENIC

FRENIC-AceAce Type H. Therefore, with the standard three relay
output points of the FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace
Ace Type H and the three relay output points of this card will make six relay output
points in total. These six relay output points are available for pump control. For details, refer to Appendix J codes
(Applied functions) [5] Pump control”.
Appendix -357
M.12 RS
RS-485
485 communication card (OPC
(OPC-E2-RS)
RS)
RS-485
485 communication card (OPC-E2-RS)
(OPC RS) expands RS RS-485
485 communication by RJ RJ-45
45 connector with
FRENIC-Ace
Ace as a standard into 2 connectors to facilitate multi
multi-drop. RS-485
485 port of this option card cannot be
connected to the keypad. In the same way as RS485 of the standard port, Fuji general-purpose
general purpose inverter protocol,
Modbus RTU protocol, and loader command are available.
Refer to RS
RS-485
485 communication user’s manual for details of each pr
protocol.
Table M
M.12-1 RS-485
485 ports
[Connector
Connector pin arrangement]
arrangement
Pin symbol
Pin number
SW10= (Factry
SW10=1 Factry default)
default SW10=2
1,6,7,8 N.C.
2 SD
3 N.C. DX-
4 DX- DX+
5 DX+ N.C.
[Names
Names and functions]
functions
Pin names Function
DX+ RS-485
485 communicationdata (+)
DX- RS-485
485 communicationdata (-)
(
This is the terminal for relaying the shield of the shielded cable, insulated from other circuits.
SD
The SD terminal in each connector.
N.C. No connection
8 1 8 1
PORT1 PORT2
Figure M
M.12-1 Pin assignment
6～8
1 5
DX+
4
TXD
3 PORT1
PORT1
DX- SW10 2
2
1
RXD
SW9
DE/RE
Terminal 6～8
Resistance
112ΩΩ 5
4
3 PORT2
PORT2
1
APPENDICES
Figure M
M.12-2 internal circuit
Appendix -358
■ Constraints on standard control circuit terminal

Control circuit terminal of OPC-E2-RS is different from some of the standard specification of FRENIC-Ace.
Different specifications are as follows.
Table M.12-2
Item Specifications
Standard control circuit terminal OPC-E2-RS
FRN□□□□E2■-2/4/7GA/A/E/U/K FRN□□□□E2■-2/4/7GB,-4C
Analog output “FM2” N Y N

CAN-Open port N N N
RS-485 port Y Y Y
Appendix-359
Appendix L Options for communication and operation overview
M.13 Simple keypad with USB port (TP

(TP-E1U)
Using the keypad in combination with FRENIC Loader enables a variety of data about the inverter unit to be saved
in the keypad memory, allowing you to check
check the information in any place. TP-E1U
TP E1U cannot be directly mounted on
FRENIC-AceAce.. It can be connected only through a cable.
USB
Features
(1) The keypad can be directly connected to a computer through a commercial USB cable (mini B) without using
a converter. The computer can be connected online with the inverter.
(2) With the FRENIC Loader, the inverter can support the following functions (1) to (4).
1) Editing, comparing, and copying the function code data
2) Real
Real-time
time operation monitor
3) Trouble history (indicating the latest four troubles)
4) Maintenance information
Data can be transferred from the USB port of the keypad directly to the computer (FRENIC Loader) at the site of
production. Periodical collection of life information can be carried out efficiently
Dimensions
APPENDICES
Appendix -360
M.14 Multi-functional keypad (TP-A1-E2C)

Simple keypad with USB port (TP-E1U)
Replacing the standard keypad with the multi-function keypad enables setting and checking of function code data,
and monitoring of the inverter running status, on the LCD monitor.
TP-A1-E2C cannot be directly mounted on FRENIC-Ace. It can be connected only through a cable.
Specifications
Items Specifications Remarks

Dimensions Refer to the figures below
Mass 120g
It is due to correspond to
Available languages Japanese, English, Chinese
user-customized language.
Possible to memorize or copy three function data
Copy function
sets.
Do not connect to FVR-E11S
FRENIC-HVAC/AQUA series
Applicable inverter series otherwise Keypad or
FRENIC-Ace series
inverter may be damaged.
Number of connection One inverter to one Multi-function keypad
Conformed to ANSI/TIA/EIA568A Category 5
Connection cable Extension cable (CB-5S)
(For 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX straight connection)
Extension cable length 20m or less
Connector RJ-45 connector
External view, dimension
Appendix-361
APPENDICES
Appendix -362
M.15 FRENIC Visual Customizer

[1] Overview
FRENIC Visual Customizer is inverter support software which can provide the visual customizing environment for
FRENIC-Ace. Customers can modify their inverter easily with this software by themselves.
[2] Specifications
Item Specifications Remarks
Name of software FRENIC Visual Customizer
No. of supported inverters For USB connection: Only one inverter
For RS-485 connection: Up to 31 inverters
USB : USB cable (mini B connecter)
Recommended cable RS-485 : Shielded twisted pair cable for long
distance transmission
Microsoft Windows XP(SP3 or later)
Operating environment
OS * Microsoft Windows Vista ***

Microsoft Windows 7
Memory 512MB or more RAM 2GB or more is recommended
Hard disk 35MB or more free space
Conversion to RS-485 communications required
COM port RS-232C or USB
to connect inverters
SXGA(1280 × 1024) / 32-bit color is
Monitor resolution 800 × 600 or higher
recommended
COM port ** COM1 to COM255 PC COM ports assigned to Loader
Transmission requirements
USB connection : Fixed at 12 Mbps

Transmission rates ** RS-485 connection : 38400bps or more is recommended.
38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 and 2400 bps
Character length 8 bits Prefixed
Stop bit length 1 bit Prefixed
Parity Even Prefixed
No. of retry times before detecting
No. of retries ** None or 1 to 10
communications error
100ms, 300ms, 500ms, 1.0s to 1.5s This setting should be longer than the response
Timeout setting **
to 1.9s, 2.0 to 9.0s, 10.0 to 60.0s interval time specified by the function code H39.
* Use on the PC downgraded to Windows XP from Windows7 or Windows Vista is not recommended.
** Bolded, underlined values are factory defaults.
*** Only support 32bit version of Windows XP, Windows Vista.
Support both 32bit and 64bit version of Windows 7.
[3] Functions
This software can provide functions below.
Function Overview
Customizable function editing Draws functions and sends them to the inverter using a graphical editing tool.
Displays the customizable function operation status with a waveform in real

Real-time trace
time.
Communication settings Specifies settings for communicating with the inverter.
Appendix-363
[4] Main Window
The following window appears when the software is started.
Project management window Toolbox

Manages project files and function Selects function symbols used in the layout.
properties.
Select Inverter Update
Inverter to be connected is selected. Updates the latest number of steps
steps.
Execution cycle Grid
Displays the customizable
ustomizable functions
function Change grid size.
size
execution time
time. Zoom in / out
Zoom in / out the layout window.
Message window Layout area

Displays information such as the results of function Draws functions with symbols added to the
code automatic assignment. layout.
Clear log
Clear log of Message window.
APPENDICES
Appendix -364
Appendix N Standard Model Specifications
N.1 ND-mode inverters for general load

■ Standard-model, Three-phase 400 V (460 V) class series (ND-mode: 0.75 kW to 5.5 kW)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4GH) 0002 0004 0006 0007 0012
Nominal applied motor (kW) [HP] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.0 5.5
(Output rating) *1 [1] [2] [3] [4] [7.5]
1.6 3.1 4.2 5.3 9.1
Output ratings
Rated capacity (kVA) *2

[1.7] [3.3] [4.4] [5.5] [9.6]
Rated voltage (V) *3 Three-phase 380 to 480 V (with AVR function)
Rated current (A) *4 2.1 4.1 5.5 6.9 12
Overload capability 120%-1 min
Voltage, frequency Three-phase 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage/frequency Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less) *6, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Input power
Rated input current *7

2.7 4.8 7.3 11.3 16.8
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 1.5 2.9 4.2 5.8 10.1
Required capacity
1.1 2.1 3.0 4.1 7.0
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 53% 50% 48% 29% 27%
Braking starting frequency: 0.0 to 60.0 Hz, Braking time: 0.0 to 30.0 s,
DC braking
Braking
Braking level: 0 to 60%

Braking transistor Built-in as standard
Minimum resistance value (Ω) 200 160 130
Braking resistor Separately mounted option
DC reactor (DCR) Separately mounted option
Applicable safety standards IEC/EN61800-5-1: 2007
Enclosure (IEC60529) IP20, UL open type
Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling
1.2 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.9
Weight / Mass (kg) [lbs]
[2.6] [3.3] [3.3] [3.5] [4.2]
Note: A box ( ) in the above table replaces A or B depending on the model.
*1 Fuji 4-pole standard motor

*2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 440 V (460 V).
*3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
*4 Setting the carrier frequency (F26) to the following value or above requires current derating.
ND spec. of all types : 4 kHz
If the ambient temperature is 40°C (104°F) or above, derating of 2%/°C (2%/1.8°F) relative to the rated
current given in this manual is required. For details, refer to the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 10
“10.4.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity.”
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67
*6 Three - phase average voltage (V) (IEC 61800-3)
If the unbalance ratio is 2% to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR).
*7 This specification is an estimated value to be applied when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (Inverter
capacity × 10 when the capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply with %X = 5% is connected.
*8 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
*9 Average braking torque for the motor running alone. It depends on the efficiency of the motor.
Appendix-365
Appendix N Standard Mode Specifications
■ Standard
Standard-model, Three-phase
phase 400 V (460 V) class series (ND-mode:
mode: 11 kW to 55 kW)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_
FRN_ _ _ _E2S
_E2S-4E
EH) 0022
00 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 0085 0105
Nominal applied motor (kW)
kW) [HP] 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
(Output rating) *1 [15] [20] [25] [30] [40] [50] [60] [75]
16 22 28 34 45 55 65 80
Output ratings

[17] [23] [29] [35] [47] [57] [68] [84]
Rated voltage (V) *3 Three-phase
Three phase 380 to 480 V (with AVR function)
Rated current (A) *4 21.5 28.5 37.0 44.0 59.0
59 72.0 85.0 105
Overload capability 120%-1
120% min
Voltage, frequency Three-phase
Three 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage/frequency Voltage: +10 to -15%
15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less) *6,, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Input power

33.0 43.8 52.3 60.6 77.9 94.3 114 140
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 21.1 28.8 35.5 42.2 57.0 68.5 83.2 102
Required capacity (with DCR)
15 20 25 29 39 47 58 71
(kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 12% 5% to 9%
DC braking
Braking
Separately mounted
Braking transistor Built-in
Built as standard
option
Minimum resistance value (Ω) 80 60 40 34.4 16 - -
Applicable safety standards IEC/EN61800-5-1:
IEC/EN61800 1: 2007
Enclosure (IEC60529) IP20, UL open type IP00, UL open type
Cooling method Fan cooling
5.0 5.0 8.0 9.0 9.5 10 25 26
[11] [11] [18] [20] [21] [22] [55] [57]
*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
pole standard motor
ND spec. of all types
types: 4 kHz
If the ambient temperature is 40°C (104°F)
(104°F) or above, derating of 2%/°C (2%/1.8°F) relative to the rated
current given in this manual is required. For details, refer to Figure 10.4
10.4--1 in the FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace User’s
’s Manual
Chapter 10 “10.4.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity.”
*6 Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67 (IEC 61800-3)
61800
Three - phase average voltage (V)
capacity × 10 when the capacity exceeds
exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply with %X = 5% is connected. When
applying with motors of 75 kW (100
( HP) or above, a DC reactor (DCR) should be used.
*9 Average braking torque for the motor running
running alone. It depends on the efficiency of the motor.
APPENDICES
Appendix -366
■ Standard-model, Three-phase 400 V (460 V) class series (ND-mode: 75 kW to 315 kW)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4EH) 0139 0168 0203 0240 0290 0361 0415 0520 0590
Nominal applied motor (kW) [HP] 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315
(Output rating) *1 [100] [125] [150] [200] [200] [300] [350] [450] [500]
106 128 155 183 221 275 316 396 450
Output ratings

[111] [134] [162] [191] [231] [288] [331] [414] [470]
Rated current (A) *4 139 168 203 240 290 361 415 520 590
Three-phase 380 Three-phase 380 to 440 V, 50 Hz
Voltage, frequency
to 480 V, 50/60 Hz Three-phase 380 to 480 V, 60 Hz *5
Allowable voltage/frequency Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less) *6, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Input power

– – – – – – – – –
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 138 164 201 238 286 357 390 500 559
Required capacity
96 114 139 165 199 248 271 347 388
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 5% to 9%
DC braking
Braking
Braking transistor Separately mounted option

Minimum resistance value
–
(Ω)
Must be used. Separately mounted component. Depending on the shipping destination, not
DC reactor (DCR)
provided with the inverter package. *11
30 33 40 62 63 95 96 130 140
[66] [73] [88] [137] [139] [209] [212] [287] [309]

ND spec. of all types : 4 kHz
current given in this manual is required. For details, refer to Figure 10.4-1 in the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual
*5 Inverters of FRN0203E2■-4H or above (400 V class series) are equipped with a power switching
connector. Use the connector depending upon the applied voltage. For details, refer to the FRENIC-Ace
User’s Manual Chapter 2 “2.2.7 Switching Connector.”
capacity × 10 when the capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply with %X = 5% is connected. When
applying with motors of 75 kW (100 HP) or above, a DC reactor (DCR) should be used.
*11 Please consult your Fuji Electric sales representative.
Appendix-367
N.2 HD-mode
mode inverters for heavy duty load
■ Standard
phase 400 V (460 V) class series (HD-mode:
mode: 0.75 kW to 5.5 kW)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_
FRN_ _ _ _E2S
_E2S-4G
GH) 0002 0004 0006 0007 0012
kW) [HP]
[ 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.0 5.5
(Output rating) *1 [1] [1.5] [3] [4] [7.5]
1.4 2.6 3.8 4.8 8.5
Output ratings

[1.4] [2.7] [4.0] [5.0
5.0] [8.8]
Rated current (A) *4 1.8 3.4 5.0 6.3 11.1
Overload capability 150%
0%-1 min
Three phase 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Voltage: +10 to -15%
15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less) *6,
Allowable voltage/frequency
Frequency: +5 to -5%
5%
Input power

2.7 3.9 7.3 11.3 16.8
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 1.5 2.1 4.2 5.8 10.1
Required capacity
1.1 1.5 3.0 4.1 7.0
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 53% 68% 48% 29% 27%
DC braking
Braking
Braking level: 0 to 8
80%
Built in as standard
Minimum resistance value (Ω)
( 200 160 130
IEC/EN61800 1: 2007
1.2 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.9
[2.6] [3.3] [3.3] [3.5] [4.2]
*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
pole standard motor
HD spec. of all types : 4 kHz
current given in this manual is required. For d
details,
etails, refer to Figure 10.4-
10.4-1 in the FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace User’s
’s Manual
the
he FRENIC-Ace
Ace User’s
User’s Manual Chapter 10 “10.4.2
10.4.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and
capacity.”
61800
If the unbalance ratio is 2% to 3%, use an opt
optional
ional AC reactor (ACR).
*7 This specification is an estimate to be applied when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (Inverter capacity
× 10 when the capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply with %X = 5% is connected. When applying
with motors of 75 kkW (100 HP)) or above, a DC reactor (DCR) should be used.
APPENDICES
Appendix -368
■ Standard-model, Three-phase 400 V (460 V) class series (HD-mode: 7.5 kW to 45 kW)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4EH) 0022 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 0085 0105
Nominal applied motor (kW) [HP] 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
(Output rating) *1 [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [40] [50] [60]
13 18 24 29 34 46 57 69
Output ratings

[14] [18] [25] [30] [36] [48] [60] [73]
Rated current (A) *4 17.5 23 31 38 45 60 75 91
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less) *6,
Input power

23.2 33.0 43.8 52.3 60.6 77.9 94.3 114
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 14.4 21.1 28.8 35.5 42.2 57.0 68.5 83.2
Required capacity
10 15 20 25 29 39 47 58
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 15% 7% to 12%
DC braking
Braking
Separately mounted
option
5.0 5.0 8.0 9.0 9.5 10 25 26
[11] [11] [18] [20] [21] [22] [55] [57]

current given in this manual is required. For details, refer to Figure 10.4-1 in the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual
Appendix-369
■ Standard
phase 400 V (460 V) class series (HD-mode:
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_
FRN_ _ _ _E2S
_E2S-4E
EH) 0139 0168 0203 0240 0290 0361 0415
415 0520 0590
kW) [HP]
[ 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250
(Output rating) *1 [75] [100] [125] [150] [200] [250] [300] [350] [400]
85 114 134 160 193 232 287 316 364
Output ratings

[89] [120] [140] [167] [202] [242] [300] [331] [380]
Rated current (A) *4 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 477
0%-1 min
Three-phase
Three 380 Three-phase
phase 380 to 440 V, 50 Hz
Voltage, frequency
to 480 V, 50/60 Hz Three-phase
phase 380 to 480 V, 60 Hz *5
Input power
5%
140 – – – – – – – –
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 102 138 164 201 238 286 357 390 443
Required capacity
71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271 307
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 7% to 12%
%
DC braking
Braking
80%
( –
Separately
Must be used. Separately mounted component. Depending on the shipping
DC reactor (DCR) mounted
option destination, not provided with the inverter package.
package *1
*11

IEC/EN61800 1: 2007
30 33 40 62 63 95 96 130 140
[66] [73] [88] [137] [139] [209] [212] [287] [309]
*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
pole standard motor
current given in this manual is required. For details, refer to Fi
Figure 10.4--1 in the FRENIC
FRENIC-Ace User’s
’s Manual
Chapter 10 “10.4.2
10.4.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity.”
*5 Inverters of FRN0203E2■-4H or above (400 V class series) are equipped with a power switching
FRENIC
User
User’ss Manual Chapter 2 “2.2.7
2.2.7 Switching Connector.”
6180
*7 This specification is an estimated
estimate value to be applied when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (Inverter
capacity × 10 when the capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply withwi th %X = 5% is connected. When
( HP)) or above, a DC reactor (DCR) should be used.
APPENDICES
Appendix -370
N.3 HND-mode inverters for general load
■ Standard-model, Three-phase 200 V (230 V) class series (HND-mode: 0.2 kW to 5.5 kW)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-2GH) 0001 0002 0004 0006 0010 0012 *10 0020 *10
Nominal applied motor (kW) [HP] 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.0 5.5
(Output rating) *1 [1/4] [1/2] [1] [1.5] [3] [4] [7.5]
0.5 0.8 1.3 2.3 3.7 4.6 7.5
Output ratings
[0.5] [0.8] [1.4] [2.4] [3.8] [4.8] [7.8]
Rated current (A) *4 1.3 2.0 3.5 6.0 9.6 12 19.6

Input power

1.8 2.6 4.9 6.7 12.8 17.9 31.9
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 0.93 1.6 3.0 4.3 8.3 11.7 19.9
Required capacity
0.4 0.6 1.1 1.5 2.9 4.1 6.9
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 75% 53% 68% 48% 29% 27%
DC braking
Braking
Braking level: 0 to 80% (Types FRN0012E2S-2GH and FRN0020E2S-2GH : 0 to 60%)

Minimum resistance value (Ω) 100 40 33
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8 1.5 1.5 1.8
[1.1] [1.1] [1.3] [1.8] [3.3] [3.3] [4.0]

HND/ND spec. of types FRN0001E2■-2GH to FRN0020E2■-2GH: 4 kHz,
If reduction is necessary, for details, refer to the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 10, Section 10.4.2
"Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity."
*10 Types FRN0012E2■-2GH and FRN0020E2■-2GH are ND spec; allowable ambient temperature 40°C
(+104°F) or less. The rated output current is decreased 1% for every 1°C (1.8°F) when ambient temperature
is +40°C (+104°F) or more.
Appendix-371
■ Standard
phase 400 V (460 V) class series (HND-mode:
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_
FRN_ _ _ _E2S GH)
_E2S-4G 0002 0004 0006 0007 *10 0012
00 *10
kW) [HP]
[ 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.0 5.5
(Output rating) *1 [1] [1.5] [3] [4] [7.5]
1.4 2.6 3.8 4.8 8.5
Output ratings

[1.4] [2.7] [4.0] [5.0] [8.8]
Rated current (A) *4 1.8 3.4 5.0 6.3 11.1
0%-1 min
5%
Input power

2.7 3.9 7.3 11.3 16.8
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 1.5 2.1 4.2 5.8 10.1
Required capacity
1.1 1.5 3.0 4.1 7.0
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 53% 68% 48% 29% 27%
DC braking
Braking
80% (Type FRN0007E2S H and FRN0012E2S
Type FRN0007E2S-4 FRN0012E2S-4H : 0 to 60%)
60%
( 200 160 130
IEC/EN61800 1: 2007
1.2 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.9
[2.6] [3.3] [3.3] [3.5] [4.2]
*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
pole standard motor
*3 Out
Output
put voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
HND spec of type FRN0002E2 E2■-4GH to FRN00FRN0006E2■-4 4GH: 8 kHz,
ND spec of type FRN0007E2
FRN00 ■-4GH to FRN00
FRN0012E2■-4G GH: 4 kHz,
HND spec of type FRN0022E2 E2■-4GH to FRN0059E2 ■-4 4GH: 10 kHz,
HND spec of type FRN0072E2■-4GH to FRN0168E2 ■-4 4GH: 6 kHz,
HND spec of type FRN0203E2■-4GH to FRN0 FRN0590E2■-4 4GH: 4 kHz
If reduction is necessary, for
or details, refer to Figure 10.
10.4-1
1 in the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC User’s
“10.4.2
61800
appl
pplying with motors of 75 kW (100
( HP)) or above, a DC reactor (DCR) should
shoul d be used.
*9 Average braking torque for the motor running alone. It depends on the efficiency of the motor.)
*10 Types FRN0007E2 E2■-4GH and FRN0012E2 E2■-4GH are ND spec; allowable ambient temperature 40 40°C
(+104
(+104°F)) or less. The rated output current is decreased 1% for every 1
1°C
°C (1.8°F)) when ambient temperature
is +40
+40°C (+104°F°F) or more.
APPENDICES
Appendix -372
■ Standard-model, Three-phase 400 V (460 V) class series (HND-mode: 7.5 kW to 45 kW)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4EH) 0022 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 0085 0105
(Output rating) *1 [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [40] [50] [60]
13 18 24 29 34 46 57 69
Output ratings

[14] [18] [25] [30] [36] [48] [60] [73]
Rated current (A) *4 17.5 23 31 38 45 60 75 91
Input power

23.2 33 43.8 52.3 60.6 77.9 94.3 114
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 14.4 21.1 28.8 35.5 42.2 57.0 68.5 83.2
Required capacity
10 15 20 25 29 39 47 58
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 15% 7% to 12%
DC braking
Braking
Separately mounted
option
5.0 5.0 8.0 9.0 9.5 10 25 26
[11] [11] [18] [20] [21] [22] [55] [57]

HND spec of type FRN0022E2■-4EH to FRN0059E2■-4EH: 10 kHz,
HND spec of type FRN0072E2■-4EH to FRN0168E2■-4EH: 6 kHz,
HND spec of type FRN0203E2■-4EH to FRN0590E2■-4EH: 4 kHz
If reduction is necessary, for details, refer to Figure 10.4-1 in the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 10
Appendix-373
■ Standard
phase 400 V (460 V) class series (HND-mode:
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_
FRN_ _ _ _E2S
_E2S-4E
EH) 0139 0168 0203 0240 0290 0361 0415 0520 0590
kW) [HP]
[ 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280
(Output rating) *1 [75] [100] [125] [150] [200] [250] [300] [350] [450]
85 114 134 160 193 232 287 316 396
Output ratings

[89] [120] [140] [167] [202] [242] [300] [331] [380]
Rated current (A) *4 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520
0%-1 min
Three-phase
Voltage, frequency
phase 380 to 480 V, 60 Hz *5
Input power
5%
140 – – – – – – – –
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 102 138 164 201 238 286 357 390 500
Required capacity
71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271 347
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 7% to 12%
%
DC braking
Braking
80%
(
Separately
Must be used. Separately mounted component. Depending on the shipping
DC reactor (DCR) mounted
option destination, not provided with the inverter package.
package *1
*11

IEC/EN61800 2007
30 33 40 62 63 95 96 130 140
[66] [73] [88] [137] [139] [209] [212] [287] [309]
*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
pole standard motor
HND spec of type FRN0022E2 E2■-4EH to FRN0059E2 ■-4E EH: 10 kHz,
HND spec of type FRN0072E2■-4EH to FRN0168E2 ■-4E EH: 6 kHz,
HND spec of type FRN0203E2■-4EH to FRN0 FRN0590E2■-4E EH: 4 kHz
or details, refer to Figure 10.4
10.4-1
1 in the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC User’s
“10.4.2
*5 Inverters of FRN0203E2■-4E EH or above (400 V class series) are equipped with a power switching
FRENIC
User
61800
appl
APPENDICES
Appendix -374
N.4 HHD-mode inverters for heavy duty load
■ Standard-model, Three-phase 200 V (230 V) class series (HHD-mode: 0.1 kW to 3.7 kW)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-2GH) 0001 0002 0004 0006 0010 0012 0020
(Output rating) *1 [1/8] [1/4] [1/2] [1] [2] [3] [5]
0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7
Output ratings
[0.3] [0.6] [1.2] [2.0] [3.2] [4.4] [7.0]
Rated current (A) *4 0.8 1.6 3.0 5.0 8.0 11 17.5
Overload capability 150%-1 min, 200%-0.5 s

Input power

1.1 1.8 3.1 5.3 9.5 13.2 22.2
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 0.57 0.93 1.6 3.0 5.7 8.3 14.0
Required capacity
0.2 0.4 0.6 1.1 2.0 2.9 4.9
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 150% 100% 70% 40%
DC braking
Braking

Minimum resistance value(Ω) 100 40 33
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8 1.5 1.5 1.8
[1.1] [1.1] [1.3] [1.8] [3.3] [3.3] [4.0]

HHD spec. of types FRN0001E2■-2GH to FRN0020E2■-2GH: 8 kHz,
If reduction is necessary, for details, refer to the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 10, Section 10.4.2
"Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity."
Appendix-375
■ Standard
phase 400 V (460 V) class series (HHD-mode:
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_
FRN_ _ _ _E2S GH)
_E2S-4G 0002 0004 0006 0007 0012
00
kW) [HP]
[ 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
(Output rating) *1 [1/2] [1] [2] [3] [5]
1.1 1.9 3.2 4.2 6.9
Output ratings

[1.2] [2.0] [3.3] [4.4] [7.2]
Rated current (A) *4 1.5 2.5 4.2 5.5 9.0
150% min, 200%
200%-0.5 s
5%
Input power

1.7 3.1 5.9 8.2 13.0
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 0.85 1.6 3.0 4.4 7.3
Required capacity
0.6 1.2 2.1 3.1 5.1
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 100%
% 70% 40%
DC braking
Braking
100%
( 200 160 130
IEC/EN61800 1: 2007
1.2 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.9
[2.6] [3.3] [3.3] [3.5] [4.2]
Note: A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, B depending on the model.
*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
pole standard motor
HHD spec of type FRN0002E2 E2■-4GH to FRN00FRN0012E2■-4 4GH: 8 kHz,,
or details, refer
refer to Figure 10.4
10.4-1
1 in the FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC User’s
“10.4.2
61800
appl
APPENDICES
Appendix -376
■ Standard-model, Three-phase 400 V (460 V) class series (HHD-mode: 5.5 kW to 37 kW)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4EH) 0022 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 0085 0105
Nominal applied motor (kW) [HP] 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
(Output rating) *1 [7.5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [40] [50]
9.9 14 18 23 30 34 46 57
Output ratings

[10] [14] [19] [24] [31] [36] [48] [60]
Rated current (A) *4 13 18 24 30 39 45 60 75
Input power

17.3 23.2 33 43.8 52.3 60.6 77.9 94.3
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 10.6 14.4 21.1 28.8 35.5 42.2 57.0 68.5
Required capacity
7.3 10 15 20 25 29 39 47
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 20% 10% to 15%
DC braking
Braking

Minimum resistance value (Ω) 80 60 40 34.4 16 －
5.0 5.0 8.0 9.0 9.5 10 25 26
[11] [11] [18] [20] [21] [22] [55] [57]

HHD spec of type FRN0002E2■-4EH to FRN0012E2■-4EH: 8 kHz,
If reduction is necessary, for details, refer to Figure 10.4-1 in the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 10
Appendix-377
■ Standard
Standard-model,
model, Three-phase
phase 400 V (460 V) class series (HHD-mode:
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_
FRN_ _ _ _E2S
_E2S-4E
EH) 0139 0168 0203 0240 0290 0361 0415 0520 0590
kW) [HP]
[ 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220
(Output rating) *1 [60] [75] [100] [125] [150] [200] [250] [300] [350]
69 85 114 134 160 193 232 287 316
Output ratings

[73] [89] [120] [140] [167] [202] [242] [300] [331]
Rated current (A) *4 91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415
150% min, 200%
200%-0.5 s
Three-phase
Voltage, frequency
phase 380 to 480 V, 60 Hz *5
Input power
5%
114 140 – – – – – – –
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 83.2 102 138 164 201 238 286 357 390
Required capacity
58 71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 10% to 15%
%
DC braking
Braking
100%
(
Separately Must be used. Separately mounted component. Depending on the
DC reactor (DCR)
mounted option shipping destination, not provided with the inverter package
package. *11
IEC/EN61800 1: 2007
30 33 40 62 63 95 96 130 140
[66] [73] [88] [137] [139] [209] [212] [287] [309]
*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
pole standard motor
HHD spec of type FRN0022E2 E2■-4EH to FRN0 N0168E2■-4E EH: 10 kHz,
HHD spec of type FRN0203E2 E2■-4EH to FRN0
FRN0590E2■-4E EH: 6 kHz,
If reduction is necessary, for details, refer to Figure 10.4
10.4-1
1 in the
he FRENIC-Ace
FRENIC User’s Manual Chapter 10
“10.4.2
*5 Inverters of FRN0203E2■-4E EH or above (400 V class series) are equipped with a power switching
FRENIC
User
61800
appl
APPENDICES
Appendix -378
■ Standard-model, Single-phase 200 V (230 V) class series (HHD-mode: 0.1 kW to 2.2 kW)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-7GH) 0001 0002 0003 0005 0008 0011
Nominal applied motor (kW) [HP] 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
(Output rating) *1 [1/8] [1/4] [1/2] [1] [2] [3]
0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2
Output ratings

[0.3] [0.6] [1.2] [2.0] [3.2] [4.4]
Rated current (A) *4 0.8 1.6 3.0 5.0 8.0 11
Voltage, frequency Single-phase 200 to 240 V, 50/ 60 Hz
Allowable voltage/frequency Voltage: +10 to -10%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Input power

1.8 3.3 5.4 9.7 16.4 24.8
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 1.1 2.0 3.5 6.4 11.6 17.5
Required capacity
0.3 0.4 0.7 1.3 2.4 3.5
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 150% 100% 70% 40%
DC braking
Braking

Minimum resistance value (Ω) 100 40
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.9 1.6 1.8
[1.1] [1.1] [1.3] [2.0] [3.5] [4.0]

HHD spec of type FRN0001E2■-7GH to FRN0011E2■-7GH: 8 kHz,
If reduction is necessary, for details, refer to Figure 10.4-1 in The FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 10
“10.4.2 “Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity.”
Appendix-379
Appendix P Common Specifications
Appendix O EMC Filter Built-in

Built in Type Specifications
O.1 ND-mode
mode inverters for general load
■ Three
Three-phase
phase 400 V (460 V) class series
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2 GH)
_E2E-4G 0002 0004 0006 0007 0012
kW) [HP]
[ 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.0 5.5
(Output rating) *1 [1] [2] [3] [4] [7.5]
Compliant with EMC Directives. Emission: Category C2.
C . Immunity: 2nd Env.
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
Weight / Mass (kg) [lbs] 1.5 [3.3] 1.8 [4.0] 2.3 [5.1] 2.3 [5.1] 2.4 [5.3]
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2
_E2E-4E
EH) 0022 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 0085 0105
kW) [HP]
[ 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
(Output rating) *1 [15] [20] [25] [30] [40] [50] [60] [75]
Compliant with EMC Directives. Emission: Category C3. Immunity: 2nd Env.
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
Weight / Mass (kg) [lbs] 6.5 [14] 6.5 [14] 11.2 [25] 11.2 [25] 10.5 [23] 11.2 [24] 26 [57] 27 [60]
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2
_E2E-4E
EH) 0139 0168 0203 0240 0290 0361 0415 0520 0590
kW) [HP]
[ 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315
(Output rating) *1 [100] [125] [150] [200] [250] [300] [350] [450] [500]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
130
Weight / Mass (kg) [lbs] 31 [68] 33 [73] 40 [88] 62 [137] 63 [139] 95 [209] 96 [212] 140 [309]
[287]

*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
pole standard motor.
motor The specification other than the above items is the same as “N.1
.1 ND-mode
inverters for general load
load”.
O.2 HD-mode
■ Three
Three-phase
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2 GH)
_E2E-4G 0002 0004 0006 0007 0012
kW) [HP]
[ 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.0 5.5
(Output rating) *1 [1] [1.5] [3] [4] [7.5]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2
_E2E-4E
EH) 0022 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 0085 0105
kW) [HP]
[ 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
(Output rating) *1 [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [40] [50] [60]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2
_E2E-4E
EH) 0139 0168 0203 0240 0290 0361 0415 0520 0590
kW) [HP]
[ 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250
(Output rating) *1 [75] [100] [125] [150] [200] [250] [300] [350] [400]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
130 140
Weight / Mass (kg) [lbs] 31 [68] 33 [73] 40 [88] 62 [137] 63 [139] 95 [209] 96 [212]
[287] [309]
APPENDICES

*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
motor The specification other than the above items is the same as “N.2 HD-mode
inverters for heavy duty load”.
Appendix
Appendix-380
380
O.3 HND-mode inverters for general load

■ Three-phase 400 V (460 V) class series
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2E-4GH) 0002 0004 0006 0007 *10 0012 *10
Nominal applied motor (kW) [HP] 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.0 5.5
(Output rating) *1 [1] [1.5] [3] [4] [7.5]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2E-4EH) 0022 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 0085 0105
(Output rating) *1 [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [40] [50] [60]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2E-4EH) 0139 0168 0203 0240 0290 0361 0415 0520 0590
Nominal applied motor (kW) [HP] 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280
(Output rating) *1 [75] [100] [125] [150] [200] [250] [300] [350] [450]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
Weight / Mass (kg) [lbs] 31 [68] 33 [73] 40 [88] 62 [137] 63 [139] 95 [209] 96 [212] 130 [287] 140 [309]

*10 Types FRN0007E2■-4GH and FRN0012E2■-4GH are ND spec; allowable ambient temperature 40°C
(+104°F) or less. The rated output current is decreased 1% for every 1°C (1.8°F) when ambient temperature
is +40°C (+104°F) or more.
The specification other than the above items is the same as “N.3 HND-mode inverters for general load”.
■ Three-phase 200 V (230 V) class series
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2E-2GH) 0001 0002 0004 0006 *10 0010 0012 *10 0020 *10
(Output rating) *1 [1/4] [1/2] [1] [1.5] [3] [4] [7.5]
EMC filter Compliant with EMC Directives. Emission: Category C2. Immunity: 2nd Env.
Weight / Mass (kg) [lbs] 0.6 [1.3] 0.6 [1.3] 0.7 [1.5] 0.9 [2.0] 2.2 [4.9] 2.3 [5.1] 2.3 [5.1]

*10 Types FRN0006E2■-2GH, FRN0012E2■-2GH and FRN0020E2■-2GH are ND spec; allowable ambient
temperature 40°C (+104°F) or less. The rated output current is decreased 1% for every 1°C (1.8°F) when
ambient temperature is +40°C (+104°F) or more.
The specification other than the above items is the same as “N.3 HND-mode inverters for general load”.
Appendix-381
O.4 HHD-mode
■ Three
Three-phase
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2E-4G
G H) 0002 0004 0006 0007 0012
kW) [HP]
[ 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
(Output rating) *1 [1/2] [1] [2] [3] [5]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2
_E2E-4E
EH) 0022 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 0085 0105
kW) [HP]
[ 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
(Output rating) *1 [7.5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [40] [50]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2
_E2E-4E
EH) 0139 0168 0203 0240 0290 0361 0415 0520 0590
kW) [HP]
[ 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220
(Output rating) *1 [60] [75] [100] [125] [150] [200] [250] [300] [350]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
130 140
Weight / Mass (kg) [lbs] 31 [68] 33 [73] 40 [88] 62 [137] 63 [139] 95 [209] 96 [212]
[287] [309]
*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
motor
The specification other than the above items is the same as ““N.4
N.4 HHD-mode
mode inverters for heavy duty load”.
loa
■ Three
Three-phase 200V
V (230 V) class series
Item Specifications
fications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2E
_E2E-2G
G H) 0001 0002 0004 0006 0010 0012 0020
(Output rating) *1 [1/8] [1/4] [1/2] [1] [2] [3] [5]
C Immunity: 2nd Env.
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
Weight / Mass (kg) [lbs] 0.6 [1.3] 0.6 [1.3] 0.7 [1.5] 0.9 [2.0] 2.2 [4.9] 2.3 [5.1] 2.3 [5.1]

*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
motor
N.4 HHD-mode
loa
■ Single
Single-phase 200V
200 (230 V) class series
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2
_E2E-7G
G H) 0001 0002 0003 0005 0008 0011
kW) [HP]
[ 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
(Output rating) *1 [1/8] [1/4] [1/2] [1] [2] [3]
EMC filter
(EN61800-3:2004)
(EN61800
Weight / Mass (kg) [lbs] 0.6 [1.3] 0.6 [1.3] 0.7 [1.5] 1.1 [2.4] 2.3 [5.1] 2.3 [5.1]
APPENDICES
*1 Fuji 4
4-pole
motor
.4 HHD-mode
loa
Appendix
Appendix-382
382
Item Explanation Remarks

HHD/HND/HD mode: 25 to 500 Hz variable
Maximum (under V/f control, Magnetic pole position sensorless vector control） IMPG-VC
frequency (Up to 200 Hz in case of under vector control with speed sensor)
ND mode: 25 to 120 Hz (under any drive control)
Base frequency 25 to 500 Hz variable (in conjunction with the maximum frequency)
Starting 0.1 to 60.0 Hz variable IMPG-VC
frequency (0.0 Hz under vector control with speed sensor)
Three phase 200 V class series
FRN0001E2■-2G H to FRN0010E2■-2G H
• 0.75 to 16 kHz variable (HHD/HND spec.)
FRN0012E2■-2G H:
• 0.75 to 16 kHz variable (HHD spec.)
• 0.75 to 10 kHz variable (ND spec.)
FRN0020E2■-2G H:
Setting range
• 0.75 to 10 kHz variable (HND spec.)

FRN0002E2■-4G H to FRN0059E2■-4EH:
• 0.75 to 16 kHz variable (HHD/HND/HD spec.)
Carrier frequency FRN0072E2■-4EH to FRN0168E2■-4EH:
• 0.75 to 10 kHz variable (HND/HD spec.)
FRN0203E2■-4EH to FRN0590E2■-4EH:
• 0.75 to 6 kHz variable (HND/HD/ND spec.)
Output
Single phase 200 V class series

FRN0001E2■-7G H to FRN0011E2■-7G H:
Note: The carrier frequency may automatically lower depending upon the ambient
temperature or the output current to protect the inverter. (The automatic
lowering function can be disabled.)
Output frequency • Analog setting: ±0.2% of maximum frequency (at 25±10°C) (77±18°F)
accuracy (Stability) • Keypad setting: ±0.01% of maximum frequency (at -10 to +50°C) (14±22°F)
• Analog setting: 0.05% of maximum frequency
Frequency setting
• Keypad setting: 0.01 Hz (99.99 Hz or less), 0.1 Hz (100.0 to 500 Hz)
resolution
• Link setting: 0.005% of maximum frequency or 0.01 Hz (fixed)
• 1: 1500 (Minimum speed : Nominal speed, 4P, 1 to 1500 r/min) IMPG-VC
Speed control range • 1: 100 (Minimum speed : Nominal speed, 4P, 15 to 1500 r/min) IMPG-VF
• 1: 10 (Minimum speed : Nominal speed, 6P, 180 to 1800 r/min) PM-SVC
• Analog setting: ±0.2% of maximum frequency or below (at 25 ±10°C) (77±18°F) IMPG-VC
• Digital setting: ±0.01% of maximum frequency or below
Speed control (at -10 to +50°C) (14 to 122°F)
accuracy • Analog setting: ±0.5% of base frequency or below (at 25 ±10°C) (77±18°F) PM-SVC
• Digital setting: ±0.5% of base frequency or below (-10 to +50°C) (14 to
122°F)
VF
• V/f control
IM-SVC
• Vector control without speed sensor (Dynamic torque vector)
VF with
• V/f control, with slip compensation
SC
Control method • V/f control, with slip sensor (PG option）
IMPG-VF
• V/f Control with speed sensor (+Auto Torque Boost)(PG option)
IMPG-ATB
• Vector control with speed sensor (PG option)
IMPG-VC
• Vector control without magnetic pole position sensor
PM-SVC
Appendix-383
VF
• V/f control
IM-SVC
IM
• Vector control without speed sensor (Dynamic torque vector)
VF with
• V/f control, with slip compensation
SC
Control method • ）
V/f control, with slip sensor (PG option）
IMPG-VF
IMPG
• V/f Control with speed sensor ((+Auto
Auto Torque Boost)(PG option)
IMPG-ATB
IMPG
• Vector
tor control with speed sensor (PG option)
IMPG-VC
IMPG
• Vector control without magnetic pole position sensor
PM-SVC
P
• Possible to set 80 to 240 V / 160 to 500 V at base frequency and at maximum
Voltage/frequency output frequency.
characteristics • Non-linear
linear V/f setting (3 points):
Free voltage (0 to 240 V / 500 V) and frequency (0 to 500 Hz) can be set.
• Auto torque boost (For constant torque load)
• Manual torque boost: Torque boost value can be set between 0.0 and 20.0%
Torque boost
• Select application load with the function code. (Variable torque load or constant
torque load)
• 200% or above,, reference frequency 0.5 Hz (HHD
(HHD-mode
mode inverters of
FRN0072E2■-4EH
FRN0072E2 or below)
150%
0% or above,, reference frequency 0.5 Hz (HHD
(HHD-mode
mode inverters of
FRN0085E2■-4EH
FRN0085E2 or above)
• 120% or above,, reference frequency 0.5 Hz (HND
(HND/ND
/ND mode)
• 150% or above,, reference frequency 0.5 Hz (HD mode)
Starting torque
(HHD-mode
mode inverters of
FRN0020
20E2■-2GH or below)
• 120%
0% or above,, reference frequency 0.5 Hz (H
(HND-mode
mode inverters of
FRN0020
20E2■-2GH or below)
Single phase 200 V class series
(HHD-mode
mode inverters of
Control
FRN001111E2■-7GH or below
below)
Base frequency 50 Hz, with slip compensation and auto torque boost active
Keypad: Start and stop with and keys (Standard keypad)
Start and stop with / and keys (Optional multi-function
multi function
keypad)
External signals (digital inputs):
Start/stop operation Forward (Reverse) rotation, stop command (capable of 3-wire
3 wire operation),
coast-to--stop
stop command, external alarm, alarm reset, etc.
Link operation: Operation through RSRS-485
485 (built-in
in as standard), CANopen (built
(built-in
as standard) or field bus (option) communications link
Switching run command: Remote/local switching, link switching
Keypad: Using and keys
External potentiometer: Using external frequency command potentiometer.
(External resistor of 1 to 5 kkΩ 1/2 W)
Analog input: 0 to ±10 VDC (±5 VDC)/ 0 to ±100% (terminal [12]),
0 to +10 VDC (+5 VDC)/ 0 to +100% (terminal [12])
4 to 20 mADC/ 0 to +100% (terminal [C1] (C1 function))
4 to 20 mADC/ 0 to ±100% (terminal [C1] (C1 function))
0 to 20 mADC/ 0 to +100% (terminal [C1] (C1 function))
0 to 20 mADC/ 0 to ±100% (terminal [C1] (C1 function))
Frequency setting 0 to +10 VDC (+5 VDC)/ 0 to +100% (terminal [C1] (V2 function)),
0 to +10 VDC (+5 VDC)/ 0 to ±100% (terminal [C1] (V2 function))
UP/DOWN operation: Frequency can be increased or decreased while the digital
input signal is ON.
Multistep frequency: Selectable from 16 different frequencies (step 0 to 15)
Pattern operation: The inverter runs automatically according to the previously
specified run time, rotation direction, acceleration/deceleration
time and reference frequency. Up to 7 stages can be specified.
APPENDICES
Link operation: Operation through RSRS-485

485 (built-in
(built as standard), CANopen (built
(built-in
as standard) or field bus (option) communications link
Appendix
Appendix-384
384
Frequency setting: Two types of frequency settings can be switched with an external
signal (digital input). Remote/local switching, link switching
Auxiliary frequency setting:
Inputs at terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function) or [C1] (V2 function) can be added to the
main setting as auxiliary frequency settings.
Operation at a specified ratio:
The ratio can be set by analog input signal.
0 to 10 VDC/0 (4) to 20 mA/0 to 200% (variable)
Inverse operation: Switchable from “0 to +10 VDC/0 to 100%” to “+10 to 0 VDC/0 to
100%” for the external command (terminals [12] and [C1] (V2
function)
Switchable from “0 to -10
- VDC/0 to -100%”
100%” to “-10
“ 10 to 0 VDC/0 to
Frequency setting -100%”
100%” for the external command (terminal [12])
Switchable from “4 to +20 mA DC/0 to 100%” to “20 to 4 mA DC/0
to 100%” for the external command (terminal [C1] (C1 function))
Switchable from “0 to +20 mA DC/0 to 100%” to “20 to 0 mA DC/0
to 100%” for the external command (terminal [C1] (C1 function))
Pulse train input (standard):
Pulse input = Terminal [X5], Rotational direction = general terminal
Complementary output: Max. 100 kHz, Open collector output: Max. 30 kHz
Pulse train input (option): A PG option card is required.
CW/CCW pulse, pulse + rotational direction
Complementary output: Max. 100 kHz, Open collector output: Max. 30 kHz
Setting range: Between 0.00 and 6000 s
Switching: The four types of acceleration/deceleration time can be set or selected
individually (switchable during operation).
Control
Acceleration/deceleration pattern:
Linear acceleration/deceleration, SS-curve
curve acceleration/deceleration (weak,
Acceleration/ arbitrary (with function code)), curvilinear acceleration/deceleration
deceleration time Deceleration mode (coast-to
(coast-to-stop):
Shutoff of the run command lets the motor coast to a stop.
Acceleration/deceleration time exclusive to jogging (0.00 to 6000 s)
Forcible stop deceleration time:
Deceleration stop by the forcible stop STOP.
STOP
During forced stop operation, S
S-curve
curve acceleration/deceleration is disabled.
Frequency limiter • Specifies the upper and lower limits in Hz.
(Upper limit and lower • “Continue to run” or “Decelerate to a stop” selectable when the reference
limit frequencies) frequency drops below the lower limit.
Frequency/PID • Bias of reference frequency and PID command can be independently set
command bias (setting range: 0 to ±100%).
• Gain: Setting range from 0 to 200%
• Offset: Setting range from -5.0
5.0 to +5.0%
Analog input
• Filter: Setting range from 0.00 s to 5.00 s
• Polarity selection (±/+)
Jump frequency • Three operation points and their common jump width (0 to 30.0 Hz) can be set.
The inverter drives the motor for the run time specified from the keypad and stops its
Timed
d operation
output. (Single-cycle
(Single cycle operation)
• Operation with key (standard keypad), or key (multi-function
function
Jogging operation keypad), or digital input signal FWD or REV
(Exclusive acceleration/deceleration time setting, exclusive frequency setting)
Appendix
Appendix-385
385
• Trip immediately: Trip immediately at the time of power failure.
• Trip after a recovery from power failure:
Coast to a stop at the time of power failure and trip when the power is recovered.
• Trip after decelerate-to-stop:
decelerate stop:
Deceleration stop at power failure, and trip after stoppage
Auto--restart after • Continue to run: Operation is continued using the load inertia energy.
momentary power • Start at the frequency selected before mom
momentary
entary power failure:
failure Coast-to--stop
stop at power failure and start after power recovery at the frequency selected
before momentary stop.
• Start at starting frequency: Coast
Coast-to-stop
stop at power failure and start at the starting
frequency after power recovery.
• Start at the frequency searched at the time of power recovery:
Coast-to--stop
stop at power failure, search for the idling motor speed, and restart the motor.
Limits the current by hardware to prevent an overcurrent trip from being caused by
Hardware current
fast load variation or momentary power failure, which cannot be covered by the
limiter
software current limiter. This limiter can be canceled.
Operation by
With commercial power selection commands ((SW50, SW60),
SW60 the inverter outputs
commercial power
50/60 Hz.
supply
• Compensates for decrease in speed according to the load
Slip compensation
• Possible to set constants for the response of slip compensation.
Droop control • Decreases the speed according to the load torque.
Control output torque so that output torque is preset limiting value or less.
Torque limiter
• Switchable between 1st and 2nd torque limit values
• Torque limit and Torque current limit are selectable. IMPG-VC
IMPG
Torque current limiter
er
• Torque limit by analog input. PM-SVC
P
Software current Automatically reduces the frequency so that the output current becomes lower than
limiter the preset operation level. This limiter can be canceled.
If the detected torque or current exceeds the preset value, the inverter decelerates
Overload stop
the motor to a stop or causes the motor to coast to a stop.
• PID processor for process control/dancer control
• Normal operation/inverse operation
• PID command: Keypad, analog input (from terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function)
and [C1] (V2 function)), multistep frequency (3 steps), RS-485
RS 485 communication
• PID feedback value: Analog input (from terminals [12], [C1] (C1
Control
function) and [C1] (V2 fu

function))
PID control
• Alarm output (absolute value alarm, deviation alarm)
• Low liquid level stop function (pressurized operation possible before low liquid
level stop)
• Anti-reset
reset wind-up
wind up function
• PID output limiter
• Integration reset/hold
Auto search for idling The inverter automatically searches for the idling motor speed and starts to drive it
motor speed without stopping it. Motor parameters require tuning. (Offline
Offline tuning)
tuning
• If the DC link bus voltage
voltage or calculated torque exceeds the automatic deceleration
level during deceleration, the inverter automatically prolongs the deceleration time
to avoid overvoltage trip.
Automatic
(It is possible to select forcible deceleration actuated when the deceleration titime
deceleration
becomes three times longer.)
• If the calculated torque exceeds automatic deceleration level during constant
speed operation, the inverter avoids overvoltage trip by increasing the frequency.
Deceleration
characteristic The motor loss is increased during deceleration to reduce the regenerative energy in
(improved braking the inverter to avoid overvoltage trip.
capacity)
Auto energy saving Controls the output voltage to minimize the total sum of the motor loss and inverter
operation loss.
Overload prevention If the surrounding temperature or IGBT junction temperature increases due to
APPENDICES
control overload, the inverter lowers the output frequency to avoid overload.
Cancels the undervoltage protection so that the inverter under an undervoltage
Battery/UPS operation
condition runs the motor with battery/UPS power.
Appendix
Appendix-386
386
Tunes the motor while the motor is stopped or running, for setting up motor
Offline tuning
parameters.
Controls the motor speed variation caused by the motor temperature rise during
Online tuning
running.
• Detects inverter internal temperature and stops cooling fan when the temperature
Cooling fan ON/OFF
is low.
control
• Possible to output a fan control signal to an external device.
• Switchable between two motors
1st to 2nd motor
It is possible to set the base frequency, rated current, torque boost, and electronic
settings
thermal slip compensation as the data for 1st and 2nd motors.
Appendix-387
Transfers the status of an external digital signal con
connected
nected with the general
general-purpose
Universal DI
digital input terminal to the host controller.
Outputs a digital command signal sent from the host controller to the general
general-purpose
Universal DO
digital output terminal.
Outputs an analog command signal sent from the host controller to the analog output
Universal AO
terminal.
• Notch filter for vibration control IMPG-VC
IMPG
Speed control • Selectable among the four set of the auto speed regulator (ASR) parameters. PM-SVC
PM
(a PG option card is required.)
In a machine such as winder/unwinder, regulates the motor speed to keep the IMPG-VF
IMPG
Line speed control
peripheral speed of the spool constant. (a
a PG option card is required.)
The positioning control starts from the preset start point and counts the feedback Excluded
pulses by means of PG card installed in the inverter. IMPG-VC
IMPG
Positioning control
The motor can be automatically started decelerating to the creep speed at which PM-SVC
PM
with pulse counter
the target position can be detected, so that the motor can stop near the position ((a
PG option card is required).
Master
Master-follower Enables synchronous operation of two motors equipped with a pulse generator (PG).
operation (a PG option card is required.)
Excitation is carried out to create the motor flux before starting the motor. (a PG IMPG-VC
IMPG
Pre-excitation
excitation
option card is required.)
The motor speed is held to zero by forcibly zeroing the speed command. (a PG option IMPG-VC
IMPG
Zero speed control
card is required.)
Stops the motor and holds the m

motor
otor in the stopped position.(a
position.( PG option card is IMPG-VC
IMPG
Servo lock
required.)
Control
Applies DC current to the motor at the operation start time or at the time of inverter
DC braking
stop to generate braking torque.
• Possible to output mechanical brake control signals with the brake ON/OFF timing
Mechanical brake
adjusted by the output current, torque command, output frequency and timer.
control
• Mechanical brake application check input.
• Analog torque/torque current command input IMPG-VC
IMPG
• Speed limit function is provided to prevent the motor from becoming out of control.
Torque control
• Torque bias (analog setting, digital setting)
(The PG option card is required.)
Rotation direction
Select either of reverse or forward rotation prevention.
control
Possible to select or connect digital logic circuits or analog operation circuits with
digital/analog I/O signals, configure a simple relay sequence, and operate it freely.
• Logic circuits:
(Digital) AND, OR, XOR, flip
flip-flop, detection of rising and falling edges, various
counters.
Customizable logic (Analog) Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, limiters, absolute values,
interface sign inversion addition, comparison, maximum value selection, minimum value
selection, average values, scale conve
conversion.
• Multifunction time: On-delay
On delay timer, offoff-delay
delay timer, pulse train output, etc.
Setting range: 0.0 to 999
9990 s
• Input/output signals: Terminal input/output, inverter control functions
• Others: Available in 200 steps configured with 2 inputs
inputs and 1 output
tput per step.
Functions for
wiredrawing
Customizable logic function enables dedicated functions for each application.
machines, hoists, and
spinning frames
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-388
388
Detachable, 7-segment, 4-digit LED, 7 push-buttons (PRG/RESET, FUNC/DATA, UP,
Indicators DOWN, RUN, STOP, and SHIFT), and 6 LED indicators (KEYPAD CONTROL, Hz, A,
kW, X10, and RUN)
Speed monitor (reference frequency, output frequency, motor speed, load shaft
speed, line speed, and speed indication with percent), output current (A), output
voltage (V), calculated torque (%), input power (kW), PID command value, PID
Running/stopping feedback amount, PID output, timer values for timed operation (s), load factor (%),
and motor output (kW), Torque current [%] , Magnetic flux command [%], Analog input
monitor, input watt-hour, constant feeding rate time (min.), and remaining time for
timed operation (s) can be displayed.
DC link bus voltage, maximum effective current, input watt-hour, input watt-hour data,
temperature (inverter internal temperature, maximum inverter internal temperature,
Display
heat sink temperature, maximum heat sink temperature), capacitance of the DC link
bus capacitor, service life of DC ink but capacitor (elapsed time/remaining time),
Maintenance monitor
cumulative run times (inverter power-ON time, electrolytic capacitors on printed circuit
boards, cooling fans, individual motors), light-alarm contents (last four alarms),
RS-485 error contents and number of error times, CANopen error contents, option
error contents and number of error times, ROM version (inverter, keypad, and option)
Displays the I/O signal states of control circuit terminals using the segment ON/OFF
I/O check
of the 7-segment LED monitor or hexadecimal format. (digital and analog signals)
Trip Displays the cause of a trip by codes.
Light-alarm Shows the light-alarm display l-al.
During running or at • Trip history: Saves and displays the cause of the last four trips (with a code).
the time of a trip • Saves and displays the detailed running status data of the last four trips.
*Note: The meaning of the described abbreviations are shown as follows.

VF V/f Control
IM-SVC(DTV) Speed Sensorless Vector control (Dynamic Torque Vector Control)
VF with SC V/f Control with Slip Compensation
IMPG-VF V/f Control with Speed Sensor (a PG option card is required.)
IMPG-ATB V/f Control with speed sensor (＋Auto Torque Boost)(A PG option card is required.)
IMPG-VC Vector Control with Speed Sensor (a PG option card is required.)
PM-SVC Magnetic Pole Position Sensorless Vector Control
A box (■) in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure.
When the protective function is activated so that the LED monitor shows alarm codes, refer to the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual
Chapter 6 “TROUBLESHOOTING.”
For the usage environment and storage environment, refer to the FRENIC-Ace User’s Manual Chapter 1 “1.3 Precautions for
Using Inverters.”
Appendix-389
APPENDICES
Appendix
Appendix-390
390

Service Manual Frenic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Frenic

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Frenic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are function codes?

What are function codes?

What are the different control modes described?

What are the different control modes described?

APPENDICES

Appendix H Before Use ································

Appendix H Before Use

H.1 Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates for Inverter Type H)

(a) Main Nameplate (b) Sub Nameplate

Figure H-1 Nameplates

TYPE: Type of inverter

Figure H-2 Type of inverter

: Compliance with European Standards (See Appendix G Section G-1)

: Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards (cUL certification)

: Compliance with the Radio

: Compliance with Russian

H.2 External View and Terminal Blocks

Main nameplate Main circuit

Keypad Front cover

Figure H-3 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters

(2) Warning plates and label

Figure H-4 Warning Plates and Label

Appendix I Function Codes Overview

I.1 Supplementary note

■ Negative logic setting of data

Function code data Action

Speed 0,2: V/f control

I.2 Function codes table

Indicates quick setup target function code.

HND and HHD drive modes 1: HND mode

Indicates quick setup target function code.

■ E code: Extension Terminal Functions (Terminal function)

13: DC braking command “DCBRK” Y N

54 (1054): Under remote mode “RMT” Y Y

2 (1002): Select multistep frequency (0 to 7 steps) “SS4” Y Y

17 (1017): UP command “UP” Y Y

indicates quick setup target function code.

■ P codes: Motor 1 Parameters (Motor 1 parameter)

Indicates quick setup target function code.

■ H codes: High Performance Functions (High Level Function)

H86 Reserved *9 0 to 2 1 Y Y 0 – – 214

*9: Factory use. Do not access these function codes.

■ A codes: Motor 2 Parameters (Motor 2 parameters)

J05 D (Differential time) 0.00 to 600.00 s 5 Y Y 0.00 Y Y

J13 (Lower limit of warning (AL)) 0% to 100% 1 Y Y 0 Y Y

■ d codes: Application Functions 2 (Application function 2)

d61 Command pulse input 0.000 to 5.000 s 7 Y Y 0.005 Y Y 296

d99 Extension function 1 0 to 127 1 Y Y 0

*9: Factory use. Do not change these function codes.

■ U codes: Application Functions 3 (Customizable logic)

■ y codes: LINK Functions (Link function)

■ K codes: Keypad functions for TP-A1-E2C

I.3 Factory default value per applicable electric motor capacitance

Applicable electric motor capacity Restart mode after momentary

I.4 Motor constants

Motor rated Starting mode

0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.22 0.20 13.79 11.75

Motor rated Starting mode